Report of the World Commission on Environment andDevelopment: Our Common Future
Table of Contents
Acronyms and Note on Terminology
Chairman's Foreword
From One Earth to One WorldPart I. Common Concerns
1. A Threatened Future
I. Symptoms and Causes
II. New Approaches to Environment and Development

2. Towards Sustainable Development
I. The Concept of Sustainable Development
II. Equity and the Common Interest
III. Strategic Imperatives
IV. Conclusion

3. The Role of the International Economy
I. The International Economy, the Environment, andDevelopment
II. Decline in the 1980s
III. Enabling Sustainable Development
IV. A Sustainable World Economy

Part II. Common Challenges
4. Population and Human Resources
I. The Links with Environment and Development

II. The Population Perspective
III. A Policy Framework

5. Food Security: Sustaining the Potential
I. Achievements
II. Signs of Crisis
III. The Challenge
IV. Strategies for Sustainable Food Security
V. Food for the Future

6. Species and Ecosystems: Resources for Development
I. The Problem: Character and Extent
II. Extinction Patterns and Trends
III. Some Causes of Extinction
IV. Economic Values at Stake
V. New Approach: Anticipate and Prevent
VI. International Action for National Species
VII. Scope for National Action
VIII. The Need for Action

7. Energy: Choices for Environment and Development
I. Energy, Economy, and Environment
II. Fossil Fuels: The Continuing Dilemma
III. Nuclear Energy: Unsolved Problems
IV. Wood Fuels: The Vanishing Resource
V. Renewable Energy: The Untapped Potential

VI. Energy Efficiency: Maintaining the Momentum
VII. Energy Conservation Measures
VIII. Conclusion

8. Industry: Producing More With Less
I. Industrial Growth and its Impact
II. Sustainable Industrial Development in a Global Context
III. Strategies for Sustainable Industrial Development

9. The Urban Challenge
I. The Growth of Cities
II. The Urban Challenge in Developing Countries
III. International Cooperation

Part III. Common Endeavours
10. Managing The CommonsI. Oceans: The Balance of Life
II. Space: A Key to Planetary Management
III. Antarctica: Towards Global Cooperation

11. Peace, Security, Development, and the Environment
I. Environmental Stress as a Source of Conflict
II. Conflict as a Cause of Unsustainable Development
III. Towards Security and Sustainable Development

12. Towards Common Action: Proposals For Institutional and Legal
ChangeI. The Challenge for Institutional and Legal Change
II. Proposals for Institutional and Legal ChangeIII. A Call for Action

Annexes
Annexe 1: Summary of Proposed Legal Principles forEnvironmental Protection and Sustainable Development Adopted
by the WCED Experts Group on Environmental Law
Annexe 2: The Commission and its Work
Throughout this report, quotes from some of the many people who spoke at WCED public
hearings appear in boxes to illustrate the range of opinions the Commission was exposed toduring its three years of work. They do not necessarily reflect the views of the Commission.

Our Common Future, Chairman's Foreword"A global agenda for change" - this was what the World Commission on Environment andDevelopment was asked to formulate. It was an urgent call by the General Assembly of theUnited Nations:to propose long-term environmental strategies for achieving sustainable developmentby the year 2000 and beyond;to recommend ways concern for the environment may be translated into greater
co-operation among developing countries and between countries at different stages of
economical and social development and lead to the achievement of common andmutually supportive objectives that take account of the interrelationships between
people, resources, environment, and development;
to consider ways and means by which the international community can deal more
effectively with environment concerns; andto help define shared perceptions of long-term environmental issues and theappropriate efforts needed to deal successfully with the problems of protecting andenhancing the environment, a long term agenda for action during the coming decades,
and aspirational goals for the world community.
When I was called upon by the Secretary-General of the United Nations in December 1983 toestablish and chair a special, independent commission to address this major challenge to theworld community, I was acutely aware that this was no small task and obligation, and that myday-to day responsibilities as Party leader made it seem plainly prohibitive. What the General
Assembly asked for also seemed to be unrealistic and much too ambitious. At the same time, it
was a clear demonstration of the widespread feeling of frustration and inadequacy in theinternational community about our own ability to address the vital global issues and deal
effectively with them.
The fact is a compelling reality, and should not easily be dismissed. Since the answers tofundamental and serious concerns are not at hand, there is no alternative but to keep on trying
to find them.
All this was on my mind when the Secretary-General presented me with an argument to which
there was no convincing rebuttal: No other political leader had become Prime Minister with abackground of several years of political struggle, nationally and internationally, as anenvironment minister. This gave some hope that the environment was not destined to remaina side issue in central, political decision making.
In the final analysis, I decided to accept the challenge. The challenge of facing the future, andof safeguarding the interests of coming generations. For it was abundantly clear: We needed a
mandate for change.

We live in an era in the history of nations when there is greater need than ever forco-ordinated political action and responsibility. The United Nations and its Secretary-General
are faced with an enormous task and burden. Responsibly meeting humanity's goals andaspirations will require the active support of us all.
My reflections and perspective were also based on other important parts of ray own politicalexperience: the preceding work of the Brandt Commission on North South issues, and thePalme Commission on security and disarmament issues, on which I served.
I was being asked to help formulate a third and compelling call for political action: After
Brandt's Programme for Survival and Common Crisis, and after Palme's Common Security,
would come Common Future. This was my message when Vice Chairman Mansour Khalid andI started work on the ambitious task set up by the United Nations. This report, as presented to
the UN General Assembly in 1987, is the result of that process.

Perhaps our most urgent task today is to persuade nations of the need to return tomultilateralism. The challenge of reconstruction after the Second World War was the real
motivating power behind the establishment of our post-war international economic system.
The challenge of finding sustainable development paths ought to provide the impetus - indeed
the imperative - for a renewed search for multilateral solutions and a restructured
international economic system of co-operation. These challenges cut across the divides ofnational sovereignty, of limited strategies for economic gain, and of separated disciplines ofscience.
After a decade and a half of a standstill or even deterioration in global co-operation, I believe
the time has come for higher expectations, for common goals pursued together, for an
increased political will to address our common future.
There was a time of optimism and progress in the 1960s, when there was greater hope for abraver new world, and for progressive international ideas. Colonies blessed with natural
resources were becoming nations. The locals of co-operation and sharing seemed to beseriously pursued. Paradoxically, the 1970s slid slowly into moods of reaction and isolation
while at the same time a series of UN conferences offered hope for greater co-operation on
major issues. The 1972 UN Conference on the Human Environment brought the industrialized
and developing nations together to delineate the "rights" of the human family to a healthy andproductive environment. A string of such meetings followed: on the rights of people toadequate food, to sound housing, to safe water, to access to means of choosing the size of theirfamilies.
The present decade has been marked by a retreat from social concerns. Scientists bring to ourattention urgent but complex problems bearing on our very survival: a warming globe, threats
to the Earth's ozone layer, deserts consuming agricultural land. We respond by demanding
more details, and by assigning the problems to institutions ill-equipped to cope with them.
Environmental degradation, first seen as mainly a problem of the rich nations and a side effectof industrial wealth, has become a survival issue for developing nations. It is part of thedownward spiral of linked ecological and economic decline in which many of the poorest
nations are trapped. Despite official hope expressed on all sides, no trends identifiable today,
no programmes or policies, offer any real hope of narrowing the growing gap between rich andpoor nations. And as part of our "development", we have amassed weapons arsenals capable ofdiverting the paths that evolution has followed for millions of years and of creating a planet
our ancestors would not recognize.
When the terms of reference of our Commission were originally being discussed in 1982, there
were those who wanted its considerations to be limited to "environmental issues" only. Thiswould have been a grave mistake. The environment does not exist as a sphere separate fromhuman actions, ambitions, and needs, and attempts to defend it in isolation from humanconcerns have given the very word "environment" a connotation of naivety in some politicalcircles. The word "development" has also been narrowed by some into a very limited focus,
along the lines of "what poor nations should do to become richer", and thus again is
automatically dismissed by many in the international arena as being a concern of specialists, of
those involved in questions of "development assistance".
But the "environment" is where we all live; and "development" is what we all do in attempting
to improve our lot within that abode. The two are inseparable. Further, development issues
must be seen as crucial by the political leaders who feel that their countries have reached aplateau towards which other nations must strive. Many of the development paths of theindustrialized nations are clearly unsustainable. And the development decisions of thesecountries, because of their great economic and political power, will have a profound effectupon the ability of all peoples to sustain human progress for generations to come.
Many critical survival issues are related to uneven development, poverty, and population
growth. They all place unprecedented pressures on the planet's lands, waters, forests, andother natural resources, not least in the developing countries. The downward spiral of poverty
and environmental degradation is a waste of opportunities and of resources. In particular, it isa waste of human resources. These links between poverty, inequality, and environmental
degradation formed a major theme in our analysis and recommendations. What is needed now
is a new era of economic growth - growth that is forceful and at the same time socially andenvironmentally sustainable.
Due to the scope of our work, and to the need to have a wide perspective. I was very muchaware of the need to put together a highly qualified and influential political and scientific team,
to constitute a truly independent Commission. This was an essential part of a successfulprocess. Together, we should span the globe, and pull together to formulate aninterdisciplinary, integrated approach to global concerns and our common future. We needed
broad participation and a clear majority of members from developing countries, to reflect
world realities. We needed people with wide experience, and from all political fields, not only
from environment or development and political disciplines, but from all areas of vital decision
making that influence economic and social progress, nationally and internationally.
We therefore come from widely differing backgrounds: foreign ministers, finance and planning
officials, policymakers in agriculture, science, and technology. Many of the Commissioners arecabinet ministers and senior economists in their own nations, concerned largely with theaffairs of those countries. As Commissioners, however, we were acting not in our national roles
but as individuals; and as we worked, nationalism and the artificial divides between"industrialized" and "developing", between East and West, receded. In their place emerged acommon concern for the planet and the interlocked ecological and economic threats withwhich its people, institutions, and governments now grapple.
During the time we met as a Commission, tragedies such as the African famines, the leak at thepesticides factory at Bhopal, India, and the nuclear disaster at Chernobyl, USSR appeared tojustify the grave predictions about the human future that were becoming commonplace during
the mid-1980s. But at public hearings we held on five continents, we also heard from theindividual victims of more chronic, widespread disasters: the debt crisis, stagnating aid to andinvestment in developing countries, falling commodity prices and falling personal incomes. We
became convinced that major changes were needed, both in attitudes and in the way oursocieties are organized.

The question of population - of population pressure, of population and human rights - and thelinks between these related issues and poverty, environment, and development proved to be
one of the more difficult concerns with which we had to struggle. The differences ofperspective seemed at the outset to be unbridgeable, and they required a lot of thought andwillingness to communicate across the divides of cultures, religions, and regions.
Another such concern was the whole area of international economic relations. In these and ina number of other important aspects of our analysis and recommendations, we were able todevelop broad agreement.
The fact that we all became wiser, learnt to look across cultural and historical barriers, wasessential. There were moments of deep concern and potential crisis, moments of gratitude andachievement, moments of success in building a common analysis and perspective. The result isclearly more global, more realistic, more forward looking than any one of us alone could havecreated. We joined the Commission with different views and perspectives, different values andbeliefs, and very different experiences and insights. After these three years of working
together, travelling, listening, and discussing, we present a unanimous report.
I am deeply grateful to all the Commissioners for their dedication, their foresight and personalcommitment to our common endeavour. It has been a truly wonderful team. The spirit offriendship and open communication, the meeting of minds and the process of learning andsharing, have provided an experience of optimism, something of great value to all of us, and, I
believe, to the report and its message. We hope to share with others our learning process, andall that we have experienced together. It is something that many others will have to experience
if global sustainable development is to be achieved.
The Commission has taken guidance from people in all walks of life. It is to these people - to all
the peoples of the world - that the Commission now addresses itself. In so doing we speak topeople directly as well as to the institutions that they have established.
The Commission is addressing governments, directly and through their various agencies andministries. The congregation of governments, gathered in the General Assembly of the United
Nations, will be the main recipients of this report.
The Commission is also addressing private enterprise, from the one-person business to thegreat multinational company with a total economic turnover greater than that of many nations,and with possibilities for bringing about far-reaching changes and improvements.
But first and foremost our message is directed towards people, whose well being is theultimate goal of all environment and development policies. In particular, the Commission isaddressing the young. The world's teachers will have a crucial role to play in bringing thisreport to them.
If we do not succeed in putting our message of urgency through to today's parents anddecision makers, we risk undermining our children's fundamental right to a healthy,
life-enhancing environment. Unless we are able to translate our words into a language that canreach the minds and hearts of people young and old, we shall not be able to undertake theextensive social changes needed to correct the course of development.
The Commission has completed its work. We call for a common endeavour and for new normsof behaviour at all levels and in the interests of all. The changes in attitudes, in social values,
and in aspirations that the report urges will depend on vast campaigns of education, debateand public participation.
To this end, we appeal to "citizens" groups, to non governmental organizations, to educational
institutions, and to the scientific community. They have all played indispensable roles in thecreation of public awareness and political change in the past. They will play a crucial part inputting the world onto sustainable development paths, in laying the groundwork for Our
Common Future.
The process that produced this unanimous report proven that it is possible to join forces, toidentify common goals, and to agree on common action. Each one of the Commissioners would
have chosen different words if writing the report alone. Still, we managed to agree on theanalysis, the broad remedies, and the recommendations for a sustainable course ofdevelopment.
In the final analysis, this is what it amounts to: furthering the common understanding andcommon spirit of responsibility so clearly needed in a divided world.

Thousands of people all over the world have contributed to the work of the Commission, byintellectual means, by financial means, and by sharing their experiences with us througharticulating their needs and demands. I am sincerely grateful to everyone who has made suchcontributions. Many of their names are found in Annexe 2 of the report. My particulargratitude goes to Vice Chairman Mansour Khalid, to all the other members of the Commission,and to Secretary-General Jim MacNeill and his staff at our secretariat, who went above andbeyond the call of duty to assist us. Their enthusiasm and dedication knew no limits. I want tothank the chairmen and members of the Intergovernmental Inter-sessional Preparatory
Committee, who co-operated closely with the Commission and provided inspiration andsupport. I thank also the Executive Director of the United Nations Environment Programme,
Dr. Mostafa Tolba, for his valuable, continuous support and interest.
Gro Harlem Brundtland
Oslo, 20 March 1987

Our Common Future, From One Earth to One WorldAn Overview by the World Commission on Environment andDevelopment
I. The Global Challenge
1. Successes and failures
2. The Interlocking Crises
3. Sustainable Development
4. The Institutional Gaps

II. The Policy Directions
1. Population and Human Resources
2. Food Security: Sustaining the Potential
3. Species and Ecosystems: Resources for Development
4. Energy: Choices for Environment and Development
5. Industry: Producing More with Less
6. The Urban Challenge

III. International Cooperation and Institutional Reform
1. The Role of the International Economy
2. Managing the Commons
3. Peace, Security, Development, and the Environment
4. Institutional and Legal Change
4.1 Getting at the Sources
4.2 Dealing with the Effects

4.3 Assessing Global Risks
4.4 Making Informed Choices
4.5 Providing the Legal Means
4.6 Investing in our Future

IV. A Call for Action
1. In the middle of the 20th century, we saw our planet from space for the first time. Historians
may eventually find that this vision had a greater impact on thought than did the Copernican
revolution of the 16th century, which upset the human self-image by revealing that the Earth is
not the centre of the universe. From space, we see a small and fragile ball dominated not byhuman activity and edifice but by a pattern of clouds, oceans, greenery, and soils. Humanity's
inability to fit its activities into that pattern is changing planetary systems, fundamentally.
Many such changes are accompanied by life-threatening hazards. This new reality, from which
there is no escape, must be recognized - and managed.
2. Fortunately, this new reality coincides with more positive developments new to this century.
We can move information and goods faster around the globe than ever before; we can produce
more food and more goods with less investment of resources; our technology and science gives
us at least, the potential to look deeper into and better understand natural systems. From
space, we can see and study the Earth as an organism whose health depends on the health ofal its parts. We have the power to reconcile human affairs with natural laws and to thrive in theprocess. In this our cultural and spiritual heritages can reinforce our economic interests andsurvival imperatives.
3. This Commission believes that people can build a future that is more prosperous, more just,and more secure. Our report, Our Common Future, is not a prediction of ever increasing
environmental decay, poverty, and hardship in an ever more polluted world among everdecreasing resources. We see instead the possibility for a new era of economic growth, onethat must be based on policies that sustain and expand the environmental resource base. And
we believe such growth to be absolutely essential to relieve the great poverty that is deepening
in much of the developing world.
4. But the Commission's hope for the future is conditional on decisive political action now to
begin managing environmental resources to ensure both sustainable human progress andhuman survival. We are not forecasting a future; we are serving a notice - an urgent noticebased on the latest and best scientific evidence - that the time has come to take the decisions
needed to secure the resources to sustain this and coming generations. We do not offer adetailed blueprint for action, but instead a pathway by which the peoples of the world may
enlarge their spheres of cooperation.

I. The Global Challenge
1. Successes and failures
5. Those looking for success and signs of hope can find many: infant mortality is falling; humanlife expectancy is increasing; the proportion of the world's adults who can read and write is
climbing; the proportion of children starting school is rising; and global food production
increases faster than the population grows.
6. But the same processes that have produced these gains have given rise to trends that theplanet and its people cannot long bear. These have traditionally been divided into failures of'development' and failures in the management of our human environment. On thedevelopment side, in terms of absolute numbers there are more hungry people in the world
than ever before, and their numbers are increasing. So are the numbers who cannot read or
write, the numbers without safe water or safe and sound homes, and the numbers short ofwoodfuel with which to cook and warm themselves. The gap between rich and poor nations is
widening - not shrinking - and there is little prospect, given present trends and institutionalarrangements, that this process will be reversed.
7. There are also environmental trends that threaten to radically alter the planet, that threaten
the lives of many species upon it. including the human species. Each year another 6 million
hectares of productive dryland turns into worthless desert. Over three decades, this would
amount to an area roughly as large as Saudi Arabia. More than 11 million hectares of forests aredestroyed yearly, and this, over three decades, would equal an area about the size of India.
Much of this forest is converted to low-grade farmland unable to support the farmers who
settle it. In Europe, acid precipitation kills forests and lakes and damages the artistic andarchitectural heritage of nations; it may have acidified vast tracts of soil beyond reasonable
hope of repair. The burning of fossil fuels puts into the atmosphere carbon dioxide, which is
causing gradual global warming. This 'greenhouse effect' may by early next century haveincreased average global temperatures enough to shift agricultural production areas, raise sea
levels to flood coastal cities, and disrupt national economies. Other industrial gases threaten
to deplete the planet's protective ozone shield to such an extent that the number of humanand animal cancers would rise sharply and the oceans' food chain would be disrupted,
industry and agriculture put toxic substances into the human food chain and into
underground water tables beyond reach of cleansing.
8. There has been a growing realization in national governments and multilateral institutions
that it is impossible to separate economic development issues from environment issues; many
forms of development erode the environmental resources upon which they must be based, andenvironmental degradation can undermine economic development. Poverty is a major cause
and effect of global environmental problems. It is therefore futile to attempt to deal withenvironmental problems without a broader perspective that encompasses the factors
underlying world poverty and international inequality.
9. These concerns were behind the establishment in 1983 of the World Commission on
Environment and Development by the UN General Assembly. The Commission is anindependent body, linked to but outside the control of governments and the UN system. The
Commission's mandate gave it three objectives: to re-examine the critical environment anddevelopment issues and to formulate realistic proposals for dealing with them; to propose newforms of international cooperation on these issues that will influence policies and events in the
direction of needed changes; and to raise the levels of understanding and commitment toaction of individuals, voluntary organizations, businesses, institutes, and governments.
10. Through our deliberations and the testimony of people at the public hearings we held on
five continents, all the commissioners came to focus on one central theme: many present
development trends leave increasing numbers of people poor and vulnerable, while at thesame time degrading the environment. How can such development serve next century's world

of twice as many people relying on the same environment? This realization broadened ourview of development. We came to see it not in its restricted context of economic growth indeveloping countries. We came to see that a new development path was required, one thatsustained human progress not just in a few pieces for a few years, but for the entire planet into
the distant future. Thus 'sustainable development' becomes a goal not just for the 'developing'nations, but for industrial ones as well.

2. The Interlocking Crises
11. Until recently, the planet was a large world in which human activities and their effects were
neatly compartmentalized within nations, within sectors (energy, agriculture, trade), andwithin broad areas of concern (environment, economics, social). These compartments havebegun to dissolve. This applies in particular to the various global 'crises' that have seizedpublic concern, particularly over the past decade. These are not separate crises: anenvironmental crisis, a development crisis, an energy crisis. They are all one.
12. The planet is passing through a period of dramatic growth and fundamental change. Ourhuman world of 5 billion must make room in a finite environment for another human world.
The population could stabilize at between 8 and 14 billion sometime next century, according toUN projections. More than 90 per cent of the increase will occur in the poorest countries, and90 per cent of that growth in already bursting cities.
13. Economic activity has multiplied to create a $13 trillion world economy, and this could growfive to tenfold in the coming half century. Industrial production has grown more than fiftyfold
over the past century, four-fifths of this growth since 1950. Such figures reflect and presage
profound impacts upon the biosphere, as the world invests in houses, transport, farms, andindustries. Much of the economic growth pulls raw material from forests, soils, seas, andwaterways.
The World Commission on Environment and Development first met in October 1984.
and published its Report 900 days later, in April 1987. Over those few days:
The drought-triggered, environment-development crisis in Africa peaked,
putting 36 million people at risk, killing perhaps a million.
A leak from a pesticides factory in Bhopal, India, killed more than 2,000
people and blinded and injured over 200,000 more.
Liquid gas tanks exploded in Mexico City, killing 1,000 and leaving thousands
more homeless.
The Chernobyl nuclear reactor explosion sent nuclear fallout across Europe,
increasing the risks of future human cancers.
Agricultural chemicals, solvents, and mercury flowed into the Rhine Riverduring a warehouse fire in Switzerland, killing millions of fish and threatening
drinking water in the Federal Republic of Germany and the Netherlands.
An estimated 60 million people died of diarrhoeal diseases related to unsafe
drinking water and malnutrition; most of the victims were children.

14. A mainspring of economic growth is new technology, and while this technology offers thepotential for slowing the dangerously rapid consumption of finite resources, it also entails highrisks, including new forms of pollution and the introduction to the planet of new variations oflife forms that could change evolutionary pathways. Meanwhile, the industries most heavily
reliant on environmental resources and most heavily polluting are growing most rapidly in thedeveloping world, where there is both more urgency for growth and less capacity to minimize
damaging side effects.
15. These related changes have locked the global economy and global ecology together in new
ways. We have in the past been concerned about the impacts of economic growth upon theenvironment. We are now forced to concern ourselves with the impacts of ecological stress degradation of soils, water regimes, atmosphere, and forests upon our economic prospects.
We have in the more recent past been forced to face up to a sharp increase in economic
interdependence among nations. We are now forced to accustom ourselves to an accelerating
ecological interdependence among nations. Ecology and economy are becoming ever moreinterwoven locally, regionally, nationally, and globally into a seamless net of causes and effects.
16. Impoverishing the local resource base can impoverish wider areas: deforestation byhighland farmers causes flooding on lowland farms; factory pollution robs local fishermen of
their catch. Such grim local cycles now operate nationally and regionally. Dryland degradation
sends environmental refugees in their millions across national borders. Deforestation in Latin
America and Asia is causing more floods, and more destructive floods, in downhill,
downstream nations. Acid precipitation and nuclear fallout have spread across the borders ofEurope. Similar phenomena are emerging on a global scale, such as global warming and loss ofozone. Internationally traded hazardous chemicals entering foods are themselvesinternationally traded. In the next century, the environmental pressure causing population
movements may be increase sharply, while barriers to that movement may be even firmer thanthey are now.
17. Over the past few decades, life-threatening environmental concerns have surfaced in thedeveloping world. Countrysides are coming under pressure from increasing numbers offarmers and the landless. Cities are filling with people, cars, and factories. Yet at the same timethese developing countries oust operate in a world in which the resources gap between mostdeveloping and industrial nations is widening, in which the industrial world dominates in therule-making of some key international bodies and in which the industrial world has alreadyused much of the planet's ecological capital. This inequality is the planet's main'environmental' problem; it is also its main 'development' problem.
18. International economic relationships pose a particular problem for environmental
management in many developing countries. Agriculture, forestry, energy production, andmining generate at least half the gross national product of many developing countries andaccount for even larger shares of livelihoods and employment. Exports of natural resources
remain a large factor in their economies, especially for the least developed. Most of thesecountries face enormous economic pressures, both international and domestic, to overexploit
their environmental resource base.
19. The recent crisis in Africa best and most tragically illustrates the ways in which economics
and ecology can interact destructively and trip into disaster. Triggered by drought, its realcauses lie deeper. They are to be found in part in national policies that gave too little attention,
too late, to the needs of smallholder agriculture and to the threats posed by rapidly rising
populations. Their roots extend also to a global economic system that takes more out of a poor
continent than it puts in. Debts that they cannot pay force African nations relying on

commodity sales to overuse their fragile soils, thus turning good land to desert. Trade barriersin the wealthy nations - and in many developing nations - make it hard for African nations tosell their goods for reasonable returns, putting yet more pressure on ecological systems. Aidfrom donor nations has not only been inadequate in scale, but too often has reflected thepriorities of the nations giving the aid, rather than the needs of the recipients.
The Commission has sought ways in which global development can be put on asustainable path into the 21st Century. Some 5,000 days will elapse between the
publication of our report and the first day of the 21st Century. What environmental
crises lie in store over those 5,000 days?
During the 1970s, twice as many people suffered each year from 'natural' disasters as
during the 1960s. The disasters most directly associated withenvironment/development mismanagement - droughts and floods - affected themost people and increased most sharply in terms of numbers affected. Some 18.5
million people were affected by drought annually in the 1960s, 24.4 million in the
1970s. There were 5.2 million flood victims yearly in the 1960s, 15.4 million in the
1970s. Numbers of victims of cyclones and earthquakes also shot up as growing
numbers of poor people built unsafe houses on dangerous ground.
The results are not in for the 1960s. But we have seen 35 billion afflicted by drought
in Africa alone and tens of millions affected by the better managed and thus
less-publicized Indian drought. Floods have poured off the deforested Andes andHimalayas with increasing force. The 1960s seem destined to sweep this dire trend
on into a crisis-filled 1990s.

20. The production base of other developing world areas suffers similarly from both local
failures and from the workings of international economic systems. As a consequence of the'debt crisis' of Latin America, that continent's natural resources are now being used not fordevelopment but to meet financial obligations to creditors abroad. This approach to the debt
problem is short-sighted from several standpoints: economic, political, and environmental. It
requires relatively poor countries simultaneously to accept growing poverty while exporting
growing amounts of scarce resources.
21. A majority of developing countries now have lower per capita incomes than when thedecade began. Rising poverty and unemployment have increased pressure on environmental
resources as more people have been forced to rely more directly upon them. Many
governments have cut back efforts to protect the environment and to bring ecologicalconsiderations into development planning.
22. The deepening and widening environmental crisis presents a threat to national security and even survival - that may be greater than well-armed, ill-disposed neighbours andunfriendly alliances. Already in parts of Latin America, Asia, the Middle East, and Africa,
environmental decline is becoming a source of political unrest and international tension. The
recent destruction of much of Africa's dryland agricultural production was more severe than if
an invading army had pursued a scorched-earth policy. Yet most of the affected governments
still spend far more to protect their people from invading armies than from the invading
desert.
23. Globally, military expenditures total about $1 trillion a year and continue to grow. In many

countries, military spending consumes such a high proportion of GNP that it itself does greatdamage to these societies' development efforts. Governments tend to base their approaches to'security' on traditional definitions. This is most obvious in the attempts to achieve security
through the development of potentially planet-destroying nuclear weapons systems. Studies
suggest that the cold and dark nuclear winter following even a limited nuclear war could
destroy plant and animal ecosystems and leave any human survivors occupying a devastatedplanet very different from the one they inherited.
24. The arms race - in all parts of the world - pre-empts resources that might be used moreproductively to diminish the security threats created by environmental conflict and theresentments that are fuelled by widespread poverty.
25. Many present efforts to guard and maintain human progress, to meet human needs, and torealize human ambitions are simply unsustainable - in both the rich and poor nations. They
draw too heavily, too quickly, on already overdrawn environmental resource accounts to beaffordable far into the future without bankrupting those accounts. They may show profit on
the balance sheets of our generation, but our children will inherit the losses. We borrowenvironmental capital from future generations with no intention or prospect of repaying. They
may damn us for our spendthrift ways, but they can never collect on our debt to them. We act
as we do because we can get away with it: future generations do not vote; they have no politicalor financial power; they cannot challenge our decisions.
26. But the results of the present profligacy are rapidly closing the options for future
generations. Most of today's decision makers will be dead before the planet feels; the heavier
effects of acid precipitation, global warming, ozone depletion, or widespread desertificationand species loss. Most of the young voters of today will still be alive. In the Commission's
hearings it was the young, those who have the most to lose, who were the harshest critics ofthe planet's present management.

3. Sustainable Development
27. Humanity has the ability to make development sustainable to ensure that it meets theneeds of the present without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their own
needs. The concept of sustainable development does imply limits - not absolute limits but
limitations imposed by the present state of technology and social organization on
environmental resources and by the ability of the biosphere to absorb the effects of humanactivities. But technology and social organization can be both managed and improved to makeway for a new era of economic growth. The Commission believes that widespread poverty is nolonger inevitable. Poverty is not only an evil in itself, but sustainable development requires
meeting the basic needs of all and extending to all the opportunity to fulfil their aspirations fora better life. A world in which poverty is endemic will always be prone to ecological and othercatastrophes.
28. Meeting essential needs requires not only a new era of economic growth for nations inwhich the majority are poor, but an assurance that those poor get their fair share of theresources required to sustain that growth. Such equity would be aided by political systems that
secure effective citizen participation in decision making and by greater democracy ininternational decision making.
29. Sustainable global development requires that those who are more affluent adopt life-styles
within the planet's ecological means - in their use of energy, for example. Further, rapidly
growing populations can increase the pressure on resources and slow any rise in living

standards; thus sustainable development can only be pursued if population size and growth
are in harmony with the changing productive potential of the ecosystem.
30. Yet in the end, sustainable development is not a fixed state of harmony, but rather aprocess of change in which the exploitation of resources, the direction of investments, theorientation of technological development, and institutional change are made consistent with
future as well as present needs. We do not pretend that the process is easy or straightforward.
Painful choices have to be made. Thus, in the final analysis, sustainable development must reston political will.

4. The Institutional Gaps
31. The objective of sustainable development and the integrated nature of the global
environment/development challenges pose problems for institutions, national andinternational, that were established on the basis of narrow preoccupations andcompartmentalized concerns. Governments' general response to the speed and scale of globalchanges has been a reluctance to recognize sufficiently the need to change themselves. The
challenges are both interdependent and integrated, requiring comprehensive approaches andpopular participation.
32. Yet most of the institutions facing those challenges tend to be independent, fragmented,
working to relatively narrow mandates with closed decision processes. Those responsible formanaging natural resources and protecting the environment are institutionally separated fromthose responsible for managing the economy. The real world of interlocked economic andecological systems will not change; the policies and institutions concerned must.
33. There is a growing need for effective international cooperation to manage ecological andeconomic interdependence. Yet at the same time, confidence in international organizations isdiminishing and support for them dwindling.
34. The other great institutional flaw in coping with environment/development challenges isgovernments' failure to make the bodies whose policy actions degrade the environment
responsible for ensuring that their policies prevent that degradation. Environmental concern
arose from damage caused by the rapid economic growth following the Second World War.
Governments, pressured by their citizens, saw a need to clean up the mess, and they
established environmental ministries and agencies to do this. Many had great success within
the limits of their mandates - in improving air and water quality and enhancing otherresources. But much of their work has of necessity been after-the-fact repair of damage:reforestation, reclaiming desert lands, rebuilding urban environments, restoring natural
habitats, and rehabilitating wild lands.
35. The existence of such agencies gave many governments and their citizens the false
impression that these bodies were by themselves able to protect and enhance theenvironmental resource base. Yet many industrialized and most developing countries carryhuge economic burdens from inherited problems such an air and water pollution, depletion ofgroundwater, and the proliferation of toxic chemicals and hazardous wastes. These have been
joined by more recent problems - erosion, desertification, acidification, new chemicals, andnew forms of waste - that are directly related to agricultural, industrial, energy, forestry, andtransportation policies and practices.
36. The mandates of the central economic and sectoral ministries are also often too narrow,too concerned with quantities of production or growth. The mandates of ministries of industry

include production targets, while the accompanying pollution is left to ministries ofenvironment. Electricity boards produce power, while the acid pollution they also produce isleft to other bodies to clean up. The present challenge is to give the central economic andsectoral ministries the responsibility for the quality of those parts of the human environment
affected by their decisions, and to give the environmental agencies more power to cope withthe effects of unsustainable development.
37. The same need for change holds for international agencies concerned with development
lending, trade regulation, agricultural development, and so on. These have been slow to takethe environmental effects of their work into account, although some are trying to do so.
38. The ability to anticipate and prevent environmental damage requires that the ecologicaldimensions of policy be considered at the same time as the economic, trade, energy,
agricultural, and other dimensions. They should be considered on the same agendas and in thesame national and international institutions.
39. This reorientation is one of the chief institutional challenges of the 1990s and beyond.
Meeting it will require major institutional development and reform. Many countries that are
too poor or small or that have limited managerial capacity will find it difficult to do thisunaided. They will need financial and technical assistance and training. But the changes
required involve all countries, large and small, rich and poor.

II. The Policy Directions
40. The Commission has focused its attention in the areas of population, food security, theloss of species and genetic resources, energy, industry, and human settlements - realizing that
all of these are connected and cannot be treated in isolation one from another. This section
contains only a few of the Commission's many recommendations.

1. Population and Human Resources
41. In many parts of the world, the population is growing at rates that cannot be sustained byavailable environmental resources, at rates that are outstripping any reasonable expectationsof improvements in housing, health care, food security, or energy supplies.
42. The issue is not just numbers of people, but how those numbers relate to available
resources. Thus the 'population problem' must be dealt with in part by efforts to eliminate
mass poverty, in order to assure more equitable access to resources, and by education to
improve human potential to manage those resources.
43. Urgent steps are needed to limit extreme rates of population growth. Choices made now
will influence the level at which the population stabilizes next century within a range of 6
billion people. But this is not just a demographic issue; providing people with facilities andeducation that allow them to choose the size of their families is a way of assuring - especiallyfor women - the basic human right of self-determination.
44. Governments that need to do so should develop long-term, multifaceted population
policies and a campaign to pursue broad demographic goals: to strengthen social, cultural, andeconomic motivations for family planning, and to provide to all who want them the education,
contraceptives, and services required.
45. Human resource development is a crucial requirement not only to build up technicalknowledge and capabilities, but also to create new values to help individuals and nations copewith rapidly changing social, environmental, and development realities. Knowledge sharedglobally would assure greater mutual understanding and create greater willingness to shareglobal resources equitably.
46. Tribal and indigenous peoples will need special attention as the forces of economic
development disrupt their traditional life-styles - life-styles that can offer modern societies
many lessons in the management of resources in complex forest, mountain, and dryland
ecosystems. Some are threatened with virtual extinction by insensitive development overwhich they have no control. Their traditional rights should be recognized and they should begiven a decisive voice in formulating policies about resource development in their areas. (See
Chapter 4 for a wider discussion of these issues and recommendations.)

2. Food Security: Sustaining the Potential
47. Growth in world cereal production has steadily outstripped world population growth. Yeteach year there are more people in the world who do not get enough food. Global agriculture
has the potential to grow enough food for all, but food is often not available where it is needed.
48. Production in industrialized countries has usually been highly subsidized and protectedfrom international competition. These subsidies have encouraged the overuse of soil andchemicals, the pollution of both water resources and foods with these chemicals, and thedegradation of the countryside. Much of this effort has produced surpluses and theirassociated financial burdens. And some of this surplus has been sent at concessional rates tothe developing world, where it has undermined the farming policies of recipient nations. Thereis, however, growing awareness in some countries of the environmental and economic
consequences of such paths, and the emphasis of agricultural policies is to encourageconservation.
49. Many developing countries, on the other hand, have suffered the opposite problem:
farmers are not sufficiently supported. In some, improved technology allied to price incentives
and government services has produced a major breakthrough in food production. But
elsewhere, the food-growing small farmers have been neglected. Coping with often inadequate
technology and few economic incentives, many are pushed onto marginal land: too dry, too
steep, lacking in nutrients. Forests are cleared and productive drylands rendered barren.
50. Most developing nations need more effective incentive systems to encourage production,
especially of food crops. In short, the 'terms of trade' need to be turned in favour of the small
farmer. Most industrialized nations, on the other hand, must alter present systems in order tocut surpluses, to reduce unfair competition with nations that may have real comparativeadvantages, and to promote ecologically sound farming practices.
51. Food security requires attention to questions of distribution, since hunger often arises
from lack of purchasing power rather than lack of available food. It can be furthered by land
reforms, and by policies to protect vulnerable subsistence farmers, pastora1ists, and thelandless - groups who by the year 2000 will include 220 million households. Their greater
prosperity will depend on integrated rural development that increases work opportunities
both inside and outside agriculture. (See Chapter 5 for a wider discussion of these issues andrecommendations.)3. Species and Ecosystems: Resources for Development
52. The planet's species are under stress. There is a growing scientific consensus that species
are disappearing at rates never before witnessed on the planet, although there is also
controversy over those rates and the risks they entail. Yet there is still time to halt thisprocess.
53. The diversity of species is necessary for the normal functioning of ecosystems and thebiosphere as a whole. The genetic material in wild species contributes billions of dollars yearly
to the world economy in the form of improved crop species, new drugs and medicines, and raw
materials for industry. But utility aside, there are also moral, ethical, cultural, aesthetic, andpurely scientific reasons for conserving wild beings.
54. A first priority is to establish the problem of disappearing species and threatened
ecosystems on political agendas as a major economic and resource issue.
55. Governments can stem the destruction of tropical forests and other reservoirs of biologicaldiversity while developing them economically. Reforming forest revenue systems andconcession terms could raise billions of dollars of additional revenues, promote more efficient,
long-term forest resource use, and curtail deforestation.
56. The network of protected areas that the world will need in the future must include muchlarger areas brought under so.ne degree of protection. Therefore, the cost of conservation willrise - directly and in terms of opportunities for development foregone. But over the long term
the opportunities for development will be enhanced. International development agencies
should therefore give comprehensive and systematic attention to the problems andopportunities of species conservation.
57. Governments should investigate the prospect of agreeing to a 'Species Convention', similarin spirit and scope to other international conventions reflecting principles of 'universal
resources'. They should also consider international financial arrangements to support theimplementation of such a convention. (See Chapter 6 for a wider discussion of these issues
and recommendations.)

4. Energy: Choices for Environment and Development
58. A safe and sustainable energy pathway is crucial to sustainable development; we have notyet found it. Rates of increase in energy use have been declining. However, theindustrialization, agricultural development, and rapidly growing populations of developing
nations will need much more energy. Today, the average person in an industrial market
economy uses more than 80 times as much energy as someone in sub-Saharan Africa. Thus
any realistic global energy scenario must provide for substantially increased primary energy
use by developing countries.
59. To bring developing countries' energy use up to industrialized country levels by the year
2025 would require increasing present global energy use by a factor of five. The planetary
ecosystem could not stand this, especially if the increases were based on non-renewable fossil
fuels. Threats of global warming and acidification of the environment most probably rule out
even a doubling of energy use bared on present mixes of primary sources.
60. Any new era of economic growth must therefore be less energy intensive than growth in
the past. Energy efficiency policies must be the cutting edge of national energy strategies forsustainable development, and there is much scope for improvement in this direction. Modern

appliances can be redesigned to deliver the same amounts of energy-services with only
two-thirds or even one-half of the primary energy inputs needed to run traditional equipment.
And energy efficiency solutions are often cost-effective.
61. After almost four decades of immense technological effort, nuclear energy has become
widely used. During this period, however, the nature of its costs, risks, and benefits havebecome more evident and the subject of sharp controversy. Different countries world-wide
take up different positions on the use of nuclear energy. The discussion in the Commission
also reflected these different views and positions. Yet all agreed that the generation of nuclear
power is only justifiable if there are solid solutions to the unsolved problems to which it gives
rise. The highest priority should be accorded to research and development on environmentallysound and ecologically viable alternatives, as well as on means of increasing the safety of
nuclear energy.
62. Energy efficiency can only buy time for the world to develop 'low-energy paths' based on
renewable sources, which should form the foundation of the global energy structure during the
21st Century. Most of these sources are currently problematic, but given innovative
development, they could supply the same amount of primary energy the planet now
consumes. However, achieving these use levels will require a programme of coordinatedresearch, development, and demonstration projects commanding funding necessary to ensure
the rapid development of renewable energy. Developing countries will require assistance tochange their energy use patterns in this direction.
63. Millions of people in the developing world are short of fuelwood, the main domestic energyof half of humanity, and their numbers are growing. The wood-poor nations must organize
their agricultural sectors to produce large amounts of wood and other plant fuels.
64. The substantial changes required in the present global energy mix will not be achieved bymarket pressures alone, given the dominant role of governments as producers of energy andtheir importance as consumers. If the recent momentum behind annual gains in energy
efficiency is to be maintained and extended,governments need to make it an explicit goal of
their policies for energy pricing to consumers, prices needed to encourage the adoption ofenergy-saving measures may be achieved through several means. Although the Commission
expresses no preference, 'conservation pricing' requires that governments take a long-termview in weighing the costs and benefits of the various measures. Given the importance of oil
prices on international energy policy, new mechanisms for encouraging dialogue between
consumers and producers should be explored.
65. A safe, environmentally sound, and economically viable energy pathway that will sustain
human progress into the distant future is clearly imperative. It is also possible. But it will
require new dimensions of political will and institutional cooperation to achieve it. (See
Chapter 7 for a wider discussion of these issues and recommendations.)

5. Industry: Producing More with Less
66. The world manufactures seven times more goods today than it did as recently as 1950.
Given population growth rates, a five- to tenfold increase in manufacturing output will beneeded just to raise developing world consumption of manufactured goods to industrialized
world levels by the time population growth rates level off next century.
67. Experience in the industrialized nations has proved that anti-pollution technology has
been cost-effective in terms of health, property, and environmental damage avoided, and thatit has made many industries more profitable by waking them more resource-efficient. Whileeconomic growth has continued, the consumption of raw materials has held steady or evendeclined, and new technologies offer further efficiencies.
68. Nations have to bear the costs of any inappropriate industrialization, and many developing
countries are realizing that they have neither the resources nor - given rapid technologicalchange - the time to damage their environments now and clean up later. But they also needassistance and information from industrialized nations to make the best use of technology.
Transnational corporations have a special responsibility to smooth the path ofindustrialization in the nations in which they operate.
69. Emerging technologies offer the promise of higher productivity, increased efficiency, anddecreased pollution, but many bring risks of new toxic chemicals and wastes and of major
accidents of a type and scale beyond present coping mechanisms. There is an urgent need fortighter controls over the export of hazardous industrial and agricultural chemicals. Present
controls over the dumping of hazardous wastes should be tightened.
70. Many essential human needs can be net only through goods and services provided byindustry, and the shift to sustainable development must be powered by a continuing flow of
wealth from industry. (See Chapter 8 for a wider discussion of these issues andrecommendations.)

6. The Urban Challenge
71. By the turn of the century, almost half of humanity will live in cities; the world of the 21st
century will be a largely urban world. Over only 65 years, the developing world's urban
population has increased tenfold, from around 100 million in 1920 to 1 billion today. In 1940,
one person in 100 lived in a city of 1 million or more inhabitants; by 1980, one in 10 lived insuch a city. Between 1985 and the year 2000, Third World cities could grow by another threequarters of a billion people. This suggests that the developing world must, over the next few
years, increase by 65 per cent its capacity to produce and manage its urban infrastructure,services, and shelter merely to maintain today's often extremely inadequate conditions.
72. Few city governments in the developing world have the power, resources, and trained
personnel to provide their rapidly growing populations with the land, services, and facilities
needed for an adequate human life: clean water, sanitation, schools, and transport. The result
is mushrooming illegal settlements with primitive facilities, increased overcrowding, andrampant disease linked to an unhealthy environment. Many cities in industrial countries also
face problems - deteriorating infrastructure, environmental degradation, inner-city decay, andneighbourhood collapse. But with the means and resources to tackle this decline, the issue formost industrial countries is ultimately one of political and social choice. Developing countries
are not in the same situation. They have a major urban crisis on their hands.
73. Governments will need to develop explicit settlements strategies to guide the process ofurbanization, taking the pressure off the largest urban centres and building up smaller towns
and cities, more closely integrating them with their rural hinterlands. This will mean
examining and changing other policies - taxation, food pricing, transportation, health,industrialization - that work against the goals of settlements strategies.
74. Good city management requires decentralization of funds, political power, and personnel to local authorities, which are best placed to appreciate and manage local needs. But thesustainable development of cities will depend on closer work with the majorities of urban poor

who are the true city builders, tapping the skills, energies and resources of neighbourhoodgroups and those in the 'informal sector'. Much can be achieved by 'site and service' schemesthat provide households with basic services and help them to get on with building sounderhouses around these. (See Chapter 9 for a wider discussion of these issues andrecommendations.)

III. International Cooperation and Institutional Reform
1. The Role of the International Economy
75. Two conditions must be satisfied before international economic exchanges can become
beneficial for all involved. The sustainability of ecosystems on which the global economy
depends must be guaranteed. And the economic partners must be satisfied that the basis ofexchange is equitable. For many developing countries, neither condition is set.
76. Growth in many developing countries is being stifled by depressed commodity prices,protectionism, intolerable debt burdens, and declining flows of development finance. If living
standards are to grow so as to alleviate poverty, these trends must be reversed.
77. A particular responsibility falls to the World Bank and the International Development
Association as the main conduit for multilateral finance to developing countries. In the context
of consistently increased financial flows, the World Bank can support environmentally soundprojects and policies. In financing structural adjustment, the International Monetary Fundshould support wider and longer term development objectives than at present: growth, social
goals, and environmental impacts.
78. The present level of debt service of many countries, especially in Africa and Latin America,
is not consistent with sustainable development. Debtors are being required to use trade
surpluses to service debts, and are drawing heavily on non-renewable resources to do so.
Urgent action is necessary to alleviate debt burdens in ways that represent a fairer sharing
between both debtors and lenders of the responsibilities and burdens.
79. Current arrangements for commodities could be significantly improved: morecompensatory financing to offset economic shocks would encourage producers to take along-term view, and not to overproduce commodities; and more assistance could be given
from diversification programmes. Commodity-specific arrangements can build on the model ofthe International Tropical Timber Agreement, one of the few that specifically includes
ecological concerns
80. Multinational companies can play an important role in sustainable development, especiallyas developing countries come to rely more on foreign equity capital. But if these companies areto have a positive influence on development, the negotiating capacity of developing countries
vis a vis transnationals must be strengthened so they can secure terms which respect theirenvironmental concerns.
81. However, these specific measures must be located in a wider context of effective
cooperation to produce an international economic system geared to growth and theelimination of world poverty. (See Chapter 3 for a more detailed discussion of issues andrecommendations on the international economy.)

2. Managing the Commons82. Traditional forms of national sovereignty raise particular problems in managing the 'global
commons' and their shared ecosystems - the oceans, outer space, and Antarctica. Some
progress has been made in all three areas; much remains to be done.
83. The UN Conference on the Law of the Sea was the most ambitious attempt ever to provide
an internationally agreed regime for the management of the oceans. All nations should ratify
the Law of the Sea Treaty as soon at possible. Fisheries agreements should be strengthened toprevent current overexploitation, as should conventions to control and regulate the dumpingof hazardous wastes at sea.
84. There are growing concerns about the management of orbital space, centering on using
satellite technology for monitoring planetary systems; on making the most effective use of thelimited capacities of geosynchronous orbit for communications satellites; and on limiting
space debris. The orbiting and testing of weapons in space would greatly increase this debris.
The international community should seek to design and implement a space regime to ensurethat space remains a peaceful environment for the benefit of all.
85. Antarctica is managed under the 1959 Antarctica Treaty. However, many nations outsideof that pact view the Treaty System as too limited, both in participation and in the scope of its
conservation measures. The Commission's recommendations deal with the safeguarding ofpresent achievements; the incorporation of any minerals development into a management
regime; and various options for the future. (See Chapter 10 for more discussion in issues andrecommendations on the management of the commons.)

3. Peace, Security, Development, and the Environment
86. Among the dangers facing the environment, the possibility of nuclear war is undoubtedly
the gravest. Certain aspects of the issues of peace and security bear directly upon the conceptof sustainable development. The whole notion of security as traditionally understood in termsof political and military threats to national sovereignty - must be expanded to include thegrowing impacts of environmental stress - locally, nationally, regionally, and globally. There
are no military solutions to 'environmental insecurity'.
87. Governments and international agencies should assess the cost-effectiveness, in terms ofachieving security, of money spent on armaments compared with money spent on reducing
poverty or restoring a ravaged environment.
88. But the greatest need is to achieve improved relations among those major powers capableof deploying weapons of mass destruction. This is needed to achieve agreement on tighter
control over the proliferation and testing of various types of weapons of mass destruction nuclear and non nuclear - including those that have environmental implications. (See Chapter
11 for more discussion of issues and recommendations on the links between peace, security,
development, and the environment.)

4. Institutional and Legal Change
89. The Report that follows contains throughout (and especially in Chapter 12), many specificrecommendations for institutional and legal change. These cannot be adequately summarized
here. However, the Commission's main proposals are embodied in six priority areas.

4.1 Getting at the Sources
90. Governments must begin now to make the key national, economic, and sectoral agencies
directly responsible and accountable for ensuring that their policies, programmes, andbudgets support development that is economically and ecologically sustainable.
91. By the same token, the various regional organizations need to do more to integrate
environment fully in their goals and activities. New regional arrangements will especially beneeded among developing countries to deal with transboundary environmental issues.
92. All major international bodies and agencies should ensure that their programmes
encourage and support sustainable development, and they should greatly improve theircoordination and cooperation. The Secretary-General of the United Nations Organization
should provide a high level centre of leadership for the UN system to assess, advise, assist,and report on progress made towards this goal.

4.2 Dealing with the Effects
93. Governments should also reinforce the roles and capacities of environmental protection
and resource management agencies. This is needed in many industrialized countries, but mosturgently in developing countries, which will need assistance in strengthening their
institutions. The UN Environment Programme (UNEP) should be strengthened as theprincipal source on environmental data, assessment, and reporting and as the principal
advocate and agent for change and international cooperation on critical environment andnatural resource protection issues.

4.3 Assessing Global Risks
94. The capacity to identify, assess, and report on risks of irreversible damage to natural
systems and threats to the survival, security, and well being of the world community must be
rapidly reinforced and extended. Governments, individually and collectively, have theprincipal responsibility to do this. UNEP's Earthwatch programme should be the centre ofleadership in the UN system on risk assessment
95. However, given the politically sensitive nature of many of the most critical risks, there isalso a need for an independent but complementary capacity to assess and report on criticalglobal risks. A new international programme for cooperation among largely non-governmentalorganizations, scientific bodies, and industry groups should therefore be established for thispurpose.

4.4 Making Informed Choices
96. Making the difficult choices involved in achieving sustainable development will depend on
the widespread support and involvement of an informed public and of NGOs, the scientificcommunity, and industry. Their rights, roles and participation in development planning,decision-making, and project implementation should be expanded.

4.5 Providing the Legal Means
97. National and international law is being rapidly outdistanced by the accelerating pace andexpanding scale of impacts on the ecological basis of development. Governments now need tofill major gaps in existing national and international law related to the environment, to findways to recognize and protect the rights of present and future generations to an environment
adequate for their health and well-being, to prepare under UN auspices a universal
Declaration on environmental protection and sustainable development and a subsequent
Convention, and to strengthen procedures for avoiding or resolving disputes on environmentand resource management issues.

4.6 Investing in our Future
98. Over the past decade, the overall cost-effectiveness of investments in halting pollution has
been demonstrated. The escalating economic and ecological damage costs of not investing inenvironmental protection and improvement have also been repeatedly demonstrated - often ingrim tolls of flood and famine. But there are large financial implications: for renewable energy
development, pollution control, and achieving less resource intensive forms of agriculture.
99. Multilateral financial institutions have a crucial role to play. The World Bank is presently
reorienting its programmes towards greater environmental concerns. This should beaccompanied by a fundamental commitment to sustainable development by the Bank. It is alsoessential that the Regional Development Banks and the International Monetary Fund
incorporate similar objectives in their policies and programmes. A new priority and focus isalso needed in bilateral aid agencies.
100. Given the limitations on increasing present flows of international aid, proposals forsecuring additional revenue from the use of international commons and natural resources
should now be seriously considered by governments.

IV. A Call for Action
101. Over the course of this century, the relationship between the human world and the planetthat sustains it has undergone a profound change.
102. When the century began, neither human numbers nor technology had the power radicallyto alter planetary systems. As the century closes, not only do vastly increased human numbers
and their activities have that power, but major, unintended changes are occurring in theatmosphere, in soils, in waters, among plants and animals, and in the relationships among allof these. The rate of change is outstripping the ability of scientific disciplines and our current
capabilities to assess and advise. It is frustrating the attempts of political and economic
institutions, which evolved in a different, more fragmented world, to adapt and cope. It deeply
worries many people who are seeking ways to place those concerns on the political agendas.
103. The onus lies with no one group of nations. Developing countries face the obvious
life-threatening challenges of desertification, deforestation, and pollution, and endure most of
the poverty associated with environmental degradation. The entire human family of nations
would suffer from the disappearance of rain forests in the tropics, the loss of plant and animal
species, and changes in rainfall patterns. Industrial nations face the life-threatening challenges

of toxic chemicals, toxic wastes, and acidification. All nations may suffer from the releases byindustrialized countries of carbon dioxide and of gases that react with the ozone layer, andfrom any future war fought with the nuclear arsenals controlled by those nations. All nations
will have a role to play in changing trends, and in righting an international economic systemthat increases rather than decreases inequality, that increases rather than decreases numbersof poor and hungry.
104. The next few decades are crucial. The time has come to break out of past patterns.
Attempts to maintain social and ecological stability through old approaches to development
and environmental protection will increase instability. Security must be sought throughchange. The Commission has noted a number of actions that must be taken to reduce risks tosurvival and to put future development on paths that are sustainable. Yet we are aware thatsuch a reorientation on a continuing basis is simply beyond the reach of present decisionmaking structures and institutional arrangements, both national and international.
105. This Commission has been careful to base our recommendations on the realities ofpresent institutions, on what can and must be accomplished today. But to keep options open
for future generations, the present generation must begin now, and begin together.
106. To achieve the needed changes, we believe that an active follow-up of this report isimperative. It is with this in mind that we call for the UN General Assembly, upon due
consideration, to transform this report into a UN Programme on Sustainable Development.
Special follow-up conferences could be initiated at the regional level. Within an appropriate
period after the presentation of this report to the General Assembly, an international
conference could be convened to review progress made, and to promote follow up
arrangements that will be needed to set benchmarks and to maintain human progress.
107. First and foremost, this Commission has been concerned with people - of all countries andall walks of life. And it is to people that we address our report. The changes in human attitudes
that we call for depend on a vast campaign of education, debate, and public participation. This
campaign must start now if sustainable human progress is to be achieved.
108. The Members of the World Commission on Environment and Development came from 21
very different nations. In our discussions, we disagreed often on details and priorities. But
despite our widely differing backgrounds and varying national and international
responsibilities, we were able to agree to the lines along which change must be drawn.
109. We are unanimous in our conviction that the security, well-being, and very survival of theplanet depend on such changes, now.

Our Common Future, Chapter 1: A Threatened Future

I. Symptoms and Causes
1. Poverty
2. Growth
3. Survival
4. The Economic Crisis

II. New Approaches to Environment and Development
1. The Earth is one but the world is not. We all depend on one biosphere for sustaining ourlives. Yet each community, each country, strives for survival and prosperity with little regard
for its impact on others. Some consume the Earth's resources at a rate that would leave little
for future generations. Others, many more in number, consume far too little and live with theprospect of hunger, squalor, disease, and early death.
2. Yet progress has been made. Throughout much of the world, children born today can expect
to live longer and be better educated than their parents. In many parts, the new-born can also
expect to attain a higher standard of living in a wider sense. Such progress provides hope as we
contemplate the improvements still needed, and also as we face our failures to make this Eartha safer and sounder home for us and for those who are to come.
3. The failures that we need to correct arise both from poverty and from the short-sighted way
in which we have often pursued prosperity. Many parts of the world are caught in a vicious
downwards spiral: Poor people are forced to overuse environmental resources to survive fromday to day, and their impoverishment of their environment further impoverishes them,making their survival ever more difficult and uncertain. The prosperity attained in some partsof the world is often precarious, as it has been secured through farming, forestry, andindustrial practices that bring profit and progress only over the short term.
4. Societies have faced such pressures in the past and, as many desolate ruins remind us,
sometimes succumbed to them. But generally these pressures were local. Today the scale ofow interventions in nature is increasing and the physical effects of our decisions spill acrossnational frontiers. The growth in economic interaction between nations amplifies the wider
consequences of national decisions. Economics and ecology bind us in ever-tightening
networks. Today, many regions face risks of irreversible damage to the human environmentthat threaten the basis for human progress.
5. These deepening interconnections are the central justification for the establishment of thisCommission. We travelled the world for nearly three years, listening. At special public hearings
organized by the Commission, we heard from government leaders, scientists, and experts,
from citizens' groups concerned about a wide range of environment and development issues,and from thousands of individuals farmers, shanty-town residents, young people,
industrialists, and indigenous and tribal peoples.

6. We found everywhere deep public concern for the environment, concern that has led notjust to protests but often to changed behaviour. The challenge is to ensure that these newvalues are more adequately reflected in the principles and operations of political and economic
structures.
7. We also found grounds for hope: that people can cooperate to build a future that is more
prosperous, more just, and more secure; that a new era of economic growth can be attained,
one based on policies that sustain and expand the Earth's resource base; and that the progressthat some have known over the last century can be experienced by all in the years ahead. But
for this to happen, we must understand better the symptoms of stress that confront us, wemust identify the causes, and we must design new approaches to managing environmental
resources and to sustaining human development

I. Symptoms and Causes
8. Environmental stress has often been seen as the result of the growing demand on scarce
resources and the pollution generated by the rising living standards of the relatively affluent.
But poverty itself pollutes the environment, creating environmental stress in a different way.
Those who are poor and hungry will often destroy their immediate environment in order tosurvive: They will cut down forests; their livestock will overgraze grasslands; they will overusemarginal land; and in growing numbers they will crowd into congested cities. The cumulative
effect of these changes is so far-reaching as to make poverty itself a major global scourge.
9. On the other hand, where economic growth has led to improvements in living standards, it
has sometimes been achieved in ways that are globally damaging in the longer term. Much of
the improvement in the past has been based on the use of increasing amounts of raw
materials, energy, chemicals, and synthetics and on the creation of pollution that is notadequately accounted for in figuring the costs of production processes. These trends have had
unforeseen effects on the environment. Thus today's environmental challenges arise bothfrom the lack of development and from the unintended consequences of some forms of
economic growth.

1. Poverty
10. There are more hungry people in the world today than ever before in human history, andtheir numbers are growing. In 1980, there were 340 million people in 87 developing countries
not getting enough calories to prevent stunted growth and serious health risks. This total wasvery slightly below the figure for 1970 in terms of share of the world population, but in terms ofsheer numbers, it represented a 14 per cent increase. The World Bank predicts that thesenumbers are likely to go on growing. /1

I think this Commission should give attention on how to look into the question of
more participation for those people who are the object of development. Theirbasic needs include the right to preserve their cultural identity, and their right not tobe alienated from their own society, and their own community. So the point I wantto make is that we cannot discuss environment or development without discussing
political development. And you cannot eradicate poverty, at least not only by
redistributing wealth or income, but there must be more redistribution of power.
Aristides Katoppo

Publisher
WCED Public Hearing
Jakarta, 26 March 1985

11. The number of people living in slums and shanty towns is rising, not falling. A growing
number lack access to clean water and sanitation and hence are prey to the diseases that arise
from this lack. There is some progress, impressive in places. But, on balance, poverty persists
and its victims multiply.
12. The pressure of poverty has to be seen in a broader context. At the international level there
are large differences in per capita income, which ranged in 1984 from $190 in low income
countries (other than China and India) to $11,430 in the industrial market economies. (SeeTable 1-1)

Table 1-1
Population Size and per capita GDP by Groups of Countries
Population

Per capita GDP

Averageannualgrowth rate of
per capita
GDP,
1965-1984(millions)(1984 dollars)(per cent)Countries
Low-income countries

611

190

0.9

1,778

390

3.2

Lower Middle-income Economies

691

740

1.0

Upper Middle-income Economies

497

1,980

3.1

High-Income Oil Exporters

19

11,3503.2

Industrial Market Economies

732

11,4302.4(excluding China, India)
China and India

Source: Based on data in World Bank, World Development Report, 1985. (New York,
Oxford University Press, 1986)
13. Such inequalities represent great differences not merely in the quality of life today, but also
in the capacity of societies to improve their quality of life in the future. Most of the world's
poorest countries depend for increasing export earnings on tropical agricultural products thatare vulnerable to fluctuating or declining terms of trade. Expansion can often only be achievedat the price of ecological stress. Yet diversification in ways that will alleviate both poverty andecological stress is hampered by disadvantageous terms of technology transfer, byprotectionism, and by declining financial flows to those countries that most need international
finance./2
14. Within countries, poverty has been exacerbated by the unequal distribution of land andother assets. The rapid rise in population has compromised the ability to raise living
standards. These factors, combined with growing demands for the commercial use of good
land, often to grow crops for exports, have pushed many subsistence farmers onto poor land
and robbed them of any hope of participating in their nations' economic lives. The same forces
have meant that traditional shifting cultivators, who once cut forests, grew crops, and thengave the forest time to recover, now have neither land enough nor time to let forests
re-establish. So forests are being destroyed, often only to create poor farmland that cannot
support those who till it. Extending cultivation onto steep slopes is increasing soil erosion in
many hilly sections of both developing and developed nations. In any river valleys, areas
chronically liable to floods are now farmed.
15. These pressures are reflected in the rising incidence of disasters. During the 1970s, six
times as many people died from 'natural disasters' each year as in the 1960s, and twice as
many suffered from such disasters. Droughts and floods, disasters among whose causes arewidespread deforestation and overcultivation, increased most in terms of numbers affected.
There were 18.5 million people affected by droughts annually in the 1960s, but 24.4 billion in
the 1970s; 5.2 billion people were victims of floods yearly in the 1960s, compared with 15.4
million in the 1970s./3 The results are not in for the 1980s, but this disaster-prone decade
seems to be carrying forward the trend, with droughts in Africa, India, and Latin America, andfloods throughout Asia, parts of Africa, and the Andean region of Latin America.
16. Such disasters claim most of their victims among the impoverished in poor nations, wheresubsistence farmers must make their land more liable to droughts and floods by clearing
marginal areas, and where the poor make themselves tore vulnerable to all disasters by livingon steep slopes and unprotected shores - the only lands left for their shanties. Lacking foodand foreign exchange reserves their economically vulnerable governments are ill-equipped tocope with such catastrophes.
17. The links between environmental stress and developmental disaster are most evident in
sub-Saharan Africa. Per capita food production, declining since the 1960s, plummeted during
the drought of the 1980s, and at the height of the food emergency some 35 million people were
exposed to risk. Human overuse of land and prolonged drought threaten to turn thegrasslands of Africa's Sahel region into desert./4 No other region more tragically suffers thevicious cycle of poverty leading to environmental degradation, which leads in turn to evengreater poverty.

If people destroy vegetation in order to get land, food, fodder, fuel, or timber, thesoil is no longer protected. Rain creates surface runoff, and the soil erodes. Whenthe soil is gone, no water is retained and the land can no longer produce enoughfood, fodder, fuel, or timber, so people need to turn to new land and start theprocess all over again.
All major disaster problems in the Third World are essentially unsolved
development problems. Disaster prevention is thus primarily an aspect ofdevelopment, and this must be a development that takes place within thesustainable limits.

Odd Grann
Secretary General, Norwegian Red Cross
WCED Public Hearing
Oslo, 24-25 June 1985

2. Growth
18. In some parts of the world, particularly since the mid-1950s, growth and development havevastly improved living standards and the quality of life. Many of the products and technologies
that have gone into this improvement are raw material- and energy-intensive and entail asubstantial amount of pollution. The consequent impact on the environment is greater thanever before in human history.
19. Over the past century, the use of fossil fuels has grown nearly thirtyfold, and industrial
production has increased move than fiftyfold. The bulk of this increase, about three-quarters
in the case of fossil fuels and a little over four-fifths in the case of industrial production, hastaken place since 1950. The annual increase in industrial production today is perhaps as large
as the total production in Europe around the end of the 1930s./5 Into every year we now
squeeze the decades of industrial growth and environmental disruption that formed the basisof the pre-war European economy.
20. Environmental stresses also arise from more traditional forms of production. More landhas been cleared for settled cultivation in the past 100 years than in all the previous centuriesof human existence. Interventions in the water cycles have increased greatly. Massive dams,
most of them built after 1960, impound a large proportion of the river flow. In Europe andAsia, water use has reached 10 per cent of the annual run off, a figure that is expected to rise to
20-25 per cent by the end of the century./6
21. The impact of growth and rising income levels can be seen in the distribution of worldconsumption of a variety of resource intensive produce. The more affluent industrializedcountries use most of the world's metals and fossil fuels. Even in the case of food products a
sharp difference exists, particularly in the products that are more resource-intensive. (SeeTable 1-2.)

Table 1-2
Distribution of World Consumption, Averages for 1980-83
Developed Countries

Developing Countries(26% of population)(74% of population)

Units of Per
Share in
CapitaWorld
Consumption Consumption
Commodity

per cent

Share in
World
Consumption
per capita per centper capita

Food
Calories

kcal/day

34

3,395

66

2,389

Proteingms/day

38

99

62

Fat

gms/day

53

127

47

40

Paper

kg/year

85

123

15

8

Steel

kg/year

79

459

21

41

Other Metals

kg/year

86

26

14

2

Commercial
Energy

/year

80

20

0.5

Source: WCED estimates based on country-level data from FAO, UN Statistical Office,
UNCTAD and American Metals Association
22. In recent years, industrial countries have been able to achieve economic growth using lessenergy and raw materials per unit of output. This, along with the efforts to reduce theemission of pollutants, will help to contain the pressure on the biosphere. But with theincrease in population and the rise in incomes, per capita consumption of energy andmaterials will go up in the developing countries, as it has to if essential needs are to be met.
Greater attention to resource efficiency can moderate the increase, but, on balance,
environmental problems linked to resource use will intensify in global terms.

3. Survival
23. The scale and complexity of our requirements for natural resources have increased greatly
with the rising levels of population and production. Nature is bountiful, but it is also fragile
and finely balanced. There are thresholds that cannot be crossed without endangering thebasic integrity of the system. Today we are close to many of these thresholds; we must be evermindful of the risk of endangering the survival of life on Earth. Moreover, the speed withwhich changes in resource use are taking place gives little time in which to anticipate andprevent unexpected effects.
24. The 'greenhouse effect', one such threat to life support systems, springs directly fromincreased resource use. The burning of fossil fuels and the cutting and burning of forests
release carbon dioxide (CO2). The accumulation in the atmosphere of CO2 and certain othergases traps solar radiation near the Earth's surface, causing global warming. This could cause
sea level rises over the next 45 years large enough to inundate many low lying coastal cities
and river deltas. It could also drastically upset national and international agricultural
production and trade systems./7

The remarkable achievements of the celebrated Industrial Revolution are now
beginning seriously to be questioned principally because the environment was notconsidered at the time. It was felt that the sky was so vast and clear nothing could
ever change its colour, our rivers so big and their water so plentiful that no amountof human activity could ever change their quality, and there were trees and naturalforests so plentiful that we will never finish them. After all, they grow again.
Today we should know better. The alarming rate at which the Earth's surface isbeing denuded of its natural vegetative cover seems to indicate that the world maysoon become devoid of trees through clearing for human developments.
Hon. Victoria Chitepo
Minister of Natural Resources and Tourism, Government of Zimbabwe
WCED Opening Ceremony
Harare, 18 Sept 1986

25. Another threat arises from the depletion of the atmospheric ozone layer by gases released
during the production of foam and the use of refrigerants and aerosols. A substantial loss ofsuch ozone could have catastrophic effects on human and livestock health and on some life
forms at the base of the marine food chain. The 1986 discovery of a hole in the ozone layer
above the Antarctic suggests the possibility of a more rapid depletion than previously
suspected./8
26. A variety of air pollutants are killing trees and lakes and damaging buildings and cultural
treasures, close to and sometimes thousands of miles from points of emission. The
acidification of the environment threatens large areas of Europe and North America. Central
Europe is currently receiving more than one gramme of sulphur on every square metre ofground each year./9 The loss of forests could bring in its wake disastrous erosion, siltation,
floods, and local climatic change. Air pollution damage is also becoming evident in some newly
industrialized countries.
27. In many cases the practices used at present to dispose of toxic wastes, such as those fromthe chemical industries, involve unacceptable risks. Radioactive wastes from the nuclear
industry remain hazardous for centuries. Many who bear these risks do not benefit in any way
from the activities that produce the wastes.
28. Desertification - the process whereby productive arid and semi-arid land is rendered
economically unproductive - and large-scale deforestation are other examples of major threats
to the integrity of regional ecosystems. Desertification involves complex interactions between
humans, land, and climate. The pressures of subsistence food production, commercial crops,
and meat production in arid and semi-arid areas all contribute to this process.
29. Each year another 6 million hectares are degraded to desert-like conditions./10 Over three
decades, this would amount to an area roughly as large as Saudi Arabia. More than 11 million
hectares of tropical forests are destroyed per year and this, over 30 years, would amount to anarea about the size of India./11 Apart from the direct and often dramatic impacts within theimmediate area, nearby regions are affected by the spreading of sands or by changes in water
regimes and increased risks of soil erosion and siltation.
30. The loss of forests and other wild lands extinguishes species of plants and animals anddrastically reduces the genetic diversity of the world's ecosystems. This process robs present

and future generations of genetic material with which to improve crop varieties, to make themless vulnerable to weather stress, pest attacks, and disease. The loss of species and subspecies,
many as yet unstudied by science, deprives us of important potential sources of medicines andindustrial chemicals. It removes forever creatures of beauty and parts of our cultural heritage;
it diminishes the biosphere.
31. Many of the risks stemming from our productive activity and the technologies we use
cross-national boundaries; many are global. Though the activities that give rise to these
dangers tend to be concentrated in a few countries, the risks are shared by all, rich and poor,
those who benefit from them and those who do not. Most who share in the risks have little
influence on the decision processes that regulate these activities.
32. Little time is available for corrective action. In some cases we may already be close totransgressing critical thresholds. While scientists continue to research and debate causes andeffects, in many cases we already know enough to warrant action. This is true locally andregionally in the cases of such threats as desertification, deforestation, toxic wastes, andacidification; it is true globally for such threats as climate change, ozone depletion, and species
loss. The risks increase faster than do our abilities to manage them.
33. Perhaps the greatest threat to the Earth's environment, to sustainable human progress,
and indeed to survival is the possibility of nuclear war, increased daily by the continuing arms
race and its spread to outer space. The search for a more viable future can only be meaningful
in the context of a more vigorous effort to renounce and eliminate the development of meansof annihilation.

4. The Economic Crisis
34. The environmental difficulties that confront us are not new, but only recently have webegun to understand their complexity. Previously our main concerns centred on the effects ofdevelopment on the environment. Today, we need to be equally concerned about the ways inwhich environmental degradation can dampen or reverse economic development. In one area
after another, environmental degradation is eroding the potential for development. This basic
connection was brought into sharp focus by the environment and development crises of the
1980s.
35. The slowdown in the momentum of economic expansion and the stagnation in world tradein the 1980s challenged all nations' abilities to react and adjust. Developing countries that relyon the export of primary products have been hit particularly hard by falling commodity prices.
Between 1980 and 1984, developing countries lost about $55 billion in export earnings becauseof the fall in commodity prices, a blow felt most keenly in Latin America and Africa./12
36. As a consequence of this period of slow growth in the world economy - together with risingdebt service obligations and a decline in the inflow of finance - many developing countries havefacet) severe economic crises. Over half of all developing countries actually experienced
declining per capita GDP in the years 1982-85 and per capita GDP has fallen, for developing
countries as a whole, by around 10 per cent in the 1980s. (See Table 1-3.)

Table 1-3
37. The heaviest burden in international economic
adjustment has been carried by the world's
poorest people. The consequence has been a considerable increase in human distress and theAnnual Rateof andIncrease
GrosstoDomestic
Product
in Developing
overexploitationof landnatural ofresources
ensure survivalin the shortterm.
Countries, 1976-85

38. Many international economic problems remain unresolved: Developing country
indebtedness remains serious; commodity and energy markets are highly unstable; financial
flows to developing countries are seriously deficient; protectionism and trade wars are aserious threat. Yet at a time when multilateral institutions, and rules, are more than evernecessary, they have been devalued. And the notion of an international responsibility fordevelopment has virtually disappeared. The trend is towards a decline in multilateralism andan assertion of national dominance.

II. New Approaches to Environment and Development
39. Human progress has always depended on our technical ingenuity and a capacity forcooperative action. These qualities have often been used constructively to achieve
development and environmental progress: in air and water pollution control, for example, andin increasing the efficiency of material and energy use. Many countries have increased foodproduction and reduced population growth rates. Some technological advances, particularly in
medicine, have been widely shared.
40. But this is not enough. Failures to manage the environment and to sustain development
threaten to overwhelm all countries. Environment and development are not separate
challenges; they are inexorably linked. Development cannot subsist upon a deteriorating
environmental resource base; the environment cannot be protected when growth leaves out ofaccount the costs of environmental destruction. These problems cannot be treated separately
by fragmented institutions and policies. They are linked in a complex system of cause andeffect.
41. First, environmental stresses are linked one to another. For example, deforestation, byincreasing run off, accelerates soil erosion and siltation of rivers and lakes. Air pollution andacidification play their part in killing forests and lakes. Such links mean that several different
problems must be tackled simultaneously. And success in one area, such as forest protection,
can improve chances of success in another area, such as soil conservation.
42. Second, environmental stresses and patterns of economic development are linked one toanother. Thus agricultural policies may lie at the root of land, water, and forest degradation.
Energy policies are associated with the global greenhouse effect, with acidification, and with
deforestation for fuelwood in many developing nations. These stresses all threaten economic
development. Thus economics and ecology must be completely integrated in decision making
and lawmaking processes not just to protect the environment, but also to protect and promote
development. Economy is not just about the production of wealth, and ecology is not justabout the protection of nature; they are both equally relevant for improving the lot of
humankind.

How long can we go on and safely pretend that the environment is not theeconomy, is not health, is not the prerequisite to development, is not recreation?
Is it realistic to see ourselves as managers of an entity out there called theenvironment, extraneous to us, an alternative to the economy, too expensive avalue to protect in difficult economic times? When we organize ourselves startingfrom this premise, we do so with dangerous consequences to our economy,
health, and industrial growth.
We are now just beginning to realize that we must find an alternative to ouringrained behaviour of burdening future generations resulting from our misplacedbelief that there is a choice between economy and the environment. That choice,in the long term, turns out to be an illusion with awesome consequences forhumanity.
Charles Caccia
Member of Parliament, House of Commons
WCED Public Hearing
Ottawa, 26-27 May 1986

43. Third, environmental and economic problems are linked to many social and politicalfactors. For example, the rapid population growth that has so profound an impact on theenvironment and on development in many regions is driven partly by such factors as thestatus of women in society and other cultural values. Also, environmental stress and unevendevelopment can increase social tensions. It could be argued that the distribution of power
and influence within society lies at the heart of most environment and development
challenges. Hence new approaches must involve programmes of social development,
particularly to improve the position of women in society, to protect vulnerable groups, and topromote local participation in decision making.
44. Finally, the systemic features operate not merely within but also between nations. Nationalboundaries have become so porous that traditional distinctions between matters of local,
national, and international significance have become blurred. Ecosystems do not respectnational boundaries. Water pollution moves through shared rivers, lakes, and seas. The
atmosphere carries air pollution over vast distances. Major accidents - particularly those at
nuclear reactors or at plants or warehouses containing toxic materials - can have widespreadregional effects.
45. Many environment economy links also operate globally. For instance, the highly
subsidized, incentive-driven agriculture of industrialized market economies generates
surpluses that depress prices and erode the viability of the often neglected agriculture ofdeveloping countries. Soils and other environmental resources suffer in both systems. Eachcountry may devise national agricultural policies to secure short-tern economic and political
gains, but no nation alone can devise policies to deal effectively with the financial, economic,
and ecological costs of the agricultural and trade policies of other nations.

To successfully advance in solving global problems, we need to develop new
methods of thinking, to elaborate new moral and value criteria, and, no doubt, newpatterns of behaviour.
Mankind is on the threshold of a new stage in its development. We should not only
promote the expansion of its material, scientific, and technical basis, but, what ismost important, the formation of new value and humanistic aspirations in human
psychology, since wisdom and humaneness are the 'eternal truths' that make thebasis of humanity. We need new social, moral, scientific, and ecological concepts,
which should be determined by new conditions for the life of mankind today and in
the future.
I.T. Frolov
Editor-in-Chief, Communist Magazine
WCED Public Hearing
Moscow, 6 Dec 1986

46. In the past, responsibility for environmental matters has been placed in environmental
ministries and institutions that often have had little or no control over destruction caused byagricultural, industrial, urban development, forestry, and transportation policies andpractices. Society has failed to give the responsibility for preventing environmental damage tothe 'sectoral' ministries and agencies whose policies cause it. Thus our environmental
management practices have focused largely upon after-the-fact repair of damage:reforestation, reclaiming desert lands, rebuilding urban environments, restoring natural
habitats, and rehabilitating wild lands. The ability to anticipate and prevent environmental
damage will require that the ecological dimensions of policy be considered at the same time as
the economic, trade, energy, agricultural, and other dimensions.
47. In most countries, environmental policies are directed at the symptoms of harmful growth;these policies have brought progress and rewards and must be continued and strengthened.
But that will not be enough. What is required is a new approach in which all nations aim at a
type of development that integrates production with resource conservation and enhancement,
and that links both to the provision for all of an adequate livelihood base and equitable accessto resources.
48. The concept of sustainable development provides a framework for the integration ofenvironment policies and development strategies - the term 'development' being used here inits broadest sense. The word is often taken to refer to the processes of economic and socialchange in the Third World. But the integration of environment and development is required in
all countries, rich and poor. The pursuit of sustainable development requires changes in thedomestic and international policies of every nation.

You talk very little about life, you talk too much about survival. It is very importantto remember that when the possibilities for life are over, the possibilities forsurvival start. And there are peoples here in Brazil, especially in the Amazon
region, who still live, and these peoples that still live don't want to reach down to
the level of survival.
Speaker from the floor
WCED Public Hearing

Sao Paulo, 26-29 Oct 1985

49. Sustainable development seeks to meet the needs and aspirations of the present withoutcompromising the ability to meet those of the future. Far from requiring the cessation of
economic growth, it recognizes that the problems of poverty and underdevelopment cannot be
solved unless we have a new era of growth in which developing countries play a large role andreap large benefits.
50. Economic growth always brings risk of environmental damage, as it puts increased
pressure on environmental resources. But policy makers guided by the concept of sustainable
development will necessarily work to assure that growing economies remain firmly attached totheir ecological roots and that these roots are protected and nurtured so that they may
support growth over the long term. Environmental protection is thus inherent in the conceptof sustainable development, as is a focus on the sources of environmental problems rather
than the symptoms.
51. No single blueprint of sustainability will be found, as economic and social systems andecological conditions differ widely among countries. Each nation will have to work out its own
concrete policy implications. Yet irrespective of these differences, sustainable development
should be seen as a global objective.
52. No country can develop in isolation from others. Hence the pursuit of sustainable
development requires a new orientation in international relations. Long term sustainablegrowth will requite far-reaching changes to produce trade, capital, and technology flows thatare more equitable and better synchronized to environmental imperatives.
53. The mechanics of increased international cooperation required to assure sustainable
development will vary from sector to sector and in relation to particular institutions. But it isfundamental that the transition to sustainable development be managed jointly by all nations.
The unity of human needs requires a functioning multilateral system that respects thedemocratic principle of consent and accepts that not only the Earth but also the world is one.
54. In the chapters that follow we examine these issues in greater detail and make a number of
specific proposals for responding to the crises of a threatened future. Overall, our reportcarries a message of hope. But it is hope conditioned upon the establishment of a new era ofinternational cooperation based on the premise that every human being - those here and those
who are to come - has the right to life, and to a decent life. We confidently believe that theinternational community can rise, as it must, to the challenge of securing sustainable humanprogress.

Footnotes
1/ World Bank, Poverty and Hunger: Issues and Options for Food Security indeveloping Countries (Washington, DC: 1986).
2/ Department of International Economic and Social Affairs, Doubling Development
Finance: Meeting a Global Challenge, Views and Recommendations of theCommittee on Development Planning (New York: UN, 1986)
3/ G. Hagman et al., Prevention Better Than Cure, Report on Human andEnvironmental Disasters in the Third World (Stockholm: Swedish Red Cross, 1984).

4/ UN, General Assembly, 'The Critical Economic Situation in Africa: Report of the Secretary
General', A/S-13/2, New York, 20 May 1986.
5/ Based on data from W.W. Rostow, The World Economy: History and Prospect(Austin: University of Texas Press, 1976); UN, World Energy Supplies in Selected Years
1929-1950 (New York: 1952); UN, Statistical Yearbook 1982 (New York: 1985); UNCTAD,
Handbook of International Trade and Development Statistics 1985 Supplement(New York: 1985); W.S. and E.S. Woytinsky, World Population and Production: Trends
and Outlook (New York: Twentieth Century Fund, 1953).
6/ USSR Committee for the International Hydrological Decade, World Water Balance andWater Resources of the Earth (Paris: UNESCO, 1978).
7/ WMO, A Report of the International Conference on the Assessment of Carbon
Dioxide and other Greenhouse Gases in Climate Variations and AssociatedImpacts, Villach, Austria, 9-15 October 1985, WMO No. 661 (Geneva: WMO/ICSU/UNEP,
1986).
8/ National Science Foundation, 'Scientists Closer to Identifying Cause of Antarctic Ozone
Layer Depletion news release. Washington, DC, 20 October 1986.
9/ J. Lehmhaus et al., Calculated and Observed Data for 1900 Compared at EMEP
Measurement Stations', Norwegian Meteorological Institute, EMEP/MSC-W Report 1-86,
1986.
10/ UNEP, 'General Assessment of Progress in the Implementation of the Plan of Action to
Combat Desertification 1978-1984', Nairobi, 1984; WCED Advisory Panel on Food Security,
Agriculture, Forestry and Environment', Food Security (London: Zed Books, 1987).
11/ World Resources Institute/International Institute for Environment and Development,
World Resources 1986 (New York: Basic Books, 1986).
12/ UNCTAD, Trade and Development Report 1986 (New York: 1986).

Our Common Future, Chapter 2: Towards Sustainable Development

I. The Concept of Sustainable Development
II. Equity and the Common Interest
III. Strategic Imperatives
1. Reviving Growth
2. Changing the quality of Growth
3. Meeting Essential Human Needs
4. Ensuring a Sustainable Level of Population
5. Conserving and Enhancing the Resource Base
6. Reorienting Technology and Managing Risk
7. Merging Environment and Economics in Decision Making

IV. Conclusion
1. Sustainable development is development that meets the needs of the present withoutcompromising the ability of future generations to meet their own needs. It contains within it
two key concepts:
the concept of 'needs', in particular the essential needs of the world's poor, to which
overriding priority should be given; andthe idea of limitations imposed by the state of technology and social organization on theenvironment's ability to meet present and future needs.
2. Thus the goals of economic and social development must be defined in terms ofsustainability in all countries - developed or developing, market-oriented or centrally planned.
Interpretations will vary, but must share certain general features and must flow from a
consensus on the basic concept of sustainable development and on a broad strategic
framework for achieving it.
3. Development involves a progressive transformation of economy and society. A development
path that is sustainable in a physical sense could theoretically be pursued even in a rigid socialand political setting. But physical sustainability cannot be secured unless development policies
pay attention to such considerations as changes in access to resources and in the distributionof costs and benefits. Even the narrow notion of physical sustainability implies a concern forsocial equity between generations, a concern that must logically be extended to equity withineach generation.

I. The Concept of Sustainable Development
4 The satisfaction of human needs and aspirations in the major objective of development. The
essential needs of vast numbers of people in developing countries for food, clothing, shelter,jobs - are not being met, and beyond their basic needs these people have legitimate aspirations
for an improved quality of life. A world in which poverty and inequity are endemic will always

be prone to ecological and other crises. Sustainable development requires meeting the basic
needs of all and extending to all the opportunity to satisfy their aspirations for a better life.
5. Living standards that go beyond the basic minimum are sustainable only if consumption
standards everywhere have regard for long-term sustainability. Yet many of us live beyond theworld's ecological means, for instance in our patterns of energy use. Perceived needs aresocially and culturally determined, and sustainable development requires the promotion ofvalues that encourage consumption standards that are within the bounds of the ecologicalpossible and to which all can reasonably aspire.
6. Meeting essential needs depends in part on achieving full growth potential, and sustainable
development clearly requires economic growth in places where such needs are not being met.
Elsewhere, it can be consistent with economic growth, provided the content of growth reflects
the broad principles of sustainability and non-exploitation of others. But growth by itself is notenough. High levels of productive activity and widespread poverty can coexist, and can
endanger the environment. Hence sustainable development requires that societies meethuman needs both by increasing productive potential and by ensuring equitable opportunities
for all.
7. An expansion in numbers can increase the pressure on resources and slow the rise in living
standards in areas where deprivation is widespread. Though the issue is not merely one of
population size but of the distribution of resources, sustainable development can only be
pursued if demographic developments are in harmony with the changing productive potentialof the ecosystem.
8. A society may in many ways compromise its ability to meet the essential needs of its people
in the future - by overexploiting resources, for example. The direction of technologicaldevelopments may solve some immediate problems but lead to even greater ones. Large
sections of the population may be marginalized by ill-considered development.
9. Settled agriculture, the diversion of watercourses, the extraction of minerals, the emission ofheat and noxious gases into the atmosphere, commercial forests, and genetic manipulation are
all examples or human intervention in natural systems during the course of development. Until
recently, such interventions were small in scale and their impact limited. Today's interventions
are more drastic in scale and impact, and more threatening to life-support systems both locallyand globally. This need not happen. At a minimum, sustainable development must notendanger the natural systems that support life on Earth: the atmosphere, the waters, the soils,
and the living beings.
10. Growth has no set limits in terms of population or resource use beyond which lies ecologicaldisaster. Different limits hold for the use of energy, materials, water, and land. Many of thesewill manifest themselves in the form of rising costs and diminishing returns, rather than in theform of any sudden loss of a resource base. The accumulation of knowledge and thedevelopment of technology can enhance the carrying capacity of the resource base. But
ultimate limits there are, and sustainability requires that long before these are reached, theworld must ensure equitable access to the constrained resource and reorient technologicalefforts to relieve the presume.

A communications gap has kept environmental, population, and development
assistance groups apart for too long, preventing us from being aware of ourcommon interest and realizing our combined power. Fortunately, the gap isclosing. We now know that what unites us is vastly more important than what

divides us.
We recognize that poverty, environmental degradation, and population growth are
inextricably related and that none of these fundamental problems can be
successfully addressed in isolation. We will succeed or fail together.
Arriving at a commonly accepted definition of 'sustainable development' remains achallenge for all the actors in the development process.
'Making Common Cause'
U.S. Based Development, Environment, Population NGOs
WCED Public Hearing
Ottawa, 26-27 May 1986

11. Economic growth and development obviously involve changes in the physical ecosystem.
Every ecosystem everywhere cannot be preserved intact. A forest may be depleted in one partof a watershed and extended elsewhere, which is not a bad thing if the exploitation has beenplanned and the effects on soil erosion rates, water regimes, and genetic losses have beentaken into account. In general, renewable resources like forests and fish stocks need not be
depleted provided the rate of use is within the limits of regeneration and natural growth. But
most renewable resources are part of a complex and interlinked ecosystem, and maximum
sustainable yield must be defined after taking into account system-wide effects of exploitation.
12. As for non-renewable resources, like fossil fuels and minerals, their use reduces the stock
available for future generations. But this does not mean that such resources should not be
used. In general the rate of depletion should take into account the criticality of that resource,
the availability of technologies tor minimizing depletion, and the likelihood of substitutes being
available. Thus land should not be degraded beyond reasonable recovery. With minerals andfossil fuels, the rate of depletion and the emphasis on recycling and economy of use should becalibrated to ensure that the resource does not run out before acceptable substitutes areavailable. Sustainable development requires that the rate of depletion of non renewable
resources should foreclose as few future options as possible.
13. Development tends to simplify ecosystems and to reduce their diversity of species. And
species, once extinct, are not renewable. The loss of plant and animal species can greatly limit
the options of future generations; so sustainable development requires the conservation ofplant and animal species.
14. So-called free goods like air and water are also resources. The raw materials and energy of
production processes are only partly converted to useful products. The rest comes out as
wastes. Sustainable development requires that the adverse impacts on the quality of air, water,and other natural elements are minimized so as to sustain the ecosystem's overall integrity.
15. In essence, sustainable development is a process of change in which the exploitation of
resources, the direction of investments, the orientation of technological development; andinstitutional change are all in harmony and enhance both current and future potential to meethuman needs and aspirations.

II. Equity and the Common Interest
16. Sustainable development has been described here in general terms. How are individuals in
the real world to be persuaded or made to act in the common interest? The answer lies partly

in education, institutional development, and law enforcement. But many problems of resource
depletion and environmental stress arise from disparities in economic and political power. An
industry may get away with unacceptable levels or air and water pollution because the people
who bear the brunt of it are poor and unable to complain effectively. A forest may be destroyed
by excessive felling because the people living there have no alternatives or because timber
contractors generally have more influence then forest dwellers.
17. Ecological interactions do not respect the boundaries of individual ownership and politicaljurisdiction. Thus:
In a watershed, the ways in which a farmer up the slope uses land directly affect run-off
on farms downstream.
the irrigation practices, pesticides, and fertilizers used on one farm affect the
productivity of neighbouring ones, especially among small farms.
The efficiency of a factory boiler determines its rate of emission of soot and noxious
chemicals and affects all who live and work around it.
The hot water discharged by a thermal power plant into a river or a local sea affects thecatch of all who fish locally.
18. Traditional social systems recognized some aspects of this interdependence and enforced
community control over agricultural practices and traditional rights relating to water, forests,
and land. This enforcement of the 'common interest' did not necessarily impede growth andexpansion though it may have limited the acceptance and diffusion of technical innovations.
19. Local interdependence has, if anything, increased because of the technology used inmodern agriculture and manufacturing. Yet with this surge of technical progress, the growing'enclosure' of common lands, the erosion of common rights in forests and other resources, andthe spread of commerce and production for the market, the responsibilities for decision
making are being taken away from both groups and individuals. This shift is still under way inmany developing countries.

If the desert is growing, forest disappearing, malnutrition increasing, and people inurban areas living in very bad conditions, it is not because we are lacking
resources but the kind of policy implemented by our rulers, by the elite group.
Denying people rights and peoples' interests is pushing us to a situation where it is
only the poverty that has a very prosperous future in Africa. And it is our hope thatyour Commission, the World Commission, will not overlook these problems ofhuman rights in Africa and will put emphasis on it. Because it is only free people,
people who have rights, who are mature and responsible citizens, who thenparticipate in the development and in the protection of the environment.
Speaker from the floor
WCED Public Hearing
Nairobi, 23 Sept 1986

20. It is not that there is one set of villains and another of victims. All would be better off if each
person took into account the effect oœ" his or her acts upon others. But each is unwilling toassume that others will behave in this socially desirable fashion, and hence all continue topursue narrow self-interest. Communities or governments can compensate for this isolation

through laws, education, taxes, subsidies, and other methods. Well-enforced laws and strict
liability legislation can control harmful side effects. Most important, effective participation indecision-making processes by local communities can help them articulate and effectively
enforce their common interest.
21. Interdependence is not simply a local phenomenon. Rapid growth in production has
extended it to the international plane, with both physical and economic manifestations. There
are growing global and regional pollution effects, such as in the more than 200 internationalriver basins and the large number of shared seas.
22. The enforcement of common interest often suffers because areas of political jurisdiction
and areas of impact do not coincide. Energy policies in one jurisdiction cause acid precipitationin another. The fishing policies of one state affect the fish catch of another. No supranational
authority exists to resolve such issues, and the common interest can only be articulated
through international cooperation.
23. In the same way, the ability of a government to control its national economy is reduced by
growing international economic interactions. For example, foreign trade in commodities makes
issues of carrying capacities and resource scarcities an international concern. (See Chapter 3.)
If economic power and the benefits of trade were more equally distributed, common interests
would be generally recognized. But the gains from trade are unequally distributed, andpatterns of trade in, say, sugar affect not merely a local sugar-producing sector, but theeconomies and ecologies of the many developing countries that depend heavily on thisproduct.
24. The search for common interest would be less difficult if all development and environment
problems had solutions that would leave everyone better off. This is seldom the case, and there
are usually winners and losers. Many problems arise from inequalities in access to resources.
An inequitable landowner ship structure can lead to overexploitation of resources in thesmallest holdings, with harmful effects on both environment and development. Internationally,monopolistic control over resources can drive those who do not share in them to excessive
exploitation of marginal resources. The differing capacities of exploiters to commandeer 'free'
goods - locally, nationally, and internationally - is another manifestation of unequal access toresources. 'Losers' in environment/development conflicts include those who suffer more thantheir fair share of the health, property, and ecosystem damage costs of pollution.
25. As a system approaches ecological limits, inequalities sharpen. Thus when a watersheddeteriorates, poor farmers suffer more because they cannot afford the same anti-erosion
measures as richer farmers. When urban air quality deteriorates, the poor, in their more
vulnerable areas, suffer more health damage than the rich, who usually live in more pristineneighbourhoods. When mineral resources become depleted, late-comers to theindustrialization process lose the benefits of low-cost supplies. Globally, wealthier nations are
better placed financially and technologically to cope with the effects of possible climatic change.
26. Hence, our inability to promote the common interest in sustainable development is often aproduct of the relative neglect of economic and social justice within and amongst nations.

III. Strategic Imperatives
27. The world must quickly design strategies that will allow nations to move from their present,
often destructive, processes of growth and development onto sustainable development paths.
This will require policy changes in all countries, with respect both to their own development
and to their impacts on other nations' development possibilities. (This chapter concerns itself
with national strategies. The required reorientation in international economic relations is dealt

with in Chapter 3.)
28. Critical objectives for environment and development policies that follow from the conceptof sustainable development include:
reviving growth;changing the quality of growth;
meeting essential needs for jobs, food, energy, water, and sanitation;
ensuring a sustainable level of population;conserving and enhancing the resource base:reorienting technology and managing risk; andmerging environment and economics in decision making.

1. Reviving Growth
29. As indicated earlier, development that is sustainable has to address the problem of thelarge number of people who live in absolute poverty - that is, who are unable to satisfy even themost basic of their needs. Poverty reduces people's capacity to use resources in a sustainable
manner; it intensifies pressure on the environment. Most such absolute poverty is indeveloping countries; in many, it has been aggravated by the economic stagnation of the 1980s.
A necessary but not a sufficient condition for the elimination of absolute poverty is a relatively
rapid rise in per capita incomes in the Third World. It is therefore essential that the stagnant or
declining growth trends of this decade be reversed.
30. While attainable growth rates will vary, a certain minimum is needed to have any impact on
absolute poverty. It seems unlikely that, taking developing countries as a whole, theseobjectives can be accomplished with per capita income growth of under 3 per cent. (See Box2-1.) Given current population growth rates, this would require overall national income growthof around 5 per cent a year in the developing economies of Asia, 5.5 per cent in Latin America,and 6 per cent in Africa and West Asia.
31. Are these orders of magnitude attainable? The record in South and East Asia over the pastquarter-century and especially over the last five years suggests that 5 per cent annual growth
can be attained in most countries, including the two largest, India and China. In Latin America,
average growth rates on the order of 5 per cent were achieved during the 1960s and 1970s, but
fell well below that in the first half of this decade, mainly because of the debt crisis./1 A revivalof Latin American growth depends on the resolution of this crisis. In Africa, growth rates
during the 1960s and 1970s were around 4-4.5 per cent, which at current rates of population
growth would mean per capita income growth of only a little over 1 per cent./2 Moreover,during the 1980s, growth nearly halted and in two-thirds of the countries per capita income
declined./3 Attaining a minimum level of growth in Africa requires the correction of short-term
imbalances, and also the removal of deep-rooted constraints on the growth process.
32. Growth must be revived in developing countries because that is where the links between
economic growth, the alleviation of poverty, and environmental conditions operate mostdirectly. Yet developing countries are part of an interdependent world economy; theirprospects also depend on the levels and patterns of growth in industrialized nations. The

medium-term prospects for industrial countries are for growth of 3-4 per cent, the minimumthat international financial institutions consider necessary if these countries are going to play apart in expanding the world economy. Such growth rates could be environmentally sustainable
if industrialized nations can continue the recent shifts in the content of their growth towards
less material- and energy-intensive activities and the improvement of their efficiency in usingmaterials and energy.

Box 2-1 Growth, Redistribution, and Poverty
1. The poverty line is that level of income below which an individual or household
cannot afford on a regular basis the necessities of life. The percentage of the
population below that line will depend on per capita national income and themanner in which it is distributed. How quickly can a developing country expect
to eliminate absolute poverty? The answer will vary from country to country,
but much can be learned from a typical case.
2. Consider a nation in which half the population lives below the poverty line andwhere the distribution of household incomes is as follows: the top one-fifth ofhouseholds have 50 per cent of total income, the next fifth have 20 per cent,the next fifth have 14 per cent, the next fifth have 9 per cent, and the bottom
fifth have just 7 per cent. This is a fair representation of the situation in many
low-income developing countries.
3. In this case, if the income distribution remains unchanged, per capita national
income would have to double before the poverty ratio drops from 50 to 10 per
cent. If income is redistributed in favour of the poor, this reduction can occur
sooner. Consider the case in which 25 per cent of the incremental income of therichest one-fifth of the population is redistributed equally to the others. The
assumptions here about redistribution reflect three judgements. First, in mostsituations redistributive policies can only operate on increases in income.
Second, in low-income developing countries the surplus that can be skimmed
off for redistribution is available only from the wealthier groups. Third,
redistributive policies cannot be so precisely targeted that they deliver benefits
only to those who are below the poverty line, so some of the benefits will accrue
to those who are just a little above it.
4. The number of years required to bring the poverty ratio down from 50 to 10 per
cent ranges from:
18-24 years if per capita income grows at 3 per cent,26-36 years if it grown at 2 per cent, and51-70 years if it grows only at 1 per cent.
In each case, the shorter time is associated with the redistribution of 25 percent of the incremental income of the richest fifth of the population and thelonger period with no redistribution.
5. So with per capita national income growing only at 1 per cent a year, the timerequired to eliminate absolute poverty would stretch well into the next century.
If, however, the aim is to ensure that the world is well on its way towards

sustainable development by the beginning of the next century, it is necessary toaim at a minimum of 3 per cent per capita national income growth and to
pursue vigorous redistributive policies.

33. As industrialized nations use less materials and energy, however, they will provide smallermarkets for commodities and minerals from the developing nations. Yet if developing nations
focus their efforts upon eliminating poverty and satisfying essential human needs, thendomestic demand will increase for both agricultural products and manufactured goods andsome services. Hence the very logic of sustainable development implies an internal stimulus to
Third World growth.
34. Nonetheless, in large numbers of developing countries markets are very small; and for all
developing countries high export growth, especially of non-traditional items, will also benecessary to finance imports, demand for which will be generated by rapid development. Thusa reorientation of international economic relations will be necessary for sustainable
development, as discussed in Chapter 3.

2. Changing the quality of Growth
35. Sustainable development involves more than growth. It requires a change in the content ofgrowth, to make it less Material- and energy-intensive and more equitable in its impact. Thesechanges are required in all countries as part of a package of measures to maintain the stock of
ecological capital, to improve the distribution of income, and to reduce the degree ofvulnerability to economic crises.
36. The process of economic development must be more soundly based upon the realities ofthe stock of capital that sustains it. This is rarely done in either developed or developing
countries. For example, income from forestry operations is conventionally measured in termsof the value of timber and other products extracted, minus the costs of extraction. The costs ofregenerating the forest are not taken into account, unless money is actually spent on suchwork. Thus figuring profits from logging rarely takes full account of the losses in future revenue
incurred through degradation of the forest. Similar incomplete accounting occurs in the
exploitation of other natural resources, especially in the case of resources that are notcapitalized in enterprise or national accounts: air, water, and soil. In all countries, rich or poor,
economic development must take full account in its measurements of growth of the
improvement or deterioration in the stock of natural resources.
37. Income distribution is one aspect of the quality of growth, as described in the preceding
section, and rapid growth combined with deteriorating income distribution may be worse thanslower growth combined with redistribution in favour of the poor. For instance, in many
developing countries the introduction of large-scale commercial agriculture may produce
revenue rapidly, but may also dispossess a large number of small farmers and make income
distribution more inequitable. In the long run, such a path may not be sustainable; it
impoverishes many people and can increase pressures on the natural resource base throughovercommercialized agriculture and through the marginalization of subsistence farmers.
Relying more on smallholder cultivation may be slower at first, but more easily sustained overthe long term.

People have acquired, often for the first time in history, both an idea of theirrelative poverty and a desire to emerge from it and improve the quality of theirlives. As people advance materially, and eat and live better, what, were once
luxuries tend to be regarded as necessities. The net result is that the demand forfood, raw materials, and power increases to an even greater degree than the
population. As demand increases, a greater and greater strain is put on the finite
area of the world's land to produce the products needed.
Dr. I. P. Garbouchev
Bulgarian Academy of Sciences
WCED Public Hearing
Moscow, 11 Dec 1986

38. Economic development is unsustainable if it increases vulnerability to crises. A drought
may force farmers to slaughter animals needed for sustaining production in future years. A
drop in prices may cause farmers or other producers to overexploit natural resources tomaintain incomes. But vulnerability can be reduced by using technologies that lower
production risks, by choosing institutional options that reduce market fluctuations, and bybuilding up reserves, especially of food and foreign exchange. A development path thatcombines growth with reduced vulnerability is more sustainable than one that does not.
39. Yet it is not enough to broaden the range of economic variables taken into account.
Sustainability requires views of human needs and well-being that incorporate such
non-economic variables as education and health enjoyed for their own sake, clean air andwater, and the protection of natural beauty. It must also work to remove disabilities fromdisadvantaged groups, many of whom live in ecologically vulnerable areas, such as many tribalgroups in forests, desert nomads, groups in remote hill areas, and indigenous peoples of theAmericas and Australasia.
40. Changing the quality of growth requires changing our approach to development efforts totake account of all of their effects. For instance, a hydropower project should not be seen
merely as a way of producing more electricity; its effects upon the local environment and thelivelihood of the local community must be included in any balance sheets. Thus theabandonment of a hydro project because it will disturb a rare ecological system could be ameasure of progress, not a setback to development./4 Nevertheless, in some cases,sustainability considerations will involve a rejection of activities that are financially attractive inthe short run.
41. Economic and social development can and should be mutually reinforcing. Money spent on
education and health can raise human productivity. Economic developments can acceleratesocial development by providing opportunities for underprivileged groups or by spreading
education more rapidly.

3. Meeting Essential Human Needs
42. The satisfaction of human needs and aspirations is so obviously an objective of productive
activity that it may appear redundant to assert its central role in the concept of sustainable
development. All too often poverty is such that people cannot satisfy their needs for survival
and well-being even if goods and services are available. At the same time, the demands of those
not in poverty may have major environmental consequences.
43. The principal development challenge is to meet the needs and aspirations of an expanding
developing world population. The most basic of all needs is for a livelihood: that is,employment. Between 1985 and 2000 the labour force in developing countries will increase bynearly 800 million, and new livelihood opportunities will have to be generated for 60 million
persons every year./5 The pace and pattern of economic development have to generate
sustainable work opportunities on this scale and at a level of productivity that would enable
poor households to meet minimum consumption standards.
44. More food is required not merely to feed more people but to attack undernourishment. For
the developing world to eat, person for person, as well as the industrial world by the year
2000, annual increases of 5.0 per cent in calories and 5.8 per cent in proteins are needed in
Africa; of 3.4 and 4.0 per cent, respectively, in Latin America; and of 3.5 and 4.5 per cent in
Asia./6 Foodgrains and starchy roots are the primary sources of calories, while proteins are
obtained primarily from products like milk, meat, fish, pulses, and oil-seeds.
45. Though the focus at present is necessarily on staple foods, the projections given above also
highlight the need for a high rate of growth of protein availability. In Africa, the task isparticularly challenging given the recent declining per capita food production and the current
constraints on growth. In Asia and Latin America, the required growth rates in calorie andprotein consumption seem to be more readily attainable. But increased food production should
not be based on ecologically unsound production policies and compromise long-term prospects
for food security.
46. Energy is another essential human need, one that cannot be universally met unless energy
consumption patterns change. The most urgent problem is the requirements of poor Third
World households, which depend mainly on fuelwood. By the turn of the century, 3 billion
people may live in areas where wood is cut faster than it grows or where fuelwood is extremely
scarce./7 Corrective action would both reduce the drudgery of collecting wood over long
distances and preserve the ecological base. The minimum requirements for cooking fuel inmost developing countries appear to be on the order of 250 kilogrammes of coal equivalent percapita per year. This is a fraction of the household energy consumption in industrial countries.

In the developing world, mostly in the Third World, we realize that the main problem
we have is that we do not have employment opportunities, and most of thesepeople who are unemployed move from rural areas and they migrate into the cities
and those who remain behind always indulge in processes - for example charcoal
burning - and all this leads to deforestation. So maybe the environmentalorganizations should step in and look for ways to prevent this kind of destruction.
Kennedy Njiro
Student, Kenya Polytechnic
WCED Public Hearing
Nairobi, 23 Sept 1986

47. The linked basic needs of housing, water supply, sanitation, and health care are also
environmentally important. Deficiencies in these areas are often visible manifestations ofenvironmental stress. In the Third World, the failure to meet these key needs is one of the
major causes of many communicable diseases such as malaria, gastro-intestinal infestations,cholera, and typhoid. Population growth and the drift into cities threaten to make these
problems worse. Planners must find ways of relying more on supporting community initiatives
and self-help efforts and on effectively using low-cost technologies. See Chapter 9.

4. Ensuring a Sustainable Level of Population

48. The sustainability of development is intimately linked to the dynamics of population
growth. The issue, however, is not simply one of global population size. A child born in acountry where levels of material and energy use are high places a greater burden on the Earth's
resources than a child born in a poorer country. A similar argument applies within countries.
Nonetheless, sustainable development can be pursued more easily when population size isstabilized at a level consistent with the productive capacity of the ecosystem.
49. In industrial countries, the overall rate of population growth is under 1 per cent, andseveral countries have reached or are approaching zero population growth. The total
population of the industrialized world could increase from its current 1.2 billion to about 1.4
billion in the year 2025./8
50. The greater part of global population increase will take place in developing countries,
where the 1985 population of 3.7 billion may increase to 6.8 billion by 2025./9 The Third World
does not have the option of migration to 'new' lands, and the time available for adjustment ismuch less than industrial countries had. Hence the challenge now is to quickly lower
population growth rates, especially in regions such as Africa, where these rates are increasing.
51. Birth rates declined in industrial countries largely because of economic and social
development. Rising levels of income and urbanization and the changing role of women all
played important roles. Similar processes are now at work in developing countries. Theseshould be recognized and encouraged. Population policies should be integrated with othereconomic and social development programmes female education, health care, and the
expansion of the livelihood base of the poor. But time is short, and developing countries will
also have to promote direct measures to reduce fertility, to avoid going radically beyond the
productive potential to support their populations. In fact, increased access to family planning
services is itself a form of social development that allows couples, and women in particular, theright to self-determination.
52. Population growth in developing countries will remain unevenly distributed between ruraland urban areas. UK projections suggest that by the first decade of the next century, theabsolute size of rural populations in most developing countries will start declining. Nearly 90
per cent of the increase in the developing world will take place in urban areas, the population ofwhich in expected to rise from 1.15 billion in 1985 to 3.25 million in 2025./10 The increase will be
particularly marked in Africa and, to a lesser extent, in Asia.
53. Developing-country cities are growing much faster than the capacity of authorities to cope.
Shortages of housing, water, sanitation, and mass transit are widespread. A growing
proportion of city-dwellers live in slums and shanty towns, many of them exposed to air andwater pollution and to industrial and natural hazards. Further deterioration is likely, given thatmost urban growth will take place in the largest cities. Thus more manageable cities may be theprincipal gain from slower rates of population growth.
54. Urbanization is itself part of the development process. The challenge is to manage theprocess so as to avoid a severe deterioration in the quality of life. Thus the development ofsmaller urban centres needs to be encouraged to reduce pressures in large cities. Solving theimpending urban crisis will require the promotion of self-help housing and urban services by
and for the poor, and a more positive approach to the role of the informal sector, supported bysufficient funds for water supply, sanitation, and other services. See Chapter 9.

5. Conserving and Enhancing the Resource Base55. If needs are to be met on a sustainable basis the Earth's natural resource base must be
conserved and enhanced. Major changes in policies will be needed to cope with the industrial
world's current high levels of consumption, the increases in consumption needed to meet
minimum standards in developing countries, and expected population growth. However, thecase for the conservation of nature should not rest only with development goals. It is part ofour moral obligation to other living beings and future generations.
56. Pressure on resources increases when people lack alternatives. Development policies mustwiden people's options for earning a sustainable livelihood, particularly for resource-poorhouseholds and in areas under ecological stress. In a hilly area, for instance, economic
self-interest and ecology can be combined by helping farmers shift from grain to tree crops by
providing them with advice, equipment, and marketing assistance. Programmes to protect theincomes of farmers, fishermen, and foresters against short-term price declines may decrease
their need to overexploit resources.
57. The conservation of agricultural resources is an urgent task because in many parts of theworld cultivation has already been extended to marginal lands, and fishery and forestry
resources have been overexploited. These resources must be conserved and enhanced to meetthe needs of growing populations. Land use in agriculture and forestry must be based on ascientific assessment of land capacity, and the annual depletion of topsoil, fish stock, or forest
resources must not exceed the rate of regeneration.
58. The pressures on agricultural land from crop and livestock production can be partly
relieved by increasing productivity. But short-sighted, short-term improvements in
productivity can create different forms of ecological stress, such as the loss of genetic diversity
in standing crops, salinization and alkalization of irrigated lands, nitrate pollution of groundwater, and pesticide residues in food. Ecologically more benign alternatives are available.
Future increases in productivity, in both developed and developing countries, should be basedon the better controlled application of water and agrochemicals, as well as on more extensive
use of organic manures and non-chemical means of pest control. These alternatives can bepromoted only by an agricultural policy based on ecological realities. (See Chapter 5.)
59. In the case of fisheries and tropical forestry, we rely largely on the exploitation of thenaturally available stocks. The sustainable yield from these stocks may well fall short ofdemand. Hence it will be necessary to turn to methods that produce more fish, fuelwood, andforest products under controlled conditions. Substitutes for fuelwood can be promoted.
60. The ultimate limits to global development are perhaps determined by the availability ofenergy resources and by the biosphere's capacity to absorb the by-products of energy use./11/
These energy limits may be approached far sooner than the limits imposed by other material
resources. First, there are the supply problems: the depletion of oil reserves, the high cost andenvironmental impact of coal mining, and the hazards of nuclear technology. Second, there are
emission problems, most notably acid pollution and carbon dioxide build up leading to global
warming.

I work with rubber trees in the Amazon. I am here to speak about the tropicalforest.
We live from this forest they want to destroy. And we want to take this opportunityof having so many people here gathered with the same objective in mind to defend
our habitat, the conservation of forest, of tropical forest.

In my area, we have about 14-16 native products that we extract from the forest,
besides all the other activities we have. So I think this must be preserved. Because
it is not only with cattle, not only with pasture lands, and not only with highways that
we will be able to develop the Amazon.
When they think of falling trees, they always think of building roads and the roads
bring destruction under a mask called progress. Let us put this progress where thelands have already been deforested, where it is idle of labour and where we haveto find people work, and where we have to make the city grow. But let us leavethose who want to live in the forest, who want to keep it as it is.
We have nothing written. I don't have anything that was created in somebody's
office. There is no philosophy. It is just the real truth, because this is what our life
is.
Jaime Da Silva Araujo
Rubber Tapper Council
WCED Public Hearing
Sao Paulo, 28-29 Oct 1985

61. Some of these problems can be met by increased use of renewable energy sources. But the
exploitation of renewable sources such as fuelwood and hydropower also entails ecologicalproblems. Hence sustainability requires a clear focus on conserving and efficiently using
energy.
62. Industrialized countries must recognize that their energy consumption is polluting thebiosphere and eating into scarce fossil fuel supplies. Recent improvements in energy efficiency
and a shift towards less energy-intensive sectors have helped limit consumption. But theprocess must be accelerated to reduce per capita consumption and encourage a shift to nonpolluting sources and technologies. The simple duplication in the developing world ofindustrial countries' energy use patterns is neither feasible nor desirable. Changing thesepatterns for the better will call for new policies in urban development, industry location,
housing design, transportation systems, and the choice of agricultural and industrial
technologies.
63. Non-fuel mineral resources appear to pose fewer supply problems. Studies done before
1960 that assumed an exponentially growing demand did not envisage a problem until well into
the next century./12 since then, world consumption of most metals has remained nearly
constant, which suggests that the exhaustion of non-fuel minerals is even more distant. The
history of technological developments also suggests that industry can adjust to scarcity
through greater efficiency in use, recycling, and substitution. More immediate needs include
modifying the pattern of world trade in minerals to allow exporters a higher share in the value
added from mineral use, and improving the access of developing countries to mineral supplies,
as their demands increase.

Indigenous peoples are the base of what I guess could be called the environmental
security system. We are the gate-keepers of success or failure to husband ourresources. For many of us, however, the last few centuries have meant a major
loss of control over our lands and waters. We are still the first to know aboutchanges in the environment, but we are now the last to be asked or consulted.

We are the first to detect when the forests are being threatened, as they are under
the slash and grab economics of this country. And we are the last to be asked
about the future of our forests. We are the first to feel the pollution of our waters,
as the Ojibway peoples of my own homelands in northern Ontario will attest. And,of course, we are the last to be consulted about how, when, and wheredevelopments should take place in order to assure continuing harmony for theseventh generation.
The most we have learned to expect is to be compensated, always too late andtoo little. We are seldom asked to help avoid the need for compensation by lending
our expertise and our consent to development.
Louis Bruyere
President, Native Council of Canada
WCED Public Hearing
Ottawa, 26-27 May 1986

64. The prevention and reduction of air and water pollution will remain a critical task ofresource conservation. Air and water quality come under pressure from such activities as
fertilizer and pesticide use, urban sewage, fossil fuel burning, the use of certain chemicals, andvarious other industrial activities. Each of these is expected to increase the pollution load on
the biosphere substantially, particularly in developing countries. Cleaning up after the event is
an expensive solution. Hence all countries need to anticipate and prevent these pollution
problems, by, for instance, enforcing emission standards that reflect likely long-term effects,
promoting low-waste technologies, and anticipating the impact of new products, technologies,
and wastes.

6. Reorienting Technology and Managing Risk
65. The fulfilment of all these tasks will require the reorientation of technology the key link
between humans and nature. First, the capacity for technological innovation needs to begreatly enhanced in developing countries so that they can respond more effectively to thechallenges of sustainable development. Second, the orientation of technology development
must be changed to pay greater attention to environmental factors.
66. The technologies of industrial countries are not always suited or easily adaptable to thesocio-economic and environmental conditions of developing countries. To compound the
problem, the bulk of world research and development addresses few of the pressing issues
facing these countries, such as arid-land agriculture or the control of tropical diseases. Not
enough is being done to adapt recent innovations in materials technology, energy conservation,
information technology, and biotechnology to the needs of developing countries. These gaps
must be covered by enhancing research, design, development, and extension capabilities in the
Third World.
67. In all countries, the processes of generating alternative technologies, upgrading traditional
ones, and selecting and adapting imported technologies should be informed by environmental
resource concerns. Most technological research by commercial organizations is devoted to
product and process innovations that have market value. Technologies are needed that
produce 'social goods', such as improved air quality or increased product life, or that resolve
problems normally outside the cost calculus of individual enterprises, such as the externalcosts of pollution or waste disposal.

68. The role of public policy is to ensure, through incentives and disincentives, that commercialorganizations find it worthwhile to take fuller account of environmental factors in thetechnologies they develop. (See Chapter 6.) Publicly funded research institutions also needsuch direction, and the objectives of sustainable development and environmental protection
must be built into the mandates of the institutions that work in environmentally sensitive
areas.
69. The development of environmentally appropriate technologies is closely related toquestions of risk management. Such systems as nuclear reactors, electric and other utility
distribution networks, communication systems, and mass transportation are vulnerable if
stressed beyond a certain point. The fact that they are connected through networks tends tomake them immune to small disturbances but more vulnerable to unexpected disruptions thatexceed a finite threshold. Applying sophisticated analyses of vulnerabilities and past failures totechnology design, manufacturing standards, and contingency plans in operations can makethe consequences of a failure or accident much less catastrophic.
70. The best vulnerability and risk analysis has not been applied consistently acrosstechnologies or systems. A major purpose of large system design should be to make theconsequences of failure or sabotage less serious. There is thus a need for new techniques andtechnologies - as well as legal and institutional mechanisms - for safety design and control,
accident prevention, contingency planning, damage mitigation, and provision of relief.
71. Environmental risks arising from technological and developmental decisions impinge on
individuals and areas that have little or no influence on those decisions. Their interests must
be taken into account. National and international institutional mechanisms are needed toassess potential impacts of new technologies before they are widely used, in order to ensurethat their production, use, and disposal do not overstress environmental resources. Similararrangements are required for major interventions in natural systems, such as river diversion
or forest clearance. In addition, liability for damages from unintended consequences must be
strengthened and enforced.

7. Merging Environment and Economics in Decision Making
72. The common theme throughout this strategy for sustainable development is the need tointegrate economic and ecological considerations in decision making. They are, after all,integrated in the workings of the real world. This will require a change in attitudes andobjectives and in institutional arrangements at every level.
73. Economic and ecological concerns are not necessarily in opposition. For example, policies
that conserve the quality of agricultural land and protect forests improve the long-term
prospects for agricultural development. An increase in the efficiency of energy and material use
serves ecological purposes but can also reduce costs. But the compatibility of environmental
and economic objectives is often lost in the pursuit of individual or group gains, with little
regard for the impacts on others, with a blind faith in science's ability to find solutions, and inignorance of the distant consequences of today's decisions. Institutional rigidities add to thismyopia.
74. One important rigidity is the tendency to deal with one industry or sector in isolation,
failing to recognize the importance of intersectoral linkages. Modern agriculture uses
substantial amounts of commercially produced energy and large quantities of industrial
products. At the same time, the more traditional connection - in which agriculture is a source

of raw materials for industry - is being diluted by the widening use of synthetics. The energyindustry connection is also changing, with a strong tendency towards a decline in the energy
intensity of industrial production in industrial countries. In the Third World, however, thegradual shift of the industrial base towards the basic material producing sectors is leading to anincrease in the energy intensity of industrial production.
75. These inter sectoral connections create patterns of economic and ecologicalinterdependence rarely reflected in the ways in which policy is made. Sectoral organizations
tend to pursue sectoral objectives and to treat their impacts on other sectors as side effects,
taken into account only if compelled to do so. Hence impacts on forests rarely worry those
involved in guiding public policy or business activities in the fields of energy, industrial
development, crop husbandry, or foreign trade. Many of the environment and development
problems that confront us have their roots in this sectoral fragmentation of responsibility.
Sustainable development requires that such fragmentation be overcome.

The issues that have been brought forward here, I think, are wide-ranging andmaybe you know, maybe you don't know, the answers to all those issues. But atleast by hearing all those questions, stories, all these expressions that have been
put forward, at least you could have some idea.
You don't know the answers nor the solutions, but you could suggest the way tosolve many problems and this is by suggesting either to governments, or the UN,
or international agencies, to solve any problem the best way: that is to include
those with direct interests in it. The beneficiaries, as well as the victims of any
development issue should be included, should be heard.
I think that is the one thing, maybe that all of us are hearing here, or expecting: thatin every development planning or development issue as much as possible to listen
and to include, to consult the people concerned. If that is taken care of, at least
one step of the problem is resolved.
Ismid Hadad
Chief Editor, Prisma
WCED Public Hearing
Jakarta, 26 March 1985

76. Sustainability requires the enforcement of wider responsibilities for the impacts ofdecisions. This requires changes in the legal and institutional frameworks that will enforce thecommon interest. Some necessary changes in the legal framework start from the proposition
that an environment adequate for health and well-being is essential for all human beings
including future generations. Such a view places the right to use public and private resources in
its proper social context and provides a goal for more specific measures.
77. The law alone cannot enforce the common interest. It principally needs community
knowledge and support, which entails greater public participation in the decisions that affectthe environment. This is best secured by decentralizing the management of resources uponwhich local communities defend, and giving these communities an effective say over the use fthese resources. It will also require promoting citizens' initiatives, empowering people'sorganizations, and strengthening local democracy./13
78. Some large-scale projects, however, require participation on a different basis. Public
inquiries and hearings on the development and environment impacts can help greatly indrawing attention to different points of view. Free access to relevant information and theavailability of alternative sources of technical expertise can provide an informed basis for public
discussion. When the environmental impact of a proposed project is particularly high, public
scrutiny of the case should be mandatory and, wherever feasible, the decision should be
subject to prior public approval, perhaps by referendum.

It has not been too difficult to push the environment lobby of the North and thedevelopment lobby of the South together. And there is now in fact a blurring of the
distinction between the two, so they are coming to have a common consensus
around the theme of sustainable development.
The building blocks are there. Environmental concern is common to both sides.
Humanitarian concern is common to both sides. The difference lies in the methodsof each and the degree to which each side tries to achieve its own economic
interest through the development assistance process.
The time is right for bridging this gap for some very pragmatic political reasons.
First of all, the people of the North do not want to see their taxes wasted.
Secondly, they do not want to see growing poverty, and they obviously care for theenvironment, be it the environment of the North, where they live, or of the South.
And the majority of people in the South do not want short-term overpass solutions.
In effect, there is a political community of interest, North and South, in the conceptof sustainable development that you can build upon.
Richard Sandbrook
International institute for Environment and Development
WCED Public Hearing
Oslo, 24-25 June 1985

79. Changes are also required in the attitudes and procedures of both public and private-sector
enterprises. Moreover, environmental regulation must move beyond the usual menu of safety
regulations, zoning laws, and pollution control enactments; environmental objectives must be
built into taxation, prior approval procedures for investment and technology choice, foreign
trade incentives, and all components of development policy.
80. The integration of economic and ecological factors into the law and into decision making
systems within countries has to be matched at the international level. The growth in fuel andmaterial use dictates that direct physical linkages between ecosystems of different countries
will increase. Economic interactions through trade, finance, investment, and travel will also
grow and heighten economic and ecological interdependence. Hence in the future, even moreso than now, sustainable development requires the unification of economics and ecology ininternational relations, as discussed in the next chapter.

IV. Conclusion
81. In its broadest sense, the strategy for sustainable development aims to promote harmony
among human brings and between humanity and nature. In the specific context of thedevelopment and environment crises of the 1980s, which current national and international
political and economic institutions have not and perhaps cannot overcome, the pursuit ofsustainable development requires:a political system that secures effective citizen participation in decision making.
an economic system that is able to generate surpluses and technical knowledge on aself-reliant and sustained basis
a social system that provides for solutions for the tensions arising from disharmonious
development.
a production system that respects the obligation to preserve the ecological base fordevelopment,a technological system that can search continuously for new solutions,an international system that fosters sustainable patterns of trade and finance, andan administrative system that is flexible and has the capacity for self-correction.
82. These requirements are more in the nature of goals that should underlie national andinternational action on development. What matters is the sincerity with which these goals are
pursued and the effectiveness with which departures from them are corrected

Footnotes
1/ UNCTAD, Handbook of International Trade and Development Statistics 1985
Supplement (New York: 1985).
2/ Ibid.
3/ Department of International Economic and Social Affairs (DIESA), Doubling
Development Finance, Meeting a Global Challenge. Views and Recommendationsof the Committee for Development Planning (New York: UN, 1986).
4/ One example of such a decision to forgo a developmental benefit in the interest ofconservation is provided by the dropping of the Silent Valley Hydro project in India.
5/ Based on data from World Bank, World Development Report 1984 (New York: Oxford
University Press, 1984).
6/ Based on per capita consumption data from FAO, Production Yearbook 1984 (Rome:
1985) and population projections from DIESA, World Population Prospects: Estimatesand Projections as Assessed in 1984 (New York: UN, 1986).
7/ FAO, Fuelwood Supplies in the Developing Countries, Forestry Paper No. 42 (Rome:
1983).
8/ DIESA, World Population Prospects, op. cit.
9/ Ibid.
10/ Ibid.
11/ W. Hafele and W. Sassin, 'Resources and Endowments, An Outline of Future Energy
Systems', in P.W. Hemily and M.N. Ozdas (eds.), Science and Future Choice (Oxford:

Clarendon Press, 1979).
12/ See, for example, OECD, Interfutures: Facing the Future (Paris: 1979) and Council on
Environmental Quality and U.S. Department of State, The Global 2000 Report to the
President: Entering the Twenty-First Century, The Technical Report, Vol. Two(Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1980).
13/ See 'For Municipal initiative and Citizen Power', in INDERENA, La Campana Verde y
los Concejos Verdes (Bogota, Colombia: 1985).

Our Common Future, Chapter 3: The Role of the International
EconomyI. The International Economy, the Environment, and Development
II. Decline in the 1980s
1. The African Continent
2. Latin American Debt

III. Enabling Sustainable Development
1. Enhancing the Flow of Resources to Developing Countries
1.1 Increasing the Flow of Finance
1.2 Lending for Sustainable Development

2. Linking Trade. Environment, and Development
2.1 International Commodity Trade
2.2 Protectionism and International Trade
2.3 'Pollution-intensive' Goods
2.4 The Mandates of Multilateral Trade Forums

3. Ensuring Responsibility in Transnational Investment
4. Broadening the Technological Base
4.1 The Diffusion of Environmentally Sound Technologies
4.2 Building Up Technological Capabilities in Developing Countries

IV. A Sustainable World Economy
1. Through the ages, people have reached beyond their own borders to obtain essential, valued,
or exotic materials. Today's surer communications and larger trade and capital movements
have greatly enlarged this process, quickened its pace, and endowed it with far-reachingecological implications. Thus the pursuit of sustainability requires major changes ininternational economic relations.

I. The International Economy, the Environment, and Development
2. Two conditions must be satisfied before international economic exchanges can become
beneficial for all involved. The sustainability of ecosystems on which the global economy
depends must be guaranteed. And the economic partners must be satisfied that the basis ofexchange is equitable; relationships that are unequal and based on dominance of one kind or
another are not a sound and durable basis for interdependence. For many developing
countries, neither condition is met.
3. Economic and ecological links between nations have grown rapidly. This widens the impactof the growing inequalities in the economic development and strength of nations. The
asymmetry in international economic relations compounds the imbalance, as developing
nations are generally influenced by - but unable to influence - international economic
conditions.
4. International economic relationships pose a particular problem for poor countries trying tomanage their environments, since the export of natural resources remains a large factor in
their economies, especially those of the least developed nations. The instability and adverse
price trends faced by most of these countries make it impossible for them to manage theirnatural resource bases for sustained production. The rising burden of debt servicing and thedecline in new capital flows intensify those forces that lead to environmental deterioration andresource depletion occurring at the expense of long-term development.
5. The trade in tropical timber, for example, is one factor underlying tropical deforestation.
Needs for foreign exchange encourage many developing countries to cut timber faster thanforests can be regenerated. This overcutting not only depletes the resource that underpins theworld timber trade, it causes the lost of forest-based livelihoods, increases soil erosion anddownstream flooding, and accelerates the loss of species and genetic resources. International
trade patterns can also encourage the unsustainable development policies and practices thathave steadily degraded the croplands and rangelands in the drylands of Asia and Africa; an
example of that is provided by the growth of cotton production for export in the Sahel region.
(See Box 3-1.)

Box 3-1
Cotton Produced for Export in the Sahel
In 1963-64, as drought and hunger were taking hold in the Sahel region of Africa, five
Sahelian nations - Burkina Faso, Chad, Mali, Niger, and Senegal - produced record
amounts of cotton. They harvested 154 million tons of cotton fibre, up from 22.7
million tons in 1961-62. The Sahel as a whole set another record in 1984: It imported arecord 1.77 million tons of cereals, up from 200,000 tons yearly in the early 1960s.
Over the period that Sahelian cotton harvests were steadily rising, world cotton prices
were steadily falling in real terms. These figures do not suggest that Sahelian nations
should plough up all cotton to plant sorghum and millet. But the fact that farmers
who can grow cotton cannot grow enough food to feed themselves suggests that cash
crops are getting too much attention and food crops too little.
Source: J. Giri, 'Retrospective de l'Economie Sahelienne', Club du Sahel, Paris, 1984.

6. Growth in many developing countries also requires external capital inflows. Without
reasonable flows, the prospect for any improvements in living standards is bleak. As a result,the poor will be forced to overuse the environment to ensure their own survival. Long-term
development thus becomes much harder, and in some cases impossible. Yet trends in the
movement of capital are worrying. Net resource flows to developing countries have fallen inreal terms; in aggregate, there is now actually an outflow. (See Table 3-1) The increase ofinternational capital flows to developing countries expected over the rest of the 1980s is only
half that thought necessary to restore growth to levels where a reduction in poverty canoccur./1
7. A mere increase in flows of capital to developing countries will not necessarily contribute todevelopment. Domestic efforts are of paramount importance. More external funding is also
required, but it must come in ways that are sensitive to the environmental impacts. The pointis that the reduction of poverty itself is a precondition for environmentally sound development.
And resource flows from rich to poor flows improved both qualitatively and quantitatively are aprecondition for the eradication of poverty.

Table 3-1

Net Transfer of Resources to Capital-Importing Developing Countries
1979

1980

1981

1982

1983

(billion dollars)

1984

1985

Net Transfer fromLoans(all IDCs)*

30.7

0.8

27.7

0.8

-8.6

-22.0

-41.0

Net Transfer fromall Resource Flows(all IDCs)**

41.4

39.3

41.5

10.1

-0.3

-12.5

-31.0

Net Transfer fromall Resource Flows(to Latin America)

15.6

11.9

11.4

-16.7

-25.9

-23.2

-30.0

* Net transfers on loans are net capital flows minus net interest paid. All loans, official andprivate, short and long-term, are included together with IMF credit** Total net resource flows relate to net loan transfers, grants and net direct investment (lessnet direct investment income)Source: UN, World Economic Survey 1986 (New York: 1986).

II. Decline in the 1980s
8. The pressures of poverty and rising populations make it enormously difficult for developing
countries to pursue environmentally sound policies even in the best of circumstances. But
when international economic conditions are bad, the problems can become unmanageable.
During the 1980s, economic growth rates declined sharply or even turned negative in much of
the Third World, particularly in Africa and Latin America. Over the five years from 1981 to
1985, population growth outstripped economic growth in most developing countries./2
9. Deteriorating terms of trade, rising debt service obligations, stagnating flows of aid, andgrowing protectionism in the developed market economies caused severe external payment
problems. The increased cost of foreign borrowing, at a time when exports were depressed,
also helped to plunge many developing countries into debt crises. Austerity programmes laid
down by the IMF as a prerequisite for extending credit to meet short-term balanceof-payments needs became particularly onerous after the debt crisis. Growth was cut back andmany social objectives fell by the wayside, including those having to do with employment,
health, education, environment, and human settlements.

We know that the world lives through an international finance crisis, which
increases the misery and the poverty in the Third World arid we sacrifice evenmore our environment, though we know that this situation can be reversed, if we
can use correctly new technology and knowledge. But for this we have to find a
new ethic that will include the relationship between man and nature above all.
Sergio Dialetachi
Speaker from the floor
WCED Public Hearing
Sao Paulo, 26-29 Oct 1985

10. This was a radical change from the 1960s and 1970s. Then it was rapid economic growththat was seen as an ecological threat. Now it is recession, austerity, and falling living standards.
The decline of the 1980s has aggravated pressures on the environment in several ways:
Austerity measures and general recessionary conditions have brought sharp declines inper capita incomes and increased unemployment. This forces more people back into
subsistence agriculture, where they draw heavily on the natural resource base and thus
degrade it.
Austerity programmes inevitably include government cutbacks in both the staff andexpenditure of fledgling, weak environmental agencies, undermining even the minimal
efforts being made to bring ecological considerations into development planning.
Conservation always taken a back seat in times of economic stress. As economic
conditions have worsened in developing countries and debt pressures have mounted,
planners have tended to ignore environmental planning and conservation in bothindustrial and rural development projects.
11. The critical situations in sub Saharan Africa and the debt strapped countries of Latin
America demonstrate, in an extreme way, the damaging impacts that unreformed international
economic arrangements are having on both development and the environment.

1. The African Continent
12. Africa on the whole has been caught up in a series of downward spirals:
poverty and hunger leading to environmental degradation, deteriorating agriculture, andhence more poverty and hunger;
falling savings and a neglect of new investment in the wake of growing poverty;high infant mortality, poverty, and lack of education;high population growth rates; anda flight from rural hunger to the cities, leading to explosive levels of urban growth andsqualor, compounding the problems of inadequate food supplies.
13. The situation is not everywhere so bleak. Some nations have coped well, and some
far-reaching and courageous policy reforms begun in the last few years have begun to bear
fruit. Encouragement also comes from South Asia, where a comparable crisis 20 years ago hasgiven way to an upward spiral of rising food production, diminishing (but still vast) poverty,
slowing population growth, rising savings and investment, and greater attention to thelong-term questions of environmental management and appropriate technology.
14. Among the many causes of the African crisis, the workings of the international economy
stand out. Sub-Saharan Africa's economic well-being depends even more than low-income
Asia's on developments in the world economy. Within the last decade, many sub-Saharancountries have been hit by adverse trends in commodity terms of trade and external shocks
such as higher oil prices, fluctuating exchange rates, and higher interest rates. Over the last 10
years, the prices of major commodities such as copper, iron ore, sugar, ground-nuts, rubber,
timber, and cotton have fallen significantly. In 1985, the terms of trade of sub-Saharancountries (except oil-exporting countries) were 10 per cent below 1970 levels. In countries
eligible for funds from the International Development Association (IDA), the average fall waswell over 20 per cent, with even greater drops in some, including Ethiopia, Liberia, Sierra
Leone, Zaire, and Zambia./3
15. The problem has been compounded by growing difficulties in attracting development
capital from the industrial world. At the same time, debt repayments and interest charges haverisen Debt service rose in sub-Saharan Africa as a whole from 15 per cent of export earnings in1980 to 31 per cent in 1985./4 This combination of events has led to a situation where net
resource transfers to the area fell from an estimated $10 billion a year in 1982 to $1 billion in
1985./5 Thus nations have been able to import far less. In countries eligible for IDA loans, theimport volume per person in 1984 was only 62 per cent of the volume in 1970./6 Imports for
agriculture - machinery, fertilizers, and pesticides - and of essential supplies to meet basic
needs have all been cut. The combination of diverse international and internal factors cut percapita incomes by 16 per cent in sub-Saharan Africa between 1960 and 1985./7
16. The economic difficulties of sub-Saharan countries have had devastating social impacts.
Declining per capita rood production has contributed to growing undernourishment. The
recent drought placed some 35 million lives at risk in 1984/85, and as the drought recededsome 19 million people continued to suffer famine./8 Malnutrition and hunger have weakened
much of the population, reducing their productivity, and made more of them (especiallychildren and the old) more susceptible to debilitating diseases and premature death. The crisis
has reversed progress in supplying safe drinking water and sanitation.

The seriousness of the African crisis cannot be overemphasized and in its entirety,
it should really engage the whole world. The lives of 400 million people living in
Africa today are imperilled. And many more people yet to be born will face a very
bleak future unless effective solutions are found and found quickly.
It requires of course very little imagination to appreciate the fact that it is not only
Africa that is in danger. In the long term the entire world economy could bethreatened not only because of the indivisibility of human welfare but because of
Africa's crucial position in the global economy as a source of a large number ofvital raw materials.
Maxime Ferrari
Director, UNEP Regional Office for Africa
WCED Public Hearing
Harare, 18 Sept 1986

17. It is now more widely recognized that it is necessary to deal with the long-term causes
rather than the symptoms. The vast misery brought on by the drought in Africa is now
generally acknowledged, and the world community has responded with a substantial
emergency programme. But emergency food aid is only a short-term reaction, and, at best, apartial answer. The roots of the problem lie in national and international policies that have bo
far prevented African economies from realizing their full potential for economic expansion andthus for easing poverty and the environmental pressures that it generates.
18. The resolution lies in large part with African decision makers, but the international
community also has a heavy responsibility to support Africa's adjustment efforts with adequate
aid and trade arrangements and to see to it that more capital flows into poorer nations thanout. These two complementary aspects of the resolution of the problems have been fullyrecognized by the African countries themselves /9 and generally acknowledged by theinternational community./10 The World Bank estimates that even if external economic
conditions are favourable over the next five years, and even if African governments implement
key policy reforms, a substantial gap will still remain between the finance or debt relief
available on current donor policies and the amounts needed to prevent a further deteriorationin the living standards of low-income Africa./11 And there is no money in this grim equation forrestoring the damaged environment.
19. The international community must realize that Africa cannot pull itself out of the planet's
most serious economic and ecological crisis without much more long-term assistance than iscurrently envisioned. In addition, greatly increased external financing for development mustbe accompanied by policy changes that recognize the need to avoid environmental degradation.

2. Latin American Debt
20. Debt is an acute problem for many countries of Africa. But, because of the magnitudes ofdebt involved, it has had its most visible impact in some middle-income countries - particularly
in Latin America. The debt crisis remains a threat to international financial stability, but its
main impact so far has been on the process of development, both in its economic and ecologicalaspects. Of the total world debt of around $950 billion in 1985, roughly 30 per cent was owed
by four countries: Argentina, Brazil, Mexico, and Venezuela. Their debts constitute roughly
two-thirds of the outstanding loans of banks to developing countries./12
21. In the 1970s, Latin America's economic growth was facilitated by external borrowing.
Commercial banks were happy to lend to growing countries rich in natural resources. Thenmajor changes in international conditions made the debt unsustainable. A global recession
restricted export markets, and tight monetary policies forced up global interest rates to levels
far exceeding any in living memory. Bankers, alarmed by deteriorating creditworthiness,
stopped lending. A flight of indigenous capital from developing countries compounded the
problem.
22. The ensuing crisis forced governments into austerity policies to cut back imports. As aresult, Latin American imports fell by 40 per cent in real terms over three years./13 The
consequent economic contraction reduced per capita gross domestic product by an average of
B per cent in the eight main Latin American countries./14 Much of the burden was carried by
the poor, as real wages fell and unemployment rose. Growing poverty and deteriorating
environmental conditions are clearly visible in every major Latin American country.
23. Further, the lack of new credit and the continuing burden of debt service forced thesecountries to service their debts by running trade surpluses. The net transfers from seven major
Latin American countries to creditors rose to almost $39 billion in 1984, and in that year 35 percent of export earnings went to pay interest on overseas debt./15 This massive drain represents
5 to 6 per cent of the region's GDP, around a third of the internal savings, and nearly 40 per
cent of export earnings. It has been achieved by adjustment policies that impose severe andregressively skewed cuts in wages, social services, investment, consumption, and employment,
both public and private, further aggravating social inequity and widespread poverty. Pressureson the environment and resources have increased sharply in the search for new and expanded
exports and replacements for imports, together with the deterioration and overexploitation of
the environment brought about by the swelling number of the urban and rural poor indesperate struggle for survival. A substantial part of Latin America's rapid growth in exports
are raw materials, food, and resource-based manufactures.

The impact of the present crisis on Latin America has been compared, in its depth
and extension, with the Great Depression of 1929-32. The crisis has made it clear
that, although the need to protect the environment against the traditional problemsof deterioration and depletion continues to be a valid objective, policy-makers
responsible for environmental management ought to avoid negative attitudes in theface of the need for economic reactivation and growth.
The expansion, conservation, maintenance, and protection of the environment canmake an essential contribution to the improvement of the standard of living, toemployment, and to productivity.
Osvaldo Sunkel
Coordinator, Joint ECLAC/UNEP Development and Environment Unit
WCED Public Hearing
Sao Paulo, 28-29 Oct 1985

24. So Latin American natural resources ate being used not for development or to raise living
standards, but to meet the financial requirements of industrialized country creditors. Thisapproach to the debt problem raises questions of economic, political, and environmental
sustainability. To require relatively poor countries to simultaneously curb their living
standards, accept growing poverty, and export growing amounts of scarce resources tomaintain external creditworthiness reflects priorities few democratically elected governments
are likely to be able to tolerate for long. The present situation is not consistent with sustainable
development. This conflict is aggravated by the economic policies of some major industrial
countries, which have depressed and destabilized the international economy. In order to bringabout socially and environmentally sustainable development it is indispensable, among otherelements, for industrial countries to resume internationally expansionary policies of growth,trade, and investment. The Commission noted that, in these circumstances, some debtor
countries have felt forced to suspend or limit the outflow of funds.
25. Growing numbers of creditor banks and official agencies are realizing that many debtors
simply will not be able to keep servicing their debts unless the burden is eased. Measures
under discussion include additional new lending, forgiveness of part of the debt, longer-term
rescheduling, and conversion to softer terms. But a necessary sense of urgency is lacking. Anysuch measures must incorporate the legitimate interests of creditors and debtors andrepresent a fairer sharing of the burden of resolving the debt crisis.

III. Enabling Sustainable Development
26. Developing countries have sought, for many years, fundamental changes in international
economic arrangements so as to make them more equitable, particularly with regard to
financial flows, trade, transnational investment, and technology transfer./16 Their arguments
must now be recast to reflect the ecological dimensions, frequently overlooked in the past.
27. In the short run, for most developing countries except the largest a new era of economic
growth hinges on effective and coordinated economic management among major industrial
countries - designed to facilitate expansion, to reduce real interest rates, and to halt the slide toprotectionism. In the longer term, major changes are also required to make consumption andproduction patterns sustainable in a context of higher global growth.
28. International cooperation to achieve the former is embryonic, and to achieve the latter,
negligible. In practice, and in the absence of global management of the economy or theenvironment, attention must be focused on the improvement of policies in areas where thescope for cooperation is already defined: aid, trade, transnational corporations, and technology
transfer.

1. Enhancing the Flow of Resources to Developing Countries
29. Two interrelated concerns lie at the heart of our recommendations on financial flows: oneconcerns the quantity, the other the 'quality of resource flows to developing countries. The
need for more resources cannot be evaded. The idea that developing countries would do betterto live within their limited means is a cruel illusion. Global poverty cannot be reduced by thegovernments of poor countries acting alone. At the same time, more aid and other forms offinance, while necessary, are not sufficient. Projects and programmes must be designed forsustainable development.

1.1 Increasing the Flow of Finance
30. As regards the quantity of resources, the stringency of external finance has alreadycontributed to an unacceptable decline in living standards in developing countries. The
patterns and the needs of the heavily indebted countries that rely mainly on commercial
finance have been described, along with those of low-income countries that depend on aid. But
there are other poor countries that have made impressive progress in recent years but still face
immense problems, not least in countering environmental degradation. Low-income Asia has acontinuing need for large amounts of aid; in general, the main recipients in this region have agood record of aid management. Without such aid it will be much more difficult, to sustain thegrowth that, together with poverty-focused programmes, could improve the lot of hundreds ofmillions of the 'absolute poor'.

The universal importance of ecological problems can hardly be denied. Their
successful solution will increasingly require coordinated activities not only withinevery country's economy but also within the scope of international cooperation.
Ecological problems are unprecedented in the history of mankind.
Dr. Todor I. Bozninov
Committee for Environment Protection, Bulgaria
WCED Public Hearing
Moscow, 8 Dec 1986

31. To meet such needs requires that the main donors and lending institutions re-examine
their policies. Official development assistance (ODA) levels have stagnated in absolute terms,
and most donor countries fall well short of internationally agreed targets. Commercial lending
and lending by export credit agencies has fallen sharply. As part of a concerted effort to reverse
these trends it is vitally important for development that there should be a substantial increase
in resources available to the World Bank and IDA. Increased commercial bank lending is also
necessary for major debtors.

1.2 Lending for Sustainable Development
32. In the past, development assistance has not always contributed to sustainable development

and in some cases detracted from it. Lending for agriculture, forestry, fishing, and energy has
usually been made on narrow economic criteria that take little account of environmental effects
For instance, development agencies have sometimes promoted chemical-dependent
agriculture, rather than sustainable, regenerative agriculture. It is important therefore that
there should be a qualitative as well as a quantitative improvement.
33. A larger portion of total development assistance should go to investments needed toenhance the environment and the productivity of the resource sectors. Such efforts include
reforestation and fuelwood development, watershed protection, soil conservation,
agroforestry, rehabilitation of irrigation projects, small scale agriculture, low-cost sanitation
measures, and the conversion of crops into fuel. Experience has shown that the most effective
efforts of this type are small projects with maximum grass-roots participation. The
programmes most directly related to the objective of sustainable development may therefore
involve higher local costs, a higher ratio of recurrent to capital costs, and a greater use of local
technology and expertise.
34. A shift towards projects of this kind would also require donors to re-examine the content of
their aid programmes, particularly with regard to commodity assistance, which has sometimes
served to reduce rather than enhance the possibilities for sustainable development. (See
Chapter 5.)

The industrialized world's demands for raw materials, higher productivity, andmaterial goods have imposed serious environmental impacts and high economic
costs not only in our own countries, but also on the developing world. The existing
international patterns of financial, economic trade and investment policies further
add to the problems.
We must all be willing to examine our relations in international trade, investments,
development assistance, industry, and agriculture in light of the consequences
these may have for underdevelopment and environmental destruction in the Third
World. We must even be willing to go further and implement the means necessary
to alienate these symptoms.
Rakel Surlien
Former Minister of Environment
Government of Norway
WCED Opening Ceremony
Oslo, 24 June 1985

35. The major priority is for sustainability considerations to be diffused throughout the work ofinternational financial institutions. The roles of the World Bank and the IMF are particularly
crucial because their lending conditions are being used as benchmarks for parallel lending byother institutions - commercial banks and export credit agencies. It is important in this context
that sustainability considerations be taken into account by the Bank in the appraisal ofstructural adjustment lending and other policy-oriented lending directed to resource-based
sectors - agriculture, fishing, forestry, and energy in particular - as well as specific projects.
36. A similar shift of emphasis is required in respect of adjustment programmes undertaken by
developing countries. To date, 'adjustment' - particularly under IMF auspices - has led more
often than not to cutbacks in living standards in the interest of financial stabilization. Implicit
in many suggested plans for coping with the debt crisis is the growing recognition that futureadjustment should be growth-oriented. Yet it also needs to be environmentally sensitive.
37. The IMF also has a mandate for structural adjustment lending, as in its new Structural
Adjustment Facility. There has been a strongly expressed demand from developing-country
borrowers for the Fund to take into account wider and longer-term development objectives
than financial stabilization: growth, social goals, and environmental impacts.
38. Development agencies, and the World Bank in particular, should develop easily usable
methodologies to augment their own appraisal techniques and to assist developing countries toimprove their capacity for environmental assessment.

2. Linking Trade, Environment, and Development
39. The importance of foreign trade to national development has greatly increased for mostcountries in the post-war period. (See Table 3-2.) This is one measure of the extent to which
trade has made nations, economically and ecologically, more interdependent. Patterns of world
trade also have changed markedly. First, the value of trade in manufactured goods grew at afaster rate than that in primary products other than fuel, and a growing number of developing
countries have emerged as major exporters of such goods. Manufactured goods now accountfor twice the value of developing countries' non-oil exports./17 (See Chapter 8.) Second, theindustrialized market economies have come to depend more on fuel imports from developing
countries, which accounted for 43 per cent of consumption in 1980-81 compared with only 16
per cent in 1959-60 and even less in pre-war years./18
40. The dependence of the developed market economies on other mineral imports from thedeveloping countries has also grown, and the share of these imports in consumption increased
from 19 per cent in 1959-60 to 30 per cent in 1980-81./19 Non-renewable resources like fuels
and minerals, as well as manufactured goods, are now far more important than tropical
products and other agricultural materials in the flow of primary products from developing toindustrial countries. In fact, the flow of food grains is in the opposite direction.
41. The main link between trade and sustainable development is the use of non-renewable raw
materials to earn foreign exchange. Developing countries face the dilemma of having to use
commodities as exports, in order to break foreign exchange constraints on growth, while also
having to minimize damage to the environmental resource base supporting this growth. There
are other links between trade and sustainable development; if protectionism raises barriers
against manufactured exports, for example, developing nations have less scope for diversifying
away from traditional commodities. And unsustainable development may arise not only fromoveruse of certain commodities but from manufactured goods that are potentially polluting.

2.1 International Commodity Trade
42. Although a growing number of developing countries have diversified into manufactured
exports, primary commodities other than petroleum continue to account for more than
one-third of the export earnings of the group as a whole. Dependence on such exports isparticularly high in Latin America (52 per cent) and Africa (62 per cent)./20 The countries
recognized as 'least developed' for the purposes of the UN Special Programme use primarycommodities for 73 per cent of their export earnings./21
43. Non-oil commodity prices fell during the early 1980s, not only in real but also in nominal
terms. By early 1985, the UNCTAD commodity price index was 30 per cent below the 1980

average./22 This recent weakness of commodity prices may not be only a temporary
phenomenon. Commodity prices have not yet recovered from the depth of the world recession
despite increased economic growth in consuming countries. The reasons may be partly
technological (an acceleration in raw material substitution); partly monetary, caused by thehigh cost of holding stocks of commodities; and partly due to increases in supplies by countries
desperate to earn foreign exchange.

Table 3-2

The Growing Importance of Trade
1950
Economic Group1982(exports as a per cent of GDP or NMP)

Developed Market Economies

7.7

15.3

Developing Market Economies

15.5

23.8

Socialist Countries of Eastern Europe

3.4*

16.6*

Socialist Countries of Asia

2.9*

9.7*

* percentages to net material product (NMP).
Source: Based on UNCTAD, Handbook of International Trade and Development
Statistics, 1985 Supplement (New York: United Nations, 1985).

44. These countries are turning the terms of trade against themselves, earning less while
exporting more. The promotion of increased volumes of commodity exports has led to cases of
unsustainable overuse of the natural resource base. While individual cases may not exactly fit
this generalization, it has been argued that such processes have been at work in ranching forbeef, fishing in both coastal and deep sea waters, forestry, and the growing of some cash crops.
Moreover, the prices of commodity exports do not fully reflect the environmental costs to theresource base. In a sense, then, poor developing countries are being caused to subsidize thewealthier importers of their products.
45. The experience of oil has of course been different from that of most other commodities.
(See Chapter 7.) It does provide one example of producers combining to restrict output andraise prices in ways that greatly increased export earnings while conserving the resource baseand promoting energy saving and substitution on a large scale. Recent events suggest that
regulation of the market by producers is very difficult in the long term, whether or not it isdesirable in the wider, global interest, and in any event the conditions have not existed forother commodity exporters to operate in a like manner. Any arrangement encompassing
measures to enhance the export earnings of producers, as well as to ensure the resource basis,
would require consumer as well as producer support.
46. In recent years, Third World commodity exporters have sought to earn more by doing thefirst-stage processing of raw materials themselves. This first stage often involves subsidizedenergy, other concessions, and substantial pollution costs. But these countries often find thatthey do not gain much from this capital- and energy-intensive first-stage processing, as theprice spread shifts in favour of downstream products, most of which continue to be
manufactured mainly in industrial countries. Tariff escalation in the industrial market
economies reinforces this tendency.
47. The main international response to commodity problems has been the development ofinternational commodity agreements to stabilize and raise developing countries' earnings fromthese exports. But real progress has been very limited and in fact there have been reversals.
Moreover, environmental resource considerations have not played any part in commodity
agreements, with the notable exception of the International Tropical Timber Agreement./23
48. Commodity agreements have not been easy to negotiate, and regulation of commodity
trade has been notoriously controversial and difficult. Current arrangements could be
improved in two crucial respects:
Larger sums for compensatory financing to even out economic shocks - as under the
IMF's Compensatory Financing Facility - would encourage producers to take a long-termview, and not to overproduce commodities where production is close to the limits ofenvironmental sustainability during periods of market glut.
Where producers need to diversify from traditional, single-crop production patterns,
more assistance could be given for diversification programmes. The second window of
the Common Fund could be used for promoting resource regeneration andconservation./24
49. Individual governments can better use renewable resources such as forests and fisheries toensure that exploitation rates stay within the limits of sustainable yields and that finances areavailable to regenerate resources and deal with all linked environmental effects. As for
non-renewable resources like minerals, governments should ensure that:the leaseholder undertakes exploration aimed at adding to proven reserves at least theamount extracted;that the ratio of production to proven reserve remains below a pre-specified limit;that the funds generated by royalties are used in a way that compensates for the
declining income when the resource deposit is exhausted; andthat the leaseholder is responsible for land restoration and other environmental control
measures in the urea affected by mining.

I think it is also of importance for the Commission to note the problem ofnegotiation of contracts on resource development. We have been trying for 10
years to include provisions on environment. We have been successful only to getfrom the investors a very broad description of what should be done inenvironmental protection. If you go into details you get problems with the lawyers
and so on. That hampers then the investment.
For us, of course, it is a choice of whether to loosen the grip a little bit or if you
maintain that, then of course, there will be no investment in the country. If an
appeal could be made to the multinationals, mainly to understand that what hasbeen done in timber should also be applied to other agreements like coffee, tin,and others. I think this would be a great help.
Speaker from the floor
Government agency
WCED Public Hearing
Jakarta, 26 March 1985

50. Relevant international organizations such as various UN agencies, the World Bank, andregional groups could develop further their work on model contracts and guidelines
incorporating these principles.

2.2 Protectionism and International Trade
51. The increase in protectionism in industrial countries stifles export growth and prevents
diversification from traditional exports. The success of some Far Eastern developing countries
in increasing exports of labour-intensive manufactured goods shows the development
potential of such trace. However, other countries - especially low-income Asian and Latin
American nations - seeking to follow the same route have found themselves severely
handicapped by growing trade barriers, particularly in textiles and clothing. If developing
countries are to reconcile a need for rapid export growth with a need to conserve the resource
base, it is imperative that they enjoy access to industrial country markets for non traditional
exports where they enjoy a comparative advantage. In many cases, the problems ofprotectionism relate to manufactures; but there are cases - sugar is a good example - whereindustrial countries employ agricultural trade restrictions in ways that are damaging
ecologically as well as economically. (See Box 3-2.)

2.3 'Pollution-intensive' Goods
52. The processing of certain raw materials - pulp and paper, oil, and alumina, for example can have substantial environmental side effects. Industrial countries have generally been more
successful than developing ones in seeing to it that export product prices reflect the costs ofenvironmental damage and of controlling that damage. Thus in the case of exports fromindustrial countries, these costs are paid by consumers in importing nations, including those in
the Third World. But in the case of exports from developing countries, such costs continue tobe borne entirely domestically, largely in the form of damage costs to human health, property,
and ecosystems.

Box 3-2
Sugar and Sustainable Development
Thirty million poor people in the Third World depend on sugar cane for their survival.
Many developing countries have a genuine comparative advantage in production andcould earn valuable foreign exchange by expanding output. Some small states - Fiji,
Mauritius, and several Caribbean islands - depend for their economic survival on canesugar exports.

Industrial countries have actively promoted, and protected, beet sugar production,
which competes with cane and has had quite damaging effects on developing
countries: High-cost, protected beet production encourages artificial sweeteners;
quotas have kept out Third World imports (except for some guaranteed imports asunder the EEC's Sugar Protocol); and surpluses are dumped on world markets
depressing prices.
In the 1986 World Development Report, the World Bank estimated thatindustrial countries' sugar policies cost developing countries About $7.4 billion in lost
revenues during 1963, reduced their real income by about $2.1 billion and increased
price instability by about 25 per cent.
Over and above the increased developing country poverty that results from thesepractices, the promotion of beet production in industrial countries has had adverse
ecological side effects. Modern beet growing is highly capital-intensive, it depends
heavily on chemical herbicides, and the crop has poorer regenerative properties thanothers. The same product could be grown in developing countries, as cane, morecheaply, using more labour and fewer chemical additives.

53. In 1980 the industries of developing countries exporting to OECD members would haveincurred direct pollution control costs of $5.5 billion if they had been required to meet theenvironmental standards then prevailing in the United States, according to a study conducted
for this Commission./25 If the pollution control expenditures associated with the materials thatwent into the final product are also counted, the costs would have mounted to $14.2 billion.
The evidence also suggests that OECD imports from developing countries involve productsthat entail higher average environmental and resource damage costs than do overall OECD
imports./26 These hypothetical pollution control costs probably understate the real costs ofenvironmental and resource damage in the exporting countries. Furthermore, these costs
relate only to environmental pollution and net to the economic damage costs associated withresource depletion.
54. The fact that these costs remain hidden means that developing countries are able to attract
more investment to export manufactured goods than they would under a more rigorous systemof global environmental control. Many Third World policymakers see this as beneficial in that itgives developing countries a comparative advantage in 'pollution-intensive' goods that should
be exploited. They also see that passing along more of the real costs could reduce thecompetitive position of their country in some markets, and thus regard any pressure in thisdirection as a form of disguised protectionism from established producers. Yet it is indeveloping countries' own long-term interests that more of the environmental and resource
costs associated with production be reflected in prices. Such changes must come from thedeveloping countries themselves.

2.4 The Mandates of Multilateral Trade Forums
55. Although a number of UNCTAD research projects have considered the links between tradeand environment, these issues have not been taken up systematically by intergovernmentalorganizations. The mandates of these organizations - principally GATT and UNCTAD - should
include sustainable development. Their activities should reflect concern with the impacts oftrading patterns on the environment and the need for more effective instruments to integrateenvironment and development concerns into international trading arrangements.
56. International organizations dealing with trade will find it easier to reorientate theiractivities if each nation designates a lead agency with a broad mandate to assess the effects ofinternational trade on sustaining the environmental and resource base of economic growth.
This agency could be responsible for raising sustainability issues in the work of UNCTAD,
GATT, OECD, CMEA, and other relevant organizations.

3. Ensuring Responsibility in Transnational Investment
57. Overseas investment activity by companies in market economies has grown substantiallyover the past 40 years. (See Box 3-3.) Foreign affiliates now account for 40 per cent of sales, 33
per cent of net assets, and 56 per cent of net earnings for 380 of the largest industrial
corporations in the market economies, according to data compiled by the UN Centre forTransnational Corporations./27 A high proportion of transnational investment is within
industrial market economies, another aspect of the growing integration of these economies.
58. Transnationals play an important role as owners, as partners in joint ventures, and as
suppliers of technology in the mining and manufacturing sectors in many developing countries,
especially in such environmentally sensitive areas as petroleum, chemicals, metals, paper, andautomobiles. They also dominate world trade in many primary commodities.
59. In recent years, many developing countries have begun to take a more positive view of therole TNC investment can play in their development process. This has been somewhat
influenced by these countries' needs for foreign exchange and their awareness of the role that
foreign investment might play in providing it. Effective cooperation with TNCs is possible increating equal conditions for all parties. This can be attained by a strict observance of theprinciple of sovereignty of the host country For their part, many corporations have recognized
the need to share managerial skills and technological know-how with host country nationals
and to pursue profit-seeking objectives within a framework of long-tern sustainable
development.

Box 3-3
The Role of Transnational Corporations
In 1983 chemicals accounted for roughly one-fourth of the stock of foreign
direct investment in manufacturing in developing countries by companies fromfour leading countries - Japan (23 per cent), the United States (23 per cent),
the United Kingdom (27 per cent), and the Federal Republic of Germany (14 percent).
Agriculture, mining, and other extractive industries accounted for 38 per centof the stock of U.S. investment in developing countries in 1983, 29 per cent of
the stock of Japanese investment in 1983, 21 per cent of the total FRG
investment in 1981-83, and 9 per cent of the stock of U.K. investment in 1978.
Eighty to ninety per cent of the trade in tea, coffee, cocoa, cotton, forest
products, tobacco, jute, copper, iron ore, and bauxite is controlled in the case ofeach commodity by the three to six largest transnationals.

Source: UN Centre on Transnational Corporations, Environmental Aspects of
the Activities of Transnational Corporations: A Survey (New York: UN,
1985).

60. But mutual suspicions still exist, usually because of an asymmetry in bargaining power
between large corporations and small, poor, developing countries. Negotiations are often madeone sided by a developing country's lack of information, technical unpreparedness, andpolitical and institutional weaknesses. Suspicions and disagreements remain, particularly
concerning the introduction of new technologies, the development of natural resources, andthe use of the environment. If multinationals are to play a larger role in development, theseconflicts and suspicions must be reduced.
61. Strengthening the bargaining posture and response of developing countries vis a vis
transnationals is therefore critical. Where nations lack indigenous capacity to deal with large
TNCs, regional and other international institutions should assist. As indicated earlier, they
could expand existing help in the form of model agreements with transnationals for different
situations, such an lease agreements for the exploitation of a mineral resource. They could also
field technical assistance and advisory teams when a country negotiates with a transnational.
62. Transnational can have a substantial impact on the environment and resources of othercountries and on the global commons. Both the home and host countries of TNCs share
responsibilities and should work together to strengthen policies in this sphere. For example,
information on policies and standards applied to and followed by corporations when investingin their own home country, especially concerning hazardous technologies, should be provided
to host countries. Moreover, the policies of some industrialized countries that major
investments are subject to prior environmental assessment should be considered for
application to investments made elsewhere and should be broadened to include sustainability
criteria. The information and recommendations thus arrived at should be shared with the hostcountries, which of course would retain the final responsibility.
63. Despite their importance, international measures regarding transnational have been
generally lacking and have proved extremely difficult to negotiate. The codes of conduct fortransnational corporations formulated by the OECD and under discussion in the UN should
deal explicitly with environmental matters and the objective of sustainable development. Moredetailed and specific instruments are needed for other problems. In particular, whenintroducing a new technology, plant, product, or process, or when setting up a joint venture ina developing country, the parties involved must also recognize and accept certain special
responsibilities. (See Chapter 8.)

4. Broadening the Technological Base
64. The promotion of resource productivity is largely the work of domestic economic policy.
But the international economy impinges on possibilities for productivity improvement inseveral ways, particularly in the transfer of technology from one country to another.

4.1 The Diffusion of Environmentally Sound Technologies
65. The promotion of sustainable development will require an organized effort to develop anddiffuse new technologies, such as for agricultural production, renewable energy systems, andpollution control. Much of this effort will be based on the international exchange of technology:
through trade in improved equipment, technology-transfer agreements, provision of experts,
research collaboration, and so on. Hence the procedures and policies that influence theseexchanges must stimulate innovation and ensure ready and widespread access toenvironmentally sound technologies.
66. The real challenge is to ensure that the new technologies reach all those who need them,overcoming such problems as the lack of information and in some cases an inability to pay forcommercially developed technologies. The measures required at the national level to deal withthese problems are discussed in Part II of this report. However, both these issues also arise in
the international diffusion of technology.

Transfer of technology should be also looked upon as being a social process.
Actually, ideally, it is the people themselves who have to make the selection, not
us. So, to sum it up I think, talking about technology it is very important to,perhaps, understand that we are dealing here with a process of change.
Technologies cannot be directly transferred except by relating this to a social
process. So, actually technology is not an independent variable in this case, but it
is very much dependent of social change.
M. Nashihin Hasan
Speaker from the floor
WCED Public Hearing
Jakarta, 26 March 1985

67. Developing countries paid about $2 billion in 1960 by way of royalties and fees, mainly toindustrial countries./28 The gap in scientific and technological capabilities is particularly widein areas of direct relevance to the objectives of sustainable development, including
biotechnology and genetic engineering, new energy sources, new materials and substitutes,
and low-waste and non-polluting technologies.
68. The principal policy issue as regards the impact of payments is the impact of patents andproprietary rights. In 1980, industrialized market economies accounted for 65 per cent of theworld total of patents granted, and the socialist countries of Eastern Europe held 29 per
cent./29 Developing countries held only 6 per cent, and most of these had been granted to
non-residents. Proprietary rights are a key element in the commercial development oftechnology. But their application in certain areas may hamper the diffusion of environmentallysound technologies and may increase inequities.
69. In the past, publicly funded research provided new technology to small producers,
particularly farmers, on a full or subsidized basis. The situation is not very different now, andin areas such as new seed varieties there is some reason to believe proprietary rights could act
as a major barrier to developing countries' acquisition of new technologies. International
cooperation is essential to maintain the flow of genetic material and to ensure an equitable
sharing of gains.

4.2 Building Up Technological Capabilities in Developing Countries
70. At present, most of the global research and development effort is devoted to military
purposes or the commercial objectives of large corporations. Little of this is of direct relevanceto conditions in developing countries. In many areas the gap in technological capabilities isnarrowing, but these efforts must be supported by international assistance, especially in such
key areas as biotechnology. Unless action is taken to accumulate biological knowledge, valuable
information as well as vital genetic variety will be lost forever, and developing countries will be
at a permanent disadvantage in adapting the new biotechnologies to their own needs.
71. Developing countries therefore have to work, individually and together, to build up theirtechnological capabilities. The creation and enhancement of the infrastructure for research andtechnology is a precondition for such cooperation. The countries concerned could share theburden by establishing cooperative research projects along the lines of the International
Agricultural Research Centres./30 Mission-oriented cooperative research ventures could be
developed in areas such as dryland agriculture, tropical forestry, pollution control in small
enterprises, and low-cost housing. Specific responsibilities would be assigned to institutions
and corporations in the participating countries, and the agreement could provide for theequitable sharing and widespread diffusion of the technologies developed.

IV. A Sustainable World Economy
72. If large parts of the developing world are to avert economic, social, and environmental
catastrophes, it is essential that global economic growth be revitalized. In practical terms, thismeans more rapid economic growth in both industrial and developing countries, freer market
access for the products of developing countries, lower interest rates, greater technology
transfer, and significantly larger capital flows, both concessional and commercial.
73. But many people fear that a more rapidly growing world economy will apply environmentalpressures that are no more sustainable than the pressures presented by growing poverty. The
increased demand for energy and other non-renewable raw materials could significantly raise
the price of these items relative to other goods.
74. The Commission's overall assessment is that the international economy must speed up
world growth while respecting the environmental constraints. Some favourable trends havebeen noted in the pattern of consumption and production in industrial countries, whichcollectively still consume most of the world's non-renewable resources.
75. Sustaining these trends will make it easier for developing countries to grow by diversifying
their own economies. But for them to emerge from dependence a general acceleration of global
economic growth is not enough. This would mean a mere perpetuation of existing economic
patterns, though perhaps at a higher level of incomes. It must be ensured that the economies
of developing countries grow fast enough to outpace their growing internal problems and fastenough for that first leap needed to acquire momentum. A continuation of economic growthand diversification, along with the development of technological and managerial skills, will help
developing countries mitigate the strains on the rural environment, raise productivity andconsumption standards, and allow nations to move beyond dependence on one or two primary
products for their export earnings.
76. Future patterns of agricultural and forestry development, energy use, industrialization, andhuman settlements can be made far less material-intensive (see Chapters 5, 7, 8, and 9), andhence both more economically and environmentally efficient. Under these conditions, a newera of growth in the world economy can widen the options available to developing countries.
77. Reforms at an international level are now needed to deal simultaneously with economic andecological aspects in ways that allow the world economy to stimulate the growth of developing
countries while giving greater weight to environmental concerns. Such an agenda requires deep

commitment by all countries to the satisfactory working of multilateral institutions, such as themultilateral development banks; to the making and observance of international rules in fields
such as trade and investment; and to constructive dialogue on the many issues where national
interests do not immediately coincide but where negotiation could help to reconcile them.
78. The Commission therefore regrets but cannot ignore the recent decline in multilateral
cooperation in general and a negative attitude to dialogue on development in particular. At firstsight, the introduction of an environmental dimension further complicates the search for suchcooperation and dialogue. But it also injects an additional element of mutual self-interest, sincea failure to address the interaction between resource depletion and rising poverty will
accelerate global ecological deterioration.
79. New dimensions of multilateralism are essential to human progress. The Commission feels
confident that the mutual interests involved in environment and development issues can help
generate the needed momentum and can secure the necessary international economic changes
that it will make possible.

Footnotes
1/ Department of International Economic and Social Affairs (DIESA), Doubling Development
Finance: Meeting a Global Challenge. Views and Recommendations of theCommittee on Development Planning (New York: UN, 1986)
2/ Ibid.
3/ World Bank, Financing Adjustment with Growth in Sub-Saharan Africa(Washington, DC, 1986).
4/ IMF, World Economic Outlook, October 1986.
5/ UN, World Economic Survey 1986 (New York, 1986).
6/ World Bank, op. cit.
7/ Ibid.
8/ UN, General Assembly, 'The Critical Economic Situation in Africa: Report of the Secretary
General', A/S-13/2, New York, 20 May 1986.
9/ Organization of African Unity Assembly of Heads of State of Government, Africa's
Priority Programme of Action 1986-1991 (Addis Ababa, 1985).
10/ UN General Assembly, United Nations Programme of Action for African
Economic Recovery and Development (New York, 1986).
11/ World Bank, op. cit.
12/ Bank of International Settlements, International Banking and Financial Markets
Developments. (Basle, 1986).
13/ Inter-American Development Bank, Economic and Social Progress in Latin
America (Washington, DC, 1986).

14/ Unpublished data from UN Economic Commission on Latin America.
15/ Ibid.
16/ See, for example, UN, 'Programme of Action on a New International Economic Order',General Assembly Resolution 3202 (S-VI), 1 May 1974.
17/ see GATT, International Trade 1985-86 (Geneva, 1986).
18/ UNCTAD, Handbook of International Trade and Development Statistics, 1977
and 1985 Supplements (New York: UN, 1977 and 1985).
19/ Ibid.
20/ UNCTAD, Statistical Pocketbook (New York: UN, 1984).
21/ Ibid.
22/ UNCTAD, Trade and Development Report (New York: UN, 1986).
23/ Alister MacIntyre, UNCTAD, statement at WCED Public Hearings, Oslo, 1985.
24/ The Common Fund is an international arrangement for the stabilization of prices for agroup of commodities of particular interest to developing countries. The Second Window of thefund is meant to provide resources for promotional and research measures.
25/ I. Halter and J.H. Loudon, 'Environmental Costs and the Patterns of North-South Trade',prepared for WCED, 1986.
26/ Ibid.
27/ UN Centre on Transnational Corporations, Transnational Corporations in World
Development Third Survey (New York: UN, 1983).
28/ Ibid.
29/ Commonwealth Working Group, Technological Change (London: Commonwealth
Secretariat, 1985).
30/ The reference is to the activities of the international institutes that work under theumbrella of the Consultative Group on International Agricultural Research of the World Bank.

Our Common Future, Chapter 4: Population and Human Resources

I. The Links with Environment and Development
II. The Population Perspective
1. Growth in Numbers
2. Changes in Mobility
3. Improved Health and Education

III. A Policy Framework
1. Managing Population Growth
2. Managing Distribution and Mobility
3. From Liability to Asset
3.1 Improving Health
3.2 Broadening Education
3.3 Empowering Vulnerable Groups

Footnotes

Chapter 4: Population and Human Resources
1. In 1985. some 80 million people were added to a world population of 4.8 billion. Each year
the number of human beings increases, but the amount of natural resources with which tosustain this population, to improve the quality of human lives. and to eliminate mass poverty
remains finite. On the other hand, expanding knowledge increases the productivity ofresources.
2. Present rates of population growth cannot continue. They already compromise many
governments' abilities to provide education, health care, and food security for people, muchless their abilities to raise living standards. This gap between numbers and resources is all themore compelling because so much of the population growth is concentrated in low-income
countries, ecologically disadvantaged regions, and poor households.
3. Yet the population issue is not solely about numbers. And poverty and resource degradation
can exist on thinly populated lands, such as the drylands and the tropical forests. People are
the ultimate resource. Improvements in education, health, and nutrition allow them to better
use the resources they command, to stretch them further. In addition, threats to thesustainable use of resources come as much from inequalities in people's access to resources
and from the ways in which they use them as from the sheer numbers of people. Thus concern
over the 'population problem' also calls forth concern for human progress and human equality.
4. Nor are population growth rates the challenge solely of those nations with high rates ofincrease. An additional person in an industrial country consumer far more and places far
greater pressure on natural resources than an additional person in the Third World.
Consumption patterns and preferences are as important as numbers of consumers in theconservation of resources.

5. Thus many governments must work on several fronts to limit population growth; to control
the impact of such growth on resources and, with increasing knowledge, enlarge their range
and improve their productivity; to realize human potential so that people can better husband
and use resources; and to provide people with forms of social security other than large
numbers of children. The means of accomplishing these goals will vary from country tocountry, but all should keep in mind that sustainable economic growth and equitable access toresources are two of the more certain routes towards lower fertility rates.
6. Giving people the means to choose the size of their families is not just a method of keeping
population in balance with resources; it is a way of assuring - especially for women the basic
human right of self-determination. The extent to which facilities for exercising such choices are
made available is itself a measure of a nation's development. In the same way. enhancing
human potential not only promotes development but helps to ensure the right of all to a fulland dignified life.

I. The Links with Environment and Development
7. Population growth and development are linked in complex ways. Economic development
generates resources that can be used to improve education and health. These improvements,
along with associated social changes, reduce both fertility and mortality rates. On the other
hand, high rates of population growth that eat into surpluses available for economic and social
development can hinder improvements in education and health.
8. In the past, the intensification of agriculture and the production of higher yields helped
nations cope with the increasing population pressures on available land. Migration andinternational trade in food and fuels eased the pressure on local resources. They permitted andhelped sustain the high population densities of some industrialized countries.
9. The situation is different in most of the developing world. There, improvements in medicine
and public health have led to a sharp drop in mortality rates and have accelerated population
growth rates to unprecedented levels. But fertility rates remain high; much human potential
remains unrealized, and economic development is stalled. Agricultural intensification can gosome way towards restoring a balance between food production and population, but there arelimits beyond which intensification cannot go. (See Box 4-1.)
10. The very possibility of development can be compromised by high population growth rates.
Moreover, most developing countries do not have the resources to wait for a few generations
before population stabilizes. The option of migration to new lands is virtually closed. And low
levels of economic and social development combined with changing trade production
relationships limit possibilities of using international trade to augment access to resources.
Hence, in the absence of deliberate measures, the imbalance between population growth andresource development will worsen.
11. Population pressure is already forcing traditional farmers to work harder, often on
shrinking fame on marginal land, just to maintain household income. In Africa and Asia, rural
population nearly doubled between 1950 and 1985, with a corresponding decline in landavailability./1 Rapid population growth also creates urban economic and social problems thatthreaten to make cities wholly unmanageable. (See Chapter 9.)
12. Larger investments will be needed just to maintain the current inadequate levels of accessto education, health care, and other services. In many cases, the resources required are justnot available. Health, housing conditions, and the quality of education and public services alldeteriorate; unemployment, urban drift, and social unrest increase.

Box 4-1
The Food/Population Balance
The potential population-supporting capacity of land in developing countries
has been assessed in a joint study by FAO and the International Institute forApplied Systems Analysis. Data on soil and land characteristics were combinedwith climatic data to calculate the potential yields of major crops, to select the
optimum crops, and to derive the overall potential for calorie production.
Three levels of crop production were calculated: the first at a low level oftechnology with no fertilizer or chemicals, traditional crop varieties, and no soil
conservation; the second at an intermediate level, where the most productive
crop mix is used on half the land along with fertilizers, improved varieties, andsome soil conservation; and the third at a high level of technology with an ideal
crop mix and technology on all lands. The population-supporting capacity wasdetermined by dividing the total calorie production by a minimum per capita
intake level. This figure was then compared with the medium-variant UN
population projections.
The 117 developing countries covered in the study, taken together, can produce
enough food to feed one-and-a-half times their projected population in the year
2000. even at a low level of technology. But the picture is less hopeful in thecases of individual countries. At the low level of technology, 64 countries with apopulation of around 1.1 billion lack the resources to feed themselves. With themost advanced agricultural methods, the number of countries where foodproduction potential would fall short of requirements drops to 19, with a total
population of 100 million. Most are high-income West Asian countries andsome small island states. Many of these countries have the capacity to earnenough foreign exchange to import their food requirements. In the others, thereal issue is the modernization of agriculture on a sustainable basis.
Some researchers have assessed the 'theoretical' potential for global foodproduction. One study assumes that the area under food production can bearound 1.5 billion hectares (close to the current level) and that average yields
could go up to 5 tons of grain equivalent per hectare (as against the present
average of 2 tons of grain equivalent}. Allowing for production from rangelands
and marine sources, the total 'potential' is placed at 8 billion tons of grain
equivalent.
How many people can this sustain? The present global average consumption ofplant energy for food, seed, and animal feed amounts to about 6,000 calories
daily, with a range among countries of 3,000-15,000 calories, depending on thelevel of meat consumption. On this basis, the potential production could
sustain a little more than 11 billion people. But if the average consumption rises
substantially - say, to 9,000 calories - the population carrying capacity of the
Earth comes down to 7.5 billion. These figures could be substantially higher if
the area under food production and the productivity of 3 billion hectares ofpermanent pastures ran be increased on a sustainable basis. Nevertheless, thedata do suggest, that meeting the food needs of an ultimate world population ofaround 10 billion would require tone changes in food habits, as well as greatly
improving the efficiency of traditional agriculture.
B. Gilland. 'Considerations on World Population and Food Supply'. Population andDevelopment Review. Vol. 9. No. 2. pp. 203-11; G M. Higgins et al., Potential
Population supporting Capacities of Lands in the Developing World(Rome: FAO. 1982); D.J. Maler (ed.). Rapid Population Growth and Human
Carrying Capacity. Staff Working Papers No. 690 (Washington, D.C.: World Bank,
1985).

13. Industrial countries seriously concerned with high population growth rates in other parts of
the world have obligations beyond simply supplying aid packages of family planning hardware.
Economic development, through its indirect impact on social and cultural factors, lowers
fertility rates. International policies that interfere with economic development thus interferewith a developing nation's ability to manage its population growth. A concern for population
growth must therefore be a part of a broader concern for a more rapid rate of economic andsocial development in the developing countries.
14. In the final analysis, and in both the developed and developing worlds, the population issue
is about humane and not about numbers. It is misleading and an injustice to the humancondition to see people merely fit; consumers. Their well being and security old age security,
declining child mortality, health care, and so on are the goal o( development Almost any
activity that increases well-being and security lessens peoples' desires to have more children
than they and national ecosystems can support.

II. The Population Perspective
1. Growth in Numbers
15. Population growth accelerated in the middle of the 18th century with the advent of theIndustrial Revolution and associated improvements in agriculture, not just in the regions thatare more developed but elsewhere as well. The recent phase of deceleration started around1950 with the sharp reduction in mortality rates in the developing countries.

Since 1970 it has been fashionable to draw a distinction between population andenvironment as two crisis areas, but often times we forget that population is in fact
a very integral part of the environment and therefore when we are addressing
ourselves to population we are looking at not only the physical, biological, andchemical environments, we are also looking at the socio-cultural or socioeconomic environment in which these development programmes are being set.
And population makes much more sense if you are talking of population within acontext.
Dr. J.O. Oucho
Population Studies and Research institute
WCED Public Hearing
Nairobi. 23 Sept 1986

16. Between 1950 and 1985. world population grew at an annual rate of 1.9 per cent, comparedwith 0.8 per cent in the half-century preceding 1950./2 population growth is now concentrated
in the developing regions of Asia, Africa, and Latin America, which accounted for 85 per cent of
the increase of global population since 1950. (See Table 4-1.)
17. The processes of population growth are changing in most developing countries as birth anddeath rates fall. In the early 1950s, practically all developing countries had birth rates over 40
and death rates over 20, the major exception being the low death rates in Latin America.
(These rates refer to the annual number of births and deaths per 1,000 population.) Today thesituation is quite different:
Thirty-two per cent of the people in the Third World live in countries - such as China andthe Republic of Korea - with birth rates below 25 and death rates below 10.
Forty-one per cent are in countries where birth rates have fallen, but not as much as
death rates, and their populations are growing at around 2 per cent - doubling, in otherwords, every 34 years. Such countries include Brazil, India, Indonesia, and Mexico.
The remaining 27 per cent live in countries, such as Algeria, Bangladesh. Iran, andNigeria, where death rates have fallen slightly but birth rates remain high. Overall
population growth is in the range of 2.5 to 3 per cent (doubling every 28 to 23 years),with even higher growth rates in some countries, such as Kenya./3
18. In the industrial world, fertility rates have declined and the population is not growing
rapidly. In fact, it has stabilized in many countries. Still, the population in North America,
Europe, the USSR, and Oceania is expected to increase by 230 million by the year 2025. whichis as many people as live in the United States today.

Table 4-1
World Population 1950-85: Key Facts
Size and Rates
1950

1960

Total Population

1970

1980

1985

(billions)

World

2.5

3.0

3.7

4.4

4.8

More developed regions

0.83

0.94

1.05

1.14

1.17

Less developed regions

1.68

2.07

2.65

3.31

3.66

Annual Growth *(per cent)

World

1.8

2.0

1.9

1.7

More developed regions

1.3

1.0

0.8

0.6

Less developed regions

2.1

2.5

2.3

2.0

Urban Population(per cent)World

29

34

37

40

41

More developed regions

54

67

67

70

72

Less developed regions

17

22

25

29

31

* Data are for growth over previous decade or, for last column, over previous five years.
Source: Department of International Economic and Social Affairs, World Population
Prospects: Estimates and Projections as Assessed in 1984 (New York: UN, 1986)
19. The acceleration of population growth in the Third World and the decline in fertility levels
in industrial countries are (changing age distribution patterns radically. In developing
countries, the young predominate. In 1900, 39 per cent of developing country populations
were younger than 15; the figure for industrialized countries was only 23 per cent./4 Yet inthese countries, the proportion of the elderly is growing. Those 65 or older accounted for 11 percent of the population in 1980; in developing countries, they represented only 4 per cent./5
Thus in the industrial world, relatively fewer people of working age will bear the burden of
supporting relatively larger numbers of older people.
20. A changing age structure helps to set patterns of future population growth. The large
number of young people in developing countries means large numbers of future parents, sothat even if each person produces fewer children. The total number of births will continue toincrease. Population growth can continue to grow for some decades after fertility rates decline
to the 'replacement level' of slightly over two children on average per couple. Thus in manynations, high population growth over the next few generations are assured.
21. Population projections indicate an increase in global population from 4.8 billion in 1985 to
6.1 billion by 2000, and to 8.2 billion by 2025. (See Table 4 2.) More than 90 pet cent of thisincrease is expected in developing regions. Large differences exist among countries in theseareas, and the momentum of population growth is higher in Africa than in Latin America or
Asia. In some developing countries, such as China, population growth rates are already well
below 2 per cent and are expected to fall below 1 per cent by the beginning of the next
century./6
22. Reflecting the 'momentum' of population growth, long term UN projections show that at
the global level:
if replacement-level fertility is reached in 2010, global population will stabilize at 7.7
billion by 2060;
if this rate is reached in 2025, population will stabilize at 10.2 billion by 2095;
if. however, the rate is reached only in 2065, global population in 2100 would be 14.2
billion./7
23. These projections show that the world has real choices. Policies to bring down fertility rates
could make a difference of billions to the global population next century. The greater part ofthe differences between the three variants is accounted for by South Asia. Africa, and Latin
America. Hence much depends on the effectiveness of population policies in these regions.

2. Changes in Mobility
24. The number of people in Europe, Japan. North America. and the Soviet Union quintupledbetween 1750 and 1950. and these regions' share in world population increased sharply overthin period./8 By the latter part of the 19th century, there was growing concern about
population pressures in Europe. Migration to North America, Australia, and New Zealandhelped to some extent. At its peak between 1881 and 1910, permanent emigration absorbed
nearly 20 per rent of the increase in population in Europe./9
25. Today, however, migration in not a major factor in determining population distribution
among countries. Between 1970 and 1980 permanent emigration as a percentage of population
increase fell to 4 per cent in Europe and was only 2.5 per cent in Latin America. The
corresponding percentages in Asia and Africa were very much lower./10 Thus the option ofemigration to new lands has not been and will not be a significant element in relieving
demographic pressures in developing countries In effect, this reduces the time available tobring population into balance with resources.
26. Within countries, populations are more mobile. Improved communications have enabledlarge movements of people. Sometimes as a natural response to the growth of economic
opportunities in different places. Some governments have actively encouraged migration fromdensely to sparsely settled areas. A more recent phenomenon is the flight of 'ecologicalrefugees' from areas of environmental degradation.

Table 4-2
Current and Projected Population Size and Growth Rates*
Population

1985

RegionAnnual Growth Rate

2000

2025

1950

1985

2000

to

to

to

1985

2000

2025

(billion)(per cent)

World

4.8

6.1

8.2

1.9

1.6

1.2

Africa

0.66

0.87

1.62

2.6

3.1

2.5

Latin America

0.41

0.55

0.78

2.6

2.0

1.4

Asia

2.82

3.55

4.54

2.1

1.6

1.0

North America

0.26

0.30

0.35

1.3

0.8

0.6

Europe

0.49

0.51

0.52

0.7

0.3

0.1

USSR

0.28

0.31

0.37

1.7

0.8

0.6

Oceania

0.02

0.03

0.04

1.9

1.4

0.9

* Medium-variant projections.
Source: Department of International Economic and Social Affairs, World Population
Prospects; Estimates and Projections as Assessed in 1984 (New York: UN, 1986).

27. Much of the movement is from countryside to city. (See Chapter 9.) In 1985. some 40 per
cent of the world's population lived in cities; the magnitude of the urban drift can be seen in
the fact that since 1950, the increase in urban population has been larger than the increase inrural population both in percentage and in absolute terms. This shift is most striking indeveloping countries, where the number of city-dwellers quadrupled during this period./11

3. Improved Health and Education
28. Improvements in the health and education of all, but especially of women and in
conjunction with other social changes that raise the status of women, can have a profoundeffect in bringing down population growth rates. In an initial period, however, better healthcare means that more babies live to reproduce and that women reproduce over longer timespans.

Table 4-3
Health Indicators
Life Expectancy at Birth
1950-55
Region1980-85(years)Infant Mortality Rates
1960-65

1980-85(deaths per 1,000 live births)

World

49.9

64.6

117

81

Africa

37.5

49.7

157

114

Asia

41.2

57.9

133

87

South America

52.3

64.0

101

64

North America

64.4

71.1

43

27

Europe

65.3

73.2

37

16

USSR

61.7

70.9

32

25

Oceania

61.0

67.6

55

39

Source: WCED, based on data in World Resources Institute / International Institute forEnvironment and Development, World Resources 1986 (New York: Basic Books, 1986).
29. The 'health status' of a society is a complex concept that cannot be measured easily. Two
widely available indicators that reflect at least some aspects of a given society's health are life
expectancy and infant mortality rates. (See Table 4-3.) These statistics suggest that health has
improved virtually everywhere; and, at least with regard to these two indicators, the gap
between industrial and developing regions has narrowed.
30. Many factors can increase life expectancy and reduce mortality rates: two are worthemphasizing. First, although generally speaking national wealth buys national health, somerelatively poor nations and areas, such as China, Sri Lanka, and the Indian state of Kerala, haveachieved remarkable success in lowering infant mortality and improving health throughincreases in education, especially of women; the establishment of primary health clinics; andother health care programmes./12 Second, the principal reductions in mortality rates in theindustrial world came about before the advent of modern drugs; they were due to improved
nutrition, housing, and hygiene. The recent gains in developing countries have also been
largely due to public health programmes, particularly for the control of communicable diseases.
31. Education is another key dimension of 'population quality'. The past few decades have seena great expansion of educational facilities in virtually all countries. In terms of school
enrolment, literacy rates, the growth in technical education, and the development of scientificskills, much progress has been achieved. (See Table 4-4.)

III. A Policy Framework
32. Excessive population growth diffuses the fruits of development over increasing numbers
instead of improving living standards in many developing countries: a reduction of current
growth rates is an imperative for sustainable development. The critical issues are the balance
between population size and available resources and the rate of population growth in relation
to the capacity of the economy to provide for the basic needs of the population, not just today
but for generations. Such a long-term view is necessary because attitudes to fertility rarelychange rapidly and because, even after fertility starts declining, past increases in population
impart a momentum of growth as people reach child-bearing age. However a nation proceeds
towards the goals of sustainable development and lower fertility levels, the two are intimately
linked and mutually reinforcing.
33. Measures to influence population size cannot be effective in isolation from otherenvironment/development issues. The number, density, movement, and growth rate of a
population cannot be influenced in the short run if these efforts are being overwhelmed byadverse patterns of development in other areas. Population policies must have a broader focus
than controlling numbers: Measures to improve the quality of human resources in terms ofhealth, education, and social development are as important.
34. A first step may be for governments to abandon the false division between 'productive' or'economic' expenditures and 'social' expenditures. Policymakers must realize that spending on
population activities and on other efforts to raise human potential is crucial to a nation's
economic and productive activities and to achieving sustainable human progress - the end forwhich a government exists.

1. Managing Population Growth
35. Progress in population policies is uneven. Some countries with serious population
problems have comprehensive policies. Some go no further than the promotion of familyplanning. Some do not do even that.
36. A population policy should set out and pursue broad national demographic goals in relation
to other socio-economic objectives. Social and cultural factors dominate all others in affecting
fertility. The most important of these is the roles women play in the family, the economy, andthe society at large Fertility rates fall as women's employment opportunities outside the homeand farm, their access to education, and their age at marriage all rise. Hence policies meant tolower fertility rates not only must include economic incentives and disincentives, but must aim
to improve the position of women in society. Such policies should essentially promote women's
rights.

Table 4-4

Male and Female Enrolment Ratios, by Region, 1960 and 1982
Male
Region1960

Female
1982

1960

1982

World
First Level

92.2

101.3

7.1

87.3

Second Level

31.3

53.3

23.1

42.5

First Level

56.2

89.2

32.0

72.1

Second Level

7.3

29.6

2.9

19.5

75.0

106.2

71.2

103.3

14.9

46.6

13.6

48.5

First Level

117.4

119.7

116.4

119.9

Second Level

69.4

85.4

71.4

86.6

First Level

94.9

100.1

63.1

79.9

Second Level

29.3

49.3

16.6

32.9

First Level

103.4

105.4

102.7

104.5

Second Level

46.5

76.2

44.6

81.3

First Level

102.2

102.9

100.7

98.9

Second Level

53.8

71.1

58.8

72.0

AfricaLatin America and Caribbean
First Level
Second Level
North America

Asia

Europe and USSR

Oceania

Note; The figures are percentages of appropriate groups receiving a given level of education.
As many older children are in primary school percentages can be over 100.
Source: WCED, based on data in UNESCO, 'A Summary Statistical Review of Education in
the World, 1960-1982, Paris, July 1984.
37. Poverty breeds high rates of population growth: Families poor in income, employment, andsocial security need children first to work and later to sustain elderly parents. Measures toprovide an adequate livelihood for poor households, to establish and enforce minimum-age
child labour laws, and to provide publicly financed social security will all lower fertility rates.

Improved public health and child nutrition programmes that bring down infant mortality rates- so parents do not need 'extra' children as insurance against child death - can also help toreduce fertility levels.
The environment is the business of everybody, development is the business ofeverybody, life and living is the business of everybody. I think the solution will befound in encouraging mass environmental literacy so that there can be democratic
and literate decisions, because if decisions are taken by a few without theincorporation of the opinion of the masses, the NGOs especially included, thelikelihood is that the situations will not succeed. They will be imposed from above,
the people will not respond positively to them, and the project is lost before it islaunched.
Joseph Ouma
Dean of School of Environmental Studies, Moi University
WCED Public Hearing
Nairobi, 23 Sept 1986

38. All these programmes are effective in bringing down birth rates only when their benefits areshared by the majority. Societies that attempt to spread the benefits of economic growth to awider segment of the population may do better at lowering birth rates than societies with both
faster and higher levels of economic growth but a less even sharing of the benefits of thatgrowth.
39. Thus developing-country population strategies must deal not only with the population
variable as such but also with the underlying social and economic conditions ofunderdevelopment. They must be multifaceted campaigns: to strengthen social, cultural, andeconomic motivations for couples to have small families and. through family planning
programmes, to provide to all who want them the education, technological means, and services
required to control family size.
40. Family planning services in many developing countries suffer by being isolated from otherprogrammes that reduce fertility and even from those that increase motivation to use suchservices. They remain separate both in design and implementation from such fertility-related
programmes as nutrition, public health, mother and child care, and preschool education thattake place in the same area and that are often funded by the same agency.
41. Such services must therefore be integrated with other efforts to improve access to healthcare and education. The clinical support needed for most modern contraceptive methods
makes family planning services heavily dependent on the health system. Some governments
have successfully combined population programme: with health, education, and ruraldevelopment projects, and implemented them as part of major socio-economic programmes invillages or regions. This integration increases motivation, improves access, and raises theeffectiveness of investments in family planning.
42. Only about 1.5 per cent of official development aid now goes for population assistance./13
Regrettably, some donor countries have cut back on their assistance for multilateral population
programmes and so weakened them; this must be reversed.
43. Zimbabwe is one nation that has successfully integrated its family planning efforts not onlywith its rural health services but also with efforts to improve women's abilities to organize

group activities and earn money through their own labour. The government's initial efforts
were aimed less at limiting population growth than at assisting women to space births in theinterests of mother and child health and at helping infertile women to bear children. But
gradually families have begun to use the contraceptives made available for child spacing as away to limit fertility. Zimbabwe now leads sub-Saharan Africa in the use of modern
contraceptive methods./14

2. Managing Distribution and Mobility
44. Population distribution across a country's different regions is influenced by thegeographical spread of economic activity and opportunity. Most countries are committed intheory to balancing regional development, but are rarely able to do this in practice.
Governments able to spread employment opportunities throughout their nations andespecially through their countrysides will thus limit the rapid and often uncontrolled growth of
one or two cities. China's effort to support village-level industries in the countryside is perhaps
the most ambitious of this sort of national programme.
45. Migration from countryside to city is not in itself a bad thing; it is part of the process of
economic development and diversification. The issue is not so much the overall rural urban
shift but the distribution of urban growth between large metropolitan cities and smaller urban
settlements. (See Chapter 9.)
46. A commitment to rural development implies more attention to realizing the development
potential of all regions, particularly those that are ecologically disadvantaged (See Chapter 6.)
This would help reduce migration from these areas due to lack of opportunities. But
governments should avoid going too far in the opposite direction, encouraging people to coveinto sparsely populated areas such as tropical moist forests, where the land may not be able toprovide sustainable livelihoods.

Demographic phenomena constitute the heart of the African Development
problematique. They are the data that lead most analysts to project a continuingand deepening crisis in Africa. There is no doubt of the imperative and urgent needfor a far reaching population policy to be adopted and vigorously implemented by
African governments.
One issue of relevance that requires further research is the use of the tax system
as a means for controlling population growth and discouraging rural-urban
migration.
To slow down population growth, should families without children be given a tax
incentive or tax break? Should a tax penalty be imposed for each child after a fixed
number of children, considering that the tax system has not solved the population
migration problem?
Adebayo Adedeji
Executive Director, Economic Commission for Africa
WCED Public Hearing
Harare, 18 Sept 1986

3. From Liability to Asset47. When a population exceeds the carrying capacity of the available resources, it can become aliability in efforts to improve people's welfare. But talking of population just as numbers
glosses over an important point: People are also a creative resource, and this creativity is anasset societies must tap. To nurture and enhance that asset, people's physical well-being must
be improved through better nutrition, health care, and so on. And education must be provided
to help them become more capable and creative, skilful, productive, and better able to deal
with day-to-day problems. All this has to be achieved through access to and participation in theprocesses of sustainable development.

3.1 Improving Health

We in Asia, I feel, want to have an equilibrium between the spiritual and material
life. I noticed that you have tried to separate religion from the technological side oflife. Is that not exactly, the mistake in the West in developing technology, without
ethics, without religion? If that is the case, and we have the chance to develop a
new direction, should we not advise the group on technology to pursue a different
kind of technology which has as its base not only the rationality, but also thespiritual aspect? Is this a dream or is this something we cannot avoid?
Speaker from the floor
WCED Public Hearing
Jakarta, 26 March 1985

48. Good health is the foundation of human welfare and productivity. Hence a broad-based
health policy is essential for sustainable development. In the developing world, the criticalproblems of ill health are closely related to environmental conditions and development
problems.
49. Malaria is the most important parasitic disease in the tropics, and its prevalence is closely
related to wastewater disposal and drainage. Large dams and irrigation systems have led to
sharp increases in the incidence of schistosomiasis (snail fever) in many areas. Inadequacies inwater supply and sanitation are direct causes of other widespread and debilitating diseases
such as diarrhoeas and various worm infestations.
50. Though much has been achieved in recent years, 1.7 billion people lack access to cleanwater, and 1.2 billion to adequate sanitation./15 Many diseases can be controlled not justthrough therapeutic interventions but also through improvements in rural water supply,
sanitation, and health education. In this sense, they really require a developmental solution. In
the developing world, the number of water taps nearby is a better indication of the health of acommunity than is the number of hospital beds.
51. Other examples of links between development, environmental conditions, and healthinclude air pollution and the respiratory illnesses it brings, the impact of housing conditions on
the spread of tuberculosis, the effects of carcinogens and toxic substances, and the exposure tohazards in the workplace and elsewhere.
52. Many health problems arise from the nutritional deficiencies that occur in virtually all
developing countries, but most acutely in low-income areas. Most malnutrition is related to ashortage of calories or protein or both, but some diets also lack specific elements andcompounds, such as iron and iodine. Health will be greatly improved in low-income areas bypolicies that lead to the production of more of the cheap foods the poor traditionally eat coarse grains and root crops.
53. These health, nutrition, environment, and development links imply that health policy
cannot be conceived of purely in terms of curative or preventive medicine, or even in terms ofgreater attention to public health. Integrated approaches are needed that reflect key healthobjectives in areas such as food production; water supply and sanitation: industrial policy,
particularly with regard to safety and pollution; and the planning of human settlements.
Beyond this, it is necessary to identify vulnerable groups and their health risks and to ensurethat the socio-economic factors that underlie these risks are taken into account in other areasof development policy.
54. Hence. WHO's 'Health for All' strategy should be broadened far beyond the provision of
medical workers and clinics, to cover health-related interventions in all development
activities./16 Moreover, this broader approach must be reflected in institutional arrangements
to coordinate all such activities effectively.
55. Within the narrower area of health care, providing primary health care facilities and making
sure that everyone has the opportunity to use them are appropriate starting points. Maternaland child health care are also particularly important. The critical elements here are relatively
inexpensive and can have a profound impact on health and well-being. An organized system oftrained birth attendants, protection against tetanus and other childbirth infections, andsupplemental feeding can dramatically reduce maternal mortality. Similarly, low-costprogrammes to assure immunization, teach and supply oral dehydration therapy against
diarrhoeas, and encourage breast-feeding (which in turn can reduce fertility) can increase childsurvival rates dramatically.
56. Health care must be supplemented by effective health education. Some parts of the Third
World may soon face growing numbers of the illnesses associated with life-styles in industrial
nations - cancer and heart disease especially. Few developing nations can afford the expensive
treatment required for the latter diseases, and should begin efforts now to educate theircitizens on the dangers of smoking and of high-fat diets.
57. A rapid spread of acquired immune deficiency syndrome (AIDS) in both developed anddeveloping nations could drastically alter all countries' health priorities. AIDS is threatening tokill millions of people and disrupt the economies of many countries. Governments shouldovercome any lingering shyness and rapidly educate their people about this syndrome andabout the ways in which it is spread. International cooperation on research and the handling of
the disease is essential.
58. Another major health problem with international ramifications is the increase in drug
addiction. It is a problem closely linked to organized crime in the production of drugs, inlarge-scale international traffic in these drugs, and in the networks for distribution. It distorts
the economy in many poor producing areas and destroys people the world over. International
cooperation is essential in tackling this scourge. Some countries have to deploy considerable
financial resources to halt the production and traffic in narcotics and to promote crop
diversification and rehabilitation schemes in the producing areas, which are generally
impoverished. To sustain their efforts, greater international assistance is essential
59. Most medical research focuses on pharmaceuticals, vaccines. and other technologicalinterventions for disease management. Much of this research is directed at the diseases ofindustrialized countries, as their treatment accounts for a substantial part of the sales ofpharmaceutical companies. More research is urgently needed on the environmentally relatedtropical diseases that are the major health problem in the Third World, This research should
focus not merely on new medicines, but also on public health measures to control these
diseases. Existing arrangements for international collaboration on tropical disease researchshould be greatly strengthened.

Education and communication are vitally important in order to impress eachindividual of his or her responsibility regarding the healthy future of the earth. The
best way for students to recognize that their action can make a difference is tohave projects organized by the school or community on which the students canwork. Once convinced that they can help, people tend to change both their attitude
and their behaviour. New attitudes towards the environment will be reflected indecisions at home and in corporate boardrooms around the world.
Bernice Goldsmith
Student, North Toronto Collegiate
WCED Public Hearing
Ottawa, 26-27 May 1986

3.2 Broadening Education
60. Human resource development demands knowledge and skills to help people improve theireconomic performance. Sustainable development requires changes in values and attitudes
towards environment and development - indeed, towards society and work at home, on farms,
and in factories. The world's religions could help provide direction and motivation in forming
new values that would stress individual and joint responsibility towards the environment andtowards nurturing harmony between humanity and environment.
61. Education should also be geared towards making people more capable of dealing withproblems of overcrowding and excessive population densities, and better able to improve what
could be called 'social carrying capacities'. This is essential to prevent ruptures in the social
fabric, and schooling should enhance the levels of tolerance and empathy required for living ina crowded world. Improved health, lower fertility, and better nutrition will depend on greater
literacy and social and civic responsibility. Education can induce all these, and can enhance asociety's ability to overcome poverty, increase incomes, improve health and nutrition, andreduce family size.
62. The investment in education and the growth in school enrolment during the past few
decades are signs of progress. Access to education is increasing and will continue to do so.
Today almost all the world's boys are getting some form of primary education. In Asia andAfrica, however, enrolment rates for girls are much lower than for boys at all levels. A large gap
also exists between developed and developing countries in enrolment rates beyond primaryschools, as Table 4-4 indicated.
63. UN projections of enrolment rates for the year 2000 suggest a continuation of thesetrends. Thus despite the growth in primary education, illiteracy will continue to rise in terms ofsheer numbers: there will be more than 900 million people unable to read and write at the endof the century. By then, girls' enrolment rates are still expected to be below the current rates
for boys in Asia. As for secondary education, developing countries are not expected to attaineven the 1960 industrial country levels by the year 2000./17

64. Sustainable development requires that these trends be corrected. The main task of
education policy must be to make literacy universal and to close the gaps between male andfemale enrolment rates. Realizing these goals would improve individual productivity andearnings, as well as personal attitudes to health, nutrition, and child-bearing. It can also instilla greater awareness of everyday environmental factors. Facilities for education beyond primaryschool must be expanded to improve skills necessary for pursuing sustainable development.
65. A major problem confronting many countries is the widespread unemployment and theunrest that it leads to. Education has often been unable to provide the skills needed forappropriate employment. This is evident in the large numbers of unemployed people who havebeen trained for white-collar employment in swelling urban populations. Education andtraining should also be directed towards the acquisition of practical and vocational skills, andparticularly towards making people more self-reliant. All this should be supported by efforts tonurture the informal sector and the participation of community organizations.
66. Providing facilities is only the beginning. Education must be improved in quality and in
relevance to local conditions. In many areas, it should be integrated with children's
participation in farm work, a process requiring flexibility in the school system. It should impartknowledge relevant for the proper management of local resources. Rural schools must teachabout local soils, water, and the conservation of both, about deforestation and how thecommunity and the individual can reverse it. Teachers must be trained and the curriculum
developed so that students learn about the agricultural balance sheet of an area.
67. Most people base their understanding of environmental processes and development on
traditional beliefs or on information provided by a conventional education. Many thus remain
ignorant about ways in which they could improve traditional production practices and better
protect the natural resource base. Education should therefore provide comprehensive
knowledge, encompassing and cutting across the social and natural sciences and thehumanities, thus providing insights on the interaction between natural and human resources,
between development and environment.
68. Environmental education should be included in and should run throughout the otherdisciplines of the formal education curriculum at all levels - to foster a sense of responsibility
for the state of the environment and to teach students how to monitor, protect, and improve it.
These objectives cannot be achieved without the involvement of students in the movement fora better environment, through such things as nature clubs and special interest groups. Adult
education, on-the-job training, television, and other less formal methods must be used to reachout to as wide a group of individuals as possible, as environmental issues and knowledge
systems now change radically in the space of a lifetime.
69. A critical point of intervention is during teacher training. The attitudes of teachers will be
key in increasing understanding of the environment and its. links with development. To
enhance the awareness and capabilities of teachers in this area, multilateral and bilateralagencies must provide support for the relevant curriculum development in teacher training
institutions, for the preparation of teaching aids, and for other similar activities. Global
awareness could be fostered by encouraging contacts among teachers from different countries,
for instance in specialized centres set up for this purpose.

I am here as the son of a small nation, the Krenak Indian Nation. We live in thevalley of the Rio Doce. which is the frontier of Espirito Santo with the State ofMinas Gerais. We are a micro-country - a micro-nation.

When the government took our land in the valley of Rio Doce, they wanted to give
us another place somewhere else. But the State, the government will neverunderstand that we do not have another place to go.
The only possible place for the Krenak people to live and to re-establish ourexistence, to speak to our Gods, to speak to our nature, to weave our lives iswhere our God created us. It is useless for the government to put us in a very
beautiful place, in a very good place with a lot of hunting and a lot of fish. The
Krenak people, we continue dying and we die insisting that there is only one place
for us to live.
My heart does not become happy to see humanity's incapacity. I have no pleasure
at all to come here and make these statements. We can no longer see the planetthat we live upon as if it were a chess-board where people just move things
around. We cannot consider the planet as something isolated from the cosmic.
We are not idiots to believe that there is possibility of life for us outside of where
the origin of our life is. Respect our place of living, do not degrade our living
condition, respect this life. We have no arms to cause pressure, the only thing wehave is the right to cry for our dignity and the need to live in our land.
Ailton Krenak
Coordinator of Indian Nations Union
WCED Public Hearing
Sao Paulo. 28-29 Oct 1985

3.3 Empowering Vulnerable Groups
70. The processes of development generally lead to the gradual integration of local
communities into a larger social and economic framework. But some communities - so-called
indigenous or tribal peoples - remain isolated because of such factors as physical barriers tocommunication or marked differences in social and cultural practices. Such groups are found in
North America, in Australia, in the Amazon Basin, in Central America, in the forests and hills ofAsia, in the deserts of North Africa, and elsewhere.
71. The isolation of many such people has meant the preservation of a traditional way of life inclose harmony with the natural environment. Their very survival has depended on theirecological awareness and adaptation. But their isolation has also meant that few of them haveshared in national economic and social development; this may be reflected in their poor health,nutrition, and education.
72. With the gradual advance of organized development into remote regions, these groups are
becoming less isolated. Many live in areas rich in valuable natural resources that planners and'developers' want to exploit, and this exploitation disrupts the local environment so as toendanger traditional ways of life. The legal and institutional changes that accompany organizeddevelopment add to such pressures.
73. Growing interaction with the larger world is increasing the vulnerability of these groups,
since they are often left out of the processes of economic development. Social discrimination,
cultural barriers, and the exclusion of these people from national political processes makesthese groups vulnerable and subject to exploitation. Many groups become dispossessed andmarginalized, and their traditional practices disappear. They become the victims of what could
be described as cultural extinction.
74. These communities are the repositories of vast accumulations of traditional knowledge andexperience that links humanity with its ancient origins. Their disappearance is a loss for thelarger society, which could learn a great deal from their traditional skills in sustainably
managing very complex ecological systems. It is a terrible irony that as formal development
reaches more deeply into rain forests, deserts, and other isolated environments, it tends todestroy the only cultures that have proved able to thrive in these environments.
75. The starting point for a just and humane policy for such groups is the recognition andprotection of their traditional rights to land and the other resources that sustain their way oflife - rights they may define in terms that do not fit into standard legal systems. These groups'
own institutions to regulate rights and obligations are crucial for maintaining the harmony withnature and the environmental awareness characteristic of the traditional way of life. Hence therecognition of traditional rights must go hand in hand with measures to protect the local
institutions that enforce responsibility in resource use. And this recognition must also give
local communities a decisive voice in the decisions about resource use in their area.
76. Protection of traditional rights should be accompanied by positive measures to enhance thewell-being of the community in ways appropriate to the group's life-style. For example,
earnings from traditional activities can be increased through the introduction of marketingarrangements that ensure a fair price for produce, but also through steps to conserve andenhance the resource base and increase resource productivity.
77. Those promoting policies that have an impact on the lives of an isolated, traditional people
must tread a fine line between keeping them in artificial, perhaps unwanted isolation andwantonly destroying their life-styles. Hence broader measures of human resource development
are essential. Health facilities must be provided to supplement and improve traditional
practices; nutritional deficiencies have to be corrected, and educational institutions
established. These steps should precede new projects that open up an area to economic
development. Special efforts should also be made to ensure that the local community canderive the full benefit of such projects, particularly through jobs.
78. In terms of sheer numbers, these isolated, vulnerable groups are small. But their
marginalization is a symptom of a style of development that tends to neglect both human andenvironmental considerations. Hence a more careful and sensitive consideration of theirinterests is a touchstone of a sustainable development policy.

Footnotes
1/ Department of International Economic and Social Affairs (DIESA). World Population
Prospects; Estimates and Projections as Assessed in 1984 (New York: United Nations,1986).
2/ Ibid.
3/ Based on data from UNCTAD, Handbook of International Trade and Development
Statistics 1985 Supplement (New York: 1985).
4/ World Bank, World Development Report 1984 (New York: Oxford University Press,
1984).

5/ Ibid.
6/ DIESA. op. cit.
7/ UN. Population Bulletin of the United Nations. No. 14. 1982 (New York: 1983).
8/ C. Clark, Population Growth and Land Use (New York: St. Martin's Press. 1957).
9/ World Bank. op. cit.
10/ Ibid.
11/ DIESA, op. cit.
12/ WHO, Intersectoral Linkages and Health Development, Case Studies in India(Kerala State), Jamaica. Norway. Sri Lanka and Thailand (Geneva: 1984).
13/ World Bank, op. cit.
14/ L. Timberlake. Only One Earth: Living for the Future (London: BBC/Earthscan.
1987).
15/ UNEP, The State of the Environment: Environment and Health (Nairobi: 1986).
16/ WHO. Global Strategy for Health for All by the Year 2000 (Geneva: 1981).
17/ UNESCO. A Summary Statistical Review of Education in the World. 1960-82(Paris: 1984).

Our Common Future, Chapter 5: Food Security: Sustaining The
Potential

I. Achievements
II. Signs of Crisis
1. Impact of Subsidies
2. Neglect of the Small Producer
3. Degradation of the Resource Base
3.1 Loss of Soil Resources
3.2 Impact of Chemicals
3.3 Pressure on Forests
3.4 Advancing Deserts

III. The Challenge
IV. Strategies for Sustainable Food Security
1. Government Intervention
2. A Global Perspective
3. The Resource Base
3.1 Land Use
3.2 Water Management
3.3 Alternatives to Chemicals
3.4 Forestry and Agriculture
3.5 Aquaculture
4. Productivity and yields
4.1 The Technological Base
4.2 Human Resources
4.3 Productivity of Inputs
5. Equity
5.1 Land Reforms
5.2 Subsistence Farmers and Pastoralists
5.3 Integrated Rural Development
5.4 Food Availability Fluctuations

V. Food for the Future
Footnotes

Chapter 5
Food Security: Sustaining The Potential
1. The world produces more food per head of population today than ever before in humanhistory. In 1985, it produced nearly 500 kilogrammes per head of cereals and root crops, theprimary sources of food./1 Yet amid this abundance, more than 730 million people did not eat
enough to lead fully productive working lives./2 There are places where too little is grown;there are places where large numbers cannot afford to buy food. And there are broad areas of
the Earth, in both industrial and developing nations, where increases in food production are
undermining the base for future production.
2. The agricultural resources and the technology needed to feed growing populations areavailable. Much has been achieved over the past few decades. Agriculture does not lackresources; it lacks policies to ensure that the food is produced where it is needed and in amanner that sustains the livelihoods of the rural poor. He can meet this challenge by building
on our achievements and devising new strategies for sustaining food and livelihood security.

I. Achievements
3. Between 1950 and 1985, cereal production outstripped population growth, increasing fromaround 700 million tons to over 1,800 million tons, an annual growth rate of around 2.7 percent./3 This increase helped to meet escalating demands for cereals caused by population
growth and rising incomes in developing countries and by growing needs for animal feed indeveloped countries. Yet regional differences in performance have been large. (See Table 5-1.)
4. As production has increased sharply in some regions and demand in others, the pattern ofworld trade in foods, especially cereals, has changed radically. North America exported barely 5
million tons of foodgrains yearly before the Second World War; it exported nearly 120 million
tons during the 1980s. Europe's grain deficit is very much lower now. and the bulk of North
American exports are to the USSR. Asia, and Africa. Three countries - China, Japan, and the
USSR - took half the world exports in the early 1980s; much of the rest went to relatively
wealthy developing countries, such as Middle Eastern oil exporters. Several poor agriculturalcountries, especially in sub-Saharan Africa, have become net importers of foodgrains. Still,
although one-fourth of sub-Saharan Africa's population relied on imported grains in 1984, that
region's imports have accounted for less than 10 per cent of world grain trade thus far in the
1980s./4

Table 5-1
Two Decades of Agricultural Development
Per Capita

Per Capita

Per Hectare

Food Production

Gross Cropped
Area

Fertilizer use(kg.)(Index 1961-64 =100)
1961-64 1981-84(Hectares)
1964

1984

1964

1984

World

100

112

0.44

0.31

29.3

85.3

North America

100

121

1.05

0.90

47.3

93.2

Western Europe

100

131

0.11

0.25

114.4

124.1

Eastern Europe and USSR

100

128

0.84

0.71

30.4

122.1

Africa

100

88

0.74

0.35

1.8

9.7

Near East*

100

107

0.53

0.35

6.9

53.6

Far East**

100

116

0.10

0.20

4.4

45.4

Latin America

100

108

0.49

0.45

11.6

11.4

CPE's of Asia***

100

135

0.17

0.10

15.5

170.3

* An FAO grouping that includes West Asia plus Egypt, Libya and Sudan** An FAO grouping that covers South and South-East Asia excluding the centrally planned
economies of Asia.
*** An FAO grouping of Centrally Planned Economies of Asia which covers China,
Kampuchea, North Korea. Mongolia and Vietnam.
5. Other foods besides grains are changing the patterns of world food demand and production.
Demand for milk and meat is growing as incomes rise in societies that prefer animal protein.
and much agricultural development in the industrialized nations has been devoted to meetingthese demands. In Europe, meat production more than tripled between 1950 and 1984, andmilk production nearly doubled./5 Meat production for exports increased sharply, particularlyin the rangelands of Latin America and Africa. World meat exports have risen from around 2
million tons in 1950-52 to over 11 million tons in 1984./6
6. To produce this milk and meat required in 1984 about 1.4 billion cattle and buffaloes, 1.6
billion sheep and goats, 800 million pigs, and a great deal of poultry - all of which weigh morethan the people on the planet./7 Most of these animals graze or browse or are fed local plants
collected for them. However, rising demands for livestock feedgrains led to sharp increases in
the production of cereals such as corn, which accounted for nearly two-thirds of the total
increase in grain production in North America and Europe between 1950 and 1985.
7. This unprecedented growth in food production has been achieved partly by an extension of
the production base: larger cropped areas, more livestock, more fishing vessels, and so on. But
most of it is due to a phenomenal rise in productivity. Population increases have meant a
decline in the area of cropped land in most of the world in per capita terms. And as theavailability of arable land has declined, planners and farmers have focused on increasing
productivity. In the past 35 years this has been achieved by:using new seed varieties designed to maximize yields, facilitate multiple cropping, andresist disease;applying more chemical fertilizers, the consumption of which rose more than ninefold/8;
using more pesticides and similar chemicals, the use of which increased thirtytwo-fold/9; andincreasing irrigated area, which more than doubled./10
8. Global statistics mask substantial regional differences. (See Box 5-1.) The impacts of newtechnology have been uneven, and in some respects the agricultural technology gap has
widened. For instance, average African foodgrain productivity declined in relation to European
productivity from roughly one-half to about one-fifth over the past 35 years. Even in Asia,
where new technology has spread rapidly, productivity in relation to European levels
dropped./11 Similar 'technology gaps' have emerged between regions within countries.
9. The past few decades have seen the emergence of three broad types of food production
systems, 'Industrial agriculture', capital- and input-intensive and usually large-scale, isdominant in North America, Western and Eastern Europe, Australia and New Zealand, and insome small areas in developing countries. 'Green Revolution agriculture' is found in uniform,
resource-rich, often flat and irrigated areas in the agricultural heartlands of some developing
countries. It is more widespread in Asia but is also found in parts of Latin America and North
Africa. Though initially the new technologies may have favoured large farmers, they are today
accessible to a growing number of small producers. 'Resource-poor agriculture' relies on
uncertain rain rather than irrigation and is usually found in developing regions difficult to farm
- drylands, highlands, and forests - with fragile soils. This includes most of sub-Saharan Africa
and the remoter areas of Asia and Latin America. Here, per capita production has been
declining and hunger is a critical problem. But today, all three systems of food production
display signs of crises that endanger their growth.

II. Signs of Crisis
10. Agricultural policies in practically all countries have focused on output growth. Despite
this, it has proved far more difficult to raise world agricultural output by a consistent 3 per centa year in the mid-1980s than it was in the mid-1950s. Moreover, production records have been
offset by the appearance

Box 5-1 Regional Perspectives on Agricultural Development
Africaa drop in per capita food output of about 1 per cent a year since the beginning of
the 1970s
a focus on cash crops and a growing dependence on imported food, fostered bypricing policies and foreign exchange compulsions
major gaps in infrastructure for research, extension, input supply, andmarketingdegradation of the agricultural resource base due to desertification, droughts,
and other processes
large untapped potential of arable land, irrigation, and fertilizer use
West Asia and North Africa
improvements in productivity due to better irrigation, the cultivation ofhigh-yielding varieties, and higher fertilizer use
limited arable land and considerable amounts of desert, making foodself-sufficiency a challenge
a need for controlled irrigation to cope with dry conditions

South and East Asia

increased production and productivity, with some countries registering grain surpluses

rapid growth in fertilizer use in some countries and extensive development ofirrigation
government commitments to be self-reliant in food, leading to national
research centres, development of high-yielding seeds, and the fostering oflocation-specific technologies
little unused land, and extensive, unabated deforestation
growing numbers of rural landlessLatin America
declining food imports since 1980, as food production kept pace withpopulation growth over the last decade
government support in the form of research centres to develop high-yielding
seeds and other technologies
inequitable distribution of land
deforestation and degradation of the agricultural resource base, fueled partly
by foreign trade and debt crisis
a huge land resource and high productivity potential, though most of thepotentially arable land is in the remote, lightly populated Amazon Basin, where
perhaps only 20 per cent of the land is suitable for sustainable agriculture
North America and Western Europe
North America the world's leading source of surplus foodgrain, though the rateof increase in output per hectare and in total productivity slowed in the 1970s
subsidies for production that are ecologically and economically expensive
depressing effect of surpluses on world markets and consequent impact on
developing countries
a resource base increasingly degraded through erosion, acidification, and watercontaminationin North America, some scope for future agricultural expansion in frontierareas that can be intensively farmed only at high cost
Eastern Europe and the Soviet Union
food deficits met through imports, with the Soviet Union being the world's
largest grain importer
increased government investment in agriculture accompanied by eased farm
distribution and organization to meet desires for food self-reliance, leading to
production increases in meat and root crops
pressures on agricultural resources through soil erosion. acidification,salinization, alkalization, and water contamination of linked economic andecological crises: Industrialized countries are finding it increasingly difficult tomanage their surplus food production, the livelihood base of millions of poor
producers in developing countries is deteriorating, and the resource base for
agriculture is under pressure virtually everywhere.

1. Impact of Subsidies
11. The food surpluses in North America and Europe result mainly from subsidies and otherincentives that stimulate production even in the absence of demand. Direct or indirect
subsidies, which now cover virtually the entire food cycle, have become extremely expensive. In
the United States, the cost of farm support has grown from $2.7 billion in 1980 to $25.8 billion
in 1986. In the EEC, such costs have risen from $6.2 billion in 1976 to $21.5 billion in 1986./12
12. It has become politically more attractive, and usually cheaper, to export surpluses - often as
food aid - rather than to store them. These heavily subsidized surpluses depress theinternational market prices of commodities such as sugar and have created severe problems forseveral developing countries whose economies are based on agriculture. Non-emergency foodaid and low-priced imports also keep down prices received by Third World farmers and reducethe incentive to improve domestic food production.
13. The environmental consequences of a heavily subsidized production system are becoming
evident within industrialized nations/13 ;lower productivity as soil quality declines due to intensive soil cultivation and overuse ofchemical fertilizers and pesticides /14;
the destruction of the countryside, through clearing of hedgerows, park: belts, and otherprotective cover and the levelling, occupation, and cultivation of marginal land andwatershed protection areas; andnitrate pollution of ground-water aquifers due to the often subsidized overuse of nitratefertilizers,
14. The financial, economic, and environmental effects of the current incentive systems are
beginning to be questioned by many governments and groups, including farm organizations. A
particular area of concern is the impact of these policies on developing countries. They depress
international prices of products, such as rice and sugar, that are important exports for many
developing countries and so reduce exchange earnings of developing countries. They increase
the instability of world prices. And they discourage the processing of agricultural commodities
in the producing countries./15
15. It is in the interests of all, including the farmers, that the policies be changed. Indeed, inrecent years some conservation-oriented changes have taken place and some subsidy systems
have increasingly stressed the need to retire land from production. The financial and economic
burden of subsidies must be reduced. The harm that these policies do to the agriculture ofdeveloping countries by disrupting world markets must be eliminated.

2. Neglect of the Small Producer
16. The new technology behind increases in agricultural productivity requires scientific andtechnological skills, a system for technology extension and other services for farmers, andcommercial orientation in farm management. In many' parts of Asia, in particular, small
farmers have shown a remarkable capacity to use new technology once they are given
incentives and adequate financial and infrastructural support. Small cash-crop farmers in
Africa have demonstrated the potential of the smallholder on that continent, and in the last few
years successes have been recorded in food crops also. But ecologically disadvantaged areas
and land-poor rural masses have not benefited from advances in technology and will not until
governments are willing and able to redistribute land and resources, and give them thenecessary support and incentives.
17. Agricultural support systems seldom take into account the special circumstances ofsubsistence farmers and herders. subsistence farmers cannot afford the high cash outlay ofmodern inputs. Many are shifting cultivators who do not have a clear title to the land they use.
They may plant a variety of crops on one plot to meet their own needs, and are thus unable touse methods developed for large stands of a single crop.
18. Many herders are nomadic and difficult to reach with education, advice, and equipment.
They, like subsistence farmers, depend on certain traditional rights, which are threatened bycommercial developments. They herd traditional breeds, which are hardy but rarely highly
productive.
19. Women farmers, though they play a critical role in food production, are often ignored byprogrammes meant to improve production. In Latin America, the Caribbean, and Asia they
form a large agricultural labour force, while most of sub-Saharan Africa's food is grown by
women. Yet almost all agricultural programmes tend to neglect the special needs of womenfarmers.

I think that at a forum like this there always tends to be someone standing up andsaying you forgot my issue. I think my serious sensitivity to women!s role vis-a-vis
the environment.
Especially in Africa, I think it has been clearly stated over and again that womenare responsible for between 60 to 90 per cent of the food production, processing,and marketing. No one can really address the food crisis in Africa or many of theother crises that seem to exist here without addressing the question of women, andreally seeing that women are participants in decision-making processes at the very
basic all the way through up the highest level.
Mrs. KingThe Greenbelt Movement
WCED Public Hearing
Nairobi. 23 Sept 1986

3. Degradation of the Resource Base
20. Short-sighted policies are leading to degradation of the agricultural resource base on
almost every continent: soil erosion in North America: soil acidification in Europe;deforestation and desertification in Asia. Africa, and Latin America; and waste and pollution ofwater almost everywhere. Within 40-70 years, global warming may cause the flooding ofimportant coastal production areas. Some of these effects arise from trends in energy use andindustrial production. Some arise from the pressure of population on limited resources. But
agricultural policies emphasizing increased production at the expense of environmental
considerations have also contributed greatly to this deterioration.

3.1 Loss of Soil Resources
21. Increases in cropped areas in recent decades have often extended cultivation in marginallands prone to erosion. By the late 1970s, soil erosion exceeded soil formation on about a thirdof U.S. cropland, much of it in the midwestern agricultural heartland./16 In Canada, soil
degradation has been costing farmers $1 billion a year./17 In the USSR, the extension ofcultivation to the so-called Virgin Lands was a major plank of agricultural policy, but now it isbelieved that much of this land is marginal./18 In India, soil erosion affects 25-30 per cent of
the total land under cultivation./19 Without conservation measures, the total area of rainfed
cropland in developing countries in Asia, Africa, and Latin America would shrink by 544 million
hectares over the long term because of soil erosion and degradation, according to an FAO
study./20
22. Erosion makes soil less able to retain water, depletes it of nutrients, and reduces the depth
available for the roots to take hold. Land productivity declines. Eroded topsoil is carried torivers. lakes, and reservoirs, silts up ports and waterways, reduces reservoir storage capacity,and increases the incidence and severity of floods.

23. Poorly designed and implemented irrigation systems have caused waterlogging,salinization, and alkalization of soils. FAO and UNESCO estimate that as much as half theworld's irrigation schemes suffer in some degree from these problems./21 These estimatesindicate that some 10 million hectares of irrigated land are being abandoned each year.
24. Soil degradation erodes the overall resource base for agriculture. The loss of croplands
encourages farmers to overuse the remaining land and to move into forests and onto
rangelands. Sustainable agriculture cannot be based on methods that mine and deplete thesoil,

3.2 Impact of Chemicals
25. Chemical fertilizers and pesticides have played a large role in production increases since
the Second World War, but clear warnings have been raised against over-reliance on them. The
run-off of nitrogen and phosphates from excess use of fertilizers damages water resources, andsuch damage is spreading.
26. Using chemicals to control insects, pests, weeds, and fungi enhances productivity, but
overuse threatens the health of humans and the lives of other species. Continuing, long-term
exposure to pesticide and chemical residues in food, water, and even in the air is hazardous,
particularly to children. A 1983 study estimated that approximately 10.000 people died eachyear in developing countries from pesticide poisoning and about 400,000 suffered acutely./22
The effects are not limited to the area where pesticides are used but travel through the foodchain.
27. Commercial fisheries have been depleted, bird species endangered, and insects that prey onpests wiped out. The number of pesticide-resistant insect pest species worldwide has
increased and many resist even the newest chemicals. The variety and severity of pest
infestations multiply, threatening the productivity of agriculture in the areas concerned.
28, The use of agricultural chemicals is not in itself harmful. In fact, the level of use is still quite
low in many regions. In these areas, response rates are high and the environmental
consequences of residues are not yet a problem. Hence these regions would benefit by using
more agrochemicals. However, the growth in the use of chemicals tends to be concentrated
precisely where they may be doing more overall harm than good.

3.3 Pressure on Forests
29. Forests are crucial for maintaining and improving the productivity of agricultural land. Yet
agricultural expansion, a growing world timber trade, and woodfuel demand have destroyed
much forest cover. Although this destruction has occurred worldwide, today the greatest
challenge is in developing countries, particularly in tropical forests. (See Chapter 6.)
30. Growing populations and the decreasing availability of arable land lead poor farmers inthese countries to seek new land in forests to grow more food. Some government policies
encourage the conversion of forests to pastures and others encourage large resettlement
schemes in forests. There is nothing inherently wrong with clearing forests for farming,
provided that the land is the best there is for new farming, can support the numbers
encouraged to settle upon it, and is not already serving a more useful function, such as
watershed protection. But often forests are cleared without forethought or planning.

31. Deforestation most severely disrupts mountainous areas and upland watersheds and theecosystems that depend on them. The uplands influence precipitation, and the state of theirsoil and vegetation systems influence how this precipitation is released into the streams andrivers and onto the croplands of the plains below. The growing numbers and growing severityof both floods and droughts in many parts of the world have been linked to the deforestation of
upland watersheds./23

3.4 Advancing Deserts
32. Some 29 per cent of the earth's land area suffers slight, moderate, or severe desertification;an additional 6 per cent is classified as extremely severely desertified./24 In 1984, the world's
drylands supported some 850 million people, of whom 230 million were on lands affected bysevere desertification./25
33. The process of desertification affects almost every region of the globe, but it is mostdestructive in the drylands of South America, Asia, and Africa; for these three areas combined.
18.5 per cent (870 million hectares) of productive lands are severely desertified. Of thedrylands in developing countries. Africa's Sudano-Sahelian zones and, to a lesser extent, somecountries south of this zone suffer the most. In their arid and semi-arid lands are to be found
80 per cent of the moderately affected and 85 per cent of the severely affected people./26
34. Land permanently degraded to desert-like conditions continues to grow at an annual rateof 6 million hectares./27 Each year. 21 million additional hectares provide no economic return
because of the spread of desertification./28 These trends are expected to continue despitesome local improvements.
35, Desertification is caused by a complex mix of climatic and human effects. The humaneffects, over which we have more control, include the rapid growth of both human and animal
populations, detrimental land use practices (especially deforestation), adverse terms of trade,and civil strife. The cultivation of cash crops on unsuitable rangelands has forced herders andtheir cattle onto marginal lands. The unfavourable international terms of trade for primary
products and the policies of aid donors have reinforced pressures to encourage increasing
cash-crop production at any cost.
36. A Plan of Action conceived by UNEP and drawn up at the 1977 UN Conference on
Desertification has led to some slight, mainly local gains./29 Progress on the plan has beenhampered by lack of financial support from the international community, by inadequacies of
the regional organizations established to respond to the regional nature of the problem, and by
the lack of involvement of grass-roots communities.

Small farmers are held responsible for environmental destruction as if they had achoice of resources to depend on for their livelihood, when they really don't. In thecontext of basic survival, today's needs tend to overshadow consideration for theenvironmental future. It is poverty that is responsible for the destruction of natural
resources, not the poor.
Geoffrey Bruce
Canadian International Development Agency
WCED Public Hearing
Ottawa, 26/27 May 1986

III. The Challenge
37. Food demand will increase as populations increase and their consumption patterns change.
In the remaining years of this century, about 1.3 billion people will be added to the humanfamily (see Chapter 4); rising incomes, however, may account for 30 to 40 per cent of theincreased demand for food in developing countries and about 10 per cent in industrial
nations./30 Thus over the next few decades, the global food system must be managed toincrease food production by 3 to 4 per cent yearly.
38. Global food security depends not only on raising global production, but on reducing
distortions in the structure of the world food market and on shifting the focus of foodproduction to food-deficit countries, regions, and households. Many of the countries not
growing enough food to feed themselves possess the largest remaining reservoirs of untapped
agricultural resources. Latin America and sub-Saharan Africa have much unused land.
although its quality and quantity vary greatly from nation to nation and much of it isecologically vulnerable./31 The Soviet Union and parts of North America have significant
amounts of frontier land suitable for agriculture; only Asia and Europe are truly land-starved.
39. Global food security also depends on ensuring that all people, even the poorest of the poor,
can get food. While on the world scale this challenge requires a reappraisal of global food
distribution, the task weighs more immediately and heavily on national governments.
Inequitable distribution of production assets, unemployment, and underemployment are at
the heart of the problem of hunger in many countries.
40. Rapid, sound agricultural development will mean not only more food but more
opportunities for people to earn money to purchase food. Thus when countries with untapped
agricultural resources provide food by importing more, they are effectively importing
unemployment. By the same token, countries that are subsidizing food exports are increasing
unemployment in food-importing countries. This marginalizes people, and marginalized
people are forced to destroy the resource base to survive. Shifting production to food-deficit
countries and to the resource-poor farmers within those countries is a way of securing
sustainable livelihoods.
41. Conserving the agricultural resource base and livelihood security of the poor can be
mutually supportive in three ways. First, secure resources and adequate livelihoods lead togood husbandry and sustainable management. Second, they ease rural-to-urban migration,
stimulate agricultural production from resources that otherwise would be underused, andreduce the need for food to be produced elsewhere. Third, by combating poverty, they help toslow population growth.
42. Shifting the focus of production to food-deficit countries will also reduce pressures on
agricultural resources in the industrialized market economies, enabling them to move towards
more sustainable agricultural practices. Incentive structures can be changed so that instead ofencouraging overproduction, they encourage farm practices that improve soil and water
quality. Government budgets will be relieved of the burdens of storing and exporting surplus
products.
43. This shift in agricultural production will be sustainable only if the resource base is secure.
As indicated, this is far from the case today. Thus to achieve global food security, the resourcebase for food production must be sustained, enhanced, and, where it has been diminished or
destroyed, restored.

There are many contradictions in agricultural development. The blind imitation ofmodels developed under different circumstances will have to give way to therealities and conditions existing in Africa. Large areas of virgin land have been
opened up for export crops whose prices keeps declining. This is not in the interestof developing countries.
There are so many problems to be overcome that we forget that every problem isan opportunity to do something positive. This is an opportunity for us to think ofconservation and environment in a broad educational context. In doing so, we will
be able to capture the next generation and demonstrate the wonder and thebenefits of the world around them.
Adolfo Mascarenhas
IUCN Harare Office
WCED Public Hearing
Harare. 18 Sept 1986

IV. Strategies for Sustainable Food Security
44. Food security requires more than good conservation programmes, which can be - andusually are - overridden and undermined by inappropriate agricultural, economic, and trade
policies. Nor is it just a matter of adding an environmental component to programmes. Foodstrategies must take into account all the policies that bear upon the threefold challenge ofshifting production to where it is most needed, of securing the livelihoods of the rural poor,and of conserving resources.

1. Government Intervention
45. Government intervention in agriculture is the rule in both industrial and developing
countries, and it is here to stay. Public investment in agricultural research and extension
services, assisted farm credit and marketing services, and a range of other support systems
have all played parts in the successes of the last half-century. In fact, the real problem in many
developing countries is the weakness of these systems.
46. Intervention has taken other forms as well. Many governments regulate virtually the entire
food cycle - inputs and outputs, domestic sales, exports, public procurement, storage anddistribution, price controls and subsidies - as well as imposing various land use regulations:acreage, crop variety, and so on.
47. In general, patterns of government intervention suffer three basic defects. First, the criteriathat underlie the planning of these interventions lack an ecological orientation and are often
dominated by short-term considerations. These criteria should discourage environmentally
unsound farm practices and encourage farmers to maintain and improve their soils, forests,
and waters.
48. The second defect is that agricultural policy tends to operate within a national frameworkwith uniform prices and subsidies, standardized criteria for the provision of support services,
indiscriminate financing of infrastructure investments, and so forth. Policies that vary fromregion to region are needed to reflect different regional needs, encouraging farmers to adopt
practices that are ecologically sustainable in their own areas.

The problem in agriculture is not faceless. I as a farmer am a potential victim of thesystem that we now operate under. Why are approximately a quarter of Canadian
farmers facing the immediate prospects of farm bankruptcy? It is directly related to
the general concept of a cheap food policy that has constituted a cornerstone offederal agricultural policy since the beginning of settlement.
We regard the current cheap food policy as a form of economic violence that iscontributing towards soil exploitation and the growing impersonal relationshipbetween farmers and the soil for economic survival. It is a policy ofindustrialization that can lead only towards disaster economically for us asfarmers, and environmentally for us all as Canadians and as world citizens.
Wayne Easter
President, National Farmers' Union
WCED Public Hearing
Ottawa, 26/27 May 1986

49. The importance of regional policy differentiation can be easily illustrated:
Hill areas may require incentive prices for fruits and subsidized supplies of foodgrains to
induce farmers to shift towards horticulture, which may be ecologically more sustainable.
In areas prone to wind and water erosion, public intervention through subsidies andother measures should encourage farmers to conserve soil and water.
Farmers on land over recharge areas for underground aquifers subject to nitratepollution might be given incentives to maintain soil fertility and increase productivity bymeans other than nitrate fertilizers.
50. The third defect in government intervention lies in incentive structures. In industrializedcountries, overprotection of farmers and overproduction represent the accumulated result oftax reliefs, direct subsidies, and price controls. Such policies are now studded with
contradictions that encourage the degradation of the agricultural resource base and. in the longrun, do more harm than good to the agricultural industry. Some governments now recognize
this and are making efforts to change the focus of the subsidies from production growth toconservation.
51. On the other hand, in most developing countries the incentive structure is weak. Market
interventions are often ineffective for lack of an organizational structure for procurement anddistribution. Farmers are exposed to a high degree of uncertainty, and price support systems
have often favoured the urban dweller or are limited to a few commercial crops, leading todistortions of cropping patterns that add to destructive pressures on the resource base. In
some cases, price controls reduce the incentive to produce. What is required, in many cases, isnothing less than a radical attempt to turn the 'terms of trade' in favour of farmers throughpricing policy and government expenditure reallocation.
52. Strengthening food security from a global point of view requires reducing incentives thatforce overproduction and non-competitive production in the developed market economies andenhancing those that encourage food production in developing countries. At the same time,these incentive structures must be redesigned to promote farming practices that conserve andenhance the agricultural resource base.

2. A Global Perspective

53. Trade in agricultural products tripled between 1950 and 1970; it has doubled since then.
Yet, when it comes to farming, countries are at their most conservative, continuing to thinkmainly in local or national terms and concerned, above all, to protect their own farmers at theexpense of competitors.
54. Shifting food production towards food-deficit countries will require a major shift in trading
patterns. Countries must recognize that all parties lose through protectionist barriers, which
reduce trade in food products in which some nations may have genuine advantage. They must
begin by redesigning their trade, tax, and incentive systems using criteria that include
ecological and economic sustainability and international comparative advantage.
55. The incentive-driven surpluses in developed market economies increase pressures toexport these surpluses at subsidized prices or as non-emergency food aid. Donor and receiving
countries should be responsible for the impacts of aid and use it for long-term objectives. It canbe beneficially used in projects to restore degraded lands, build up rural infrastructure, andraise the nutrition level of vulnerable groups.

3. The Resource Base
56. Agricultural production can only be sustained on a long-term basis if the land, water, andforests on which it is based are not degraded. As suggested, a reorientation of public
intervention will provide a framework for this. But more specific policies that protect theresource base are needed to maintain and even enhance agricultural productivity and thelivelihoods of all rural dwellers.

3.1 Land Use
57. The initial task in enhancing the resource base will be to delineate broad land categories:
enhancement areas, which are capable of sustaining intensive cropping and higher
population and consumption levels;
prevention areas, which by common consent should not be developed for intensive
agriculture or. where developed, should be converted to other uses; andrestoration areas, where land stripped of vegetative cover has either totally lost its
productivity or had it drastically reduced.
58. Identifying land according to 'best use' criteria requires information that is not always
available. Most industrial nations possess inventories and descriptions of their lands, forests,
and waters that are detailed enough to provide a basis for delineating land categories. Few
developing countries have such inventories, but they can and should develop them quickly
using satellite monitoring and other rapidly changing techniques./32
59. Selection of land for each category could be made the responsibility of a board orcommission representing the interests involved, especially the poor and more marginalized
segments of the population. The process must be public in character, with publicly agreed
criteria that combine the best use approach with the level of development required to sustain
livelihood. Classifying land according to best use will determine variations in infrastructure
provision, support services, promotional measures, regulatory restrictions, fiscal subsidies,and other incentives and disincentives.
60. Lands identified as prevention areas should be denied supports and subsidies that would
encourage their development for intensive agriculture. But such areas might well support

certain ecologically and economically sustainable uses such as grazing. fuelwood plantations,fruit farming, and forestry. Those redesigning support systems and incentives should focus ona broader range of crops, including those that enhance grazing, soil and water conservation,and so on.
61. In vast areas today natural factors and land use practices have reduced productivity to apoint too low to sustain even subsistence farming. Treatment of these areas must vary fromsite to site. Governments should give priority to establishing a national policy andmultidisciplinary programmes and to creating or strengthening institutions to restore suchareas. Where these already exist, they should be better coordinated and designed. The UN Planof Action to Combat Desertification, which is already in place, requires more support,
particularly financial.
62. Restoration may require limits on human activities so as to permit the regeneration ofvegetation. This can be difficult where there are large herds of animals or large numbers ofpeople. for the agreement and participation of the local people are of the highest importance.
The state, with the cooperation of those living locally, could protect these areas by declaring
them national reserves. Where these areas are privately held, the state might wish either topurchase the land from the owners or to provide incentives for its restoration.

Intensive agriculture may quickly exhaust the soil cover. causing its degradation,
unless some special soil protection measures aimed at constant restoration andexpanded reproduction of fertility are taken. The task of agriculture is thus notconfined to obtaining the biological product but extends to constant maintenanceand augmentation of soil fertility. Otherwise we will very quickly consume what byright belongs to our children, grandchildren, and great-grandchildren, to say nothingof more distant descendants.
It is this misgiving - that our generation lives to a certain extent at the expense of
the coming generations, thoughtlessly drawing on the basic reserves of soil fertility
accumulated in the millennia of the biospheric development. instead of living off thecurrent annual increment - that causes the increasing concern of scientists dealing
with the state of the planetary soil cover.
B. G. Rozanov
Moscow State University
WCED Public Hearing
Moscow, 11 Dec 1986

3.2 Water Management
63. Improvements in water management are essential to raise agricultural productivity and to
reduce land degradation and water pollution. Critical issues concern the design of irrigation
projects and the efficiency of water use.
64. Where water is scarce, an irrigation project should maximize productivity per unit of water;where water is plentiful, it must maximize productivity per unit of land. But local conditions
will dictate how much water can be used without damaging the soil. Salinization. alkalization,
and waterlogging can be avoided by a more careful approach to drainage, maintenance,
cropping patterns. the regulation of water quantities, and more rational water charges. Many ofthese objectives will be easier to realize in small-scale irrigation projects. But whether small orlarge, the projects must be designed with the abilities and aims of the participating farmers in
mind, and then involve them in the management.
65. In some areas excessive use of ground-water is rapidly lowering the water table - usually acase where private benefits are being realized at society's expense. Where ground-water use
exceeds the recharge capacity of local aquifers, regulatory or fiscal controls become essential.
The combined use of ground and surface water can improve the timing of water availability andstretch limited supplies.

3.3 Alternatives to Chemicals
66. Many countries can and should increase yields by greater use of chemical fertilizers andpesticides, particularly in the developing world. But countries can also improve yields byhelping farmers to use organic nutrients more efficiently. Hence governments must encourage
the use of more organic plant nutrients to complement chemicals. Pest control must also bebased increasingly on the use of natural methods. (See Box 5-2) These strategies requirechanges in public policies, which now encourage the increased use of chemical pesticides andfertilizers. The legislative, policy, and research capacity for advancing non-chemical andless-chemical strategies must be established and sustained.
67. Chemical fertilisers and pesticides are heavily subsidized in many countries. Thesesubsidies promote chemical use precisely in the more commercially oriented agricultural areas
where their environmental damage may already outweigh any increases in productivity theybring. Hence different regions will require different policies to regulate and promote chemicaluse.
68. Legislative and institutional frameworks for controlling agrochemicals must be greatly
strengthened everywhere.
69, Industrialized countries must tighten controls on pesticide exports. (See Chapter 8.)
Developing countries must possess the basic legislative and institutional instruments tomanage the use of agricultural chemicals within their countries. And they will need technicaland financial assistance to do so.

3.4 Forestry and Agriculture
69. Undisturbed forests protect watersheds, reduce erosion. offer habitats for wild species, andplay key roles in climatic systems. They are also an economic resource providing timber,
fuelwood, and other products. The crucial task is to balance the need to exploit forests against
the need to preserve them.
70. Sound forest policies can be based only on an analysis of the capacity of the forests and theland under them to perform various functions. Such an analysis might lead to some forests
being cleared for intensive cultivation, others for livestock; some forestland might be managed
for increased timber production or agroforestry use and some left intact for watershed
protection, recreation, or species conservation. The extension of agriculture into forest areas
must be based on scientific classification of land capacities.
71. Programmes to preserve forest resources must start with the local people who are both
victims and agents of destruction, and who will bear the burden of any new management
scheme./33 They should be at the centre of integrated forest management, which is the basis ofsustainable agriculture.

72. Such an approach would entail changes in the way governments set development priorities,
as well as the evolution of greater responsibility to local governments and communities.
Contracts covering forest use will have to be negotiated, or overall environmental sustainabilityof forest exploitation and overall environmental and ecosystem conservation. Prices for forest
products need to reflect the true resource value of the goods.

Box 5-2Natural Systems of Nutrient Supply and Peat Control
Crop residues and farmyard manure are potential sources of soil nutrients.
Organic wastes reduce run-off, increase the take-up of other nutrients, andimprove soil's water-holding and erosion-resistance capacity.
Using farmyard manure, especially in conjunction with intercropping and crop
rotation, can greatly lower production costs.
Overall systems efficiency is enhanced if manure or vegetable biomass isanaerobically digested in biogas plants, yielding energy for cooking and to run
pumps, motors, or electric generators.
Natural systems of biological nitrogen fixation through the use of certain
annual plants, trees, and micro-organisms have a high potential.
Integrated pest management (IPM) reduces the need for agrochemicals.
improves a country's balance of payments. releases foreign exchange for otherdevelopment projects, and creates jobs where they are most needed.
IPM requires detailed information about pests and their natural enemies, seedvarieties tailored to resist pests, integrated cropping patterns, and farmers who
support the approach and are willing to modify farm practices to adopt it.

73. Portions of forests may be designated as prevention areas. These are predominantly
national parks, which could be set aside from agricultural exploitation to conserve soil, water,
and wildlife. They may also include marginal lands whose exploitation accelerates landdegradation through erosion or desertification. In this connection, the reforestation of
degraded forest areas is of utmost importance. Conservation areas or national parks can also
conserve genetic resources in their natural habitats. (See Chapter 6.)
74. Forestry can also be extended into agriculture. Farmers can use agroforestry systems to
produce food and fuel. In such systems, one or more tree crops are combined with one or more
food crops or animal farming on the same land, though sometimes at different times.
Well-chosen crops reinforce each other and yield more food and fuel than when grown
separately. The technology is particularly suitable for small farmers and for poor-quality lands.
Agroforestry has been practised by traditional farmers everywhere. The challenge today is torevive the old methods, improve them, adapt them to the new conditions. and develop new
ones./34
75. International forestry research organizations should work in various tropical countries invarious ecosystems along the lines now followed by the Consultative Group on International
Agricultural Research. There is considerable scope for institution building and additional
research on forestry's role in agricultural production, for example by developing models that
better predict the effects on water and soil loss of removing specific portions of forest cover.

3.5 Aquaculture
76. Fisheries and aquaculture are critical to food security in that they provide both protein andemployment. The greater part of world fish supply comes from marine fisheries, which yielded
76.8 million tons in 1983. Landings have increased by 1 million tons per year over the past few
years; by the end of the century, a catch of around 100 million tons should be possible./35 Thisis well short of the projected demand. There are indications that much of the naturally
available freshwater fish stocks are fully exploited or damaged by pollution.
77. Aquaculture. or 'fish-farming', which differs from conventional fishing in that fish aredeliberately reared in controlled water bodies, can help meet future needs. Yields fromaquaculture have doubled during the last decade and now represent about 10 per cent of world
production of fishery products./36 A five- to tenfold increase is projected by the year 2000,
given the necessary scientific, financial, and organizational support./37 Aquaculture can beundertaken in paddy fields, abandoned raining excavations, small ponds, and many other areas
with some water, as well as on various commercial scales: individual, family, cooperative, or
corporate. The expansion of aquaculture should be given high priority in developing anddeveloped countries.

4. Productivity and yields
78. The conservation and enhancement of agriculture's resource base will increase production
and productivity. But specific measures are required to make inputs more effective. This is best
done by strengthening the technological and human resource base for agriculture in developing
countries.

Thus at the root of this environmental problem is a land problem that has to besolved if any serious ecological policy is to be taken - and reorientation of the
agricultural policy has to be undertaken. I believe that any conservationist policy
has to be followed by a coherent agricultural policy that will meet the need not onlyof preservation as such but also meet the needs of the Brazilian population.
Julio M.G. Gaiger
President, National Indian Support Association
WCED Public Hearing
Sao Paulo. 28/29 Oct 1985

4.1 The Technological Base
Blends of traditional and modern technologies offer possibilities for improving nutrition andincreasing rural employment on a sustainable basis. Biotechnology, including tissue culture
techniques, technologies for preparing value-added products from biomass, micro-electronics,
computer sciences, satellite imagery, and communication. technology are all aspects of frontier
technologies that can improve agricultural productivity and resource management./38
80. Providing sustainable livelihoods for resource-poor farmers presents a special challenge for
agricultural research. The major advances in agricultural technology in recent decades are
better suited to stable, uniform, resource-rich conditions with good soils and ample watersupplies. New technologies are most urgently needed in sub-Saharan Africa and the remoter

areas of Asia and Latin America, which typically have unreliable rainfall, uneven topography,
and poorer soils, and hence are unsuited to Green Revolution technologies.
81. To serve agriculture in these areas, research has to be less centralized and more sensitive tofarmers' conditions and priorities. Scientists will need to start talking to poor farmers andbasing research priorities on growers' priorities. Researchers must learn from and develop theinnovations of farmers and not just the reverse. More adaptive research should be done righton the farm, using research stations for referral and with farmers eventually evaluating theresults.
82. Commercial enterprises can help develop and diffuse technology, but public institutions
must provide the essential framework for agricultural research and extension. Pew academic
and research institutions in developing regions are adequately funded. The problem is mostacute in the low-income countries, where expenditure on agricultural research and extension
amounts to 0.9 per cent of total agricultural income, as against 1.5 per cent in the middleincome countries./39 Research and extension efforts must be greatly expanded, especially inareas where climate, soils, and terrain pose special problems.
83. These areas particularly will need new seed varieties, but so will much developing-country
agriculture. At present, 55 per cent of the world's scientifically stored plant genetic resources iscontrolled by institutions in industrial countries, 31 per cent by institutions in developing
countries, and 14 per cent by International Agricultural Research centres./40 Much of thisgenetic material originated in developing countries. These gene banks must increase theirinventories of material, improve their storage techniques, and ensure that the resources arereadily accessible to research centres in developing countries.
84. Private companies increasingly seek proprietary rights to improved seed varieties, often
without recognizing the rights of the countries from which the plant matter was obtained. This
could discourage countries rich in genetic resources from making these internationallyavailable and thus reduce the options for seed development in all countries. The genetic
research capabilities of developing countries are so limited that agriculture there could become
excessively dependent on private gene banks and seed companies elsewhere. Thus
international cooperation and a clear understanding on the sharing of gains are vital in criticalareas of agricultural technology, such as the development of new seed varieties.

4.2 Human Resources
85. The technological transformation of traditional agriculture will be difficult without amatching effort to develop human resources. (See Chapter 4.) This means educational reforms
to produce researchers more attuned to the needs of rural peoples and agriculture. Illiteracy is
still widespread among the rural poor. But efforts to promote literacy should focus attention on
functional literacy covering the efficient use of land, water, and forests.
86. Despite women's critical role in agriculture, their access to education and theirrepresentation in research, extension, and other support services is woefully inadequate.
Women should be given the same educational opportunities as men. There should be more
female extension workers, and women should participate in field visits. Women should begiven more power to take decisions regarding agricultural and forestry programmes.

4.3 Productivity of Inputs
87. In traditional agriculture, local organic material provided farmers with sources of energy,nutrients, and ways of controlling pests. Today, these needs are increasingly met by electricity,
petroleum products, chemical fertilizers, and pesticides. The cost of these inputs forms a
growing proportion of agricultural costs, and wasteful use does economic and ecological harm.
88. One of the most important energy-related needs is mechanical power for irrigation. The
efficiency of pumps could be greatly improved by providing appropriate incentives forequipment producers and farmers, and through effective extension work. Energy for irrigation
pumps can also be provided by wind generators or by conventional internal combustion
engines running on biogas produced from local biomass wastes. Solar dryers and solar coolers
can save agricultural products. These non-conventional sources should be promoted,
particularly in areas poor in energy resources.
89. Nutrients are lost when fertilizers are improperly applied. Often they leach away with theflow of water in a field and degrade local water supplies. Similar problems of waste anddestructive side effects occur in the use of pesticides. Hence extension systems and chemical
manufacturers will need to give priority to programmes to promote careful and economical useof these expensive, toxic materials.

5. Equity
90. The challenge of sustainable agriculture is to raise not just average productivity andincomes, but also the productivity and incomes of those poor in resources. And food security is
not just a question of raising food production, but of ensuring that the rural and urban poor do
not go hungry during the short term or midst a local food scarcity. All this requires thesystematic promotion of equity in food production and distribution.

5.1 Land Reforms
91. In many countries where land is very unequally distributed land reform is a basic
requirement. Without it, institutional and policy changes meant to protect the resource base
can actually promote inequalities by shutting the poor off from resources and by favouring
those with large farms, who are better able to obtain the limited credit and services available.
By leaving hundreds of millions without options, such changes can have the opposite of theirintended effect, ensuring the continued violation of ecological imperatives.
92. Given institutional and ecological variations, a universal approach to land reform is
impossible. Each country should work out its own programme of land reform to assist theland-poor and to provide a base for coordinated resource conservation. The redistribution ofland is particularly important where large estates and vast numbers of the land-poor coexist.
Crucial components include the reform of tenancy arrangements, security of tenure, and theclear recording of land rights. In agrarian reforms the productivity of the land and. in forest
areas, the protection of forests should be a major concern.
93. In areas where holdings are fragmented into many non-contiguous plots, landconsolidation can ease the implementation of resource conservation measures. Promoting
cooperative efforts by small farmers - in pest control or water management, for instance would also help conserve resources.
94. In many countries women do not have direct land rights; titles go to men only. In theinterests of food security, land reforms should recognize women's role in growing food.
Women, especially those heading households, should be given direct land rights.

5.2 Subsistence Farmers and Pastoralists
95. Subsistence farmers, pastoralists, and nomads threaten the environmental resource basewhen processes beyond their control squeeze their numbers onto land or into areas thatcannot support them.
96. The traditional rights of subsistence farmers, particularly shifting cultivators, pastoralists.
and nomads, must therefore be protected from encroachments. Land tenure rights andcommunal rights in particular must be respected. When their traditional practices threaten the
resource base, their rights may have to be curtailed, but only when alternatives have been
provided. Most of these groups will need to be helped to diversify their livelihoods by entering
the market economy through employment programmes and some cash-crop production.
97. Research should give early attention to the varied requirements of the mixed farming
typical in subsistence agriculture. Extension and input supply systems must become moremobile to reach shifting cultivators and nomads and priority given to public investment toimprove their cropland, grazing areas, and water sources.

5.3 Integrated Rural Development
98. Rural populations will continue to increase in many countries. With existing patterns ofland distribution, the number of smallholders and landless households will increase by about
50 million, to nearly 220 million, by the year 2000./41 Together, these groups represent threequarters of the agricultural households in developing countries./42 Without adequate
livelihood opportunities, these resource-poor households will remain poor and be forced to
overuse the resource base to survive.
99. Considerable effort has gone into creating strategies of integrated rural development, andthe requirements and pitfalls are well known. Experience has shown that land reform isnecessary but alone is not enough without support through the distribution of inputs and rural
services. Smallholders, including - indeed especially - women, must be given preference whenallocating scarce resources, staff, and credit. Small farmers must also be more involved informulating agricultural policies.
100. Integrated rural development also requires resources to absorb the large increases inrural working populations expected in most developing countries through non-agricultural
work opportunities, which should be promoted in rural areas. Successful agriculturaldevelopment and the growth in incomes should open up opportunities in service activities andsmall-scale manufacturing if supported by public policy.

5.4 Food Availability Fluctuations
101. Environmental degradation can make food shortages more frequent and more severe.
Hence sustainable agricultural development will reduce the season-to-season variability infood supplies. But such systems cannot eliminate it. There will be weather-induced
fluctuations, and the growing dependence on only a few crop varieties over large areas may
amplify the effects of weather and pest damage. Often it is the poorest households and theecologically disadvantaged regions that suffer most from these shortages.
102. Food stocks are crucial in dealing with shortages. At present, the world stock of cereals is

on the order of 20 per cent of annual consumption: The developing world controls about
one-third of the stock and the industrial world, two-thirds. More than half the developingcountry stock is in two countries - China and India. Stock levels in most of the others provide
only for immediate operational requirements; there is little by way of a reserve./43

As agriculture production is being developed, a rising number of farmers havebeen able to purchase tractors. But they find that, after using them for a year, it
becomes much more expensive than they expected because they have to spend atremendous amount of money on expensive spare parts. Perhaps we mightrecommend that Indonesia establish a factory that makes these spare parts,
before they continue encouraging introduction of tractors in agriculture.
For this reason, a number of loans that the government has been providing forfarmers to modernize their agricultural techniques, particularly buying tractors, havenot been paid back. If the tractors were still running, they could probably pay backtheir loans. In fact, now these tractors are becoming a problem themselves,because they sit around getting rusty. and thus turning into pollution.
Andi Mappasala
Chairman. Yayasan Tellung Poccoe
WCED Public Hearing
Jakarta. 26 March 1985

103. The food stocks of industrialized countries are essentially surpluses, and provide a basis
for emergency assistance, which must be maintained. But emergency food aid is a precarious
basis for food security: developing countries should build up national stocks in surplus years toprovide reserves as well as encouraging development of food security at the household level.
To do this, they will need an effective system of public support for measures facilitating thepurchase, transportation, and distribution of food. The provision of strategically locatedstorage facilities is critical both to reduce post-harvest losses and to provide a base for quickinterventions in emergencies.
104. During most food shortages, poor households not only cannot produce food but also lose
their usual sources of income and cannot buy the food that is available. Hence food security
also requires that machinery is available promptly to put purchasing power in the hands ofdisaster-struck households, through emergency public works programme, and throughmeasures to protect small farmers from crop failures.

V. Food for the Future105. The challenge of increasing food production to keep pace with demand, while retaining theessential ecological integrity of production systems, is colossal both in its magnitude andcomplexity. But we have the Knowledge we need to conserve our land and water resources.
New technologies provide opportunities for increasing productivity while reducing pressureson resources. A new generation of farmers combine experience with education. With theseresources at our command, we can meet the needs of the human family. Standing in the way is
the narrow focus of agricultural planning and policies.
106. The application of the concept of sustainable development to the effort to ensure foodsecurity requires systematic attention to the renewal of natural resources. It requires a holistic
approach focused on ecosystems at national, regional. and global levels, with coordinated landuse and careful planning of water usage and forest exploitation. The goal of ecological security
should be embedded firmly in the mandates of FAO. other UN organizations that deal with
agriculture, and all other appropriate international agencies. It will also require anenhancement and reorientation of international assistance. (See Chapter 3.)
107. The agricultural systems that have been built up over the past few decades havecontributed greatly to the alleviation of hunger and the raising of living standards. They have
served their purposes up to a point. But they were built for the purposes of a smaller, more
fragmented world. New realities reveal their inherent contradictions. These realities require
agricultural systems that focus as much attention on people as they do on technology, as muchon resources as on production, as much on the long term as on the short term. Only such
systems can meet the challenge of the future.

Footnotes
1/ Based on data from FAO, Production Yearbook 1985 (Rome: 1986).
2/ Based on World Bank estimates for 1980, according to which 340 million people indeveloping countries (excluding China) did not have enough income to attain a minimum
calorie standard that would prevent serious health risks and stunted growth in children, and
730 million were below a higher standard that would allow an active working life. See World
Bank, Poverty and Hunger: Issues and Options for Food Security in Developing
Countries (Washington. DC: 1986).
3/ FAO, Yearbook of Food and Agriculture Statistics, 1951 (Home: 1952); FAO,
Production Yearbook 1985. op. cit.
4/ FAO, Yearbook of Food and Agricultural Statistics, Trade Volume, Part 2 1951
and Trade Yearbook 1982 and 1984 (Rome: 1952. 1983, and 1985).
5/ FAO, Trade Yearbook 1968 and Commodities Review and Outlook 1984-85(Rome: 1969 and 1986).
6/ FAO, Yearbook of Food and Agricultural Statistics, Trade Volume, Part 2 1954
(Rome: 1955); FAO, Commodities Review, op. cit.
7/ FAO, Production Yearbook 1984 (Rome: 1985).
8/ L.R. Brown. 'Sustaining World Agriculture,' in L.R. Brown et al., State of the World 1987
(London: W.W. Norton. 1987).
9/ A. Gear (ed.), The Organic Food Guide (Essex: 1983).
10/ USSR Committee for the International Hydrological Decade, World Water Balance andWater Resources of the Earth (Paris: UNESCO, 1978).
11/ FAO, Yearbook of Food and Agricultural Statistics 1951 and Production
Yearbook 1984. op. cit.
12/ 'Dairy, Prairie', The Economist, 15 November 1986.
13/ WCED Advisory Panel on Food Security, Agriculture, Forestry and Environment, Food
Security (London: Zed Books. 1987).

14/ The term pesticides is used in a generic sense in this report and covers insecticides,
herbicides. fungicides, and similar agricultural inputs.
15/ World Bank. World Development Report 1986 (New York: Oxford University Press.
1986).
16/ Brown, op. cit.
17/ Standing Committee on Agriculture. Fisheries and Forestry. Soil at Risk: Canada's
Eroding Future, A Report on Soil Conservation to the Senate of Canada (Ottawa: 1984).
18/ Brown, op. cit.
19/ Centre for Science and Environment, The State of India's Environment 1984-85(New Delhi: 1985).
20/ FAO, Land, Food and People (Rome: 1984).
21/ I. Szabolcs. 'Agrarian Change', prepared for WCED, 1985.
22/ Gear. op. cit./
23/ J. Bandyopadhyay, 'Rehabilitation of Upland Watersheds', prepared for WCED, 1985.
24/ UNEP. 'General Assessment of Progress in the Implementation of the Plan of Action to
Combat Desertification 1978-1984'. Nairobi, 1984; WCED Advisory Panel, op. cit.
25/ UNEP, op. cit.
26/ Ibid.
27/ Ibid.
28/ Ibid.
29/ Ibid.
30/ FAO, Agriculture Towards 2000 (Rome: 1981)
31/ FAO, Potential Population Supporting Capacities of Lands in the Developing
World (Rome: 1982).
32/ The land capability classification developed by the U.S. Bureau of Land Management is an
example of how the problem could be approached. A broader type of classification is implicit in
FAO, Potential Population Supporting Capacities.
33/ INDERENA, Caguan-Cagueta Report (Bogota, Colombia: 1985).
34/ The agroforestry programmes implemented in India are examples of such an approach.
They have been adopted enthusiastically by many farmers.
35/ FAO. World Food Report (Rome: 1985); WCED Advisory Panel, op. cit.
36/ WCED Advisory Panel, op. cit.
37/ Ibid.

38/ Ibid.
39/ FAO, World Food Report, op. cit.
40/ Data from Dag Hammarskjold Foundation, Sweden, in Centre for Science andEnvironment, op. cit.
41/ FAO estimates quoted in WCED Advisory Panel, op. cit.
42/ Ibid.
43/ FAO, Food Outlook (Rome: 1986).

Our Common Future, Chapter 6: Species and Ecosystems: Resources
for Development

I. The Problem: Character and Extent
II. Extinction Patterns and Trends
III. Some Causes of Extinction
IV. Economic Values at Stake
V. A New Approach; Anticipate and Prevent
VI. International Action for National Species
1. Some Current Initiatives
2. Setting Priorities

VII. Scope for National Action
VIII. The Need for Action
Footnotes

Chapter 6
Species and Ecosystems: Resources for Development
1. Conservation of living natural resources - plants, animals, and micro-organisms, and thenon-living elements of the environment on which they depend - is crucial for development.
Today, the conservation of wild living resources is on the agenda of governments; nearly 4 percent of the Earth's land area is managed explicitly to conserve species and ecosystems, and all
but a small handful of countries have national parks. The challenge facing nations today is nolonger deciding whether conservation is a good idea, but rather how it can be implemented in
the national interest and within the means available in each country.

I. The Problem: Character and Extent
2. Species and their genetic materials promise to play an expanding role in development, and apowerful economic rationale is emerging to bolster the ethical, aesthetic, and scientific cases
for preserving them. The genetic variability and germplasm material of species makecontributions to agriculture, medicine, and industry worth many billions of dollars per year.
3. Yet scientists have intensively investigated only one in every 100 of Earth's plant species,
and a far smaller proportion of animal species. If nations can ensure the survival of species, theworld can look forward to new and improved foods, new drugs and medicines, and new raw
materials for industry. This - the scope for species to make a fast-growing contribution tohuman welfare in myriad forms - is a major justification for expanded efforts to safeguard
Earth's millions of species.

4. Equally important are the vital life processes carried out by nature, including stabilization ofclimate, protection of watersheds and soil, preservation of nurseries and breeding grounds,
and so on. Conserving these processes cannot be divorced from conserving the individual
species within natural ecosystems. Managing species and ecosystems together is clearly themost rational way to approach the problem. Numerous examples of workable solutions to local
problems are available./1
5. Species and natural ecosystems make many important contributions to human welfare. Yet
these very important resources are seldom being used in ways that will be able to meet thegrowing pressures of future high demands for both goods and services that depend upon thesenatural resources.
6. There is a growing scientific consensus that species are disappearing at rates never before
witnessed on the planet. But there is also controversy over those rates and the risks theyentail. The world is losing precisely those species about which it knows nothing or little; they
are being lost in the remotest habitats. The growing scientific concern is relatively new and thedata base to support it fragile. But it firms yearly with each new field report and satellite study.
7. Many ecosystems that are rich biologically and promising in material benefits are severely
threatened. Vast stocks of biological diversity are in danger of disappearing just as science islearning how to exploit genetic variability through the advances of genetic engineering.
Numerous studies document this crisis with examples from tropical forests, temperate forests,
mangrove forests, coral reefs, savannas, grasslands, and arid zones./2 Although most of thesestudies are generalized in their documentation and few offer lists of individual species at risk orrecently extinct, some present species-by-species details. (See Box 6-1.)
8. Habitat alteration and species extinction are not the only threat. The planet is also being
impoverished by the loss of races and varieties within species. The variety of genetic riches
inherent in one single species can be seen in the variability manifested in the many races ofdogs, or the many specialized types of maize developed by breeders./3
9. Many species are losing whole populations at a rate that quickly reduces their genetic
variability and thus their ability to adapt to climatic change and other forms of environmental
adversity. For example, the remaining gene pools of major crop plants such as maize and riceamount to only a fraction of the genetic diversity they harboured only a few decades ago, eventhough the species themselves are anything but threatened. Thus there can be an importantdifference between loss of species and loss of gene reservoirs.
10. Some genetic variability inevitably will be lost, but all species should be safeguarded to theextent that it is technically, economically, and politically feasible. The genetic landscape isconstantly changing through evolutionary processes, and there is more variability than can be
expected to be protected by explicit government programmes. So in terms of genetic
conservation, governments must be selective, and ask which gene reservoirs most merit a
public involvement in protective measures. However, as a more general proposition,
governments should enact national laws and public policies that encourage individual,
community, or corporate responsibility for the protection of gene reservoirs.
11. But before science can focus on new ways to conserve species, policy makers and the generalpublic for whom policy is made must grasp the size and the urgency of the threat. Species thatare important to human welfare are not just wild plants that are relatives of agricultural crops,
or animals that are harvested. Species such as earthworms, bees, and termites may be far more
important in terms of the role they play in a healthy and productive ecosystem. It would begrim irony indeed if just as new genetic engineering techniques begin to let us peer into life's
diversity and use genes more effectively to better the human condition, we looked and foundthis treasure sadly depleted.

Box 6-1
Some Examples of Species Extinction
In Madagascar, until about mid-century, there were 12,000 plant species andprobably around 190,000 animal species, with at least 60 per cent of them
endemic to the island's eastern strip of forest (that is, found nowhere else on
Earth). At least 93 per cent of the original primary forest has been eliminated.
Using these figures, scientists estimate that at least half the original species
have already disappeared, or are on the point of doing so.
Lake Malawi in Central Africa holds over 500 cichlid fish species, 99 per cent ofthem endemic. The lake is only one-eighth the size of North America's Great
Lakes, which feature just 173 species, fewer than 10 per cent of which areendemic. Yet Lake Malawi is threatened through pollution from industrial
installations and the proposed introduction of alien species.
Western Ecuador is reputed to have once contained between 8,000 and 10,000
plant species, some 40 and 60 per cent of them endemic. Given that there are
between 10 and 30 animal species for every one plant species in similar areas,
western Ecuador must have contained about 200,000 species. Since 1960,
almost all the forests of western Ecuador have been destroyed to make way forbanana plantations, oil wells, and human settlements. The number of species
thus eliminated is difficult to judge, but the total could well number 50.000 or
more - all in just 25 years.
The Pantanal area of Brazil contains 110,000 square kilometres of wetlands,
probably the most extensive and richest in the world. They support the largest
and most diversified populations of waterfowl in South America. The area has
been classified by UNESCO as 'of international importance'. Yet it suffers
increasingly from agricultural expansion, dam construction, and other forms of
disruptive development. Sources: W. Rauh. 'Problems of BiologicalConservation in Madagascar', in D. Bramwell (ed.), Plants and Islands(London: Academic Press, 1979): D.C.N. Barel et al., 'Destruction of Fisheries inAfrica's Lakes', Nature, Vol. 315, pp. 19-20, 1985; A.H. Gentry. 'Patterns of
Neotropical Plant Species Diversity', Evolutionary Biology. Vol. 15, pp.1-84,
1982; D.A. Scott and M. Carbonell, 'A Directory of Neotropical Wetlands',
IUCN. Gland. Switzerland. 1985.

Our Atlantic forest, this mass of tropical forest that is a narrow stretch from theNorth to the South, has been reduced drastically.
This forest is characterised by a large number of endemic species, that is species
that only exist in this area, and only exist in Brazil. And consequently, it is up to us,
Brazilians, to shoulder the responsibility of keeping these species in existence.
Ibsen de Gusmao Camara
President, Brazilian Foundation for Preservation of Nature

WCED Public Hearing
Sao Paulo. 28-29 Oct 1985

II. Extinction Patterns and Trends
12. Extinction has been a fact of life since life first emerged. The present few million species are
the modern-day survivors of the estimated half-billion species that have ever existed. Almost
all past extinctions have occurred by natural processes, but today human activities are
overwhelmingly the main cause of extinctions.
13. The average duration of a species is some 5 million years. The best current estimates arethat on average 900,000 species have become extinct every 1 million years during the last 200
million years, so the average 'background rate' of extinction has been very roughly one in every
one and one-ninth years./4 The present human-caused rate is hundreds of times higher, andcould easily be thousands of times higher./5 We do not know. We have no accurate figures on
the current rates of extinctions, as most of the species vanishing are those least documented,
such as insects in tropical forests.
14. Although tropical moist forests are by far the richest biological units in terms of genetic
diversity and by far the most threatened through human activities, other major ecologicalzones are also under pressure. Arid and semi-arid lands harbour only a very small number of
species compared with tropical forests. But because of the adaptations of these species toharsh living conditions, they feature many potentially valuable biochemicals, such as the liquid
wax of the jojoba shrub and the natural rubber of the guayule bush. Many of these arethreatened by. among other things, the expansion of livestock herding.
15. Coral reefs, with an estimated half-million species in their 400,000 square kilometres, arebeing depleted at rates that may leave little but degraded remnants by early next century. This
would be a great loss, in that coral-reef organisms, by virtue of the 'biological warfare' they
engage in to ensure living space in crowded habitats, have generated an unusual number andvariety of toxins valuable in modern medicine./6
16. Tropical moist forests cover only 6 per cent of the Earth's land surface but contain at least
half the Earth's species (which totals 5 million at a minimum, but could be as many as 30
million). They may contain 90 per cent or even more of all species. The mature tropical foreststhat still exist cover only 900 million hectares, out of the 1.5-1.6 billion hectares that once
stood. Between 7.6 million and 10 million hectares are eliminated outright each year, and at
least a further 10 million hectares are grossly disrupted annually./7 But these figures comefrom surveys of the late 1970s, and since then deforestation rates have probably accelerated.
17. By the end of the century, or shortly thereafter, there could be little virgin tropical moist
forest left outside of the Zaire Basin and the western half of Brazilian Amazonia, plus someareas such as the Guyana tract of forest in northern South America and parts of the island of
New Guinea. The forests in these zones are unlikely to survive beyond a few further decades, asworld demand for their produce continues to expand and as the number of forestland farmers
increases.
18. If deforestation were to continue in Amazonia at present rates until the year 2000, but thenhalted completely (which is unlikely), about 15 per cent of plant species would be lost. Were
Amazonia's forest cover to be ultimately reduced to those areas now established as parks andreserves, 66 per cent of plant species would eventually disappear, together with almost 69 percent of bird species and similar proportions of all other major categories of species. Almost 20

per cent of the Earth's species are found in Latin American forests outside of Amazonia;
another 20 per cent are found in forests of Asia and Africa outside the Zaire Basin./8 All these
forests are threatened, and if they were to disappear, the species loss could amount tohundreds of thousands.
19. Unless appropriate management measures are taken over the longer term, at least
one-quarter, possibly one-third, and conceivably a still larger share of species existing today
could be lost. Many experts suggest that at least 20 per cent of tropical forests should beprotected, but to date well under 5 per cent has been afforded protection of any sort - andmany of the tropical forest parks exist only on paper.
20. Even the most effectively managed parks and protected areas are unlikely to provide a
sufficient answer. In Amazonia, if as much as half the forest were to be safeguarded in some
way or another but the other half were to be eliminated or severely disrupted, there might well
not be enough moisture in the Amazonian ecosystem to keep the remaining forest moist./9 It
could steadily dry up until it became more like an open woodland - with the loss of most of thespecies adapted to tropical moist forest conditions.
21. More widespread climatic changes are likely to emerge within the foreseeable future as theaccumulation of 'greenhouse gases' in the atmosphere leads to global warming early in the next
century. (See Chapter 7.) Such a change will produce considerable stress for all ecosystems,
making it particularly important that natural diversity be maintained as a means of adaptation.

Twenty years ago, as we decided to intensify our forest exploitation, we justthought the resource is available, and we just took it. At the time, we also thought
the intensive selecting out of the trees being cut wouldn't destroy forest
regeneration. Because not all of the trees were being cut. But we forgot that we
don't know yet about how the tropical forest should be rehabilitated.
An indigenous species such as meranti, I don't know the name in English, meranti,rami, is our high-valued wood, a timber that cannot make a shadow in its particularperiod of growth. And it cannot survive without that shadow. And we still didn't think
about it, we just accepted the technology from the West that we have to cut, toexploit our forest.
Emmy H. Dharsono
NGO Network for Forest Conservation
WCED Public Hearing
Jakarta, 26 March 1985

III. Some Causes of Extinction
22. The tropics, which host the greatest number and diversity of species, also host mostdeveloping nations, where population growth is fastest and poverty is most widespread. If
farmers in these countries are forced to continue with extensive agriculture, which isinherently unstable and leads to constant movement, then farming will tend to spreadthroughout remaining wildlife environments. But if they are helped and encouraged to practise
more intensive agriculture, they could make productive use of relatively limited areas, with less
impact on wildlands.
23. They will need help: training, marketing support, and fertilizers, pesticides, and tools they
can afford. This will require the full support of governments, including ensuring thatconservation policies are designed with the benefit of agriculture foremost in mind. It may be
expedient to stress the value to farmers rather than to wildlife of this programme, but in fact
the destinies of the two are intertwined. Species conservation is tied to development, and the
problems of both are more political than technical.
24. Population growth is a major threat to conservation efforts in many developing nations.
Kenya has allocated 6 per cent of its territory as parks and reserves in order to protect its
wildlife and to earn foreign exchange through tourism. But Kenya's present population of 20
million people is already pressing so hard on parks that protected land is steadily being lost to
invading farmers. And the country's population is projected to grow fourfold in the next 40
years./10
25. Similar population pressures threaten parks in Ethiopia, Uganda. Zimbabwe, and othercountries in which a growing but impoverished peasantry is forced to depend on a dwindling
natural resource base. The prospects are bleak for parks that do not make important andrecognizable contributions to national development objectives.
26. Brazil, Colombia, Indonesia. Cote d'lvoire, Kenya, Madagascar, Peru, the Philippines.
Thailand, and other nations with an unusual abundance of species already suffer a massive
flow of farmers from traditional homelands into virgin territories. These areas often include
tropical forests. perceived by the migrants encouraged to farm there as 'free' lands available for
unimpeded settlement. The people who are already living on such lands at low population
densities and with only traditional rights to the land are often swept aside in the rush todevelop lands that might better be left in extensively used forest.
27. Many tropical countries with large forest resources have provoked wasteful 'timber booms'
by assigning harvesting rights to concessionaires for royalty, rent, and tax payments that are
only a small fraction of the net commercial value of the timber harvest. They have compounded
the damage caused by these incentives by offering only short-term leases, requiring
concessionaires to begin harvesting at once, and adopting royalty systems that induce loggers
to harvest only the best trees while doing enormous damage to the remainder. In response,
logging entrepreneurs in several countries have leased virtually the entire productive forest
area within a few years and have overexploited the resource with little concern for future
productivity (while unwittingly opening it for clearing by slash-and-burn cultivators)./11
28. In Central and South America, many governments have encouraged the large-scaleconversion of tropical forests to livestock ranches. Many of these ranches have proved
ecologically and economically unsound, as the underlying soils are soon depleted of nutrients;
weed species replace planted grasses, and pasture productivity declines abruptly. Yet tens of
millions of hectares of tropical forest have been lost to such ranches, largely because
governments have underwritten the conversions with large land grants, tax credits and tax
holidays, subsidized loans, and other inducements./12
29. The promotion of tropical timber imports into certain industrial countries, through low
tariffs and favourable trade incentives, combined with weak domestic forest policies in tropicalcountries and with high costs and disincentives to harvesting in industrial countries, also
drives deforestation. Some industrial countries typically import unprocessed logs either
duty-free or at minimal tariff rates. This encourages developed country industries to use logs
from tropical forests rather than their own, a pattern that is reinforced by domestic restrictions
on the amounts that can be cut in domestic forests.

All of us in Africa are slowly waking up to the fact the African crisis is essentially anenvironmental problem that has precipitated such adverse symptoms as drought,
famine, desertification, overpopulation, environmental refugees, political instability,
widespread poverty, etc.
We are awaking to the fact that if Africa is dying it is because her environment has
been plundered, overexploited, and neglected.
Many of us in Africa are also waking up to the realization that no good Samaritans
will cross the seas to come to save the African environment. Only we Africans canand should be sufficiently sensitive to the well-being of our environment.
Mrs. Rahab W. Mwatha
The Greenbelt Movement
WCED Public Hearing
Nairobi, 23 Sept 1986

IV. Economic Values at Stake
30. Species conservation is not only justified in economic terms. Aesthetic, ethical, cultural,and scientific considerations provide ample grounds for conservation. For those who demandan accounting, the economic values inherent in the genetic materials of species are alone
enough to justify species preservation.
31. Today, industrialized nations record far greater financial benefits from wild species than dodeveloping countries, though unrecorded benefits to people living in the tropical countryside
can be considerable. But the industrial countries have the scientific and industrial capacity toconvert the wild material for industrial and medical use. And they also trade a higher
proportion of their agricultural produce than do developing nations. Northern crop breeders
are increasingly dependent on genetic materials from wild relatives of maize and wheat, twocrops that play leading roles in the international grain trade. The U.S. Department ofAgriculture estimates that contributions from plant genetic material lead to increases in
productivity that average around l per cent annually, with a farm-gate value of well over $1
billion (1980 dollars)./13
32. The U.S. maize crop suffered a severe setback in 1970. when a leaf fungus blighted
croplands, causing losses to farmers worth more than $2 billion. Then fungus-resistant genetic
material was found in genetic stocks that had originated in Mexico./14 More recently, aprimitive species of maize was discovered in a montane forest of south-central Mexico./15 This
wild plant is the most primitive known relative of modern maize and was surviving in only
three tiny patches covering a mere four hectares in an area threatened with destruction by
farmers and loggers. The wild species is a perennial; all other forms of maize are annuals. Its
cross-breeding with commercial varieties of maize opens up the prospect that farmers could bespared the annual expense of ploughing and sowing, since the plant would grow again yearly of
its own accord. The genetic benefits of this wild plant, discovered when not more than a few
thousand last stalks remained, could total several thousand million dollars a year./16
33. Wild species likewise contribute to medicine. Half of all prescriptions dispensed have their
origins in wild organisms./17 The commercial value of these medicines and drugs in the UnitedStates now amounts to some $14 billion a year./18 Worldwide, and including non-prescription
materials plus pharmaceuticals, the estimated commercial value exceeds $40 billion a year./19
Industry also benefits from wildlife./20
34. Wildlife-derived materials contribute gums, oils, resins, dyes, tanning, vegetable fats andwaxes, insecticides, and many other compounds. Many wild plants bear oil-rich seeds that canhelp in the manufacture of fibres, detergents, starch, and general edibles. For instance, theFevillea genus of rain-forest vines in western Amazonia bear seeds with such a high oil content
that a hectare of such vines in an original forest could produce more oil than a hectare ofcommercial oil palm plantation./21
35. A few plant species contain hydrocarbons rather than carbohydrates./22 Certain of theseplants can flourish in areas that have been rendered useless through such activities as stripmining. Hence land that has been degraded by extraction of hydrocarbons such as coal could
be rehabilitated by growing hydrocarbons on the surface. Moreover, unlike an oil well, a'petroleum plantation' need never run dry.
36. The emerging field of genetic engineering, by which science devises new variations of life
forms, does not render wild genes useless. In fact, this new science must be based on existing
genetic material and makes such material even more valuable and useful. Extinction, according
to Professor Tom Eisner of Cornell University, 'no longer means the simple loss of one volume
from the library of nature. It means the loss of a loose-leaf book whose individual pages, were
the species to survive, would remain available in perpetuity for selective transfer andimprovement of other species./23 And Professor Winston Brill of the University of Wisconsin
has noted: 'We are entering an age in which genetic wealth, especially in tropical areas such as
rain forests, until now a relatively inaccessible trust fund, is becoming a currency with highimmediate value./24
37. Genetic engineering may mean that agriculture's Green Revolution will be superseded by a'Gene Revolution'. This technology raises hopes of eventually harvesting crops from deserts,
from seawater, and from other environments that did not previously support farming. Medical
researchers foresee their own Gene Revolution bringing more innovative advances during thelast two decades of this century than occurred during the previous 200 years.
38. Many of the nations with the least capacity for managing living resources are those richestin species; the tropics, which contain at least two-thirds of all species and a still greater
proportion of threatened species, roughly coincide with the area generally referred to as theThird World. Many developing nations recognize the need to safeguard threatened species butlack the scientific skills, institutional capacities, and funds necessary for conservation.
Industrial nations seeking to reap some of the economic benefits of genetic resources should
support the efforts of Third World nations to conserve species; they should also seek ways tohelp tropical nations and particularly the rural people most directly involved with these species
realize some of the economic benefits of these resources.

It will not be possible to restore the population of 'oomurasaki' - our purple
emperor butterfly - to the previous level. The forest for oomurasaki requires
weeding, planting of trees, and care and maintenance. The forest will be handed
down to the succeeding generations. Isn't it wonderful to think that you are linked tothe succeeding generations by handing down the forest where many oomurasaki
fly and people enjoy themselves?
It would be nice if we could develop into the hearts of the children the love andaffection for nature. We hope to make the forest we are making our gift to thechildren who will live in the 21st century.
Mika Sakakibara
Student, Tokyo University of Agriculture and Technology

WCED Public Hearing
Tokyo. 27 Feb 1987

V. A New Approach; Anticipate and Prevent
39. The historical approach of establishing national parks that are somehow isolated from thegreater society has been overtaken by a new approach to conservation of species andecosystems that can be characterized as 'anticipate and prevent.' This involves adding a new
dimension to the now-traditional and yet viable and necessary step of protected areas.
Development patterns must be altered to make them more compatible with the preservation of
the extremely valuable biological diversity of the planet. Altering economic and land use
patterns seems to be the best long-term approach to ensuring the survival of wild species andtheir ecosystems.
40. This more strategic approach deals with the problems of species depletion at their sourcesin development policies. anticipates the obvious results of the more destructive policies, andprevents damage now. A useful tool in promoting this approach is the preparation of National
Conservation Strategies (NCS), which bring the processes of conservation and development
together. Preparing an NCS involves government agencies, non-governmental organizations,private interests, and the community at large in analysis of natural resource issues andassessment of priority actions. In this way. it is hoped that sectoral interests will better
perceive their interrelationships with other sectors and new potentials for conservation anddevelopment will be revealed.
41. The link between conservation and development and the need to attack the problem at thesource can be seen clearly in the case of tropical forests. Sometimes it is government policy, noteconomic necessity, that drives the overexploitation and destruction of these resources. The
direct economic and fiscal costs of this overexploitation - in addition to those of species
extinction - are huge. The result has been wasteful exploitation of the tropical forests, thesacrifice of most of their timber and non-timber values. enormous losses of potential revenue
to the government, and the destruction of rich biological resources.
42. Third World governments can stem the destruction of tropical forests and other reservoirsof biological diversity while achieving economic goals. They can conserve valuable species andhabitat while reducing their economic and fiscal burdens. Reforming forest revenue systems
and concession terms could raise billions of dollars of additional revenues, promote more
efficient, long-term forest resource use. and curtail deforestation. Governments could savethemselves enormous expense and revenue loss, promote more sustainable land uses, andslow down the destruction of tropical forests by eliminating incentives for livestock ranching.
43. The link between conservation and development also requires some changes in tradepatterns. This has been recognized in the establishment in 1986 of the International Tropical
Timber Organization, based in Yokohama, Japan, which seeks to rationalize trade flows. It has
been set up to implement the first commodity agreement that incorporates a specificconservation component.
44. Numerous other opportunities can be found to encourage both species conservation andeconomic productivity. Many governments maintain unrealistically low taxes on rural land,
while allowing settlers to establish title to 'virgin' land by converting it to farmland. Thus
wealthy landowners can keep huge, underused estates at little or no cost, while land-hungry
peasants are encouraged to clear forests to establish marginal holdings. Reforms of tax andtenure systems could increase productivity on existing holdings and reduce the pressures toexpand cultivation into forests and upland watersheds.
45. Well-designed ecosystem conservation contributes to the predominant' goals of sustainable
development in a number of ways. Safeguards for critical tracts of wildlands can serve also to
safeguard agricultural land, for example. This is particularly true for upland forests of thetropics, which protect valley fields from floods and erosion, and waterways and irrigation
systems from siltation.
46. A case in point is the Duraoga-Bone Reserve in Indonesia's northern Sulawesi, coveringsome 3,000 square kilometres of upland forest. It protects large populations of most of
Sulawesi's endemic mammals, and many of the island's 80 endemic bird species. It also
protects the Dumoga Valley Irrigation Scheme, funded by a World Bank loan, set up in theflatlands below to achieve a tripling of rice production on more then 13,000 hectares of prime
agricultural land./25 Similar examples include the Canaima National Park in Venezuela, which
protects domestic and industrial water supplies for a major hydropower facility that, in turn,provides electricity to the nation's key industrial centre and its capital city.
47. One conclusion from this connection is that governments could think of 'parks fordevelopment', insofar as parks serve the dual purpose of protection for species habitats anddevelopment processes at the same time. National efforts to anticipate and prevent theadverse consequences of development policies in any of these areas would surely yield much
more for species conservation than all the measures of the past 10 years in support of parkbuilding, ranger patrols, anti-poaching units, and the other conventional forms of wildlife
preservation. The 3rd World Congress on National Parks, held in Bali, Indonesia, in October
1982, brought this message from protected area managers to the policy makers of the world,
demonstrating the many contributions that protected areas managed in the modern way aremaking to sustaining human society.

VI. International Action for National Species
48. Species and their genetic resources - whatever their origins - plainly supply benefits to all
human beings. Wild genetic resources from Mexico and Central America serve the needs ofmaize growers and consumers globally. The principal cocoa-growing nations are in West Africa,
while the genetic resources on which modern cocoa plantations depend for their continued
productivity are found in the forests of western Amazonia.
49. Coffee growers and drinkers depend for the health of the crop on constant supplies of new
genetic material from coffee's wild relatives, principally located in Ethiopia. Brazil, which
supplies wild rubber germplasm to Southeast Asia's rubber plantation, itself depends on
germplasm supplies from diverse parts of the world to sustain its sugar-cane, soybean, andother leading crops. Without access to foreign sources of fresh germplasm year by year, thenations of Europe and North America would quickly find their agricultural output declining.
50. The Earth's endowment of species and natural ecosystems will soon be seen as assets to beconserved and managed for the benefit of all humanity. This will necessarily add the challengeof species conservation to the international political agenda.
51. At the heart of the issue lies the fact that there is often a conflict between the short-term
economic interest of the individual nations and the long-term interest of sustainable
development and potential economic gains of the world community at large. A major thrust inactions to conserve genetic diversity must therefore be directed at making it more economicallyattractive both in the short term and in the longer perspective to protect wild species and theirecosystems. Developing countries must be ensured an equitable share of the economic profit

from the use of genes for commercial purposes.

1. Some Current Initiatives
52. A number of international measures are already being tried. But they are limited in scope,
only partially successful, and reactive in nature. UNESCO operates a clearing-house for
information on natural areas and genetic resources. Its World Heritage Fund supports the
management of a handful of exceptional ecosystems around the world, but all these activities
receive small budgets. UNESCO has sought to establish a global system of Biosphere Reserves
representing the Earth's 200 'biotic provinces' and harbouring sample communities of species.
But only one-third of the needed reserves have been established, even though instituting andoperating the rest would cost only about $150 million a year./26
53. UN agencies such as FAO and UNEP run programmes concerned with threatened species,
genetic resources, and outstanding ecosystems. But their combined activities are tiny in theface of the large needs. Among national agencies, the U.S. Agency for International
Development leads the field in recognizing the value of species conservation. Legislation
passed by the U.S. Congress in 1986 will make available $2.5 million a year for this purpose./27
Again, this should be considered an important gesture compared with what has been done todate by bilateral agencies, but trifling compared with the needs and opportunities.
54. IUCN, working in close collaboration with UNEP, WWF, the World Bank, and various
international technical assistance agencies, has established a 'Conservation Monitoring
Centre', to provide data on species and ecosystems for any part of the world quickly and easily.
This service, which is available to all, can help ensure that development projects are designedwith full information available about the species and ecosystems that might be affected.
Technical assistance is also available for nations, sectors, and organizations interested inestablishing local data bases for their own applications.
55. Species problems tend to be perceived largely in scientific and conservationist terms rather
than as a leading economic and resource concern. Thus the issue lacks political clout. One
important initiative that attempts to put conservation more squarely on the agenda ofinternational development concerns has been the Tropical Forestry Action Plan. This
collaborative effort coordinated by FAO involves the World Bank, IUCN, the World Resources
Institute, and UNDP, along with numerous other collaborating institutions. The broad-based
effort proposes the formulation of national forestry reviews, national forestry plans,
identification of new projects, enhanced cooperation between development aid agencies atwork in the forestry sector. and increased flows of technical and financial resources into
forestry and related fields such as' smallholder agriculture.
56. Establishing norms and procedures with respect to resource issues is at least as important
as increased funding. Precedents for such norms include the Convention on Wetlands ofInternational Importance, the Convention on Conservation of Islands for Science (both ofwhich safeguard prime habitats and their species), and the Convention on International Tradein Endangered Species. These three precedents all help, although the first two are essentiallyreactive attempts to devise 'species refuges'.

As deforestation progresses, it reduces the quality of life of millions of people indeveloping countries; their survival is threatened by the loss of the vegetation uponwhich they depend for their sources of household energy and many other goods. If
tropical forests continue to be cleared at the current rate, at least 556 million acres

(225 million hectares) will be cleared by the year 2000; if destruction of the tropicalrain forests continues unabated, an estimated 10 to 20 per cent of the earth's plant
and animal life will be gone by the year 2000.
Reversing deforestation depends on political leadership and appropriate policychanges by developing-country governments to support community-level
initiatives. The key ingredient is active participation by the millions of small farmers
and landless people who daily use forests and trees to meet their needs.
J. Gustave Speth
President, World Resources Institute
WCED Public Hearing
Sao Paulo. 28-29 Oct 1985

2. Setting Priorities
57. A first priority is to establish the problem of disappearing species and threatened
ecosystems on political agendas as a major resource issue. The World Charter for Nature,
adopted by the UN in October 1982, was an important step towards this objective.
58. Governments should investigate the prospect of agreeing to a 'Species Convention', similarin spirit and scope to the Law of the Sea Treaty and other international conventions reflecting
principles of 'universal resources'. A Species Convention, such as a draft prepared by IUCN,
should articulate the concept of species and genetic variability as a common heritage.
59. Collective responsibility for the common heritage would not mean collective internationalrights to particular resources within nations. This approach need not interfere with concepts ofnational sovereignty. But it would mean that individual nations would no longer be left to relyon their own isolated efforts to protect species within their borders.
60. Such a Convention would need to be supported by a financial arrangement that would havethe active backing of the community of nations. Any such arrangement, and there are several
possibilities, must not only seek to ensure the conservation of genetic resources for all people,
but assure that the nations that possess many of these resources obtain an equitable share of
the benefits and earnings derived from their development. This would greatly encourage theconservation of species. One such arrangement might be a Trust Fund to which all nations
could contribute, with those benefiting most from the use of these resources contributing anappropriate share. Governments of tropical forest nations could receive payments to support
the conservation of given areas of forest, with such payments rising or falling depending on the
degree to which the forests are maintained and protected./28
61. The sums required for effective conservation are large. Traditional-type conservation needsin tropical forests alone require outlays of $170 million a year for at least five years./29
However, the network of protected areas that the world will need by the year 2050 must
include much larger areas brought under some degree of protection and a sophisticated degreeof flexibility in management techniques./30
62. More funds will also be required for conservation activities outside protected areas: wildlife
management, ecodevelopment areas, education campaigns, and so on. Other approaches of aless expensive sort include the conservation of wild gene reservoirs of special significancethrough 'genetic conservation areas' in countries well endowed with biological wealth. Much ofthis work can be carried out by citizens' groups and other non-governmental means.

63. International development agencies - the World Bank and other major lending banks. UN
agencies, and bilateral agencies -should give comprehensive and systematic attention to the
problems and opportunities of species conservation. Although the international trade inwildlife and wildlife products is considerable, to date the economic values inherent in genetic
variability and ecological processes have been generally disregarded. Possible measures include
environmental impact analyses of development projects with particular attention to species'
habitats and life-support systems, identification of crucial localities featuring exceptional
concentrations of species with exceptional levels of endemism that face exceptional degrees of
threat, and special opportunities for linking species conservation with development aid.

VII. Scope for National Action
64. As indicated earlier, governments need to follow a new approach in this field - one ofanticipating the impact of their policies in numerous sectors and acting to prevent undesirable
consequences. They should review programmes in areas such as agriculture, forestry, andsettlements that serve to degrade and destroy species' habitats. Governments should
determine how many more protected areas are needed, especially in the spirit of how suchareas can contribute to national development objectives, and make further provision forprotection of gene reservoirs (for instance, primitive cultivated varieties) that may notnormally be preserved through conventional protected areas.
65. In addition, governments need to reinforce and expand existing strategies. Urgent needs
include better wildlife and protected-area management, more protected areas of anon-conventional type (such as the ecological stations that are proving reasonably successful inBrazil), more game cropping and ranching projects (such as the crocodile schemes in India,
Papua New Guinea, Thailand, and Zimbabwe), more promotion of wildlife-based tourism, andstronger anti-poaching measures (even though relatively few species are threatened bypoaching, compared with the vast numbers threatened by habitat loss). National Conservation
Strategies, such as those already prepared in over 25 countries, can be important tools for
coordinating conservation and development programmes.
66. Other measures governments could take to confront the crisis of disappearing species,
recognizing that it constitutes a major resource and development challenge, include
consideration of species conservation needs and opportunities in land use planning and the
explicit incorporation of their genetic resource stocks into national accounting systems. This
could entail establishing a natural-resource accounting system that directs particular attention
to species as high-value yet little-appreciated resources. Finally, they should support andexpand programmes of public education to ensure that the species question receives theattention it deserves throughout the entire population.
67. Every nation has only limited resources at its disposal for dealing with conservation
priorities. The dilemma is how to use these resources most effectively. Cooperation withneighbouring nations sharing species and ecosystems can help streamline programmes as well
as share expenses for regional initiatives. Explicit efforts to save particular species will bepossible for only relatively few of the more spectacular or important ones. Agonizing as it will
be to make such choices, planners need to make conservation strategies as systematicallyselective as possible. No one cares for the prospect of consigning threatened species to
oblivion. But insofar as choices are already being made, unwittingly, they should be made withselective discretion that takes into account the impact of the extinction of a species upon thebiosphere or on the integrity of a given ecosystem.
68. But even though public effort may be concentrated on a few species, all species areimportant and deserve some degree of attention; this might take the form of tax credits tofarmers willing to maintain primitive cultivars. an end to incentives to clear virgin forest, thepromotion of research attention from local universities, and the preparation of basic
inventories of native flora and fauna by national institutions.

The world is unfortunately not what we would like it to be. The problems are manyand great. Actually, they can only be solved with cooperation and quick-wittedness.
I represent an organization called 'Nature and Youth'. I know that I have full support
among our members when I say that we are worried about the future if drasticchanges do not take place, concerning the world's way of treating our essentialcondition, nature.
We who work with youth, and are youth ourselves in Norway today, know very well
how the destroying of nature leads to an apathetic fear among youth concerning
their future and how it will turn out.
It is of great importance that common people get the chance to take part indeciding how nature should be treated.
Frederic Hauge
Nature and Youth
WCED Public Hearing
Oslo, 24-25 June 1985

VIII. The Need for Action
69. There are numerous signs that the loss of species and their ecosystems is being taken
seriously as a phenomenon that carries practical implications for people all around the world,
now and for generations to come.
70. The recent rise in public concern can be seen in such developments as the growth in
Kenya's Wildlife Clubs. now numbering more than 1,500 school clubs with around 100.000
members./31 A parallel development in conservation education has occurred in Zambia. In
Indonesia, some 400 conservation groups have joined together under the banner of theIndonesian Environmental Forum and exert strong political influence./32 In the United States,
membership of the Audubon Society reached 385,000 in 1985./33 In the Soviet Union, natureclubs have over 35 million members./34 All of these indicate that the public puts a value on
nature that is beyond the normal economic imperatives.
71. In response to this popular concern, governments have been moving to help species
threatened within their borders, primarily through the establishment of additional protectedareas. Today, the worldwide network of protected areas totals more than 4 million square
kilometres, roughly equivalent to the size of most of the countries of Western Europe
combined, or twice the size of Indonesia. In terms of continental coverage, protected areas inEurope (outside the USSR) amounted by 1985 to 3.9 per cent of territory; in the USSR, to 2.5
per cent; in North America, to 8.1 per cent; in South America, to 6.1 per cent; in Africa, to 6.5
per cent; and in Asia (outside the USSR) and Australia, to 4.3 per cent each./35
72. Since 1970, the networks have expanded in extent by more than 80 per cent, around
two-thirds of which are in the Third World. But a great deal more remains to be done; aconsensus of professional opinion suggests that the total expanse of protected areas needs tobe at least tripled if it is to constitute a representative sample of Earth's ecosystems./36
73. There is still time to save species and their ecosystems. It is an indispensable prerequisite
for sustainable development. Our failure to do so will not be forgiven by future generations.

Footnotes
1/ J. McNeely and K. Miller (eds.), National Parks Conservation and Development; The
Role of Protected Areas in Sustaining Society, Proceedings of the World Congress on
National Parks (Washington, DC: Smithsonian Institution Press, 1984).
2/ W.B. Banage. 'Policies for the Maintenance of Biological Diversity', prepared for WCED,
1986; P.R. Ehrlich and A.H. Ehrlich. Extinction (New York: Random House. 1981); D.
Western (ed.), Conservation 2100, Proceedings of Wildlife Conservation International and
New York Zoological Society Conference, 21-24 October 1986 (New York: Zoological Society, inpress); N. Myers, 'Tropical Deforestation and Species Extinctions, The Latest News', Futures,
October 1985; R. Lewin, 'A Mass Extinction Without Asteroids', Science, 3 October 1986; P.H.
Raven. 'Statement from Meeting of IUCN/WWF Plant Advisory Group', Las Palmas, CanaryIslands, 24-25 November 1985; M.E. Soule (ed.), Conservation Biology: Science of
Scarcity and Diversity (Sunderland, Mass.: Sinauer Associates, 1986); E.O. Wilson (ed.),Biodiversity, Proceedings of National Forum held by National Academy of
Sciences and Smithsonian Institution, 21-24 September 1986 (Washington, DC:
National Academy Press, forthcoming).
3/ O.H. Frankel and M.E. Soule. Conservation and Evolution (Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press, 1981): CM. Schonewald-Cox et al. (eds.). Genetics and Conservation(Menlo Park. Calif.: Benjamin/Cummings Publishing Company Inc., 1983).
4/ D.D. Raup. 'Biological Extinction in Earth History', Science. 28 March 1986.
5/ Wilson, op. cit.; Ehrlich and Ehrlich, op. cit.; Myers. 'The Latest News', op. cit.; Soule. op.
cit.
6/ G.D. Ruggieri and N.D. Rosenberg, The Healing Sea (New York: Dodd Mead and Co.,
1978).
7/ FAO/UNEP. Tropical Forest Resources. Forestry Paper No. 30 (Rome: 1982); J.M.
Melillo et al., 'A Comparison of Recent Estimates of Disturbance in Tropical Forests',
Environmental Conservation. Spring 1985; N. Myers. The Primary Source (New York:W.W. Norton, 1984); Myers 'The Latest News', op. cit.; J. Molofsky et al., 'A Comparison of
Tropical Forest Surveys', Carbon Dioxide Program. U.S. Department of Energy. Washington
DC. 1986.
8/ D. Simberloff, 'Are We On the Verge of a Mass Extinction in Tropical Rain Forests?' in D.K.
Elliott (ed.), Dynamics of Extinction (Chichester. UK: John Wiley & Sons. 1986); Raven. op.
cit.
9/ E. Salati and P.B. Vose, 'Amazon Basin: A System in Equilibrium', Science, 13 July 1984.
10/ Department of International Economic and Social Affairs, World Population
Prospects: Estimates and Projections as Assessed in 1984 (New York: UN. 1986).
11/ R. Repetto. 'Creating Incentives for Sustainable Forestry Development', World Resources

Institute. Washington. DC, August 1985.
12/ Ibid.
13/ Agricultural Research Service, Introduction, Classification. Maintenance.
Evaluation, and Documentation of Plant Germplasm (Washington. DC: U.S.
Department of Agriculture. 1985).
14/ L.A. Tatum. 'The Southern Corn Leaf Blight Epidemic', Science. Vol. 171. pp. 1113-16, 1971.
15/ H.H. Iltis et al., 'Zea diploperennis (Gramineae), a New Teosinte from Mexico', Science, 12January 1979.
16/ A.C. Fisher. 'Economic Analysis and the Extinction of Species', Department of Energy andResources. University of California. Berkeley. 1982.
17/ N.R. Farnsworth and D.D. Soejarto. 'Potential Consequence of Plant Extinction in the
United States on the Current and Future Availability of Prescription Drugs', Economic
Botany, Vol. 39. pp. 231-40. 1985.
18/ N. Myers, A Wealth of Wild Species (Boulder, Colo.: Westview Press. 1983).
19/ Ibid.
20/ M.L. Oldfield, 'The Value of Conserving Genetic Resources', National Park Service. U.S.
Department of the Interior. Washington, DC, 1984; L.H. Princen, 'New Crop Development for
Industrial Oils', Journal of the American Oil Chemists' Society, Vol. 56, pp. 845-48,
1979.
21/ A.H. Gentry and R. Wettach, 'Fevillea - A New Oilseed from Amazonian Peru', Economic
Botany, Vol. 40, pp. 177-85, 1986.
22/ M. Calvin. 'Hydrocarbons from Plants: Analytical Methods and Observations',
Naturwissenschaften. Vol. 67, pp. 525-33, 1980; C.W. Hinman et al., 'Five Potential New
Crops for Arid Lands', Environmental Conservation. Winter 1985.
23/ T. Eisner. 'Chemicals. Genes, and the Loss of Species'. Nature Conservancy News, Vol.
33. No. 6, pp. 23-24, 1983.
24/ W.J. Brill. 'Nitrogen Fixation: Basic to Applied', American Scientist, Vol. 67, pp. 458-65.
1979.
25/ McNeely and Miller, op. cit.
26/ UNESCO, International Coordinating Council of Man and the Biosphere. MAB
Report Series No. 58 (Paris: 1985).
27/ Letter to N. Myers, Consultant in Environment and Development, from Senator W. Roth(R-Del.), U.S. Congress, Washington. DC.
28/ R.A. Sedjo, Testimony before the Subcommittee on Human Rights and international
Organizations. Foreign Affairs Committee, U.S. House of Representatives, 12 September 1984.
29/ International Task Force. Tropical Forests: A Call for Action (Washington, DC: World
Resources Institute, 1985).

30/ R.L. Peters and J.D.S. Darling, 'The Greenhouse Effect of Nature Reserves', Bioscience,Vol. 35, pp. 707-17. 1984.
31/ 'Kenya's Wildlife Clubs' (Brochure). Ed Wilson. WWF Regional Office for East and Central
Africa, personal communication, 3 February 1987.
32/ Centre for Environmental Studies, Environmental NGO's in Developing Countries(Copenhagen: 1985).
33/ Membership figure from Audubon circulation in Ulrich's Periodicals (New York: R.W.
Bowker, 1985).
34/ Prof. Yazan, IUCN Vice-President and Regional Counsellor, IUCN Bulletin. Vol. 17, Nos.
7-9.
35/ List of National Parks and Equivalent Reserves (IUCN: 1985).
36/ McNeely and Miller, op. cit.

Our Common Future, Chapter 7: Energy: Choices for Environmentand Development

I. Energy, Economy, and Environment
II. Fossil Fuels: The Continuing Dilemma
1. Managing Climatic change
2. Reducing Urban-Industrial Air Pollution
3. Damage from the Long-Range Transport of Air Pollution

III. Nuclear Energy: Unsolved Problems
1. The Peaceful Atom
2. The Growing Understanding of Nuclear Issues
3. The Current International Situation
4. Conclusions and Recommendations

IV. Wood Fuels: The Vanishing Resource
V. Renewable Energy: The Untapped Potential
VI. Energy Efficiency: Maintaining the Momentum
VII. Energy Conservation Measures
VIII. Conclusion
1. Energy is necessary for daily survival. Future development crucially depends on its long-term
availability in increasing quantities from sources that are dependable, safe, andenvironmentally sound. At present, no single source or mix of sources is at hand to meet thisfuture need.
2. Concern about a dependable future for energy is only natural since energy provides'essential services' for human life - heat for warmth, cooking, and manufacturing, or power fortransport and mechanical work. At present, the energy to provide these services comes fromfuels - oil, gas, coal, nuclear, wood, and other primary sources (solar, wind, or water power) that are all useless until they are converted into the energy services needed, by machines orother kinds of end-use equipment, such as stoves, turbines, or motors. In many countries
worldwide, a lot of primary energy is wasted because of the inefficient design or running of theequipment used to convert it into the services required; though there is an encouraging growthin awareness of energy conservation and efficiency.
3. Today's primary sources of energy are mainly non-renewable: natural gas, oil, coal, peat, andconventional nuclear power. There are also renewable sources, including wood, plants, dung,
falling water, geothermal sources, solar, tidal, wind, and wave energy, as well as human andanimal muscle-power. Nuclear reactors that produce their own fuel ('breeders') and eventuallyfusion reactors are also in this category. In theory, all the various energy sources cancontribute to the future energy mix worldwide. But each has its own economic, health, andenvironmental costs, benefits, and risks - factors that interact strongly with othergovernmental and global priorities. Choices must be made, but in the certain knowledge thatchoosing an energy strategy inevitably means choosing an environmental strategy.
4. Patterns and changes of energy use today are already dictating patterns well into the next
century. We approach this question from the standpoint of sustainability. The key elements ofsustainability that have to be reconciled are:sufficient growth of energy supplies to meet human needs (which means accommodatinga minimum of 3 per cent per capita income growth in developing countries);
energy efficiency and conservation measures, such that waste of primary resources isminimized;
public health, recognizing the problems of risks to safety inherent in energy sources; andprotection of the biosphere and prevention of more localized forms of pollution.
5. The period ahead must be regarded as transitional from an era in which energy has beenused in an unsustainable manner. A generally acceptable pathway to a safe and sustainableenergy future has not yet been found. We do not believe that these dilemmas have yet beenaddressed by the international community with a sufficient sense of urgency and in a global
perspective.

I. Energy, Economy, and Environment
6. The growth or energy demand in response to industrialization, urbanization, and societal
affluence has led to an extremely uneven global distribution of primary energy consumption./1
The consumption of energy per person in industrial market economies, for example, is morethan 80 times greater than in sub-Saharan Africa. (See Table 7-1.) And about a quarter of theworld's population consumes three-quarters of the world's primary energy.

Table 7-1
Global Primary Energy Consumption Per Capita, 1984
GNP Per
Capita(1984 dollars)World Bank GNP Economy
Category

EnergyConsumption

Mid-1984
Population

Total
Consumption(kW per
capita*)(million)(TW)

Low Income

260 0.41

2,390

0.99

Sub-Saharan Africa

210 0.08

258

0.02

Lower-middle

740 0.57

691

0.39

Upper-middle

1,950 1.76

497

0.87

Sub-Saharan Africa

660 0.25

148

0.04

High-Income Oil Exporters

11,250 5.17

19

0.10

Industrial Market
Economies

11,430 7.01

733

5.14

East European
Non-Market Economies

6.27

389

2.44

World

2.11**

4.718

9.94

*kW per capita is kW years/year per capita.

** Population-weighted average energy consumption (kW/capita) for first three maincategories is 0.654 and for industrial market and East European categories is 6.76.
Source: Based on World Bank, World Development Report 1985 (New York: Oxford
University Press, 1986).
7. In 1980, global energy consumption stood at around 10TW./2 (See Box 7-1.) if per capita use
remained at the same levels as today, by 2025 a global population of 6.2 billion/3 would needabout 14TW (over 4TW in developing and over 9TW in industrial countries) - an increase of 40
per cent over 1980. But if energy consumption per head became uniform worldwide at current
industrial country levels, by 2025 that same global population would require about 55TW.

Box 7-1 Energy Units
A variety of units are used to measure energy production and use in physical terms.
This chapter user; the kilowatt (kW); the Gigawatt (GW), which is equal to 1 million
kW; and the Terawatt (TW), which is equal to 1 billion kilowatts. One kilowatt - a
thousand watts of energy - if emitted continuously for a year is lkW year. Consuming 1
kW year/year is equivalent to the energy liberated by burning 1,050 kilogrammes approximately 1 ton - of coal annually. Thus a TW year is equal to approximately 1billion tons of coal. Throughout the chapter, TW years/year is written as TW.

8. Neither the 'low' nor the 'high' figure is likely to prove realistic, but they give a rough idea ofthe range within which energy futures could move, at least hypothetically. Many otherscenarios can be generated in-between, some of which assume an improved energy base for thedeveloping world. For instance, if the average energy consumption in the low- and middleincome economies trebled and doubled, respectively, and if consumption in the high-income
oil-exporting and industrial market and non-market countries remained the same as today,then the two groups would be consuming about the same amounts of energy. The low- andmiddle-income categories would need 10.5TW and the three 'high' categories would use 9.3TW- totalling 20TW globally, assuming that primary energy is used at the same levels of efficiency
as today.
9. How practical are any of these scenarios? Energy analysts have conducted many studies ofglobal energy futures to the years 2020-2030./4 Such studies do not provide forecasts of futureenergy needs, but they explore how various technical, economic, and environmental factors
may interact with supply and demand. Two of these are reviewed in Box 7-2, though a muchwider range of scenarios - from 5TW up to 63TW - are available. In general, the lower scenarios(14.4TW by 2030,/5 11.2TW by 2020./6 and 5.2 by 2030/7) require an energy efficiency
revolution. The higher scenarios (18.8TW by 2025./8 24.7TW by 2020,/9 and 35.2 by 2030 /10)
aggravate the environmental pollution problems that we have experienced since the Second
World War.

Box 7-2 Two Indicative Energy Scenarios
Case A: High Scenario
By the year 2030, a 35TW future would involve producing 1.6 tines as much oil, 3.4
times as much natural gas, and nearly 5 times as much coal as in 1960. This increasein fossil fuel use implies bringing the equivalent of a new Alaska pipeline into
production every one to two years. Nuclear capacity would have to be increased 30
times over 1960 levels - equivalent to installing a new nuclear power station
generating 1-gigawatt of electricity every two to four days. This 35TW scenario is still
well below the 55TW future that assumes today's levels of energy consumption percapita in industrial countries are achieved in all countries.
Case B: Low Scenario
Taking the 11.2TW scenario as a highly optimistic example of a strong conservation
strategy. 2020 energy demand in developing and industrial countries is quoted as
7.3TW and 3.9TW respectively, as compared with 3.3TW and 7.0TW in 1980. This
would mean a saving of 3.1TW in industrial countries by 2020 and an additional
requirement of 4.0TW in developing countries. Even if developing countries wereable to acquire the liberated primary resource, they would still be left with a shortfallof 0.9TW in primary supply. Such a deficit is likely to be much greater (possibly two
to three times), given the extreme level of efficiency required for this scenario, whichis unlikely to be realized by most governments. In 1980, the following breakdown ofprimary supply was quoted: oil, 4.2TW; coal, 2.4; gas, 1.7; renewables, 1.7; andnuclear, 0.2. The question is - where will the shortfall in primary energy supply comefrom? This rough calculation serves to illustrate that the postulated average growthof around 30 per cent per capita in primary consumption in developing countries will
still require considerable amounts of primary supply even under extremely efficientenergy usage regimes.
Sources: The 35TW scenario was originated in Energy Systems Group of theInternational Institute for Applied Systems Analysis, Energy in a Finite World A Global Systems Analysis, (Cambridge, Mass.: Ballinger, 1981); all othercalculations are from J. Goldemberg et al., 'An End-Use Oriented Global Energy
Strategy', Annual Review of Energy, Vol. 10, 1985.

10. The economic implications of a high energy future are disturbing. A recent World Bank
Study indicates that for the period 1960-95, a 4.1 per cent annual growth in energy
consumption, approximately comparable to Case A in Box 7-2, would require an average annual
investment of some $130 billion (in 1982 dollars) in developing countries alone. This would
involve doubling the share of energy investment in terms of aggregate gross domestic
product./11 About half of this would have to come from foreign exchange and the rest frominternal spending on energy in developing countries.
11. The environmental risks and uncertainties of a high energy future are also disturbing andgive rise to several reservations. Four stand out:
the serious probability of climate change generated by the 'greenhouse effect' of gases

emitted to the atmosphere, the most important of which is carbon dioxide (CO2)
produced from the combustion of fossil fuels/12 ;urban-industrial air pollution caused by atmospheric pollutants from the combustion offossil fuels /13;
acidification of the environment from the same causes/14; andthe risks of nuclear reactor accidents, the problems of waste disposal and dismantling ofreactors after their service life is over, and the dangers of proliferation associated withthe use of nuclear energy.
Along with these, a major problem arises from the growing scarcity of fuelwood in developing
countries. If trends continue, by the year 2000 around 2.4 billion people may be living in areas
where wood is extremely scarce./15
12. These reservations apply at even lower levels of energy use. A study that proposed energy
consumption at only half the levels of Case A (Box 7-2) drew special attention to the risks ofglobal warning from CO2./16 The study indicated that a realistic fuel mix - a virtual quadruplingof coal and a doubling of gas use, along with 1.4 times as much oil - could cause significant
global warming by the 2020s. No technology currently exists to remove CO2 emissions fromfossil fuel combustion. The high coal use would also increase emissions of oxides of sulphur
and nitrogen, much of which turns to acids in the atmosphere. Technologies to remove theselatter emissions are now required in some countries in all new and even some old facilities, butthey can increase investment costs by 15-25 per cent./17 If countries are not prepared to incurthese expenses, this path becomes even more infeasible, a limitation that applies much more to
the higher energy futures that rely to a greater extent on fossil fuels. A near doubling of global
primary energy consumption will be difficult without encountering severe economic, social,and environmental constraints.

Energy is, put most simply, the fundamental unit of the physical world. As such, wecannot conceive of development without changes in the extent or the nature ofenergy flows. And because it is so fundamental, every one of those changes offlows has environmental implications. The implications of this are profound. Itmeans that there is no such thing as a simple energy choice. They are all complex.
And they all involve trade-offs. However, some of the choices and some of the
trade-offs appear to be unequivocally better than others, in the sense that they
offer more development and less environmental damage.
David Brooks
Friends of the Earth
WCED Public Hearings
Ottawa, 26-27 May 1986

13. This raises the desirability of a lower energy future, where GDP growth is not constrained
but where investment effort is switched away from building more primary supply sources andput into the development and supply of highly efficient fuel-saving end-use equipment. In thisway, the energy services needed by society could be supplied at much reduced levels of primaryenergy production. Case B in Box 7-2 allows for a 50 per cent fall in per capita primary energy
consumption in industrial countries and a 30 per cent increase in developing countries./18 By
using the most energy-efficient technologies and processes now available in all sectors of theeconomy, annual global per capita GDP growth rates of around 3 per cent can be achieved. This
growth is at least as great as that regarded in this report as a minimum for reasonable
development. But this path would require huge structural changes to allow market penetrationof efficient technologies, and it seems unlikely to be fully realizable by most governments
during the next 40 years.
14. The crucial point about these lower, energy-efficient futures is not whether they are
perfectly realisable in their proposed time frames. Fundamental political and institutional
shifts are required to restructure investment potential in order to move along these lower,
more energy-efficient paths.
15. The Commission believes that there is no other realistic option open to the world for the
21st century. The ideas behind these lower scenarios are not fanciful. Energy efficiency has
already shown cost-effective results. In many industrial countries, the primary energy required
to produce a unit of GDP has fallen by as much as a quarter or even a third over the last 13
years, much of it from implementing energy efficiency measures./19 Properly managed,
efficiency measures could allow industrial nations to stabilize their primary energy
consumption by the turn of the century. They would also enable developing countries toachieve higher levels of growth with much reduced levels of investment, foreign debt, andenvironmental damage. But by the early decades of the 21st century they will not alleviate theultimate need for substantial new energy supplies globally.

II. Fossil Fuels: The Continuing Dilemma
16. Many forecasts of recoverable oil reserves and resources suggest that oil production willlevel off by the early decades of the next century and then gradually fall during a period of
reduced supplies and higher prices. Gas supplies should last over 200 years and coal about
3.000 years at present rates of use. These estimates persuade many analysts that the world
should immediately embark on a vigorous oil conservation policy.
17. In terms of pollution risks, gas is by far the cleanest fuel, with oil next and coal a poor third.
But they all pose three interrelated atmospheric pollution problems: global warming,/20 urban
industrial air pollution,/21 and acidification of the environment./22 Some of the wealthierindustrial countries may possess the economic capacity to cope with such threats. Most
developing countries do not.
18. These problems are becoming more widespread particularly in tropical and subtropicalregions, but their economic, social, and political repercussions are as yet not fully appreciatedby society. With the exception of CO2, air pollutants can be removed from fossil fuelcombustion processes at costs usually below the costs of damage caused by pollution./23
However, the risks of global warming make heavy future reliance upon fossil fuels problematic.

1. Managing Climatic change
19. The burning of fossil fuels and, to a lesser extent, the loss of vegetative cover, particularly
forests, through urban-industrial growth increase the accumulation of CO2 in the atmosphere.
The pre-industrial concentration was about 280 parts of carbon dioxide per million parts of air
by volume. This concentration reached 340 in 1980 and is expected to double to 560 between
the middle and the end of the next century./24 Other gases also play an important role in this'greenhouse effect', whereby solar radiation is trapped near the ground, warming the globe andchanging the climate.

20. After reviewing the latest evidence on the greenhouse effect in October 1985 at a meeting in
Villach, Austria, organized by the WMO, UNEP, and ICSU, scientists from 29 industrialized
and developing countries concluded that climate change must be considered a 'plausible andserious probability. They further concluded that: 'Many important economic and social
decisions are being made today on ... major water resource management activities such as
irrigation and hydropower; drought relief; agricultural land use; structural designs and coastal
engineering projects; and energy planning - all based on the assumption that past climaticdata, without modification, are a reliable guide to the future. This is no longer a good
assumption'./25
21. They estimated that if present trends continue, the combined concentration of CO2 andother greenhouse gases in the atmosphere would be equivalent to a doubling of CO2 frompre-industrial levels, possibly as early as the 2030s, and could lead to a rise in global mean
temperatures 'greater than any in man's history'./26 Current modelling studies and'experiments' show a rise in globally averaged surface temperatures, for an effective CO2
doubling, of somewhere between 1.5°C and 4.5°C, With the warming becoming more
pronounced at higher latitudes during winter than at the equator.
22. An important concern is that a global temperature rise of 1.5-4.5°C, with perhaps a two to
three times greater warming at the poles, would lead to a sea level rise of 25-140
centimetres./27 A rise in the upper part of this range would inundate low-lying coastal cities
and agricultural areas, and many countries could expect their economic, social, and politicalstructures to be severely disrupted. It would also alow the 'atmospheric heat-engine', which isdriven by the differences between equatorial and polar temperatures, thus influencing rainfall
regimes./28 Experts believe that crop and forest boundaries will move to higher latitudes; theeffects of warmer oceans on marine ecosystems or fisheries and food chains are also virtually
unknown.
23. There is no way to prove that any of this will happen until it actually occurs. The key
question is: How much certainty should governments require before agreeing to take action? Ifthey wait until significant climate change is demonstrated, it may be too late for any
countermeasures to be effective against the inertia by then stored in this massive global
system. The very long time lags involved in negotiating international agreement on complex
issues involving all nations have led some experts to conclude that it is already late./29 Given
the complexities and uncertainties surrounding the issue, it is urgent that the process start
now. A four track strategy is needed, combining:
improved monitoring and assessment of the evolving phenomena;
increased research to improve knowledge about the origins, mechanisms, and effects ofthe phenomena;
the development of internationally agreed policies for the reduction of the causative
gases; andadoption of strategies needed to minimize damage and cope with the climate changes,
and rising sea level.
24. No nation has either the political mandate or the economic power to combat climaticchange alone. However, the Villach statement recommended such a four track strategy forclimate change, to be promoted by governments and the scientific community through WMO,
UNEP, and ICSU - backed by a global convention if necessary./30

It is difficult to imagine an issue with more global impacts on human societies andthe natural environment than the greenhouse effect. The signal is unclear but wemay already be witnessing examples, if not actual greenhouse effects, in Africa.
The ultimate potential impacts of a greenhouse warming could be catastrophic. It is
our considered judgement that it is already very late to start the process of policy
consideration. The process of heightening public awareness, of building support
for national policies, and finally for developing multilateral efforts to slow the rateof emissions growth will take time to implement.
The greenhouse issue is an opportunity as well as a challenge; not surprisingly, it
provides another important reason to implement sustainable development
strategies.
Irving Mintzer
World Resources Institute
WCED Public Hearing
Oslo, 24-25 June 1985

25. While these strategies are being developed, more immediate policy measures can andshould be adopted. The most urgent are those required to increase and extend the recent
steady gains in energy efficiency and to shift the energy mix more towards renewables. Carbon
dioxide output globally could be significantly reduced by energy efficiency measures without
any reduction of the tempo of GDP growth./31 These measures would also serve to abate otheremissions and thus reduce acidification and urban-industrial air pollution. Gaseous fuels
produce less carbon dioxide per unit of energy output than oil or coal and should be promoted,
especially for cooking and other domestic uses.
26. Gases other than carbon dioxide are thought to be responsible for about one-third ofpresent global warming, and it is estimated that they will cause about half the problem around2030./32 some of these, notably chlorofluorocarbons used as aerosols, refrigeration chemicals,
and in the manufacture of plastics, may be more easily controlled than CO2. These, although
not strictly energy-related, will have a decisive influence on policies for managing carbon
dioxide emissions.
27. Apart from their climatic effect, chlorofluorocarbons are responsible to a large extent fordamage to the earth's stratospheric ozone./33 The chemical industry should make every effort
to find replacements, and governments should require the use of such replacements whenfound (as some nations have outlawed the use of these chemicals as aerosols). Governments
should ratify the existing ozone convention and develop protocols for the limitation ofchlorofluorocarbon emissions, and systematically monitor and report implementation.
28. A lot of policy development work is needed. This should proceed hand in hand withaccelerated research to reduce remaining scientific uncertainties. Nations urgently need toformulate and agree upon management policies for all environmentally reactive chemicals
released into the atmosphere by human activities, particularly those that can influence theradiation balance on earth. Governments should initiate discussions leading to a convention on
this matter.
29. If a convention on chemical containment policies cannot be implemented rapidly,
governments should develop contingency strategies and plans for adaptation to climaticchange. In either case, WMO, UNEP, WHO, ICSU, and other relevant international andnational bodies should be encouraged to coordinate and accelerate their programmes todevelop a carefully integrated strategy of research, monitoring, and assessment of the likely
impacts on climate, health, and environment of all environmentally reactive chemicals released
into the atmosphere in significant quantities.

2. Reducing Urban-Industrial Air Pollution
30. The past three decades of generally rapid growth worldwide have seen dramatic increases
in fuel consumption for heating and cooling, automobile transport, industrial activities, andelectricity generation. Concern over the effects of increasing air pollution in the late 1960s
resulted in the development of curative measures, including air-quality criteria, standards, andadd-on control technologies that can remove pollutants cost-effectively. All these greatly
reduced emissions of some of the principal pollutants and cleaned air over many cities. Despite
this, air pollution has today reached serious levels in the cities of several industrial and newly
industrialized countries as well as in those of most developing countries, which in some cases
are by now the world's most polluted urban areas.
31. The fossil fuel emissions of principal concern in terms of urban pollution, whether fromstationary or mobile sources, include sulphur dioxide, nitrogen oxides, carbon monoxide,various volatile organic compounds, fly ash, and other suspended particles. They can injure
human health and the environment, bringing increased respiratory complaints, somepotentially fatal. But these pollutants can be contained so as to protect human health and theenvironment and all governments should take steps to achieve acceptable levels of air quality.
32. Governments can establish and monitor air quality goals and objectives, allowable
atmospheric loadings, and related emission criteria or standards, as some successfully doalready. Regional organizations can support this effort. Multilateral and bilateral development
assistance agencies and development banks should encourage governments to require that themost energy-efficient technology be used when industries and energy utilities plan to build new
or extend existing facilities.

3. Damage from the Long-Range Transport of Air Pollution
33. Measures taken by many industrialized countries in the 1970s to control urban andindustrial air pollution (high chimney stacks, for example) greatly improved the quality of the
air in the cities concerned. However, it quite unintentionally sent increasing amounts ofpollution across national boundaries in Europe and North America, contributing to theacidification of distant environments and creating new pollution problems. This was manifest
in growing damage to lakes, soils, and communities of plants and animals./34 Failure to control
automobile pollution in some regions has seriously contributed to the problem.
34. Thus atmospheric pollution, once perceived only as a local urban-industrial problem
involving people's health, is now also seen as a much more complex issue encompassingbuildings, ecosystems, and maybe even public health over vast regions. During transport in theatmosphere, emissions of sulphur and nitrogen oxides and volatile hydrocarbons aretransformed into sulphuric and nitric acids, ammonium salts, and ozone. They fall to theground, sometimes many hundreds or thousands of kilometres from their origins, as dry
particles or in rain, snow, frost, fog, and dew. Few studied of their socio-economic costs areavailable, but these demonstrate that they are quite large and suggest that they are growing
rapidly./35 They damage vegetation, contribute to land and water pollution, and corrodebuildings, metallic structures and vehicles, causing billions of dollars in damage annually.
35. Damage first became evident in Scandinavia in the 1960s. Several thousand lakes in
Europe, particularly in southern Scandinavia/36, and several hundreds in North America/37
have registered a steady increase in acidity levels to the point where their natural fish
populations have declined or died out. The same acids enter the soil and groundwater,increasing corrosion of drinking water piping in Scandinavia./38
36. The circumstantial evidence indicating the need for action on the sources of acidprecipitation is mounting with a speed that gives scientists and governments little time toassess it scientifically. Some of the greatest observed damage has been reported in Central
Europe, which is currently receiving more than one gramme of sulphur on every square metreof ground each year, at least five times greater than natural background./39 There was little
evidence of tree damage in Europe in 1970. In 1962, the Federal Republic of Germany reported
visible leaf damage in its forest plot samples nationwide, amounting in 1983 to 34 per cent, andrising in 1985 to BO per cent./40 Sweden reported light to moderate damage in 30 per cent of
its forests, and various reports from other countries in Eastern and Western Europe are
extremely disquieting. So far an estimated 14 per cent of all European forestland is affected./41
37. The evidence is not all in, but many reports show soils in parts of Europe becoming acidthroughout the tree rooting layers,/42 particularly nutrient-poor soils such as those ofSouthern Sweden/43 The precise damage mechanisms are not known, but all theories include
an air pollution component. Root damage/44 and leaf damage appear to interact - affecting theability of the trees both to take up water from the soil and to retain it in the foliage, so that they
become particularly vulnerable to dry spells and other stresses. Europe may be experiencing animmense change to irreversible acidification, the remedial costs of which could be beyond
economic reach./45 (See Box 7-3.) Although there are many options for reducing sulphur,nitrogen, and hydrocarbon emissions, no single pollutant control strategy is likely to beeffective in dealing with forest decline. It will require a total integrated mix of strategies andtechnologies to improve air quality, tailored for each region.

A forest in an ecosystem that exists under certain environmental conditions, and if
you change the conditions, the system is going to change. It is a very difficult taskfor ecologists to foresee what changes are going to be because the systems are
so enormously complex.
The direct causes behind an individual tree dying can be far removed from theprimary pressure that brought the whole system into equilibrium. One time it might
be ozone, another time it may be SO2, a third time it may be aluminium poisoning.
I can express myself by an analogy: If there is famine, there are relatively few
people who die directly from starvation: they die from dysentery or various
infectious diseases. And in such a situation, it is not of very much help to send
medicine instead of food. That means that in this situation, it is necessary toaddress the primary pressures against the ecosystem.
Alf Johnels
Swedish Museum of Natural History
WCED Public Hearing
Oslo, 24-25 June 1985

38. Evidence of local air pollution and acidification in Japan and also in the newlyindustrialized countries of Asia, Africa, and Latin America is beginning to emerge. China andthe Republic of Korea seem particularly vulnerable, as do Brazil, Colombia, Ecuador, andVenezuela. So little is known about the likely environmental loading of sulphur and nitrogen inthese region and about the acid-neutralizing capacity of tropical lakes and forest soils that acomprehensive programme of investigation should be formulated without delay./46
39. Where actual or potential threats from acidification exist, governments should map
sensitive areas, assess forest damage annually and soil impoverishment every five years
according to regionally agreed protocols, and publish the findings. They should support
transboundary monitoring of pollution being carried out by agencies in their region and, where
there is no such agency, create one or give the job to any suitable regional body. Governments
in many regions could gain significantly from early agreement to prevent transboundary air
pollution and the enormous damage to their economic base now being experienced in Europe
and North America. Even though the exact causes of the damage are hard to prove, reduction
strategies are certainly within reach and economic. They could be viewed as a cheap insurance
policy compared with the vast amount of potential damage these strategies avoid.

Box 7-3 The Damage and Control Costs of Air Pollution
It is very difficult to quantify damage control costs, not least because cost figures arehighly dependent on the control strategy assumed. However, in the eastern UnitedStates, it has been estimated that halving the remaining sulphur dioxide emissions
from existing sources would cost $5 billion a year, increasing present electricity rates
by 2-3 per cent. If nitrogen oxides are figured in, the additional costs might be as highas $6 billion a year. Materials corrosion damage alone is estimated to cost $7 billion
annually in 17 states in the eastern United states.
Estimates of the annual costs of securing a 55 to 65 per cent reduction in theremaining sulphur emissions in the countries of the European Economic Community
between 1980 and 2000 range from $4.6 billion to $6.7 billion (1982 dollars) per year.
Controls on stationary boilers to reduce nitrogen levels by only 10 per cent annuallyby the year 2000 range between $100,000 and $400,000 (1982 dollars). Thesefigures translate into a one-time increase of about 6 per cent in the price of electrical
power to the consumer. Studies place damage costs due to material and fish losses
alone at $3 billion a year, while damage to crops, forests, and health are estimated to
exceed $10 billion per year. Technologies for drastically reducing oxides of nitrogenand hydrocarbons from automobile exhaust gases are readily available and routinely
used in North America and Japan, but not in Europe.
Japanese laboratory studies indicate that air pollution and acid rain can reduce somewheat and rice crop production, perhaps by as much as 30 per cent.
Sources: U.S. Congress, Office of Technology Assessment, Acid Rain andTransported Air Pollutants: Implications for Public Policy (Washington,
DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1985); U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
Acid Deposition Assessment (Washington, DC: 1985); I.M. Torrens, 'Acid Rainand Air Pollution: A Problem of Industrialization', prepared for WCED, 1985; P.
Mandelbaum, Acid Rain - Economic Assessment (New York: Plenum Press,
1985); M. Hashimoto, 'National Air quality Management Policy of Japan', prepared
for WCED, 1985; OECD, The State of the Environment (Paris: 1985).

III. Nuclear Energy: Unsolved Problems
1. The Peaceful Atom
40. In the years following the Second World War, the nuclear knowledge that under militarycontrol had led to the production of atomic weapons was redeployed for peaceful 'energy'
purposes by civilian technologists. Several benefits were obvious at the time.
41. It was also realized that no energy source would ever be risk-free. There was the danger ofnuclear war, the spread of atomic weapons, and nuclear terrorism. But intensive international
cooperation and a number of negotiated agreements suggested that these dangers could be
avoided. For instance, the Nonproliferation Treaty (NPT), drafted in its final form in 1969,
included a promise by signatory governments possessing nuclear weapons and expertise topursue and undertake nuclear disarmament ad also to assist the non-nuclear signatories indeveloping nuclear power, but strictly for peaceful purposes only. Other problems, such asradiation risks, reactor safety, and nuclear waste disposal were all acknowledged as very
important but, with the right amount of effort, containable.
42. And now, after almost four decades of immense technological effort to support nuclear
development, nuclear energy has become widely used. Some 30 governments produce from
nuclear generators a total of about 15 per cent of all the electricity used globally. Yet it has not
met earlier expectations that it would be the key to ensuring an unlimited supply of low-costenergy. However, during this period of practical experience with building and running nuclear
reactors, the nature of the costs, risks and benefits have become much more evident and assuch, the subject of sharp controversy.

2. The Growing Understanding of Nuclear Issues
43. The potential for the spread of nuclear weapons is one of the most serious threats to world
peace. It is in the interest of all nations to prevent proliferation of nuclear weapons. All nations
therefore should contribute to the development of a viable non-proliferation regime. The
nuclear weapon states must deliver on their promise to reduce the number and ultimately
eliminate nuclear weapons in their arsenals and the role those weapons play in their strategies.
And the non-nuclear-weapon states must cooperate in providing credible assurances that they
are not moving towards a nuclear weapon capability.

The health risks for the development of peaceful uses of nuclear technology,
including nuclear electricity, are very small when compared with the benefits fromthe use of nuclear radiation for medical diagnosis treatment.
The safe application of nuclear radiation technology promises many benefits inenvironmental clean-up and in increasing world food supplies by eliminating
spoilage.
With a recent and very notable exception, the international cooperation that has
marked the development of nuclear power technology provides an excellent modelby which to address common environmental and ethical problems posed by thedevelopment of other technologies.
Ian Wilson
Vice-President, Canadian Nuclear Association
WCED Public Hearing
Ottawa, 26-27 May 1986

44. Most schemes for non-proliferation mandate an institutional separation between militaryand civilian uses of nuclear energy. But for countries with full access to the complete nuclear
fuel cycle, no technical separation really exists. Not all states operate the necessary clear-cut
administrative separation of civilian and military access. Cooperation is needed also amongsuppliers and buyers of civilian nuclear facilities and materials and the International Atomic
Energy Agency, in order to provide credible safeguards against the diversion of civilian reactor
programmes to military purposes, especially in countries that do not open all their nuclear
programmes to IAEA inspection. Thus, there still remains a danger of the proliferation of
nuclear weapons.

2.1 Costs
45. The costs of construction and the relative economics of electricity generating stations whether powered by nuclear energy, coal, oil or gas - are conditioned by the following factors
throughout the service life of a plant:
the cost of borrowing money to finance plant construction,
the impact of inflation;
the duration of the period of planning, licensing, and construction;
the cost of fuel and maintenance ;the costs of protective measures, to ensure safe operation; andwaste disposal costs (land, air, and water pollution containment) and the costs of
dismantling at the end of service life.
46. All these factors vary widely depending on differing institutional, legal, and financial
arrangements in different countries. Cost generalizations and comparisons are therefore
unhelpful or misleading. However, costs associated with several of these factors have increased
more rapidly for nuclear stations during the last 5-10 years, so that the earlier clear costadvantage of nuclear over the service life of the plant has been reduced or lost altogether./47
Nations should therefore look very closely at cost comparisons to obtain the best value whenchoosing an energy path.

2.2 Health and Environment Risks
47. Very strict codes of safety practice are implemented in nuclear plants so that under
officially approved operating conditions, the danger from radiation to reactor personnel andespecially to the general public is negligible. However, an accident occurring in a reactor may incertain very rare canes be serious enough to cause an external release of radioactive
substances. Depending upon the level of exposure, people are under a certain level of risk of
becoming ill from various forms of cancer or from alteration or genetic material, which may
result in hereditary defects.
48. Since 1928, the International Commission on Radiological Protection (ICRP) has issued
recommendations on radiation dosage levels above which exposure is unacceptable. These
have been developed for occupationally exposed workers and for the general public. The'Nuclear Safety Standards (NUSS) codes of IAEA were developed in 1975 to reduce safety
differences among member states. Neither system is in any way binding on governments, if an
accident occurs, individual governments have the responsibility of deciding at what level ofradioactive contamination pasture land, drinking water, milk, meat, eggs, vegetables, and fish,
are to be banned for consumption by livestock or humans.
49. Different countries - even different local government authorities within a country - havedifferent criteria. Some have none at all, ICRP and NUSS notwithstanding. States with more
rigorous standards may destroy large amounts of food or may ban food imports from aneighbour states with more permissive criteria. This causes great hardship to farmers who may
not receive any compensation for their losses. It may also cause trade problems and politicaltension between states. Both of these difficulties occurred following the Chernobyl disaster,when the need to develop at least regionally conformable contamination criteria andcompensation arrangements was overwhelmingly demonstrated.

2.3 Nuclear Accidents Risks
50. Nuclear safety returned to the newspaper headlines following the Three Mile Island(Harrisburg, United States) and the Chernobyl (USSR) accidents. Probabilistic estimates of therisks of component failure, leading to a radioactive release in Western style light water reactors
wore made in 1975 by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission./48 The most serious categoryof release through containment failure was placed at around 1 in 1,000,000 years of reactor
operation. Post-accident analysis of both Harrisburg and Chernobyl - a completely different
type of reactor - have shown that in both cases, human operator error was the main cause.
They occurred after about 2,000 and 4,000 reactor-years respectively./49 The frequencies ofsuch occurrences are well nigh impossible to estimate probabilistically. However, available
analyses indicate that although the risk of a radioactive release accident is small, it is by nomeans negligible for reactor operations at the present time.
51. The regional health and environment effects of an accident are largely predictable fromradioactive fall-out studies following early atomic weapons testing in the atmosphere and havebeen confirmed in practice following the Chernobyl accident. What could not be confidently
predicted before Chernobyl were the local effects of such an accident. A much clearer picture is
now emerging as a result of the experiences there when a reactor exploded, following a series ofinfringements of the official safety regulations, on 26 April 1986, causing the worst reactor
accident ever experienced. As a result, the whole district had to be managed on something likea 'war footing' and efforts resembling a large military operation were needed to contain thedamage.

2.4 Radioactive Waste Disposal
52. Civil nuclear energy programmes worldwide have already generated many thousands oftons of spent fuel and high-level waste. Many governments have embarked on large-scale
programmes to develop ways of isolating these from the biosphere for the many hundreds ofthousands of years that they will remain hazardously radioactive.
53. But the problem of nuclear waste disposal remains unsolved. Nuclear waste technology hasreached an advanced level of sophistication./50 This technology has not however been fully
tested or utilized and problems remain about disposal. There is particular concern about future
recourse to ocean dumping and the disposal of contaminated waste in the territories of smallor poor states that lack the capacity to impose strict safeguards. There should be a clear
presumption that all countries that generate nuclear waste dispose of it within their own
territories or under strictly monitored agreements between states.

3. The Current International Situation
54. During the last 25 years, a growing awareness of the difficulties outlined above has resulted
in a wide range of reactions from technical experts, the public, and governments. Many experts
still feel that so much can be learned from the problems experienced up to now. They argue
that if the public climate allows then to solve the nuclear waste disposal and decommissioning
issues and the cost of borrowing money remains reasonably below its 1980-82 peak, in theabsence of viable new supply alternatives there is no reason why nuclear energy should not
emerge as a strong runner in the 1990s. At the other extreme, many experts take the view that
there are so many unsolved problems and too many risks for society to continue with a nuclear
future. Public reactions also vary. Some countries have exhibited little public reaction, in others
there appears to be a high level of anxiety that expresses itself in anti-nuclear results in public
opinion polls or large anti-nuclear campaigns.

Today the assessment of practical consequences can be based on practicalexperience. The consequences of Chernobyl has made Soviet specialists once
again pose a question: Is not the development of nuclear energy on an industrial
scale premature? Will it not be fatal to our civilization, to the ecosystem of ourplanet? On our planet so rich in all sorts of energy sources, this question can be
discussed quite calmly. We have a real choice in this, both on a state and agovernmental level, and also on the level of individuals and professionals.
We must put all our efforts to improve the technology itself, to develop andelaborate strict standards and norms of quality, of safety of a technology. We
must work for the creation of anti-accident centres and centres devoting
themselves to compensating for the losses to the environment. The upgrading of
the industrial level of safety and the solution of the problem of the relations
between man and machine would be a lot more natural thing to do thanconcentrating the efforts on only one element of the energy structure in the world.
This would benefit the whole of humanity.
V. A. Legasov
Member, Academy of Sciences of the USSRWCED Public Hearing
Moscow, 8 Dec 1986

55. And so, whilst some states still remain nuclear-free, today nuclear reactors supply about 15
per cent of all the electricity generated. Total electricity production worldwide is in turnequivalent to around 15 per cent of global primary energy supply. Roughly one-quarter of all
countries worldwide have reactors. In 1986, there were 366 working and a further 140
planned,/51 with 10 governments possessing about 90 per cent of all installed capacity (morethan 5 GW (e)). Of these, there are 8 with a total capacity of more than 9 GW (e),/52 which
provided the following percentages of electric power in 1985: France, 65; Sweden, 42; Federal
Republic of Germany, 31; Japan, 23; United Kingdom, 19; United States, 16; Canada, 13; andUSSR, 10. According to IAEA, in 1985 there were 55 research reactors worldwide, 33 of them indeveloping countries./53
56. Nevertheless, there is little doubt that the difficulties referred to above have in one way or
another contributed to a scaling back of future nuclear plans - in some countries, to a de facto
nuclear pause. In Western Europe and North America, which today have almost 75 per cent of
current world capacity, nuclear provides about one-third of the energy that was forecast for it
10 years ago. Apart from France, Japan, the USSR, and several other East European countries
that have decided to continue with their nuclear programmes, ordering, construction, andlicensing prospects for new reactors in many other countries look poor. In fact, between 1972
and 1986, earlier global projections of estimated capacity for the year 2000 have been revised
downwards by a factor of nearly seven. Despite this, the growth of nuclear at around 15 percent a year over the last 20 years is still impressive./54

57. Following Chernobyl, there were significant changes in the nuclear stance of certain
governments. Several - notably China, the Federal Republic of Germany, France, Japan,
Poland, United Kingdom, United States, and the USSR - have maintained or reaffirmed theirpro-nuclear policy. Others with a 'no nuclear' or a 'phase-out' policy (Australia, Austria,
Denmark, Luxembourg, New Zealand, Norway, Sweden - and Ireland with an unofficial
anti-nuclear position) have been joined by Greece and the Philippines. Meanwhile, Finland,
Italy, the Netherlands, Switzerland, and Yugoslavia are re-investigating nuclear safety and/or
the anti-nuclear arguments, or have introduced legislation tying any further growth of nuclear
energy and export/import of nuclear reactor technology to a satisfactory solution of the
problem of disposal of radioactive wastes. Several countries have been concerned enough to
conduct referenda to test public opinion regarding nuclear power.

4. Conclusions and Recommendations
58. These national reactions indicate that as they continue to review and update all theavailable evidence, governments tend to take up three possible positions:remain non-nuclear and develop other sources of energy:
regard their present nuclear power capacity as necessary during a finite period oftransition, to safer alternative energy sources; or
adopt and develop nuclear energy with the conviction that the associated problems andrisks can and must, be solved with a level of safety that is both nationally andinternationally acceptable.
The discussion in the Commission also reflected these tendencies, views, and positions.
59. But whichever policy is adopted, it is important that the vigorous promotion of energyefficient practices in all energy sectors and large-scale programmes of research, development,
and demonstration for the safe and environmentally benign use of all promising energy
sources, especially renewables, be given the highest, priority.
60. Because of potential transboundary effects, it is essential that governments cooperate todevelop internationally agreed codes of practice covering technical, economic, social (including
health and environment aspects), and political components of nuclear energy. In particular,international agreement must be reached on the following specific items:
full governmental ratification of the conventions on 'Early Notification of a Nuclear
Accident' (including the development of an appropriate surveillance and monitoring
system) and on 'Assistance in the Case of a Nuclear Accident or Radiological Emergency'
as recently developed by IAEA;
emergency response training - for accident containment and for decontamination andlong-term clean-up of affected sites, personnel, and ecosystems;
the transboundary movement of all radioactive materials - including fuels, spent fuels,and other wastes by land, sea, or air;a code of practice on liability and compensation;
standards for operator training and international licensing;codes of practice for reactor operation, including minimum safety standards;
the reporting of routine and accidental discharges from nuclear installations;effective, internationally harmonized minimum radiological protection standards;
agreed site selection criteria as well as consultation and notification prior to the siting of
all major civil nuclear - related installations;standards for waste repositories;
standards for the decontamination and dismantling of time-expired nuclear reactors;
andproblems posed by the development of nuclear powered shipping.
61. For many reasons, especially including the failure of the nuclear weapons states to agree on
disarmament, the Nonproliferation Treaty has not proved to be a sufficient instrument toprevent the proliferation of nuclear weapons, which still remains a serious danger to world
peace. We therefore recommend in the strongest terms the construction of an effective
international regime covering all dimensions of the problem. Both nuclear weapons states andnon nuclear weapons states, should undertake to accept safeguards in accordance with thestatutes of IAEA.
62. Additionally, an international regulatory function is required, including inspection ofreactors internationally. This should be quite separate from the role of IAEA in promoting
nuclear energy.
63. The generation of nuclear power is only justifiable if there are solid solutions to thepresently unsolved problems to which it gives rise. The highest priority must be accorded toresearch and development on environmentally sound and economically viable alternatives, aswell as on means of increasing the safety of nuclear energy.

IV. Wood Fuels: The Vanishing Resource
64. Seventy per cent of the people in developing countries use wood and, depending on
availability, burn anywhere between an absolute minimum of about 350 kilogrammes to 2,900
kilogrammes of dry wood annually, with the average being around 700 kilogrammes perperson./55 Rural woodfuel supplies appear to be steadily collapsing in many developing
countries, especially in Sub-Saharan Africa./56 At the same time, the rapid growth ofagriculture, the pace of migration to cities, and the growing numbers of people entering themoney economy are placing unprecedented pressures on the biomass base/57 and increasing
the demand for commercial fuels: from wood and charcoal to kerosene, liquid propane, gas,and electricity. To cope with this, many developing country governments have no option but toimmediately organize their agriculture to produce large quantities of wood and other plant
fuels.
65. Wood is being collected faster than it can regrow in many developing countries that still rely
predominantly on biomass wood, charcoal, dung, and crop residues - for cooking, for heating
their dwellings, and even for lighting. FAO estimates suggest that in 1900, around 1.3 billion
people lived in wood-deficit areas./58 If this population-driven overharvesting continues atpresent rates, by the year 2000 some 2.4 billion people may be living in areas where wood is'acutely scarce or has to be obtained elsewhere'. These figures reveal great human hardship.
Precise data on supplies are unavailable because much of the wood is not commercially tradedbut collected by the users, principally women and children, but there is no doubt that millions
are hard put to find substitute fuels, and their numbers are growing.
66. The fuelwood crisis and deforestation - although related are not the same problems. Woodfuels destined for urban and industrial consumers do tend to come from forests. But only asmall proportion of that used by the rural poor comes from forests. Even in these cases,
villagers rarely chop down trees; most collect dead branches or cut them from trees./59
67. When fuelwood is in short supply, people normally economize; when it is no longer
available, rural people are forced to burn such fuels as cow dung, crop stems and husks, andweeds. Often this does no harm, since waste products such as cotton stalks are used. But theburning of dung and certain crop residues may in some cases rob the soil of needed nutrients.
Eventually extreme fuel shortages can reduce the number of cooked meals and shorten thecooking time, which increases malnourishment.
68. Many urban people rely on wood, and most of this is purchased. Recently, as the price ofwood fuels has been rising, poor families have been obliged to spend increasing proportions of
their income on wood. In Addis Ababa and Maputo, families may spend a third to half of theirincomes this way./60 Much work has been done over the past 10 years to develop fuel-efficient
stoves, and some of these new models use 30-50 per cent less fuel. These, as well as aluminium
cooking pots and pressure cookers that also use much less fuel, should be made more widely
available in urban areas.

Fuelwood and charcoal are, and will remain, the major sources of energy for thegreat majority of rural people in developing countries. The removal of trees in both
semiarid and humid land in African countries is a result to a large extent of
increasing

V. Renewable Energy: The Untapped Potential
73. Renewable energy sources could in theory provide 10-13TW annually - equal to current
global energy consumption./63 Today they provide about 2TW annually, about 21 per cent of
the energy consumed worldwide, of which 15 per cent is biomass and 6 per cent hydropower.
However, most of the biomass is in the form of fuelwood and agricultural and animal wastes.
As noted above, fuelwood can no longer be thought of as a 'renewable' resource in many areas,
because consumption rater have overtaken sustainable yields.
74. Although worldwide reliance on all these sources has been growing by more than 10 per
cent a year since the late 1970s, it will be some time before they make up a substantial portionof the world's energy budget. Renewable energy systems are still in a relatively primitive stageof development. But they offer the world potentially huge primary energy sources, sustainablein perpetuity and available in one form or another to every nation on Earth. But it, will require
a substantial and sustained commitment to further research and development if their potential
is to be realized.
75. Wood as a renewable energy source is usually thought of as naturally occurring trees andshrubs harvested for local domestic use. Wood, however, is becoming an important feedstock,
specially grown for advanced energy conversion processes in developing as well as industrial
countries for the product ion of process heat, electricity, and potentially for other fuels, such as
combustible gases and liquids.
76. Hydropower, second to wood among the renewables, has been expanding at nearly 4 percent annually. Although hundreds of thousands of megawatts of hydropower have been
harnessed throughout the world, the remaining potential is huge./64 In neighbouring
developing countries, interstate cooperation in hydropower development could revolutionize
supply potential especially in Africa.

In the choice of resources to be utilized we should not stare at renewable
resources of energy blindly, we should not blow it out of proportion, we should notpromote it for the sake of the environment per se. Instead we should develop andutilize all resources available, renewable sources of energy included, as along-term endeavour requiring a continuous and sustained effort that will not be
subject to short-term economic fluctuations, in order that we, in Indonesia, willachieve a successful and orderly transition to a more diversified and balanced
structure of energy supply and environmentally sound energy supply system, whichis the ultimate goal of our policy.
Speaker from the floor
WCED Public Hearings
Jakarta, 26 March 1985

77. Solar energy use is small globally, but it is beginning to assume an important place in theenergy consumption patterns of some countries. Solar water and household heating is
widespread in many parts of Australia, Greece, and the Middle East. A number of East
European and developing countries have active solar energy programmes, and the UnitedStates and Japan support solar sales of several hundred million dollars a year. With constantly
improving solar thermal and solar electric technologies, it is likely that their contribution will
increase substantially. The cost of photovoltaic equipment has fallen from around $500-600
per peak watt to $5 and is approaching the $1-2 level where it can compete with conventional
electricity production./65 But even at $5 per peak watt, it still provides electricity to remoteplaces more cheaply than building power lines.
78. Wind power has been used for centuries - mainly for pumping water. Recently its use has
been growing rapidly in regions such as California and Scandinavia. In these cases the windturbines are used to generate electricity for the local electricity grid. The costs ofwind-generated electricity, which benefited initially from substantial tax incentives, have fallen
dramatically in California in the last five years and may possibly be competitive with otherpower generated there within a decade./66 Many countries have successful but small windprogrammes, but the untapped potential is still high.
79. The fuel alcohol programme in Brazil produced about 10 billion litres of ethanol fromsugar-cane in 1984 and replaced about 60 per cent of the gasoline that would have beenrequired./67 The cost has been estimated at $50-60 per barrel of gasoline replaced. Whensubsidies are removed, and a true exchange rate is used, this is competitive at 1981 oil prices.
With present lower oil prices, the programme has become uneconomical. But it saves thenation hard currency, and it provides the additional benefits of rural development,
employment generation, increased self-reliance, and reduced vulnerability to crises in theworld oil markets.
80. The use of geothermal energy, from natural underground heat sources, has been increasing
at more than 15 per cent per year in both industrial and developing countries. The experience
gained during the past decades could provide the basis for a major expansion of geothermalcapacity./68 By contrast, technologies for low-grade heat via heat pumps or from solar pondsand ocean thermal gradients are promising but still mostly at the research and development
stage.
81. These energy sources are not without their health and environment risks. Although theyrange from rather trivial to very serious problems, public reactions to them are not necessarily
in proportion to the damage sustained. For instance, some of the commonest difficulties withsolar energy are, somewhat surprisingly, the injuries from roof falls during solar thermal
maintenance and the nuisance of sun-glare off their glass surfaces. Or a modern wind turbine
can be a significant noise nuisance to people living nearby. Yet, these apparently small
problems often arouse very strong public reactions.
82. But these are still minor issues compared with the ecosystem destruction at hydropowersites or the uprooting of homesteads in the areas to be flooded, as well as the health risks fromtoxic gases generated by rotting submerged vegetation and soils, or from waterborne diseases
such as schistosomiasis (snail fever). Hydrodams also act as an important barrier to fish
migration and frequently to the movement of land animals. Perhaps the worst problem theypose is the danger of catastrophic rupture of the dam-wall and the sweeping away or floodingof human settlements downstream - about once a year somewhere in the world. This risk issmall but not insignificant.
83. One of the most widespread chronic problems is the eye and lung irritation caused bywoodsmoke in developing countries. When agricultural wastes are burned, pesticide residues
inhaled from the dusts or smoke of the crop material can be a health problem. Modern biofuel
liquids have their own special hazards. Apart from competing with food crops for good
agricultural land, their production generates large quantities of organic waste effluent, which if
not used as a fertilizer can cause serious water pollution. Such fuels, particularly methanol,
may produce irritant or toxic combustion products. All these and many other problems, bothlarge and small, will increase as renewable energy systems are developed.
84. Most renewable energy systems operate best at small to medium scales, ideally suited forrural and suburban applications. They are also generally labour-intensive, which should be an
added benefit where there if surplus labour. They are less susceptible than fossil fuels to wild
price fluctuations and foreign exchange costs. Most countries have some renewable resources,
and their use can help nations move towards self-reliance.
85. The need for a steady transition to a broader and more sustainable mix of energy sources isbeginning to become accepted. Renewable energy sources could contribute substantially tothis, particularly with new and improved technologies, but their development will depend in
the short run on the reduction or removal of certain economic and institutional constraints totheir use. These are formidable in many countries. The high level of hidden subsidies forconventional fuels built into the legislative and energy programmes of most countries distorts
choices against renewables in research and development, depletion allowances, tax write-offs,
and direct support of consumer prices. Countries should undertake a full examination of all
subsidies and other forms of support to various sources of energy and remove those that are
not clearly justified.
86. Although the situation is changing rapidly in some jurisdictions, electrical utilities in mosthave a supply monopoly on generation that allows them to arrange pricing policies that
discriminate against other, usually small, suppliers./69 In some countries a relaxation of thiscontrol, requiring utilities to accept power generated by industry, small systems, andindividuals, has created opportunities for the development of renewables. Beyond that,
requiring utilities to adopt an end-use approach in planning, financing, developing, andmarketing energy can open the door to a wide range of energy-saving measures as well asrenewables.
87. Renewable energy sources require a much higher priority in national energy programmes.
Research, development, and demonstration projects should command funding necessary toensure their rapid development and demonstration. With a potential of 10TW or so, even if
3-4TW were realized, it would make a crucial difference to future primary supply, especially indeveloping countries, where the background conditions exist for the success of renewables.
The technological challenges of renewables are minor compared with the challenge of creating
the social and institutional frameworks that will ease these sources into energy supply systems.
88. The Commission believes that every effort should be made to develop the potential forrenewable energy, which should form the foundation of the global energy structure during the
21st Century. A much more concerted effort must be mounted if this potential is to be realized.
But a major programme of renewable energy development will involve large costs and highrisks, particularly massive-scale solar and biomass industries. Developing countries lack theresources to finance all but a small fraction of this cost although they will be important users
and possibly even exporters. Large-scale financial and technical assistance will therefore be
required.

VI. Energy Efficiency: Maintaining the Momentum
89. Given the above analysis, the Commission believes that energy efficiency should be thecutting edge of national energy policies for sustainable development. Impressive gains inenergy efficiency have been made since the first oil price shock in the 1970s. During the past 13
years, many industrial countries saw the energy content of growth fall significantly as a resultof increases in energy efficiency averaging 1.7 per cent annually between 1973 and 1983./70 And
this energy efficiency solution costs less, by savings made on the extra primary supplies
required to run traditional equipment.
90. The cost-effectiveness of 'efficiency' as the most environmentally benign 'source' of energy
is well established. The energy consumption per unit of output from the most efficient
processes and technologies is one-third to less than one-half that of typically available
equipment./71
91. This is true of appliances for cooking, lighting and refrigeration, and space cooling andheating - needs that are growing rapidly in most countries and putting severe pressures on theavailable supply systems. It is also true of agricultural cultivation and irrigation systems, of theautomobile, and of many industrial processes and equipment.
92. Given the large disproportion in per capita energy consumption between developed anddeveloping countries in general, it is clear that the scope and need for energy saving ispotentially much higher in industrial than in developing countries. Nonetheless, energy
efficiency is important everywhere. The cement factory, automobile, or irrigation pump in apoor country is fundamentally no different from its equivalent in the rich world. In both, there
is roughly the same scope for reducing the energy consumption or peak power demand ofthese devices without loss of output or welfare. But poor countries will gain much more fromsuch reductions.
93. The woman who cooks in an earthen pot over an open fire uses perhaps eight times moreenergy than an affluent neighbour with a gas stove and aluminium pans. The poor who lighttheir homes with a wick dipped in a jar of kerosene get one-fiftieth of the illumination of a
100-watt electric bulb, but use just as much energy. These examples illustrate the tragic
paradox of poverty. For the poor, the shortage of money is a greater limitation than theshortage of energy. They are forced to use 'free' fuels and inefficient equipment because they
do not have the cash or savings to purchase energy-efficient fuels and end-use devices.
Consequently, collectively they pay much more for a unit of delivered energy services.
94. In most cases, investments in improved end-use technologies save money over timethrough lowered energy-supply needs The costs of improving the end-use equipment isfrequently much less than the cost of building more primary supply capacity. In Brazil, forexample, it has been shown that for a discounted total investment of $4 billion in more efficient
end-use technologies (such as more efficient refrigerators, street-lighting, or motors) it would
be feasible to defer construction of 21 gigawatts of new electrical supply capacity,
corresponding to a discounted capital savings for new supplies of $19 billion in the period 1986
to 2000./72

We must change our attitude towards consumption goods in developed countries
and we must create technological advances that will allow us to carry on economic
development using less energy. We must ask ourselves can we solve the problems
of underdevelopment without using or increasing the tremendous amount of energy
used by these countries.
The idea that developing countries use very little energy is an incorrect idea. We
find that the poorest countries of all have a different problem; their problem isinefficient use of energy. Medium countries such as Brazil use more efficient andmodern sources of fuel. The great hope for these countries is that the future will bebuilt not based on technologies of the past, but using advanced technology. This
will allow them to leap forward in relation to countries that are already developed.
Jose Goldemberg
President, Companhia Energetica de Sao Paulo
WCED Public Hearing
Brasilia, 30 Oct 1985

95. There are many examples of successful energy efficiency programmes in industrial
countries. The many methods used successfully to increase awareness include information
campaigns in the media, technical press, and schools; demonstrations of successful practices
and technologies; free energy audits; energy 'labelling' of appliances; and training in energysaving techniques. These should be quickly and widely extended. Industrialized countries
account for such a large proportion of global energy consumption that even small gains inefficiency can have a substantial impact on conserving reserves and reducing the pollution loadon the biosphere. It is particularly important that consumers, especially large commercial andindustrial agencies, obtain professional audits of their energy use. This kind of energy 'bookkeeping' will readily identify those places in their consumption patterns where significant
savings can be made.
96. Energy pricing policies play a critical role in stimulating efficiency. At present, theysometimes include subsidies and seldom reflect the real costs of producing or importing theenergy, particularly when exchange rates are undervalued. Very rarely do they reflect theexternal damage costs to health, property, and the environment. Countries should evaluate allhidden and overt subsidies to see how far real energy costs can be passed on to the consumer.
The true economic pricing of energy - with safeguards for the very poor - needs to be extended
in all countries. Large numbers of countries both industrial and developing are alreadyadopting such policies.

97. Developing countries face particular constraints in saving energy. Foreign exchange
difficulties can make it hard to purchase efficient but costly energy conversion and end-use
devices. Energy can often be saved cost-effectively by fine-tuning already functioning
systems./73 But governments and aid agencies may find it less attractive to fund such measuresthan to invest in new large-scale energy supply hardware that is perceived as a more tangible
symbol of progress.
98. The manufacture, import, or sale of equipment conforming to mandatory minimal energy
consumption or efficiency standards is one of the most powerful and effective tools inpromoting energy efficiency and producing predictable savings. International cooperation may
be required when such equipment is traded from nation to nation. Countries and appropriate
regional organizations should introduce and extend increasingly strict efficiency standards forequipment and mandatory labelling of appliances.
99. Many energy efficiency measures cost nothing to implement. But where investments areneeded, they are frequently a barrier to poor households and small-scale consumers, evenwhen pay-back times are short. In these latter cases, special small loan or hire-purchasearrangements are helpful. Where investment costs are not insurmountable, there are many
possible mechanisms for reducing or spreading the initial investment, such as loans withfavourable repayment periods and 'invisible' measures such as loans repaid by topping up thenew, reduced energy bills to the pre-conservation levels.
100. Transport has a particularly important place in national energy and development
planning. It is a major consumer of oil, accounting for 50-60 per cent of total petroleum use inmost developing countries./74 It is often a major source of local air pollution and regional
acidification of the environment in industrial and developing countries. Vehicle markets willgrow much more rapidly in developing countries, adding greatly to urban air pollution, which
in many cities already exceeds international norms. Unless strong action is taken, air pollution
could become a major factor limiting industrial development in many Third World cities.
101. In the absence of higher fuel prices, mandatory standards providing for a steady increasein fuel economy may be necessary. Either way, the potential for substantial future gains in fueleconomy is enormous. If momentum can be maintained, the current average fuel consumptionof approximately 10 litres per 100 kilometres in the fleet of vehicles in use in industrial
countries could be cut in half by the turn of the century./75
102. A key issue is how developing countries can rapidly improve the fuel economy of theirvehicles when these are, on average, used for twice as long those as in industrial countries,
cutting rates of renewal and improvement in half. Licensing and import agreements should be
reviewed to ensure access to the best available fuel efficient designs and production processes.
Another important fuel-saving strategy especially in the growing cities of developing countries
is the organizing of carefully planned public transport systems.
103. Industry accounts for 40 60 pet cent of all energy consumed in industrial countries and10-40 per cent in developing countries. (See Chapter 6.) There has been significant
improvement in the energy efficiency of production equipment, processes, and products. In
developing countries, energy savings of as much as 20-30 per cent could be achieved by suchskilful management of industrial development.
104. Agriculture worldwide is only a modest energy consumer, accounting for about 3.5 percent of commercial energy use in the industrial countries and 4.5 per cent in developing
countries as a whole./76 A strategy to double food production in the Third World throughincreases in fertilizers, irrigation, and mechanization would add 140 million tons of oil
equivalent to their agricultural energy use. This is only some 5 per cent of present world energy
consumption and almost certainly a small part of the energy that could be saved in othersectors in the developing world through appropriate efficiency measures./77
105. Buildings offer enormous scope for energy savings, and perhaps the most widely
understood ways of increasing energy efficiency are in the home and workplace. Buildings in
the tropics are now commonly designed to avoid as much direct solar heating as possible byhaving very narrow east- and west-facing walls, but with long sides facing north and south andprotected from the overhead sun by recessed windows or wide sills.
106. An important method of heating buildings is by hot water produced during electricity
production and piped around whole districts, providing both heat and hot water. This
extremely efficient use of fossil fuels demands a coordination of energy supply with local
physical planning, which few countries are institutionally equipped to handle./78 Where it has
been successful, there has usually been local authority involvement in or control of regionalenergy-services boards, such as in Scandinavia and the USSR. Given the development of theseor similar institutional arrangements, the cogeneration of heat and electricity could
revolutionize the energy efficiency of buildings worldwide.

VII. Energy Conservation Measures107. There is general agreement that the efficiency gains achieved by some industrializedcountries over the past 13 years were driven largely by higher energy prices, triggered by higher
oil prices. Prior to the recent fall in oil prices, energy efficiency was growing at a rate of 2.0 per
cent annually in some countries, having increased gradually year by year./79
108. It is doubtful whether such steady improvements can be maintained and extended if
energy prices are held below the level needed to encourage the design and adoption of moreenergy-efficient homes, industrial processes, and transportation vehicles. The level required
will vary greatly within and between countries, depending on a wide range of factors. But
whatever it is, it should be maintained. In volatile energy markets, the question is how.
109. Nations intervene in the 'market price' of energy in a variety of ways. Domestic taxes (orsubsidies) on electrical power rates, oil, gas and other fuels are most common. They vary
greatly between and even within countries where different states, provinces, and sometimes
even municipalities have the right to add their own tax. Although taxes on energy have seldom
been levied to encourage the design and adoption of efficiency measures, they can have that
result if they cause energy prices to rise beyond a certain level - a level that varies greatly
among jurisdictions.
110. Some nations also maintain higher than market prices on energy through duties onimported electricity, fuel, and fuel products. Others have negotiated bilateral pricing
arrangements with oil and gas producers in which they stabilize prices for a period of time.
111. In most countries, the price of oil eventually determines the price of alternative fuels.
Extreme fluctuations in oil prices, such as the world has experienced recently, endanger
programmes to encourage conservation. Many positive energy developments worldwide thatmade sense with oil above $25 per barrel, are harder to justify at lower prices. Investments inrenewables, energy-efficient industrial processes, transport vehicles, and energy-services may
be reduced. Most are needed to ease the transition to a safer and more sustainable energy
future beyond this century. This goal requires a long, uninterrupted effort to succeed.

112. Given the importance of oil prices on international energy policy, the Commission
recommends that new mechanisms for encouraging dialogue between consumers andproducers be explored.
113. If the recent momentum behind annual gains in energy efficiency is to be maintained andextended, governments need to make it an explicit goal of their policies for energy pricing toconsumers. Prices needed to encourage the adoption of energy-saving measures may beachieved by any of the above means or by other means. Although the Commission expresses nopreference, conservation pricing requires that governments take a long-term view in weighing
the costs and benefits of the various measures. They need to operate over extended periods,
dampening wild fluctuations in the price of primary energy, which can impair progress towards
energy conservation.

VIII. Conclusion
114. It is clear that a low energy path is the best way towards a sustainable future. But given
efficient and productive uses of primary energy, this need not mean a shortage of essential
energy services. Within the next 50 years, nations have the opportunity to produce the samelevels of energy services with as little as half the primary supply currently consumed. Thisrequires profound structural changes in socio-economic and institutional arrangements and is
an important challenge to global society.
115. More importantly, it will buy the time needed to mount major programmes on sustainable
forms of renewable energy, and so begin the transition to a safer, more sustainable energy era.
The development of renewable sources will depend in part on a rational approach to energy
pricing to secure a stable matrix for such progress. Both the routine practice of efficient energy
use and the development of renewables will help take pressure off traditional fuels, which aremost needed to enable developing countries to realize their growth potential worldwide.
116. Energy is not so much a single product as a mix of products and services, a mix upon which
the welfare of individuals, the sustainable development of nations, and the life-supporting
capabilities of the global ecosystem depend. In the past, this mix has been allowed to flow
together haphazardly, the proportions dictated by short-term pressures on and short-termgoals of governments, institutions, and companies. Energy is too important for its development
to continue in such a random manner. A safe, environmentally sound, and economically viableenergy pathway that will sustain human progress into the distant future is clearly imperative.
It is also possible. But it will require new dimensions of political will and institutional
cooperation to achieve it.

Footnotes
1/ World Bank, World Development Report 1986 (New York: Oxford University Press,
1986).
2/ British Petroleum Company, BP Statistical Review of World Energy (London: 1986).
3/ Medium variant in Department of International Economic and Social Affairs, World
Population Prospects as Assessed in 1980, Population Studies No. 78 (Annex), and Long
Range Population Projections of the World and Major Regions 2025-2150, Five
Variants as Assessed in 1980 (New York: UN, 1981).

4/ For a useful comparison of various scenarios, see J. Goldemberg et al., 'An End-Use
Oriented Global Energy strategy', Annual Review of Energy, Vol. 10, 1985; and W. Keepin
et al., 'Emissions of CO2 into the Atmosphere', in B. Bolin et al. (eds.), The Greenhouse
Effect, Climate Change and Ecosystems (Chichester, UK: John Wiley & Sons, 1986).
5/ U. Colombo and O. Bernadini, 'A Low Energy Growth Scenario and the Perspectives forWestern Europe', Report for the Commission of the European Communities Panel on
Low Energy Growth, 1979.
6/ Goldemberg et al., 'Global Energy Strategy', op. cit.
7/ A.B. Lovins et al., 'Energy Strategy for Low Climatic Risk', Report for the German Federal
Environment Agency, 1981.
8/ J.A. Edmonds et al., 'An Analysis of Possible Future Atmospheric Retention of Fossil FuelCO2', Report for U.S. Department of Energy, DOE/OR/21400 1, Washington, DC, 1984.
9/ J-R Frisch (ed.), Energy 2000-2020: World Prospects and Regional Stresses,
World Energy Conference (London: Graham and Trotman, 1983).
10/ Energy Systems Group of the International Institute for Applied Systems Analysis,
Energy in a Finite World - A Global Systems Analysis (Cambridge, Mass.: Ballinger,1981).
11/ World Bank, The Energy Transition in Developing Countries (Washington, DC:1983).
12/ World Meteorological Organization, A Report of the International Conference on
the Assessment of the Role of Carbon Dioxide and of Other Greenhouse Gases in
Climate Variations and Associated Impacts, Villach, Austria, 9-15 October 1985, WMO
No. 661 (Geneva: WMO/ICSU/UNEP, 1986).
13/ B.N. Lohani, 'Evaluation of Air Pollution control Programmes and Strategies in Seven Asian
Capital Cities', prepared for WCED, 1986; H. Weidner, 'Air Pollution Control Strategies andPolicies in the Federal Republic of Germany', prepared for WCED, 1986; M. Hashimoto,'National Air quality Management Policy of Japan', prepared for WCED, 1985; CETESB, 'Air
Pollution Control Programme and Strategies in Brazil - Sao Paulo and Cubatao Areas, 1985',
prepared for WCED, 1985.
14/ National Research Council, Acid Deposition: Long Term Trends (Washington, DC:
National Academy Press, 1985); L.P. Muniz and H. Leiverstad, 'Acidification Effects on
Freshwater Fish', in D. Drablos and A. Tollan (eds.), Ecological Impact of Acid
Precipitation (Oslo: SNSF, 1980); L. Hallbacken and C.O. Tamm, 'Changes in Soil Acidityfrom 1927/ to 1982- 4 in a Forest Area of South West Sweden', Scandinavian Journal ofForest Research, No. 1, pp. 219-32, 1986.
15/ FAO, Fuelwood Supplies in the Developing Countries, Forestry Paper No. 42(Rome: 1983); Z. Mikdashi, 'Towards a New Petroleum Order', Natural Resources Forum,
October 1986.
16/ Edmonds et al., op. cit.
17/ I.M. Torrens, 'Acid Rain and Air Pollution, A Problem of Industrialization', prepared for
WCED, 1985.

18/ Goldemberg et al., 'Global Energy Strategy', op. cit.
19/ British Petroleum Company, op. cit.
20/ WMO, Report of International Conference, op. cit.; I. Mintzer, 'Societal Responses to
Global Warming', submitted to WCED Public Hearings, Oslo, 1985; F.K. Hare, 'The Relevanceof Climate', submitted to WCED Public Hearings, Ottawa, 1986.
21/ Lohani, op. cit.; Weidner, op. cit.; Hashimoto, op. cit.; CETESB, op. cit.
22/ Torrens, op. cit.; F. Lixun and D. Zhao, 'Acid Rain in China', prepared for WCED, 1985; H.
Rodhe, 'Acidification in Tropical Countries', prepared for WCED, 1985; G.T. Goodman,'Acidification of the Environment, A Policy Ideas Paper', prepared for WCED, 1986.
23/ Torrens, op. cit.
24/ Bolin et al., op. cit.
25/ WMO, Report of International Conference, op. cit.
26/ Ibid.
27/ Ibid.
28/ Goldemberg et al., 'Global Energy Strategy', op. cit.
29/ Mintzer, op. cit.
30/ WMO, Report of International Conference, op. cit.
31/ D.J. Rose et al., Global Energy Futures and CO2 - Induced Climate Change,
MITEL Report 83-015 (Cambridge, Mass.: Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1983); A.M.
Perry et al., 'Energy Supply and Demand Implication of CO2', Energy, Vol. 7, pp. 991-1004,
1982.
32/ Bolin et al., op. cit.
33/ G. Brasseur, The Endangered Ozone Layer: New Theories on Ozone Depletion',
Environment, Vol. 29, No. 1, 1987.
34/ National Research Council, op. cit.; Muniz and Leiverstad, op. cit.
35/ OECD, The State of the Environment (Paris: 1985).
36/ Muniz and Leiverstad, op. cit.
37/ National Research Council, op. cit.
38/ National Swedish Environmental Protection Board, Air Pollution and Acidification(Solna, Sweden, 1986).
39/ J. Lehmhaus et al., 'Calculated and Observed Data for 1980 Compared at EMEP
Measurement Stations', Norwegian Meteorological Institute, EMEP/MSO W Report 1 86, 1986;
C.B. Epstein and M. Oppenheimer, 'Empirical Relation Between Sulphur Dioxide Emissions
and Acid Deposition Derived from Monthly Data', Nature, No. 323, pp. 245-47, 1985.

40/ 'Neuartige Waldschaden in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland', Das Bundesministerium fur
Ernahrung, Landwirtschaft und Forsten, 1983; 'Waldschaden Sernebungen', Das
Bundesministerium fur Ernahrung, Landwirtschaft und Forsten, 1985; S. Nilsson, 'Activities ofTeams of Specialists: Implications of Air Pollution Damage to Forests for Roundwood Supply
and Forest Products Markets: Study on Extent of Damage', TIM/R 124 Add.1 (Restricted),
1986.
41/ S. Postel, 'Stabilizing Chemical Cycles' (after Allgemeine Forst Zeitschrift, Nos. 46(1985) and 41 (1986)); in L.R. Brown et al., State of the World 1987 (London: W.W. Norton,
1987).
42/ T. Paces, 'Weathering Rates of Eneiss and Depletion of Exchangeable Cations in Soils
Under Environmental Acidification', Journal Ecological Society, No. 143, pp. 673-77, 1986;
T. Paces, 'Sources of Acidification in Contra] Europe Estimated from Elemental Budgets in
Small Basins', Nature, No. 315, pp. 31-36, 1985.
43/ Hallbacken and Tamm, op. cit.
44/ G. Tyler et al., 'Metaller i Skogsmark - Deposition och omsattning', SNV PM 1692, Solna,
Sweden, 1983.
45/ 'Neuartige Waldschaden', 1983, op. cit; Paces, 'Weathering Rates', op. cit.
46/ Rodhe, op. cit,
47/ R. Eden et al., Energy Economics (New York: Cambridge University Press, 1981);
Nuclear Energy Agency, Projected Costs of Generating Electricity from Nuclear andCoal-Fired Power Stations for Commissioning in 1995 (Paris: OECD, 1986).
48/ Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Physical Processes in Reactor Meltdown
Accidents, Appendix VIII to Reactor Safety Study (WASH-1400) (Washington, DC: U.S.
Government Printing Office, 1975).
49/ S. Islam and K. Lindgren, 'How many reactor accidents will there be?', Nature, No. 122,
pp. 691-92, 1986; A.W.K. Edwards, 'How many reactor accidents?' Nature, No. 324, pp 417-18,
1986.
50/ F.L. Parker et al., The Disposal of High Level Radioactive Waste - 1984, Vols. 1 & 2(Stockholm: The Beijer Institute, 1984); F.L. Parker and R.E. Kasperson, International
Radwaste Policies (Stockholm: The Beijer Institute, in press).
51/ International Atomic Energy Agency, Nuclear Power: Status and Trends, 1986
Edition (Vienna: 1986).
52/ 'World List of Nuclear Power Plants', Nuclear News, August 1986.
53/ IAEA Bulletin, Summer 1986.
54/ C, Flavin, 'Reassessing Nuclear Power', in Brown et al., op. cit.; British Petroleum
Company, op. cit.
55/ G. Foley, 'Wood Fuel and Conventional Fuel Demands in the Developing World', Ambio,
Vol. 14 No. 5, 1985.
56/ FAO, Fuelwood Supplies, op. cit.; FAO/UNEP, Tropical Forest Resources, Forestry

Paper No. 30 (Rome: 1982).
57/ The Beijer Institute, Energy, Environment and Development in Africa, Vols, 1-10
(Uppsala, Sweden: Scandinavian Institute of African Studies, 1984 87); 'Energy Needs in
Developing Countries', Ambio, Vol. 14, 1985; E.N. Chidumayo, 'Fuelwood and Social Forestry',
prepared for WCED, 1985; G.T. Goodman, 'Forest-Energy in Developing Countries: Problems
and Challenges', International Union of Forest Research Organizations, Proceedings,
Ljubljana, Yugoslavia, 1986.
58/ FAO, Fuelwood Supplies, op. cit.
59/ Beijer Institute, op. cit.; J. Bandyopadhyay, 'Rehabilitation of Upland Watersheds',
prepared for WCED, 1986.
60/ Beijer Institute, op. cit.
61/ R. Overend, 'Bioenergy Conversion Process: A Brief State of the Art and Discussion ofEnvironmental Implications', International Union of Forestry Research Organization,
Proceedings, Ljubljana, Yugoslavia, 1986.
62/ W. Fernandes and S. Kulkarni (eds.), Towards a New Forest Policy: People's Rights
and Environmental Needs (New Delhi, India: Indian Social Institute, 1983); P.N. Bradley etal., 'Development Research and Energy Planning in Kenya', Ambio, Vol. 14, No. 4; R. Hosier,'Household Energy Consumption in Rural Kenya', Ambio, Vol 14, No. 4, 1985; 1985; R.
Engelhard et al., 'The Paradox of Abundant On-Farm Woody Biomass, Yet Critical Fuelwood
Shortage: A Case Study of Kakamega District (Kenya)', International Union of Forest Research
Organization, Proceedings, Ljubljana, Yugoslavia, 1986.
63/ D. Deudney and C. Flavin, Renewable Energy: The Power to Choose (London: W.W.
Norton, 1983).
64/ World Resources Institute/International Institute Environment and Development, World
Resources 1987 (New York, Basic Books, in press).
65/ Ibid.
66/ Ibid.
67/ Goldemberg et al., 'Global Energy Strategy', op. cit.; J. Goldemberg et al., 'Ethanol Fuel: A
Use of Biomass Energy in Brazil', Ambio, Vol. 14, pp. 293-98, 1985; J. Goldemberg et al., 'Basic
Needs and Much More, With One Kilowatt Per Capita', Ambio, Vol. 14, pp. 190-201, 1985.
68/ WRI/IIED, op. cit.
69/ N.J.D. Lucas, 'The Influence of Existing Institutions on the European Transition from Oil',
The European, pp. 173-89, 1981.
70/ OECD, op. cit.
71/ E. Hirst et al., 'Recent Changes in U.S. Energy Consumption, What Happened and Why?' in
D.J. Rose (ed.), Learning About Energy (New York: Plenum Press, 1986).
72/ H.S. Geller, 'The Potential for Electricity Conservation in Brazil', Companhia Energetica de
Sao Paulo, Sao Paulo, Brazil, 1985.

73/ World Bank, Energy Transition in Developing Countries, op. cit.
74/ G. Leach et al., Energy and Growth; A Comparison of Thirteen Industrialized
and Developing Countries (London: Butterworth, 1986).
75/ MIT International Automobile Program, The Future of the Automobile (London:
George Allen & Unwin, 1984).
76/ FAO, Agriculture; Towards 2000 (Rome: 1981).
77/ Ibid.
78/ Lucas, op. cit.
79/ OECD, op. cit.

Our Common Future, Chapter 8: Industry: Producing More With
Less

I. Industrial Growth and its Impact
1. The Changing structure of World Industry
2. Environmental Decline and Response

II. Sustainable Industrial Development in a Global Context
1. Industrialization in the Third World
2. Use of Energy and Raw Materials
3. Promises and Risks of New Technologies

III. Strategies for Sustainable Industrial Development
1. Establish Environmental Goals, Regulations, Incentives, andStandards
2. Make More Effective Use of Economic Instruments
3. Broaden Environmental Assessments
4. Encourage Action by Industry
5. Increase Capacity to Deal with Industrial Hazards
6. Strengthen International Efforts to Help Developing Countries
1. Industry is central to the economies of modern societies and an indispensable motor of
growth. It is essential to developing countries, to widen their development base and meetgrowing needs. And though industrialized countries are said to be moving into a postindustrial, information-based era, this shift must be powered by a continuing flow of wealthfrom industry./1
2. Many essential human needs can be met only through goods and services provided byindustry. The production of food requires increasing amounts of agrochemicals and machinery.
Beyond this, the products of industry form the material basis of contemporary standards ofliving. Thus all nations require and rightly aspire to efficient industrial bases to meet changing
needs.
3. Industry extracts materials from the natural resource base and inserts both products andpollution into the human environment. It has the power to enhance or degrade theenvironment; it invariably does both. (See Chapter 2 for a discussion of the concept ofsustainable development within the context of industry and resource use.)

I. Industrial Growth and its Impact
4. As recently as 1950, the world manufactured only one-seventh of the goods it does today,and produced only one-third of the minerals. Industrial production grew most rapidly between
1950 and 1973, with a 7 per cent annual growth in manufacturing and a 5 per cent growth inmining. Since then growth rates have slowed, to about 3 per cent yearly between 1973 and 1985
in manufacturing and virtually zero growth in mining./2
5. That earlier, rapid growth in production was reflected in the rising importance of
manufacturing in the economies of virtually all countries. By 1982, the relative share of value
added to gross domestic product by manufacturing (the 'manufacturing value added', or MVA)
ranged from 19 per cent in developing countries as a whole to 21 per cent in industrialized
market economies and 51 per cent of net material product in centrally planned economies. (SeeTable 8-1.) If the extractive industries are taken into account, the share is even higher.

Table 8-1
Share of Manufacturing Value Added in GDP,
by Economic Grouping and Income Group
1960
Group of Countries

1970

1980

1962

per cent

Developing Countries

14.2

16.6

19.0

19.0

Low income

11.2

13.8

15.0

15.0

Lower-middle income

11.0

13.5

16.4

16.6

Intermediate income

10.6

14.4

17.1

17.6

Upper-middle income

19.4

21.6

24.1

23.3

High income

17.2

16.2

17.2

17.9

Developed Market Economies

25.6

26.3

27.9

27.1

Centrally Planned Economies*

32.0

42.4

50.5

50.8

* Figures refer to the share of manufacturing value added (estimated) in net material
product. Data are constant (1975) prices.
Source: UNIDO, World Industry: A Statistical Review 1985 (Vienna: 1966).

1. The Changing structure of World Industry
6. In recent years, the trend of the 1950s and 1960s has been reversed. Manufacturing has
declined in importance relative to other sectors of the economy. In many countries, this declinehas been in progress since 1973. It is most noticeable in the case of industrial market
economies, but the share of MVA in GDP has also declined in nearly half the 95 developing
countries surveyed by UNIDO./3 This may reflect the growing interaction between industry
and all fields of science and technology and the increasing integration of industry and services,
as well as industry's ability to produce more with less.
7. The relative importance of industry as an employer has been declining for some time indeveloped countries. But the shift in jobs towards the service sector has accelerated sharply
over the past 15 years with the increasing adoption of new processes and technologies.
Economists continue to argue over whether the advent of an information-based economy willfurther depress employment in industry or will expand job opportunities overall./4
8. Most developing countries started at independence with virtually no modern industry. Then
during the 1960s and 1970s their industrial production, employment, and trade consistently
grow faster than these sectors in developed market economies. By 1984, developing countries
accounted for 11.6 per cent of world MVA (still well short of the 'Lima target' of 25 per centadopted by UNIDO in 1975). The centrally planned economies of Eastern Europe had raised
their share of world MVA from 15.2 per cent in 1963 to 24.9 per cent in 1984./5
9. The international trade in manufactured goods, which has consistently grown fatter than has
world manufacturing output, is one of the factors underlying the changing geography ofindustrialization. Many developing nations, particularly newly industrialized countries (NICs),
have shared in this growth and made spectacular progress in industrialization. Taking theThird World as a whole, exports of manufactured goods have grown steadily relative to primaryexports, rising from 13.3 per cent of their total non-oil exports in 1960 to 54.7 per cent in 1982.
(See Table 8-2.)
10. In general, developing-country industrial production is diversifying and moving into more
capital intensive areas such as metal products, chemicals, machinery, and equipment. And
heavy industries, traditionally the most polluting, have been growing in relation to lightindustries. At the same time, the share of industries involved in food products, and to a lesser
extent in textiles and clothing, has fallen significantly.

2. Environmental Decline and Response
11. Industry and its products have an impact on the natural resource base of civilization
through the entire cycle of raw materials exploration and extraction, transformation into
products, energy consumption, waste generation, and the use and disposal of products byconsumers. These impacts may be positive, enhancing the quality of a resource or extending its
uses. Or they may be negative, as a result of process and product pollution and of depletion ordegradation of resources.
12. The negative environmental impacts of industrial activity were initially perceived as
localized problems of air, water, and land pollution. Industrial expansion following the Second
World War took place without much awareness of the environment and brought with it a rapid
rise in pollution, symbolized by the Lob Angeles smog; the proclaimed 'death' of Lake Erie; theprogressive pollution of major rivers like the Meuse, Kibe, and Rhine; and chemical poisoningby mercury in Minamata. These problems have also been found in many parts of the Third
World as industrial growth, urbanization, and the use of automobiles spread./6
13. Public concern grew rapidly and forced a broad debate on environment conservation andeconomic growth. The possibility that the process of industrial growth would run into materialresource constraints became an important theme in this debate. Although non-renewable
resources are by definition exhaustible, recent assessments suggest that few minerals are likely
to run out in the near future.

Table 8-2
Composition of the Merchandise Trade of Developing Countries
Exports
1960
Item

Imports
1970

1980

1982

1960

1970 1980

1982(billions of dollars)Primary
Commodities

25

45

452

369

11

17

166

166

Non-oil

17

27

107

93

8

12

79

73

Petroleum

6

18

345

277

3

5

87

92

Manufactures

3

9

101

112

17

39

288

296

Total

27

55

553

481

28

56

454

462

Total Non-oil

20

36

208

204

25

51

367

370

(per cent)Primary
Commodities
Including Oil

90.4

82.6

81.8

76.8

38.8

30.1

36.6

35.9

Non-oil

62.3

49.2

19.4

19.2

28.4

21.7

17.5

15.9

Petroleum

28.1

33.4

62.4

57.5

10.4

8.4

19.1

20.0

Manufactures

9.6

17.4

18.1

23.2

61.2

69.9

63.4

64.1

Share in Non-oil Exports

Share in Non-oil Imports

Primary
Commodities(Non-oil)

86.7

73.9

51.6

45.3

32.7

23.7

71.6

19.8

Manufactures

13.3

26.1

48.4

54.7

68.3

76.3

78.4

80.2

Source: UNIDO, Industry in a Changing World (New York 1983); for 1982, WCED
estimates based on UN, 1983 International Trade Statistics Yearbook, Vol. 1 (NewYork: 1985)
14. By the late 1960s, growing awareness and public concern led to action by governments andindustry in both industrial and some developing countries. Environmental protection andresource conservation policies and programmes were established, along with agencies toadminister them. Initially policies focused on regulatory measures aimed at reducing

emissions. Later a range of economic instruments were considered - taxation, pollution
charges, and subsidies for pollution control equipment - but only a few countries introduced
them. Expenditures rose, gradually at first, reaching 1.0 per cent and as high as 2.0 per cent of
GNP in some industrial countries by the late 1970s.
15. Industry also responded to these problems by developing new technologies and industrial
processes designed to reduce pollution and other adverse environmental impacts.
Expenditures on pollution control measures rose rapidly in some highly polluting industries;
and corporations began to set up their own environmental policy and control units. Guidelines
and codes of conduct were published covering safety of products and plant operations, tradepractices, technology transfer, and international cooperation./7 National and international
industry associations have also developed guidelines and voluntary codes of practice./8

I am one of the patients of air pollution. When Japanese economy grew very
rapidly, my asthma deteriorated. I am 39 years old. I was hospitalized when I was
18 until I was 23 because of my severe asthma. I had no joy of life, no joie de vivre
in those five years. I got a job and went to work but I cannot work as long a time asordinary people. For the last 10 years I can hardly work. And when the law wasenacted, the law concerning the abatement of pollution, it has given me
compensation. That is my only income, from the compensation that this law
provides. And if I should suffer another disease on top of asthma, I really don't
know what to do.
Yoshi Suzuki
Association of Patients of Pollution and Their Families
WCED Public Hearing
Tokyo, 27 Feb 1987

16. The results were mixed, but during the decade a number of industrial countries
experienced a significant improvement in environmental quality. There was a considerable rollback in air pollution in many cities and water pollution in many lakes and rivers. Certain
chemicals were controlled.
17. But these achievements were limited to some industrial countries. Taking the world as awhole, fertilizer run-off and sewage discharges into rivers, lakes, and coastal waters haveincreased, with resulting impacts on fishing, drinking water supply, navigation, and scenic
beauty. The water quality of most major rivers has not markedly improved over the years. It is,
in fact, worsening in many of them, as it is in many smaller rivers. Industrialized countries still
suffer from 'traditional' forms of air and land pollution. Levels of sulphur and nitrogen oxides(NOV), suspended particulates, and hydrocarbons remain high and in some cases haveincreased. Air pollution in parts of many Third World cities has risen to levels worse thananything witnessed in the industrial countries during the 1960s./9
18. It is becoming increasingly clear that the sources and causes of pollution are far morediffuse, complex, and interrelated - and the effects of pollution more widespread, cumulative,
and chronic - than hitherto believed. Pollution problems that were once local are now regionalor even global in scale. Contamination of soils, ground-water, and people by agrochemicals is
widening and chemical pollution has spread to every corner of the planet. The incidence ofmajor accidents involving toxic chemicals has grown. Discoveries of hazardous waste disposalsites - at Love Canal in the United States, for example, and at Lekkerkek in the Netherlands,
Vac in Hungary, and Georgswerder in the Federal Republic of Germany - have drawn attention

to another serious problem.

It is absolutely clear now that the present scale and rate of development of the
productive forces require a different approach to the questions connected withenvironmental protection and rational utilization of natural resources. This is a taskof immense economic and social significance. For actually it is a question ofpeople's health and a caring approach to the national wealth of each country.
Moreover, it is also a question of the future. And on the solution depends theconditions in which the coming generations will live.
A. P. Semyonov
Central Council of Trade Unions
WCED Public Hearing
Moscow, 8 Dec 1986

19. In the light of this and the growth trends projected through the next century, it is evident
that measures to reduce, control, and prevent industrial pollution will need to be greatly
strengthened. If they are not, pollution damage to human health could become intolerable incertain cities and threats to property and ecosystems will continue to grow. Fortunately, thepast two decades of environmental action have provided governments and industry with thepolicy experience and the technological means to achieve more sustainable patterns ofindustrial development.
20. At the beginning of the 1970s, both governments and industry were deeply worried about
the costs of proposed environmental measures. Some felt that they would depress investment,
growth, jobs, competitiveness, and trade, while driving up inflation. Such fears proved
misplaced. A 1984 survey by OECD of assessments undertaken in a number of industrial
countries concluded that expenditures on environmental measures over the past two decades
had a positive short term effect on growth and employment as the increased demand theygenerated raised the output of economies operating at less than full capacity. The benefits,
including health, property, and ecosystem damages avoided, have been significant. More
important, these benefits have generally exceeded costs./10
21. Costs and benefits have naturally varied among industries.One method of estimating thecost of pollution abatement in industry compares expenditures on new plants and equipmentthat have pollution control facilities to hypothetical expenditures on new plants without suchfeatures. Studies using this comparison in the United States found that pollution abatement
expenditures foe new plant and equipment for all manufacturing industries in that country in1984 amounted to $4.53 billion, or 3.3 per cent of total new expenditures. The chemicalindustry spent $580 million (3.8 per cent) on such equipment./11 Similar studies in theJapanese steel industry found that new investment in pollution control equipment reached ashigh as 21.3 per cent of total investment in 1976 and even today remains around 5 per cent./12
22. Firms involved in food processing, iron and steel, non-ferrous metals, automobiles, pulp
and paper, chemicals, and electric power generation - all major polluters have borne a highproportion of the total pollution control investment by industry. Such costs provided a strong
incentive for many of these industries to develop a broad range of new processes and cleaner
and more efficient products and technologies. In fact, some firms that a decade ago establishedteams to research and develop innovative technologies to meet new environmental standards
are today among the most competitive in their fields, nationally and internationally.

23. Waste recycling and reuse have become accepted practices in many industrial sectors. In
some industrialized countries technologies to scrub sulphur and nitrogen compounds fromsmokestack gases made remarkable advances in a relatively short time. New combustion
techniques simultaneously raise combustion efficiency and reduce pollutant emissions./13
Innovative products and process technologies are also currently under development thatpromise energy- and resource-efficient modes of production, reducing pollution andminimizing risks of health hazards and accidents.
24. Pollution control has become a thriving branch of industry in its own right in several
industrialized countries. High-pollution industries such as iron and steel, other metals,
chemicals, and energy production have often led in expanding into the fields of pollution
control equipment, detoxification and waste disposal technology, measurement instruments,and monitoring systems. Not only have these industries become more efficient andcompetitive, but many have also found new opportunities for investment, sales, and exports.
Looking to the future, a growing market for pollution control systems, equipment, and services
is expected in practically all industrialized countries, including NICs.

II. Sustainable Industrial Development in a Global Context
25. If industrial development is to be sustainable over the long term, it will have to change
radically in terms of the quality of that development, particularly in industrialized countries.
But this is not to suggest that industrialization has reached a quantitative limit, particularly indeveloping countries. Even today, according to UNIDO, world industrial output would have to
be increased by a factor of 2.6 if consumption of manufactured goods in developing countries
were to be raised to current industrial country levels./14 Given expected population growth, afive- to tenfold increase in world industrial output can be anticipated by the time world
population stabilizes sometime in the next century. Such growth has serious implications forthe future of the world's ecosystems and its natural resource base.

Our ecological movement is not against industry, but we must think of the social
function of industries and that pollution and progress are not the same thing.
Pollution is not the synonym of progress and therefore time has come for new
development concepts to come up. Pollution should not be a synonym of progressbecause we know that pollution is controlled and when you do not control pollution
you are transferring this pollution to the community of the whole.
Fabio Feldman
Lawyer for Victims of Cubatao
WCED Public Hearing
Sao Paulo, 28-29 Oct 1985

26. In general, industries and industrial operations should be encouraged that are more
efficient in terms of resource use, that generate less pollution and waste, that are based on theuse of renewable rather than non renewable resources, and that minimize irreversible adverse
impacts on human health and the environment.

1. Industrialization in the Third World
27. Growing populations and high proportions of young people in the Third World are leading
to large increases in the labour force. Agriculture cannot absorb them. Industry must provide

these expanding societies not only with employment but with products and services. They will
experience massive increases in the production of basic consumer goods and a concomitantbuild-up of industrial infrastructure - iron and steel, paper, chemicals, building materials, andtransportation. All this implies considerable increase in energy and raw material use, industrial
hazards and wastes, accidents, and resource depletion.
28. The problems and prospects for industrial development vary among the countries of theThird World, which differ greatly in size and resources. There are some large countries with
abundant natural resources and a substantial domestic market that provide a base forwide-ranging industrial development. Smaller, resource-rich countries are trying to build up an
export-oriented processing industry. Several developing countries have based much of theirindustrial development on export industries in garments, consumer electronics, and lightengineering. In many countries, however, industrial development is restricted to a few
consumer-goods industries that cater to relatively small domestic markets.
29. The developing countries' share in world production of iron and steel rose from 3.6 per centin 1955 to 17.3 per cent in 1984, when four countries - Brazil, China, India, and the Republic ofKorea - produced more than 10 million tons of steel each, as much as in many medium-sizedindustrialized countries./15 At the same time that this industry is contracting in many
developed countries, it is expected to expand by 38 million tons between 1982 and 1990 in thedeveloping world. Latin America is projected to account for 41 per cent of this rise, Southeast
Asia for 36 per cent, the Middle East for 20 per cent, and Africa for 1.3 per cent./16
30. Many developing countries still depend heavily on their exports of minerals and othercommodities, mostly in unprocessed or only intermediately processed forms. In the case of
several major minerals such as aluminium and nickel, a few transnational corporations control
the whole industry, from mining through final processing./17 Some countries have beenmoderately successful in increasing the share of refined products in their exports. Yet most ofthese 'manufactured' goods are processed further in the industrial country that imports them.
Thus in 1980, only 39 per cent of all Third World exports of manufactured goods were ready forfinal use, while 43 per cent of its total exports were unprocessed./18 This ratio should improveas developing nations move into the further stages of processing. These improvements shouldbe speeded up.
31. The expected growth in basic industries foreshadows rapid increases in pollution andresource degradation unless developing countries take great care to control pollution andwaste, to increase recycling and reuse, and to minimize hazardous wastes. These countries do
not have the resources to industrialize now and repair the damage later; nor will they have thetime, given the rapid pace of technological progress. They can profit from the improvements inresource and environmental management being achieved in industrialized countries, and so
avoid the need for expensive clean-ups. Such technologies can also help them reduce ultimate
costs and stretch scarce resources. And they can learn from the mistakes of developed
countries,
32. Economies of scale are no longer always the primary consideration. New technologies incommunications, information, and process control allow the establishment of small-scale,decentralized, widely dispersed industries, thus reducing levels of pollution and other impacts
on the local environment. There may, however, be trade-offs to be made: small-scale raw
material processing, for example, is often labour-intensive and widely dispersed but intensivein the use of energy. Such dispersed industries could relieve big cities of some of their
population and pollution pressures. They could provide non-farming jobs in the countryside,produce consumer goods that cater to local markets, and help spread environmentally soundtechnologies.

2. Use of Energy and Raw Materials
33. Industrial growth is widely seen as inevitably accompanied by corresponding increases inenergy and raw material consumption. In the past two decades, however, this pattern appears
to have fundamentally changed. As growth has continued in the developed market economies,
the demand for many basic materials, including energy and water, has levelled off; in somecases, it has actually declined in absolute terms.
34. Energy consumption per unit of GDP in OECD countries has been dropping at a rate of 1-3
per cent every year since the late 1960s. Between 1973 and 1983, these nations improved
energy efficiency by 1.7 per cent annually./19 Industrial water consumption per unit ofproduction has also declined. Older pulp and paper mills typically used about 160 cubic metresof water per ton of pulp; those built during the 1970s, however, used only 70. With advanced
techniques that keep water circulating within a closed system, and with proper staff training,
use rates could be lowered to 20-30 cubic metres per ton of pulp./20
35. An integrated steel mill uses about 80-200 tons of water for every ton of crude steel.
However, since only about 3 tons of water per ton of crude steel are lost, mostly by
evaporation, recycling can greatly reduce consumption./21 Closed water circulation systems are
not unique to the steel industry or to developed market economies. Between 1975 and 1980,
the chemical industry's output in the USSR increased by 76 per cent, but the total consumptionof fresh water remained at the 1975 level./22 And between 1981 and 1986, Soviet industrial
output increased by 25 per cent but industrial water consumption remained constant./23
36. Declines in consumption of other raw materials began much earlier. In fact, the amount of
raw materials needed for a given unit of economic output has been dropping over this entire
century, except in wartime, for practically all non-agricultural commodities./24 A recent studyof consumption trends of seven basic materials in the United States bears this out,/25 as do
studies in Japan. Japan used only 60 per cent as much raw materials for every unit ofindustrial production in 1984 as it used in 1973./26 These efficiency trends do not result from adecline in manufacturing in favour of service industries, for over these periods the output of
the manufacturing sector continued to grow The productivity and efficiency of resource use areconstantly improving, and industrial production is steadily switching away from heavily
material intensive products and processes.
37. The two oil price hikes of the 1970s shocked many countries into saving money bypromoting conservation measures, switching to other fuels, and raising overall energy
efficiency. These events demonstrated the importance of energy pricing policies that take into
account their current stock, depletion rates, availability of substitutes, and any unavoidable
environmental damage associated with their extraction or processing. (See Chapter 7.) They
also indicated the potential of similar pricing policies for other raw materials.

I think there must be a persistent push, a persistent effort towards establishingsome kind of international code for areas of technologies having highenvironmental risks. At the moment not many in Indonesia would be considered asvery knowledgeable industries. We need also this kind of thing in order toguarantee some kind of minimum safety for countries like ours to develop within
the context of international economic relations.
Speaker from the floor

WCED Public Hearing
Jakarta, 26 March 1985

38. Some have referred to these processes as the increasing 'de-materialization' of society andthe world economy. Yet even the most industrially advanced economies still depend on acontinued supply of basic manufactured goods. Whether made domestically or imported, theirproduction will continue to require large amounts of raw materials and energy, even if
developing countries progress rapidly in the adoption of resource-efficient technologies. To
sustain production momentum on a global level, therefore, policies that inject resource
efficiency considerations into economic, trade, and other related policy domains are urgently
needed, particularly in industrial countries, along with strict observance of environmental
norms, regulations, and standards.

3. Promises and Risks of New Technologies
39. Technology will continue to change the social, cultural, and economic fabric of nations andthe world community. With careful management, new and emerging technologies offer
enormous opportunities for raising productivity and living standards, for improving health,and for conserving the natural resource base. Many will also bring new hazards, requiring an
improved capacity for risk assessment and risk management. (See Chapter 12.)
40. Information technology based chiefly on advances in micro-electronics and computerscience is of particular importance. Coupled with rapidly advancing means of communication,
it can help improve the productivity, energy and resource efficiency, and organizational
structure of industry.
41. New materials such it fine ceramics, rare metals and metal alloys, high-performanceplastics, and now composites allow more flexible approaches to production. They also
contribute to energy and resource conservation, as in general they require less energy to
manufacture and, being lighter, contain less matter than conventional materials.
42. Biotechnology will have major implications for the environment. The products of genetic
engineering could dramatically improve human and animal health. Researchers are finding new
drugs, new therapies, and new ways of controlling disease vectors. Energy derived from plants
could increasingly substitute for non-renewable fossil fuels. New high-yield crop varieties andthose resistant to unfavourable weather conditions and pests could revolutionize agriculture.
Integrated pest management will become more common. Biotechnology could also yieldcleaner and more efficient alternatives to many wasteful processes and polluting products.
New techniques to treat solid and liquid wastes could help solve the pressing problem ofhazardous waste disposal./27
43. Advances in space technology, now the almost exclusive domain of industrial countries,
also hold promise for the Third World, even for agriculture-based economies. Weather
forecasting services provided through a satellite and communications network can help
farmers in deciding when to plant, water, fertilize, and harvest crops. Remote sensing andsatellite imagery could facilitate optimal use of the Earth's resources, permitting themonitoring and assessment of long-term trends in climatic change, marine pollution, soil
erosion rates, and plant cover. (See Chapter 10.)
44. These new technologies and the Green Revolution blur the traditional distinctions between
agriculture, industry, and services. And they make it possible for developments in one sector tomore radically affect those in another. Agriculture has become virtually an 'industry' indeveloped countries. Agriculture-related services - especially for regional weather forecasting,storage, and transport - are becoming ever more important. New techniques of tissue culture
and genetic engineering could soon generate plant strains able to fix nitrogen from the air, adevelopment that would drastically affect the fertilizer industry, but that would also reduce thethreat of pollution by agrochemicals.
45. The chemical and energy industries are moving increasingly into the seeds business,
providing new seeds that meet specific local conditions and requirements - but that may alsoneed specific fertilizers and pesticides. Here research and development, production, andmarketing need to be carefully guided so as not to make the world even more dependent on a
few crop varieties - or on the products of a few large transnational
46. Yet new technologies are not all intrinsically benign, nor will they have only positive
impacts on the environment. The large-scale production and widespread use of new materials,
for example, may create hitherto unknown health hazards (such as the use of gallium arsenate
in the microchip industry.)/28 Risk research might be carried out and products manufactured
where safeguards are weak or where people are unaware of the dangers. The need for caution
in introducing a new technology is reinforced by the experience of the Green Revolution,
which, despite formidable achievements, raises concerns over dependence on relatively few
crop strains and large doses of agrochemicals. New life forms produced by genetic engineering
should be carefully tested and assessed for their potential impact on health and on themaintenance of genetic diversity and ecological balance before they are introduced to themarket, and thus to the environment./29

III. Strategies for Sustainable Industrial Development
47. Resource and environmental considerations must be integrated into the industrial planningand decision-making processes of government and industry. This will allow a steady reductionin the energy and resource content of future growth by increasing the efficiency of resourceuse, reducing waste, and encouraging resource recovery and recycling.

1. Establish Environmental Goals, Regulations, Incentives, and Standards
48. In dealing with industrial pollution and resource degradation, it is essential that industry,
government, and the public have clear benchmarks. Where the workforce and financial
resources permit, national governments should establish clear environmental goals andenforce environmental laws, regulations, incentives, and standards on industrial enterprises.
In formulating such policies, they should give priority to public health problems associatedwith industrial pollution and hazardous wastes. And they must improve their environmental
statistics and data base relating to industrial activities.
49. The regulations and standards should govern such matters as air and water pollution,
waste management, occupational health and safety of workers, energy and resource efficiency
of products or processes, and the manufacture, marketing, use, transport, and disposal of toxic
substances. This should normally be done at the national level, with local governments being
empowered to exceed, but not to lower, national norms. In preparing environmental
regulations, it is important that flexible systems are adopted without specifying a particular
process or technology and recognizing that governments differ greatly in their capacity toformulate legal standards and enforce them.
50. Regulations to control the impacts of industrial activity across national boundaries and on

the international commons are also needed. Existing or future international conventions
dealing with transfrontier pollution or management of shared natural resources should
enshrine certain key principles:
the responsibility of every state not to harm the health and environment of othernations,
liability and compensation for any damage caused by transfrontier pollution, andequal right of access to remedial measures by all parties concerned.

2. Make More Effective Use of Economic Instruments
51. Pollution is a form of waste, and a symptom of inefficiency in industrial production. Whenindustries recognize pollution as a cost, they are sometimes motivated to make investments inimproved products and processes to increase efficiency and hence to reduce the pollution andwaste they generate, particularly when there are economic incentives to do so, it largely
depends on whether such investments will increase their economic performance.
52. But there are limits to what society can expert industry operating in competition with otherindustries to do voluntarily. Regulations imposing uniform performance standards are
essential to ensure that industry makes the investments necessary to reduce pollution andwaste and to enable them to compete on an equal footing.
53. Air and water have traditionally been regarded as 'free' goods, but the enormous costs tosociety of past and present pollution show that they are not free. The environmental costs ofeconomic activity are not encountered until the assimilative capacity of the environment has
been exceeded. Beyond that point, they cannot be avoided. They will be paid. The policyquestion is how and by whom they will be paid, not whether. Basically, there are only two ways.
The costs can be 'externalized' - that is, transferred to various segments of the community inthe form of damage costs to human health, property, and ecosystems. Or they can'internalized' - paid by the enterprise. The enterprise may invest in measures to prevent thedamages and, if the market for its product allows, pass the costs along to the consumer. Or it
may invest in measures to restore unavoidable damage replanting forests, restocking fish,
rehabilitating land after mining. Or it may compensate victims of health and property damage.
In these cases, too, the costs may be passed on to the consumer.
54. Enterprises may be encouraged to invest in preventive, restorative, or compensatory
measures with subsidies of various kinds. Indeed, in most industrialized and many developing
countries, subsidies are a common way of encouraging companies to invest in measuresneeded to prevent external damage. But in this case, of course, it is the taxpayer who pays,
rather than the consumer of the product. Moreover, if the subsidies are large and paid toindustries operating in an international market, they can lead to trade distortions and should
be avoided.
55. In 1972, the member countries of OECD agreed to base their environmental policies on a
Polluter Pays Principle (PPP)./30 Essentially an economic efficiency measure, PPP is intended
to encourage industries to internalize environmental costs and reflect them in the prices of
products. At the same time, state regulations in CMEA countries are carried out throughgovernment bodies that allow environmental concerns to be taken into account.

We move towards attacking the sources and not the effects. But we also meet

environmental questions in our markets, among our own employees and in our
local environment. This definitely provides experiences that underline the need fora more complete and comprehensive thinking about the systems of which
environment becomes an integral part. We also, as industry, meet the problems ofinternational relations and environment, unfortunately very often in the way ofhidden trade barriers or difficulties in cooperation between authorities.
Rolf Marstrander
Director, Environment Affairs, Norsk Hydro
WCED Public Hearing
Oslo, 24-25 June 1985

56. In the case of OECD, the guidelines on PPP were intended to discourage subsidies that
could lead to distortions in trade. Countries agreed to phase out the use of subsidies overvarying periods of time. (See Chapter 3 for the application of PPP to international trade andinvestment.)
57. Incentives to reduce pollution can be enhanced by other measures. Energy and water
pricing policies, for example, can push industries to consume less. Product redesign andtechnological innovations leading to safer products, more efficient processes, and recycling of
raw materials can also be promoted by a more effective, integrated use of economic incentives
and disincentives, such as investment tax breaks, low-interest loans, depreciation allowances,
pollution or waste charges, and non-compliance fees.
58. Sometimes the way in which other policy objectives are promoted unintentionally reduces
the effectiveness of environmental programmers. For example, subsidies on raw materials or
water supply or energy to promote the development of industry in remote areas may welldilute the pressure to conserve resources. Governments should examine whether existing
economic policies, instruments, or subsidies provided to various industry-based programmes
and projects contribute effectively to the promotion of environmentally sound and resource
efficient practices.

3. Broaden Environmental Assessments
59. An increasing number of countries require that certain major investments be subject to an
environmental impact assessment. This broader environmental assessment should he applied
not only to products and projects, but also to policies and programmed, especially major
macroeconomic, finance, and sectoral policies that induce significant impacts on theenvironment.
60. Many developing countries, particularly in Asia and Latin America, have adopted systems
for environmental impact assessment. But the lack of institutional capacity and skilled
personnel mean that these are often conducted by outside consultants, without quality checks.
In some cases, government authorities would benefit from a second opinion on theenvironmental documentation they receive. Interested governments should create an
independent international assessment body to help developing countries, upon request,
evaluate the environmental impact and sustainability of planned development projects.

4. Encourage Action by Industry
61. Industry's response to pollution and resource degradation has not been and should not belimited to compliance with regulations. It should accept a broad sense of social responsibility
and ensure an awareness of environmental considerations at a levels. Towards this end, allindustrial enterprises, trade associations, and labour unions should establish company wide orindustry-wide policies concerning resource and environmental management, including
compliance with the laws and requirements of the country in which they operate.
62. International trade associations play a major role in Betting standards and disseminating
information, which must be significantly expanded. They should establish and make widely
available sectoral guidelines for assessing the sustainability and potential hazards of new
facilities, for developing accident contingency plans, and for selecting pollution control or
waste treatment technologies. Such key industry associations as the International Chamber ofCommerce and the European Council of Chemical Manufacturers' Federation that have taken
important and encouraging leadership roles in dealing with environmental issues should now
take a lead in addressing the broader concerns inherent in sustainable development.
63. With limited resources at their disposal, small and medium- sized industries often findthemselves unable to afford the changes necessary to meet environmental regulations andproduct controls. Small scale businesses such as metal working, machine tools, printing, andtanning and dying are frequently among the worst offenders of environmental regulations in
any country. New technologies, especially micro-electronics, already allow small industries
inexpensive means to control an entire production process. Energy-saving biological systems
may be well suited to the needs of small and medium sized industries for pollution control or
waste disposal.
64. Small and medium scale enterprises, constituting the largest segment of industry in mostnations, need information and may in some cases require financial and technical assistancefrom the public sector. Management and worker training can help them incorporate cleaner
technologies and environmental planning into work patterns. Governments should encourage
cooperative efforts smaller firms in joint research and development on environmental issues,for example, or joint use of pollution control or waste treatment facilities.

5. Increase Capacity to Deal with Industrial Hazards
65. Chemical products have greatly improved health and life expectancies; increased
agricultural production; raised comfort, convenience, and the general quality of life; andexpanded economic opportunities. The chemical industry is also one of the most dynamic
sectors in most countries, including many developing ones. Yet this industry, together with its
products, can have a particularly severe impact on the environment. It has given rise to a hostof new problems both of product and process pollution. It continues to generate anincreasingly wider range of products and wastes whose effects, especially long-term ones, onhuman health and the environment are not precisely known. Major accidents have taken place,and the safety record of the industry has been challenged in recent years.
66. In a world more and more dependent on chemical products and highly complex large-scaletechnologies, accidents with catastrophic consequences are likely to increase. Some of theheavy metals and non-metallic minerals, such as asbestos, also pose serious hazards to healthand the environment. Various hazardous products and processes are already built into current
systems of production and the technological structure of contemporary society, and it will be along time before these can be replaced with less dangerous, inherently safer technologies andsystems. Some highly toxic chemicals that are known to cause cancer and birth defects andhave long-term genetic effects are already in the environment in significant concentrations, andmay take decades to be diffused.

5.1 Chemicals
67. Chemicals represent about 10 per cent of total world trade in terms of value,/31 some
70,000-80,000 chemicals are now on the market - and hence in the environment./32 The
figure is only an informed estimate because no complete inventory has been done. Some
1,000-2,000 new chemicals enter the commercial market each year, many without adequate
prior testing or evaluation of effects.
68. According to a U.S. National Research Council sample of 65,725 chemicals in common use,
data required for complete health hazard evaluations were available for only 10 per cent ofpesticides and 18 per cent of drugs. No toxicity data existed for nearly 80 per cent of thechemicals used in commercial products and processes inventoried under the Toxic Substances
Control Act./33 This situation is now beginning to change as governments move gradually froma system of post-market testing to one of pre-market testing of all new chemicals.
69. By 1986, more than 500 chemicals and chemical products had been banned altogether or
had their uses severely restricted in the country of origin./34 In addition, an unknown numberof chemicals are withdrawn from clearance processes every year in the light of control agency
concerns, or are never submitted to national control agencies for clearance. Some of these end
up on the export market.
70. In industrial countries, in an increasingly interdependent and effective system, chemical
control agencies share test results and notify each other of new restrictions on chemicals. A
ban or restriction in one country is thus often quickly followed by a review and appropriate
action in the others.
71. Importing developing countries do not, as a rule, share in this system. Recently, someindustrial countries undertook to require their industry to provide a one-time notification toimporting countries of chemicals that they have formally banned or severely restricted. They
agreed to provide prior notification of the proposed export/import of such chemicals and theyalso agreed to provide the importing country with the information that led them to ban or
restrict the chemical, if it is requested. While the intent behind this system is laudable, it isdifficult to see how it can work for importing countries that have no control institutions toreceive the notification or professional capacity to assess the information.
72. Third World importers have no way to effectively control trade in chemicals that have beenbanned or severely restricted in exporting countries. Thus these countries badly need theinfrastructure to assess the risks associated with chemical use. In view of the seriousness of
this situation, the Commission recommends that all governments, particularly those of the
major chemical-producing countries, should:
undertake that no new chemicals be placed on international markets until the health andenvironmental impacts have been tested and assessed;
reinforce on-going efforts to obtain international agreement on the selection of existingchemicals for priority testing, on criteria and procedures for their assessment, and on asystem for international sharing of the tasks and the resources required;strictly regulate the export to developing countries of those chemicals for whichauthorization for domestic sale has not been sought or given, by extending requirementsfor prior notification and information exchange to them; andsupport the establishment in existing regional organizations of units qualified to receive
such prior notification and information, to assess it and to advise governments in theregion on the risks associated with the use of these chemicals, in order to permit
individual governments to weigh these risks against benefits they may perceive fromimportation of the chemicals.
73. Consumer awareness should be increased. Governments should encourage theestablishment of information centres on chemical products used by consumers and strengthen
the international networks of information exchange, assessment, and data banks now evolving
in the UN and elsewhere./35 Another essential step is the adoption and enforcement ofregulations on the packaging and labelling of chemicals whose use may be potentially harmful,to ensure that clear directions are provided in common local languages. Consumer unions andother non-governmental organizations should take the lead in collecting and distributing
comparative risk information on ingredients in consumer products such as cleaning agents andpesticides.

The most explosive development in the establishment of chemical and pollutive
industry has come in developing countries. This is an outright danger. The last
accidents are but a few of those that may come. However, we recognize thatconsiderable responsibility tests on the trade union movement in the individual
countries in pressing for influence on authorities and managements to avoid bothsuch accidents and investments from companies that do net follow acceptable
standards.
Technology development has improved environment in the industrial parts of theworld. The new production and information systems make it more difficult, then, forthe developing countries to use cheap labour as a means to attract industry to theircountries. The future for these countries does not look very bright, unless theinternational society takes it upon itself to affect a sharing of production
technology and resources. This is politically difficult indeed.
Juul Bjerke
International Confederation of Free Trade Unions
WCED Public Hearing
Oslo, 24-25 June 1985

74. The chemical producer and user industries, as the source of the risks associated withchemicals and as the greatest beneficiary of their use should bear the responsibility forensuring (and the liability for not ensuring) that their products meet the highest standards ofsafety, have the fewest adverse side effects on health and the environment, and are handledwith appropriate care by workers and users. This will require the fullest possible disclosure of
information about the properties and production processes of chemical substances and oncomparative risks, not only to the regulatory authorities but also to the workers, consumers,
and residents of the community in which a chemical industry operates.

5.2 Hazardous Wastes
75. Industrialized countries generate about 90 per cent of the world's hazardous wastes.
Although all estimates have a wide margin of error, given considerable differences in definitionof 'hazardous waste', in 1984 some 325 million to 375 million tons were generated

worldwide,/36 around 5 million tons of which were in the newly industrialized and developing
areas of the world./37
76. In OECD member countries alone, thousands of waste disposal sites exist, many of which
are likely to require some form of remedial action. Clean-up is expensive: Estimates include$10 billion for the Federal Republic of Germany, more than $1.5 billion for the Netherlands,$20-100 billion for the United States, and at least $60 million for Denmark (in 1966 dollars)./38
A large number of potentially hazardous sites may also exist in concentrated industrial-urban
areas in centrally planned economies as well as in developing countries. Some form ofgovernment intervention is required through regulatory action or financial support.
77. Waste management in developing countries suffers from a variety of problems. Frequentand heavy rains in the tropics, for instance, leach wastes into the soils under landfills or evencause them to overflow. With little or no pretreatment of wastes, this could contaminate watersupplies or cause local people to be directly exposed to the wastes. Land-filling generally
occurs close to industrial states that are surrounded by poor neighbourhoods or shanty
towns./39 These dangers point up the need for land use planning in developing countries, andthe mote urgent need to actually implement and enforce such plans.
78. The overriding policy objective must be to reduce the amount of waste generated and totransform an increasing amount into resources for use and reuse. This will reduce the volume
that otherwise must be treated or disposed of through incineration, land disposal, or dumping
at sea. This is first and foremost a problem of industrialized countries. But it is also a problem
in NICs and developing countries, where rapid industrialization is bringing the same severe
problems of hazardous waste management.
78. The amount of wastes crossing national frontiers is increasing and is likely to continue todo so. Between 1962 and 1983, wastes transported in Western Europe for disposal in anothercountry virtually doubled, reaching some 250,000- 425,000 tons (1-2 per cent of the total
hazardous wastes generated)./40 This increase may be attributed partly to the availability ofrelatively low-cost, legal, land-based disposal facilities in some countries. For example, about
4,000 shipments of hazardous wastes went from the Netherlands to the German Democratic
Republic in 1984. And the Federal Republic of Germany sent about 20,000 shipments to theGerman Democratic Republic the preceding year. International transport of wastes meant for
disposal at sea, either by incineration or dumping, amounted to about 1.8 million tons in
1983./41 Small and poor countries are especially vulnerable to offshore dumping, as has
occurred in the waters of the Pacific and the Caribbean.
80. Some countries have recently proposed what amounts to a commodity trade in hazardous(including radioactive) wastes. Strengthened international cooperation in this area is vitally
important, and several international bodies have taken up the matter./42 An international
agreement currently being developed by OECD is to be based on three important principles:
equally strict controls on shipments to non member countries; prior notification to andconsent from the country of final destination, whether member or non-member country; and aguarantee of existence of adequate disposal facilities in the recipient country. UNEP has drawn
up extensive draft guidelines, but as of now there is no effective mechanism either to monitor
or to control hazardous waste trade and dumping./43 Governments and internationalorganizations must more actively support efforts to achieve an effective international regime tocontrol the transfrontier movement of hazardous wastes.

5.3 Industrial Accidents

81. Accidents involving toxic chemicals and radioactive materials can occur in plants in any
region. According to a survey carried out by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 6,928
accidents of varying severity occurred at U.S. plants between 1980 and 1965 - an average of fivea day./44
82. In 1984, liquid gas storage tanks exploded in Mexico City, killing 1,000 people and leaving
thousands more homeless. Only months after the Bhopal tragedy in India, which killed over
2,000 people and injured 200,000 more, an accident at a plant in West Virginia in the UnitedStates operated by the parent company of the Bhopal facility resulted in emergency evacuationof residents and some health problems. The accidental release in 1976 of the highly toxic andmutagenic chemical dioxin at Seveso, Italy, and the ensuing saga of drums of contaminated soil
being passed around Europe, also showed that in industrial countries regulations can beevaded and minimum safety standards breached.
83. In early November 1986, a fire at a warehouse of a chemicals manufacturer in Basel,
Switzerland, sent toxic fumes into France and the Federal Republic of Germany and released
toxic chemicals into the Rhine, causing massive fish kills and affecting the vital water supply incountries downstream, all the way to the Netherlands. Scientists investigating the Rhine
agreed that it could be years before the damaged riverine ecosystems would return to theirformer statue./45
84. Thus incidents at Mexico City, Bhopal, Chernobyl, and Basel - all occurring within the short
lifetime of this Commission raised public concern about industrial disasters. They also
demonstrated the likelihood of significant increases in the frequency and magnitude ofindustrial accidents with catastrophic consequences.
85. These events point to the need to strengthen national capabilities and the framework forbilateral and regional cooperation. National and local governments should:
survey hazardous industrial operations and adopt, and enforce regulations or guidelines
on the safe operation of industrial plants and on the transport, handling, and disposal ofhazardous materials;
adopt land use policies or regional development plans that would require or provide
incentives to industries that have a high pollution or accident potential to locate awayfrom population centres, and that would discourage people from moving close to plants
and waste disposal sites;
ensure that plant workers are provided with full information about the products andtechnologies they handle, and are given adequate training in safe operational procedures
and emergency preparedness; andinvolve local governments and community residents in major siting decisions andemergency preparedness planning.

In industry, we feel it must now be made mandatory for any firm that is potentiallypolluting nature through liquid gas or particle emissions to enrol their staff in short
but instructive courses of environmental education. Too often firms pollute not justthrough accident or design but through gross ignorance by the labour involved ofthe destructive effect on the environment.
Donald AubreySociety to Overcome Pollution
WCED Public Hearing
Ottawa, 26-27 May 1986

86. Increasingly, the consequences of accidents may seriously affect neighbouring countries.
Nations should enter into arrangements with other nations that could be seriously affected byan accident in hazardous facilities located on its territory, under which they would agree to:
notify each other of the location and essential characteristics of existing hazardous
installations, an accident in which could spill over and affect lives, property, andecosystems in the other;
prepare contingency plans covering potential accidents in these installations;provide prompt alert, full information, and mutual assistance in case of accidents;
establish criteria for selection of sites for new hazardous facilities, which would then be
subject to the above; andestablish standards for the liability and compensation for any damage caused bytransfrontier pollution.
87. Industrial accidents and their consequences are to a large extent unpredictable. In order tobetter identify risks, governments, international organizations, and industry itself should
promote further development of technology/risk assessment methodologies, establish databanks on such assessments conducted, and make them easily available to all countries.

6. Strengthen International Efforts to Help Developing Countries
88. Pollution-intensive, resource-based industries are growing fastest in developing countries.
These governments will thus have to substantially strengthen their environmental andresource management capabilities. Even where policies, laws, and regulations on theenvironment exist, they may not be consistently enforced. Many developing nations havebegun to build up their educational and scientific infrastructure, but their technical andinstitutional capacity for making the most of imported or new technologies remains small.
Some countries thus continue to depend on outside technical and managerial skills for the
maintenance of industrial operations. For lack of capital, they often find that a new industry
can only be started with the support of foreign aid, commercial loans, a direct investment, or a
joint venture with a transnational corporation.
89. The importance of private investment and the key role of transnational corporations havealready been highlighted. (See Chapter 3.) It is inconceivable that a successful transition tosustainable development can be achieved unless the policies and practices are reoriented
around sustainable development objectives. Those external agencies that support and facilitate
private investment, particularly export credit and investment insurance organizations, should
also incorporate sustainable development criteria into their policies and practices.
90. The problems of developing-country governments are compounded by the vagaries of theinternational economic system, such as high debts, high interest rates, and declining terms nf
trade for commodities. These do not encourage hard-pressed governments to spend highproportions of their meagre resources on environmental protection and resource management.
(See Chapter 3.)

91. The developing countries themselves will eventually have to bear the consequences of
inappropriate industrialization, and the ultimate responsibility for ensuring the sustainabilityof their development rests with each government. They must define their own environmental
goals and development objectives, and establish clear priorities among competing demands ontheir scarce resources. They will also need to search for more self-reliant means of industrial
and technological development. The choices are theirs, but they will need all the assistance technical, financial, and institutional - that the international community can muster to help
them set an environmentally sound and sustainable course of development.
92. Large industrial enterprises, and transnational corporations in particular, have a special
responsibility. They are repositories of scarce technical skills, and they should adopt thehighest safety and health protection standards practicable and assume responsibility for safe
plant and process design and for staff training. The transnational should also instituteenvironmental and safety audits of their plants measured against standards at othersubsidiaries, not just against those of other local companies, which may have less stringent
requirements These audits and their follow-up should be made available to governments andother interested parties.
93. Particular care is required in dealing with toxic chemicals and hazardous wastes, and incontingency planning for accidents. The views of non-governmental organizations and the local
community should be sought in planning new industrial facilities. The relevant national andlocal authorities must be fully informed about the properties, potentially harmful effects, andany potential risks to the community of the technology, process, or product being introduced.
The necessary information should be disclosed to nearby residents in an easily understandable
manner. The enterprises must cooperate with the local government, and community incontingency planning and in devising clearly defined mechanisms for relief and compensation
to pollution or accident victims.
94. Many developing countries need information on the nature of industry-based resource andenvironmental problems, on risks associated with certain processes and products, and on
standards and other measures to protect health and ensure environmental sustainability. They
also need trained people to apply such information to local circumstances. International tradeassociations and labour unions should develop special environmental training programmes fordeveloping countries and disseminate information on pollution control, waste minimization,and emergency preparedness plans through local chapters.

Footnotes
1/ As will be noted later in this chapter, the conventional classification of economic activities
into three sectors - primary (agriculture and mining), secondary (manufacturing), and tertiary(commerce and other services) - has become increasingly ambiguous. Some economic activities
cut across all three. Furthermore, the services sector has begun to occupy an important placeof its own in industrialized economies. In this chapter, however, the term 'industry' will be
used in the traditional sense to include mining and quarrying, manufacturing, construction,
electricity, water, and gas.
2/ GATT, International Trade 1985-66 (Geneva: 1986).
3/ UNIDO, Industry in the 1980s: Structural Change and Interdependence (NewYork: 1985).

4/ See, for example, W.W. Leontief, The Impact of Automation (Oxford: Oxford University
Press, 1986); F. Duchin, 'Automation and its Effects on Employment', in E. Collings and L.
Tanner (eds.), Employment Implications of the Changing Industrial Base (New York:
Ballinger Books, 1984); J. Rada, The Impact of Micro-electronics (Geneva: ILO, 1980);
and D. Werneke, Microelectronics and Office Jobs (Geneva: ILO, 1983).
5/ UNIDO, Industry and Development: Global Report 1985 (New York: 1985).
6/ WHO, Urban Air Pollution 1973-1980 (Geneva: 1984); World Resources
Institute/International Institute for Environment and Development, World Resources
1986 (New York: Basic Books, 1986).
7/ The UN Commission on Transnational Corporations has been working on a comprehensive
code since 1977 but the sections on environmental and consumer protection have been
virtually agreed. For other examples, see FAO, 'Code of Conduct on the Distribution and Use of
Pesticides', Rome, 1985; UNEP, 'Guidelines on Risk Management and Accident Prevention in
the Chemical Industry', adopted in 1982; and OECD, 'Declaration of OECD Member Countries
on International Investment and Multinational Enterprise', 1976. and 'Clarification of theEnvironmental Concerns Expressed in Paragraph 2 of the General Policies Chapter of theOECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises', Paris, 1985.
8/ See, for example, International Chamber of Commerce, 'Environmental Guidelines forWorld industry', Paris, 1976 (revised in 1981 and 1986); Hellenic Marine Environment
Protection Association, 'To Save the Seas, Declaration of a Voluntary Commitment' and'Guidelines for the Officers of HELMEPA Member Vessels', Athens, 1982; and U.S. National
Agricultural Chemicals Association, 'Guidelines on Labelling Practices for Pesticide Products in
Developing Areas of the World', Washington, DC, 1985.
9/ UNEP, State of the Environment 1982 (Nairobi: 1982).
10/ OECD, 'The Impact of Environmental Measures on the Rate of Economic Growth, Rate ofInflation, Productivity and International Trade', Background Papers Prepared for theInternational Conference on Environment and Economics, Vol. I (Paris: 1984).
11/ U.S. Department of Commerce, 'Plant and Equipment Expenditures by Business for
Pollution Abatement', Survey of Current Business, February 1986.
12/ Japanese Ministry of International Trade and Industry, data compiled annually for the
Industrial Structural Council, Tokyo, 1970-86.
13/ The UN Economic Commission for Europe compiles and publishes a 'compendium of lowand non-waste technologies'. A special department in the French Ministry of Environment
collects and disseminates information on clean processes and technologies ('les techniques
propres').
14/ UNIDO, Industry in the 1980s, op. cit.
15/ N. Namiki, 'International Redeployment of Pollution-Intensive Industries and The Role ofMultinational Corporations', prepared for WCED, 1986.
16/ OECD, Developments in Steel Making Capacity in Non-OECD Market Economy
Countries (Paris: 1985).
17/ Namiki, op. cit.

18/ UNIDO, Industry in a Changing World (New York: 1983).
19/ OECD, The State of the Environment 1985 (Paris: 1985).
20/ 'Industry Experience with Environmental Problem Solving', background paper prepared
for the World Industry Conference on Environmental Management, organized by theInternational Chamber of Commerce and the UN Environmental Programme, Versailles, 14-16
November 1984.
21/ Ibid.
22/ UNEP, The World Environment 1972-1982 (Nairobi: 1982).
23/ V. Anikeev, Director of the Department on Environment and Rational Use of Natural
Resources, GOSPLAN, during a visit by WCED to the GOSPLAN headquarters, Moscow, 12
December 1986.
24/ P.F. Drucker, 'The Changed World Economy', Foreign Affairs, Spring 1986.
25/ E.D. Larson et al. 'Beyond the Era of Materials', Scientific American, June 1986.
26/ Drucker, op. cit.
27/ For a discussion of various possibilities for industrial application of biotechnology, see J.
Elkington, Double Dividends? U.S. Biotechnology and Third World Development,
WRI Papers, No. 2 (Washington, DC: World Resources Institute, 1986).
28/ The 1986 annual report of the Japanese Environment Agency to the Parliament dealt
extensively with this topic of the potential environmental impacts and risks posed by the newtechnologies. Quality of the Environment in Japan 1986 (Tokyo: 1987).
29/ The U.S. Government recently announced a comprehensive regulatory policy for ensuring
the safety of biotechnology research and products. See 'Coordinated Framework for Regulationof Biotechnology', Federal Register, 26 June 1986.
30/ See OECD, 'Guiding Principles Concerning International Economic Aspects ofEnvironmental Policies', Council Recommendation C(72)128, Paris, 26 May 1972.
31/ OECD, Economic Aspects of International Chemicals Control (Paris: 1983).
32/ The Conservation Foundation, 'Chemicals Policy in the Global Environment', paper
prepared for WCED, 1986.
33/ National Research Council, Toxicity Testing (Washington, DC: National Academy Press,
1984).
34/ See 'Consolidated List of Products Whose Consumption and/or Sale Have Been Banned,
Withdrawn, Severely Restricted or Not Approved by Governments', compiled by the United
Nations, 1st revised edition, DIESA/WP/1, 1986.
35/ Notable examples include the International Programme on Chemical Safety (UNEP/WHO/ILO), International Register of Potentially Toxic Chemicals (UNEP), International Agency for
Research on Cancer (WHO), and the UN's 'Consolidated List', op. cit.
36/ H. Yakowitz, 'Global Aspects of Hazardous Waste Management', prepared for WCED, 1985;

U.S. Congress, Office of Technology Assessment, Superfund Strategy (Washington DC: U.S.
Government Printing Office, 1985). U.S. estimates include wastewater in very dilute form. The
result is a much larger estimate of total hazardous wastes for the United States than for othercountries.
37/ Some other sources quote figures as high as 34 million tons for Brazil alone, and 22 millionand 13.6 million tons for Mexico and India, respectively. See H. J. Leonard, 'Hazardous Wastes:
The Crisis Spreads' National Development, April 1986.
38/ Estimates quoted in an OECD Secretariat paper, Paris, 1986.
39/ UNEP, 'Transfrontier Movements of Hazardous Wastes With Regard to Developing
Countries', prepared for the Working Group of Experts on Environmentally Sound
Management of Hazardous Wastes, Munich, 1984.
40/ Yakowitz, op. cit.
41/ OECD, Background Papers for Conference on International Cooperation Concerning
Transfrontier Movements of Hazardous Wastes, Basel, Switzerland, 26-27 March 1985.
42/ See EEC, 'Supervision and Control of Transfrontier Shipments of Hazardous Waste',Council Directive, Brussels, December 1984; OECD, Resolution of the Council C(85)100, Paris,
June 1985.
43/ UNEP "Transfrontier Movements', op. cit. See also M.J. Suess and J.W. Huismans (eds.),
Management of Hazardous Waste: Policy Guidelines and Code of Practice(Copenhagen: WHO Regional Office for Europe, 1983).
44/ Preliminary findings of a study conducted for U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,'Acute Hazardous Data Base Washington', D.C., 1985, quoted in Yakowitz, op. cit.
45/ See, for example, La Suisse, 3-9 November; Die Welt, 10 November; Die Zeit, 14
November; Der Spiegel, 17 November; International Herald Tribune, 14-16 November 1986.

Our Common Future, Chapter 9: The Urban Challenge

I. The Growth of Cities
1. The Crisis in Third World Cities
2. The Situation in Industrial World Cities

II. The Urban Challenge in Developing Countries
1. National Urban Strategies
2. Strengthening Local Authorities
3. Self-Reliance and Citizen Involvement
4. Housing and Services for the Poor
5. Tapping More Resources

III. International Cooperation
1. Cooperation Among Developing Countries
2. International Support
1. By the turn of the century, almost half the world will live in urban areas - from small towns tohuge megacities./1 The world's economic system is increasingly an urban one, with overlapping
networks of communications, production, and trade./2 This system, with its flows of
information, energy, capital, commerce, and people, provides the backbone for national
development. A city's prospects - or a town's - depend critically on its place within the urban
system, national and international. So does the fate of the hinterland, with its agriculture,
forestry, and mining, on which the urban system depends.
2. In many nations, certain kinds of industries and service enterprises are now being developedin rural areas. But they receive high-quality infrastructure and services, with advanced
telecommunications systems ensuring that their activities are part of the national (and global)
urban-industrial system. In effect, the countryside is being 'urbanized'.

Table 9-1
Proportion of Population Living In Urban Areas, 1950-2000
1950

1985

2000

(Per cent)World Total

29.2

41.0

46.6

More Developed Regions

53.8

71.5

74.4

Less Developed Regions

17.0

31.2

39.3

Africa

15.7

29.7

39.0

Latin America

41.0

69.0

76.8

(Temperate South America)(64.8)(84.3)

88.6(Tropical South America)(35.9)(70.4)(79.4)

Asia

16.4

28.1

35.0

(China)(11.0)(20.6)(25.1)(India)(17.3)(25.5)(34.2)(in Millions)
World Total

734.2

1982.82853.6More Developed Regions

447.3

838.8

949.9

1144.01903.7Less Developed Regions
Africa

35.2

164.5

340.0

Latin America

67.6

279.3

419.7

Asia

225.8

791.1

1242.4

Source: 'Urban and Rural Population Projections. 1984 Unofficial Assessment', Population
Division. United Nations, New York.

I. The Growth of Cities
3. This is the century of the 'urban revolution'. In the 35 years since 1950, the number ofpeople living in cities almost tripled, increasing by 1.25 billion. In the more developed regions,the urban population nearly doubled, from 447 million to 838 million. In the less developed
world, it quadrupled, growing from 286 million to 1.14 billion. (See Table 9-1.)
4. Over only 60 years, the developing world's urban population increased tenfold, from around
100 million in 1920 to close to 1 billion in 1980. At the same time, its rural population morethan doubled.
In 1940, only one person in eight lived in an urban centre, while about one in 100 lived ina city with a million or more inhabitants (a 'million city').
By 1960, more than one in five persons lived in an urban centre, and one in 16 in a'million city'.
By 1980, nearly one in three persons was an urban dweller and one in 10 a 'million city'resident./3
5. The population of many of sub-Saharan Africa's larger cities increased more than sevenfold
between 1950 and 1980 Nairobi, Dar es Salaam, Nouakchott, Lusaka, Lagos, and Kinshasa
among them./4 (See Table 9-2.) During these same 30 years, populations in many Asian and
Latin American cities (such as Seoul, Baghdad, Dhaka, Amman, Bombay, Jakarta, Mexico City,
Manila, Sao Paulo, Bogota, and Managua) tripled or quadrupled. In such cities, net
immigration has usually been a greater contributor than natural increase to the population
growth of recent decades.
6. In many developing countries, cities have thus grown far beyond anything imagined only a
few decades ago and at speeds without historic precedent. (See Box 9-1.) But some experts
doubt that developing nations will urbanize as rapidly in the future as in the last 10-40 years,
or that megacities will grow as large as UN projections suggest. Their argument is that many ofthe most powerful stimuli to rapid urbanization in the past have less influence today, and thatchanging government policies could reduce the comparative attractiveness of cities, especiallythe largest cities, and slow rates or urbanization.
7. The urban population growth rate in developing countries as a whole has been slowing downfrom 5.2 per cent per annum in the late 1950s to 3.4 per cent in the 1950s./5 It is expected to
decline even further in the coming decades. Nevertheless, if current trends hold. Third World
cities could add a further three-quarters of a billion people by the year 2000. Over the sametime, the cities of the industrial world would grow by a further 111 million./6
8. These projections put the urban challenge firmly in the developing countries, in the space ofjust 15 years (or about 5,500 days), the developing world will have to increase by 65 per cent its
capacity to produce and manage its urban infrastructure, services, and shelter - merely tomaintain present conditions. And in many countries, this must be accomplished underconditions of great economic hardship and uncertainty, with resources diminishing relative toneeds and rising expectations.

Table 9-2
Examples of Rapid Population Growth in Third World Cities
1950

Most Recent Figure

Mexico City

3.05

16.0

(1982)

22.3

Sao Paulo

2.7

12.6

(1980)

24.0

Bombay3.0

8.2(1981)

16.0

Jakarta

1.45

6.2(1977)

12.8

Cairo

2.5

8.5

(1979)

13.2

Delhi

1.4

5.8

(1981)

9.6

Manila1.78

5.5(1980)

11.1

Lagos

0.27

4.0

(1980)

8.3(1951)(1951)(1952)UN Projectionsfor 2000Bogota

0.61

3.9(1985)

9.6

Nairobi

0.14

0.83

(1979)

5.3

Dar es Salaam

0.15

0.9

(1981)

4.6

Greater Khartoum

0.18

1.05

(1978)

4.3

Amman

0.03

0.78

(1978)

1.5

Nouakchott

0.00580.25(1982)

1.1

Managua

0.11

0.51

(1980)

1.1

Santa Cruz

0.059

0.26

(1976)

1.0(1960)

Source: Recent census data used whenever possible; if none available, an estimate by thecity government or a local research group has been used. UN projections for the year 2000
from Department of International Economic and Social Affairs, Estimates andProjections of Urban. Rural and City Populations 1950-2025 (the 1982
Assessment). ST/ESA/SER.R/58. New York. 1985 and from UN, Urban, Rural and City
Populations 1950-2000 (as Assessed in 1978). Population Studies No. 68 (New York,1980). Other data from Jorge E. Hardoy and David Satterthwaite, Shelter: Need andResponse (Chichester, UK: John Wiley & Sons, 1981), with some figures updated with more
recent census data.

1. The Crisis in Third World Cities
9. Few city governments in the developing world have the power, resources, and trained staff
to provide their rapidly growing populations with the land, services, and facilities needed for anadequate human life: clean water, sanitation, schools, and transport. The result ismushrooming illegal settlements with primitive facilities, increased overcrowding, andrampant disease linked to an unhealthy environment.

Box 9-1
Dominating Cities
Nairobi, Kenya: In 1975, Nairobi had 57 per cent of all Kenya's manufacturing
employment and two-thirds of its industrial plants. In 1979, Nairobi contained
around 5 per cent of the national population.
Manila, Philippines: Metropolitan Manila produces one-third of the nation's grossnational product, handles 70 per cent of all imports, and contains 60 per cent of the
manufacturing establishments. In 1981, it contained around 13 per cent of thenational population.
Lima, Peru: The metropolitan area of Lima accounts for 43 per cent of grossdomestic product, for four-fifths of bank credit and consumer goods production, andfor more than nine-tenths of capital goods production in Peru. In 1981, it was home toaround 21 per cent of Peruvians.

Lagos, Nigeria: In 1978, Lagos' metropolitan area handled over 40 per cent of thenation's external trade, accounted for over 57 per cent of total value added in
manufacturing, and contained over 40 per cent of Nigeria's highly skilled workers. It
contains only some 5 per cent of the national population.
Mexico City, Mexico: In 1970, with some 24 per cent of Mexicans living there, thecapital contained 30 per cent of the manufacturing jobs, 28 per cent of employment
in commerce, 38 per cent of jobs in services, 69 per cent of employment in national
government, 62 per cent of national investment in higher education, and 80 per centof research activities. In 1965, it contained 44 per cent of national bank deposits and61 per cent of national credits.
Sao Paulo, Brazil: Greater Sao Paulo, with around one-tenth of Brazil's national
population in 1980, contributed one-quarter of the net national product and over 40
per cent of Brazil's industrial value-added.
Source: J.E. Hardoy and D. Satterthwaite, 'Shelter, Infrastructure and Services inThird World Cities', Habitat International, Vol. 10, No 4, 1986.

10. In most Third World cities, the enormous pressure for shelter and services has frayed theurban fabric. Much of the housing used by the poor is decrepit. Civic buildings are frequently ina state of disrepair and advanced decay. So too is the essential infrastructure of the city; public
transport is overcrowded and overused, as are roads, buses and trains, transport stations,public latrines, and washing points. Water supply systems leak, and the resulting low waterpressure allows sewage to seep into drinking water. A large proportion of the city's population
often has no piped water, storm drainage, or roads./7

Given the distribution of incomes, given the foreseeable availability of resources
national, local, and worldwide given present technology, and given the present
weakness of local government and the lack of interest of national governments insettlement problems, I don't see any solution for the Third World city.
Third World cities are and they will increasingly become centres of competition fora plot to be invaded where you can build a shelter, for a room to rent, for a bed ina hospital, for a seat in a school or in a bus, essentially for the fewer stable
adequately paid jobs, even for the space in a square or on a sidewalk where you
can display and sell your merchandise, on which so many households depend.
The people themselves organize and help construct most new housing units in
Third World cities and they do so without the assistance from architects, planners,
and engineers, nor from local or national governments. Furthermore, in manycases, national and local governments are frequently harassing these groups. The
people themselves are becoming increasingly the true builders and designers ofThird World cities and quite often the managers of their own districts.
Jorge Hardoy
International Institute for Environment and Development
WCED Public Hearing
Sao Paulo, 28-29 Oct 1985

11. A growing number of the urban poor suffer from a high incidence of diseases; most areenvironmentally based and could be prevented or dramatically reduced through relatively
small investments. (See Box 9-2.) Acute respiratory diseases, tuberculosis, intestinal parasites,and diseases linked to poor sanitation and contaminated drinking water (diarrhoea, dysentery,hepatitis, and typhoid) are usually endemic; they are one of the major causes of illness anddeath, especially among children. In parts of many cities, poor people can expect to see one infour of their children die of serious malnutrition before the age of five, or one adult in two
suffering intestinal worms or serious respiratory infections./8
12. Air and water pollution might be assumed to be less pressing in Third World cities becauseof lower levels of industrial development. But in fact hundreds of such cities have highconcentrations of industry. Air, water, noise, and solid waste pollution problems haveincreased rapidly and can have dramatic impacts on the life and health of city inhabitants, on
their economy, and on jobs. Even in a relatively small city, just one or two factories dumping
wastes into the only nearby river can contaminate everyone's drinking, washing, and cooking
water. Many slums and shanties crowd close to hazardous industries, as this is land no one else
wants. This proximity has magnified the risks for the poor, a fact demonstrated by great loss oflife and human suffering in various recent industrial accidents.

Box 9-2
Environmental Problems in Third World Cities
Out of India's 3,119 towns and cities, only 209 had partial and only 8 had full sewage
and sewage treatment facilities. On the river Ganges, 114 cities each with 50,000 or
more inhabitants dump untreated sewage into the river every day. DDT factories,
tanneries, paper and pulp mills, petrochemical and fertilizer complexes, rubber
factories, and a host of others use the river to get rid of their wastes. The Hoogly
estuary (near Calcutta) is choked with untreated industrial wastes from more than
150 major factories around Calcutta. Sixty per cent of Calcutta's population sufferfrom pneumonia, bronchitis, and other respiratory diseases related to air pollution.
Chinese industries, most of which use coal in outdated furnaces and boilers, areconcentrated around 20 cities and ensure a high level of air pollution. Lung cancer
mortality in Chinese cities is four to seven times higher than in the nation as a whole,and the difference is largely attributable to heavy air pollution.
In Malaysia, the highly urbanized Klang Valley (which includes the capital, Kuala
Lumpur) has two to three times the pollution levels of major cities in the UnitedStates, and the Klang river system is heavily contaminated with agricultural andindustrial effluents and sewage.
Sources: Centre for science and Environment, State of India's Environment: A
Citizens' Report (New Delhi: 1983); Vaclav Smil, The Bad Earth:Environmental Degradation in China (London: Zed Press, 1986); Sahabat Alam
Malaysia, The State of Malaysian Environment 1983-84 - Towards Greater
Environmental Awareness (Penang, Malaysia: 1983).

13. The uncontrolled physical expansion of cities has also had serious implications for theurban environment and economy. Uncontrolled development makes provision of housing,roads, water supply, sewers, and public services prohibitively expensive. Cities are often built
on the most productive agricultural land, and unguided growth results in the unnecessary lossof this land. Such losses are most serious in nations with limited arable land, such as Egypt.
Haphazard development also consumes land and natural landscapes needed for urban parks
and recreation areas. Once an area is built up, it is both difficult and expensive to re-create
open space.
14. In general, urban growth has often preceded the establishment of a solid, diversified
economic base to support the build-up of housing, infrastructure, and employment. In many
places, the problems are linked to inappropriate patterns of industrial development and thelack of coherence between strategies for agricultural and urban development. The link between
national economies and international economic factors has been discussed in Part I of thisreport. The world economic crisis of the 1980s has not only reduced incomes, increased
unemployment, and eliminated many social programmes, it has also exacerbated the alreadylow priority given to urban problems, increasing the chronic shortfall in resources needed tobuild, maintain, and manage urban areas./9

2. The Situation in Industrial World Cities
15. The Commission's focus on the urban crisis in developing countries is not meant to imply
that what transpires in the cities of the industrial world is not of crucial importance tosustainable development globally. It is. These cities account for a high share of the world's
resource use, energy consumption, and environmental pollution. Many have a global reach anddraw their resources and energy from distant lands, with enormous aggregate impacts on theecosystems of those lands.
16. Nor is the emphasis on Third World cities meant to imply that problems within the cities ofindustrialized countries are not serious. They are. Many face problems of deteriorating
infrastructure, environmental degradation, inner-city decay, and neighbourhood collapse. The
unemployed, the elderly, and racial and ethnic minorities can remain trapped in a downward
spiral of degradation and poverty, as job opportunities and the younger and better-educatedindividuals leave declining neighbourhoods. City or municipal governments often face a legacyof poorly designed and maintained public housing estates, mounting costs, and declining tax
bases.
17. But most industrial countries have the means and resources to tackle inner-city decay andlinked economic decline. Indeed, many have succeeded in reversing these trends throughenlightened policies, cooperation between the public and private sectors, and significant
investments in personnel, institutions, and technological innovation./10 Local authorities
usually have the political power and credibility to take initiatives and to assess and deploy
resources in innovative ways reflecting unique local conditions. This gives them a capacity to
manage, control, experiment, and lead urban development. In centrally planned economies,
the ability to plan and implement plans for urban development has been significant. The
priority given to collective goods over private consumption may also have increased theresources available for urban development.
18. The physical environment in many cities of the industrial world has improved substantiallyover the decades. According to the historical records of many major centres - like London,
Paris, Chicago, Moscow, and Melbourne - it was not too long ago that a major part of theirpopulation lived in desperate circumstances amid gross pollution. Conditions have improved
steadily during the past century, and this trend continues, although the pace varies between
and within cities.

Large cities by definition are centralized, manmade environments that depend
mainly on food, water, energy, and other goods from outside. Smaller cities, bycontrast, can be the heart of community-based development and provide services
to the surrounding countryside.
Given the importance of cities, special efforts, and safeguards are needed toensure that the resources they demand are produced sustainably and that urban
dwellers participate in decisions affecting their lives. Residential areas are likely to
be more habitable if they are governed as individual neighbourhoods with direct
local participation. To the extent that energy and other needs can be met on a local
basis, both the city and surrounding areas will be better off.
'Sustainable Development and How to Achieve It'
Global Tomorrow Coalition
WCED Public Hearing
Ottawa, 26-27 May 1986

19. In most urban areas, almost everyone is served by refuse collection today. Air quality has
generally improved, with a decline in the emission of particles and sulphur oxides. Efforts torestore water quality have met with a mixed record of success because of pollution fromoutside of cities, notably nitrates and other fertilizers and pesticides. Many coastal areas,
however, close to major sewage outlets, show considerable deterioration. There is risingconcern about chemical pollutants in drinking water and about the impacts of toxic wastes ongroundwater quality. And noise pollution has tended to increase.
20. Motor vehicles greatly influence environmental conditions in the cities of the industrial
world. A recent slowdown in the growth rate of vehicle numbers, stricter emission standards
for new vehicles, the distribution of lead-free gasoline, improvements in fuel efficiency,
improved traffic management policies, and landscaping have all helped reduce the impacts ofurban traffic.
21. Public opinion has played a critical role in the drive to improve urban conditions. In somecities, public pressure has triggered the abandonment of massive urban development projects,
fostered residential schemes on a more human scale, countered indiscriminate demolition ofexisting buildings and historic districts, modified proposed urban highway construction, andled to transformation of derelict plots into playgrounds.
22. The problems that remain are serious but they affect relatively limited areas, which makes
them much more tractable than those of Cairo or Mexico City, for example. Certain aspects ofurban decline even provide opportunities for environmental enhancement. The exodus of
population and economic activities, while creating severe economic and social difficulties,
reduces urban congestion, allows new uses for abandoned buildings, protects historic urban
districts from the threat of speculative demolition and reconstruction, and contributes tourban renewal. The de-industrialization of these cities is often counterbalanced by the growthof the services sector, which brings its own problems. But this trend creates opportunities toremove heavy industrial pollution sources from residential and commercial areas.

23. The combination of advanced technology, stronger national economies, and a developed
institutional infrastructure give resilience and the potential for continuing recovery to cities in
the industrial world. With flexibility, space for manoeuvre, and innovation by local leadership,
the issue for industrial countries is ultimately one of political and social choice. Developing
countries are not in the same situation. They have a major urban crisis on their hands.

II. The Urban Challenge in Developing Countries
24. Settlements - the urban network of cities, towns, and villages - encompass all aspects of theenvironment within which societies' economic and social interactions take place.
Internationally, the major cities of the world constitute a network for the allocation of
investment and for the production and sale of most goods and services. These centres are thefirst to be plugged into this network, through air- and seaports and telecommunications. New
technologies usually arrive and are first put into practice in large and then smaller cities. Only if
centres are firmly connected to this network can they hope to attract investment intechnologies and manufacturing goods for world markets. Nationally, cities are veritableincubators of economic activities. Some enterprises are large-scale but the vast majority aresmall, doing everything from selling snack foods to mending shoes and building houses. The
growth of these activities is the foundation of the domestic economy.

1. National Urban Strategies
25. The natural evolution of this network of settlements, however, has caused apprehension inmost developing countries. Of particular concern has been the phenomenal growth of often one
or two major cities. In some countries, the desire to limit this growth has led to spatial policies
designed to accelerate the development of secondary centres. Underlying this has been aparticular concern that unbalanced growth is increasing interregional disparities and creating
economic and social imbalances that can have serious consequences in terms of national unityand political stability.
26. Although far from conclusive, the available evidence suggests that most attempts by central
governments to balance spatial development have been both expensive and ineffective. Major
macroeconomic, social, and sectoral policies have often been directly opposed to thedecentralization policy. Investments supported by governments and aid agencies havefollowed the same centralizing logic as private investments, and have built transportation
facilities, educational and health institutions, and urban infrastructure and services where thedemand exists - in the major city. Rural-urban migration has followed the same pattern. A
major reason why so many migrants in recent decades went to cities such as Nairobi, Manila,
Lagos, Mexico City, Sao Paulo, Rangoon, or Port au Prince was the dominant role each centre
came to play in its national economy.

We see that the increasing urban drift is inevitable: There are a lot of 'push' factors
working in the rural areas. Rural pluralization is caused by absence of land reform,by the increase of absentee landownership, by the displacement of the Green
Revolution.
Resides the 'push' factors of the rural areas, there are, of course, the 'pull' factors,
the glamour of the Big city, the higher pay of urban jobs as compared to rural
income possibilities. So the informal sector of Jakarta has grown; maybe from the
7 million population of Jakarta, 3 or 4 million - at least two-thirds - are the result of
the urban drift.

George Adicondro
Director, Irian Jaya, Rural Community Development Foundation
WCED Public Hearing
Jakarta, 26 March 1985

27. The macroeconomic and pricing policies pursued by governments further reinforced thisconcentration. The major cities, often the capital, usually receive a disproportionately large
share of the total national expenditure on education and on subsidies to reduce the prices ofwater, corn, electric power, diesel fuel, and public transport. Railroad freight rates sometimes
favour routes that pass through the capital. Property taxes in the city and surrounding districts
may be undervalued. New or expanded industries given a boost by the import substitution
policies are encouraged to establish in or near the capital./11
28. Agricultural and food policies have also tended to promote rapid growth of larger cities.
Low or even negative economic supports for agricultural products have driven smallholders off
their land and added to the numbers of the rural poor. Urban food prices, held low bysubsidies, have served to attract many of them to cities. In recent years, however, somedeveloping countries have found it possible to begin to shift more income from the major cities
to the rural areas and smaller towns. In some cases, policies to promote small landholdings
and intensive farming have had this effect. Increasing production, a growth in agricultural
employment, and higher average incomes have stimulated the development of small andintermediate centres in the agricultural regions they serve./12
29. There are some important lessons to be learned about spatial strategies for urban
development:
Nothing much short of coercion will prevent the growth of the major city in the earlystages of development.
The key to successful intervention is timing, to encourage deconcentration only when theadvantages of concentration are diminishing.
Avoid policy interventions that increase the attractiveness of the major city, particularly
subsidies on food and energy, overly generous provision of urban infrastructure andother services, and excessive concentration of administrative power in the capital.
The best way to encourage the growth of secondary centres is to build on the natural
economic advantages of their regions, especially in resource processing and marketing,and the decentralized provision of government services.
Rural and urban development strategies and approaches should be complementaryrather than contradictory: The development of secondary centres is to the direct
economic benefit of the resource areas they serve.
30. The job opportunities and housing provided by cities are essential to absorb the population
growth that the countryside cannot cope with; as long as price controls and subsidies do notinterfere, the urban market should offer advantages to rural producers. But there are obviously
conflicts of interest between developing country city-dwellers and farmers. A major thrust of
the discussion on food security (see Chapter 5) was to assert the importance of decisively
turning the 'terms of trade' in favour of farmers, especially small farmers, through pricing andexchange rate policies. Many developing countries are not implementing such policies, partly
for fear of losing the support of politically powerful urban factions. Thus they fail both to stem

urban drift and to improve food security.
31. These considerations can provide the basis for developing an explicit national settlements
strategy and policies within which innovative and effective local solutions to urban problems
can evolve and flourish. Every government has such a strategy in effect, but it is most often
implicit in a range of macroeconomic, fiscal, budget, energy, and agricultural policies. These
policies have usually evolved incrementally in response to the pressures of the day and, almost
invariably, they contradict each other and the stated settlement goals of the government. A
national urban strategy could provide an explicit set of goals and priorities for the developmentof a nation's urban system and the large, intermediate, and small centres within it. Such a
strategy must go beyond physical or spatial planning, it requires that governments take a muchbroader view of urban policy than has been traditional.
32. With an explicit strategy, nations can begin to reorient those central economic and major
sectoral policies that now reinforce megacity growth, urban decline, and poverty. They canlikewise promote more effectively the development of small and intermediate urban centres,
the strengthening of their local governments, and the establishment of services and facilities
needed to attract development initiatives and investment. Ministries of Planning, Finance,
Industry, Agriculture, and so on would have clear goals and criteria against which to assess theeffects of their policies and expenditures on urban development. Contradictory policies andprogrammes could be changed. At the very least, the spatial biases inherent in macroeconomic
and fiscal policies, annual budgets, pricing structures, and sectoral investment plans could be
exposed and assessed. Within such a strategy, the traditional tools of urban policy, including
land use planning and control, would stand a better chance of being effective.
33. The formulation of such a strategy is clearly a central government responsibility. Beyond
this, however, the role of central governments should be primarily to strengthen the capacity of
local governments to find and carry through effective solutions to local urban problems andstimulate local opportunities.

2. Strengthening Local Authorities
34. The institutional and legal structures of local government in most developing nations are
inadequate for these purposes. In most African and Asian nations the structure of urban
government goes hack to the colonial period and was designed to deal with predominantly
rural and agricultural societies. It was never intended to cope with rapid urbanization or to
manage cities of several million inhabitants. Newly independent governments inherited aframework of laws and procedures totally inappropriate to deal with the urban processes they
were about to confront. Yet in many nations, this inherited framework remains largely in place.
35. Where the immediate colonial past is less evident, as in most Latin American nations, thepolitical, institutional, and legal frameworks for local government are often just as
inappropriate and inadequate. As in Asia and Africa, most are based on models imported from
Europe or North America. This has made it difficult for them to influence the direction ofurbanization and to manage the problems of large, rapidly expanding urban centres. It hascreated cities that are energy and material-intensive and dependent on imports, and that add
to the burden on the national economy, including pressures on trade and balance of payments.
36. Urban development cannot be based on standardized models, imported or indigenous.
Development possibilities are particular to each city and must be assessed within the context of
its own region. What works in one city may be totally inappropriate in another. Althoughtechnical help from central agencies may be needed, only a strong local government can ensurethat the needs, customs, urban forms, social priorities, and environmental conditions of thelocal area are reflected in local plans for urban development. But local authorities have notbeen given the political power, decision making capacity, and access to revenues needed tocarry out their functions. This leads to frustration, to continuing criticism of local government
for insufficient and inefficient services, and to a downward spiral of weakness feeding on
weakness.

A lot of youth in the Third World countries and even adults are unemployed. We
want simple technologies whereby one particular person can do a kind of a job that
could have provided job opportunities to several hundreds. What are we doing withthe surplus potential energy? So again I say that development is people, it is nothigh technology, it is not modernization, it is not westernization. But it should be
culturally relevant.
Jan Selego
World Vision International
WCED Public Hearing
Nairobi, 23 Sept 1986

37. The lack of political access is a major weakness of local government in many developing
countries. Most local governments have difficulties getting enough revenue to cover theiroperating expenses, let alone to make new investments to extend services and facilities. Evenricher city governments have access to the equivalent of only $10-50 per inhabitant to invest
each year. Despite these weaknesses, the trend in recent decades has been for national
governments to reduce the financial capacity of local governments in real terms.
38. The result is growing centralization and continuing weaknesses at both the central andlocal level. Instead of doing a few things well, central authorities end up doing too many things,
none of them well. Human and financial resources get stretched too thin. Local governments
do not gain the expertise, authority, and credibility needed to deal with local problems.
39. To become key agents of development, city governments need enhanced political,
institutional, and financial capacity, notably access to more of the wealth generated in the city.
Only in this way can cities adapt and deploy some of the vast array of tools available to address
urban problems - tools such as land title registration, land use control, and tax sharing.

3. Self-Reliance and Citizen Involvement
40. In most developing countries between one-fourth and one-half of the economically active
urban population cannot find adequate, stable livelihoods. With few jobs available inestablished businesses or government services, people have to find or create their own sourcesof income. These efforts have resulted in the rapid growth of what has been termed the'informal sector', which provides much of the cheap goods and services essential to city
economies, business, and consumers.
41. Thus, while many poor people may not be officially employed, most are working - inunregistered factories end construction firms, selling goods on street corners, making clothes
in their homes, or as servants or guards in better-off neighbourhoods. Most of the so-called
unemployed are in fact working 10-15 hours a day, six to seven days a week. Their problem is
not so much underemployment as underpayment.

42. Most house building, maintenance, or upgrading in the cities of developing countries isdone outside official plans and usually in illegal settlements. This process mobilizes untappedresources, contributes to capital formation, and stimulates employment. These informal sector
builders represent an important source of urban employment, in particular for low andunskilled labour. They are not capital- or technology-intensive, they are not energy-intensive,
and as a rule they do not impose a drain on foreign exchange. In their way, they contribute
their share to attaining some of the nation's major development objectives. Moreover, they are
flexible in responding to local needs and demands, catering in particular to poorer households,
which usually have nowhere else to turn. Many governments have begun to see the wisdom oftolerating rather than quashing their work. Large-scale bulldozing of squatter communities is
now rarer, although it still happens.
43. Governments should give more support to the informal sector, recognizing its vitalfunctions in urban development. Some governments have done so, facilitating loans and credit
to small entrepreneurs, building cooperatives, and neighbourhood improvement associations.
Providing tenure to those living in illegal settlements is basic to this process, as is easing somebuilding and housing regulations.
44. Multilateral and bilateral development assistance agencies should follow suit, and some are
beginning to do so. Non-governmental and private voluntary organizations are springing up in
many countries to provide cost-effective channels for assistance, ensuring that it gets to those
who can use it. A much larger proportion of assistance could be channelled directly throughthese organizations.
45. The above measures would also reinforce self-reliance and local governance by the poor in
their own neighbourhood associations. Left to their own devices, the poor in many Third World
cities have organized to fill gaps in services left by the local government. Among other things,
community groups mobilize and organize fund-raising or mutual self-help to deal with security,environmental, and health problems within the immediate area.
46. Governments should move from a position of neutrality or antagonism to active support forsuch efforts. A few have actually institutionalized such programmes so that public ministries oragencies work continuously with community organizations. In the Indian city of Hyderabad,for example, an Urban Community Development Department set up by the municipal
corporation works directly with community groups and non-government organizations inpoorer neighbourhoods. By 1983, some 223 organizations had been formed by residents in
low-income areas, plus 135 youth organizations and 99 women's groups./13 In this way
governments can become partners and sponsors of the people who are the main builders of
their cities.

The shantytowns have found their own technique, their own resources without any
assistance from anyone else, and they solved their housing problems. The real
problem is not that. It is the poverty, the lack of planning, the lack of technicalassistance, the lack of financing to buy construction materials, the lack of urban
equipment.
To change this housing policy for human settlements, they should stimulate
self-construction, instead of financing these large housing complexes. It would
have been much better and would have cost less to help the people to carry out the
self-construction.

Generally speaking, it seems clear that without meeting the basic needs of humanbeings, concern for the environment has to be secondary. Man has to survive,
answer, and attend first to his basic survival needs - food, housing, sanitation - andthen to the environment.
Walter Pinto Costa
President, Environmental and Sanitation Association
WCED Public Hearing
Sao Paulo, 28-29 Oct 1985

4. Housing and Services for the Poor
47. In most developing-world cities, there is little low-cost housing. Generally those on low
incomes either rent rooms - whether in tenements or cheap boarding-houses, or in someone
else's house or shack - or they build or buy a house or shack in an illegal settlement. There aremany kinds and degrees of illegality, and these influence the extent to which governments
tolerate the existence of such settlements, or even provide them with public services andfacilities.
48. Whatever form it takes, low-income accommodation generally shares three characteristics.
First, it has inadequate or no infrastructure and services - including piped water, sewers, orother means of hygienically disposing of human wastes. Second, people live in crowded andcramped conditions under which communicable diseases can flourish, particularly whenmalnutrition lowers resistance. Third, poor people usually build on land ill-suited for humanhabitation: floodplains, dusty deserts, hills subject to landslide, or next to polluting industries.
They choose these sites because the land's low commercial value means they stand a betterchance of not being evicted.
49. Landownership structures and the inability or unwillingness of governments to intervene inthese structures are perhaps the main factors contributing to 'illegal' settlements and chaotic
urban sprawl. When half or more of a city's workforce has no chance of obtaining a legal plot on
which a house can be built, let alone of affording to buy or rent a house legally, the balance
between private landownership rights and the public good must be quickly rethought.
50. Given urbanization trends in most developing countries, there is no time to wait for slow
and uncertain programmes. Government intervention must be reoriented so that limited
resources are put to maximum effect in improving housing conditions for the poor. The options
for intervention are many (see Box 9-3), but governments should be guided by these sevenpriorities:
provide legal tenure to those living in 'illegal' settlements, with secure titles and basic
services provided by public authorities;
ensure that the land and other resources people need to build or improve their housing
are available;
supply existing and new housing areas with infrastructure and services;
set up neighbourhood offices to provide advice and technical assistance on how housing
can be built better and cheaper, and on how health and hygiene can be improved;

plan and guide the city's physical expansion to anticipate and encompass needed land
for new housing, agricultural land, parks, and children's play areas;consider how public intervention could improve conditions for tenants and those living
in cheap rooming or boarding-houses; andchange housing finance systems to make cheap loans available to lower-income andcommunity groups.
51. Most cities urgently need a large and continuous increase in the availability of cheap
housing plots convenient to the main centres of employment. Only government intervention
can achieve this, but no general prescriptions are possible. Societies differ too much in how
they view private landownership and land use rights, in how they use different instruments
such as direct grants, tax write-offs, or deduction of mortgage interest, and in how they treat
land speculation, corruption, and other undesirable activities that often accompany processesof this kind. Although the means are particular to each nation, the end must be the same:
governments ensuring that there are cheaper, better-serviced, better-located, legal alternatives
to illegal plots. If this need is not met, the uncontrolled growth of cities - and its accompanying
high costs - will not be stopped.
52. Besides land, building materials are another major cost for people putting up their own
houses. Government support for the production of materials and of certain structuralcomponents, fixtures, and fittings could reduce housing costs and create many jobs. Smallneighbourhood workshops often have cost advantages because of the low cost of transport
from the workshop to the building site.

Box 9-3Three Ways to Use $20 Million to Improve Conditions in a City of
1 Million
Option 1:
Build 2,000 public housing units for poor families (with an average of six family
members), each costing $10,000. Conditions are improved for 12,000 people, butlittle cost recovery is possible for poor families. If the city's population grows at 5 percent annually, 630.000 new inhabitants will be added over 10 years, so only a tiny
fraction of total population will have benefited.
Option 2:
Establish a 'site-and-service scheme', whereby poor families are responsible forbuilding their houses on an allocated site supplied with piped water, connection to a
sewer system, and electricity, roads, and drainage. At $2,000 per plot, this means
housing for some 60,000 people - about 10 per cent of the city's population growthover 10 years.
Option 3:
Allocate $100,000 to a neighbourhood organization representing 1,000 poor
households (6,000 people) in an existing low-income settlement. It chooses toimprove drainage and roads, build a health clinic, establish a cooperative to produceinexpensive building materials and components, and reblock the settlement toimprove access roads and provide 50 new plots. With $10 million, 100 such
community initiatives are supported, reaching 600,000 people and providing 5,000
new housing plots. Many new jobs are stimulated. The remaining $10 million is spenton installing piped water; at $100 per household, all 600,000 people reached.

53. The majority of building codes and standards are ignored because following them would
produce buildings too expensive for most people. A more effective approach might be to set upneighbourhood offices to provide technical advice on how health and safety can be improved atminimum cost. Good professional advice can lower building costs and improve quality, andmight be more effective than prescribing what can or cannot be built.
54. Many poor people rent accommodation; half or more of a city's entire population may betenants. Increasing the availability of house sites, materials, and credits does little for those
who must rent. One possibility is financial support to non-governmental, non-profit
organizations to purchase end develop property specifically for rental units. A second is
support for tenants to buy out landlords and convert tenancy into cooperative ownership.
55. Governments, especially those strapped for resources, may claim that piped water supplies
and sewage disposal systems are too expensive. As a consequence, poor people may have to
pay water vendors far more per litre of water than middle- or upper-income groups pay publicagencies to pipe water into their homes. Western water-borne sewage systems and treatment
plants may be prohibitively expensive. But other techniques and systems cost between
one-tenth and one-twentieth as much per household, and most of these use much less water.
Moreover, lower-cost technology can be upgraded over time, as money becomes available./14
56. Major improvements can be made relatively cheaply in all these areas. But costs will remain
low only if low-income groups are encouraged to participate fully in defining what they need, in
deciding what they will contribute to the new services, and in doing the job with their own
hands. This cooperation depends on establishing the new relationship between citizens andgovernment called for earlier.

5. Tapping More Resources
57. The available resources in or close to cities are often underused. Many landowners leavewell-located sites undeveloped in order to benefit later from their increasing value as the city
grows. Many public agencies have land that could be put to better use, such as the area next tostations and harbours controlled by railway and port authorities. Several countries haveintroduced special programmes to encourage public and private cooperation in thedevelopment of such lands, a trend that should be encouraged. There is a general need to findinnovative and effective ways of pooling land for the common good. Most cities havemechanisms for acquiring land either at market rates (which means that schemes are neverimplemented), or at arbitrarily low confiscatory rates (where the alliance of political forces andlandlords blocks the acquisition anyway).
58. Governments should also consider supporting urban agriculture. This may have lessrelevance in cities where land markets are highly commercialized and land for housing is in
short supply. But in most cities, especially those with less commercialized land markets,considerable potential exists. Many African cities already realize this. Urban agriculture,especially on city fringes, is undertaken by people as a way to feed themselves, in otherinstances, the process is more commercialized, with enterprises specializing in vegetableproduction for sale within the city.
59. Officially sanctioned and promoted urban agriculture could become an importantcomponent of urban development and make more food available to the urban poor. The
primary purposes of such promotion should be to improve the nutritional and healthstandards of the poor, help their family budgets (50-70 per cent of which is usually spent onfood), enable them to earn some additional income, and provide employment. Urban
agriculture can also provide fresher and cheaper produce, more green space, the clearing of
garbage dumps, and recycling of household waste./15

I'm an expert in slum dwelling. We're establishing a small, tiny organization trying toorganize slum dwellers, because we see so many slums. Slums in the city, slums inthe villages, slums in the forests.
I have worked for four years to motivate my fellow slum dwellers to become
transmigrants, and they finally migrated to ten places all over Indonesia. They arestill in very good communication with me. They're still sending me letters, and they
say that life is not better in the transmigration areas. Living in the shadows in theurban slums or living in the shadows in the transmigration site is just the same.
When I go back to my people, the slum dwellers, tonight they will ask me what I
have got from this meeting in the big hotel. They won't ask for information, just'Have you brought some money for us to build new houses?'
Syamsuddin Nainggolan
Founder, Yayasan Panca Bakti
WCED Public Hearing
Jakarta, 26 March 1986

60. Another poorly used resource is solid wastes, the disposal of which has become a major
problem in many cities, with much of it dumped and uncollected. Promoting the reclamation,
reuse, or recycling of materials can reduce the problem of solid waste, stimulate employment,
and result in savings of raw materials. Composting can support urban agriculture. If amunicipal government lacks the resources to collect household wastes regularly, it can support
existing community-based schemes. In many cities, literally thousands of people already makea living sorting through wastes by hand on municipal tips. Investing in a more capitalintensive, automatic recycling plant could be doubly counterproductive if it unnecessarily
consumes scarce capital or if a plant would destroy many people's livelihoods. But animmediate need here is to give health advice and provide health care services to those who aremaking a living off municipal tips./16

III. International Cooperation
61. The future will be predominantly urban, and the most immediate environmental concernsof most people will be urban ones. The effectiveness of efforts to improve urban life depends
largely on the health of national economies. In many developing countries, this is linked closely
to the state of the world economy. An improvement in international economic relations (seeChapter 3) would perhaps do more than anything else to enhance the capacity of developing
countries to address their linked urban and environmental problems. But beyond that is theneed to strengthen cooperation among developing countries and to increase various types ofdirect support from the international community.

1. Cooperation Among Developing Countries
62. Developing countries can do a great deal together to develop the policy concepts,
programmes, and institutions needed to tackle the urban crisis they share. Although the
management problems confronting Caracas, Dakar, or Delhi have little relevance to those
confronting London or Paris, the cities of Latin America, West Africa, or South Asia have muchin common. As they formulate broad national urban strategies, it is important that they shareexperiences on the management of their growing megacities, on the development of small andintermediate centres, on strengthening local government, on upgrading illegal settlements, oncrisis-response measures, and on a range of other problems that are more or less unique to theThird World.
63. Further research could provide the basis for rethinking the Third World city. It could also
feed in-country training programmes (or, for smaller nations, regional training programmes)for city and municipal government staff. Good policy proposals and good training courses
depend on good local information and analysis; far too little of all three of these is found withindeveloping countries and cities.

2. International Support
64. A greater flow of international resources is required to support the efforts of developing
countries to tackle the unfolding urban crisis. An agreed definition of 'urban development
assistance' does not exist, but the Development Assistance Committee recently estimated that
total bilateral and multilateral aid for urban programmes averaged about $900 million per year
over 1980-84./17 It is also estimated that to date fewer than 5 per cent of the developing world's
urban population has been reached by a housing or neighbourhood upgrading projectsponsored by a development assistance agency. This level of support needs to be increased
significantly. Moreover, the scope of support should be broadened and its quality and terms
improved.
65. In addition, development assistance agencies should increase aid and technical assistancein three areas:
to set up infrastructure funds for local governments;
to undertake tasks such as reorganizing local tax assessments and collection, preparing
or updating maps of property ownership, and setting up technical teams to advise
households and community groups on improving housing;for in-country training courses and on-the job training for local officials.
66. Part of the increased aid should go directly to community groups, using intermediaries
such as national or international NGOs. Several bilateral aid programmes have alreadydemonstrated the cost-effectiveness of this approach; various NGOs have been responsible formany successful community based schemes to improve housing and provide basic services.
They are generally more successful at reaching the poorest. More aid should also go to
supporting independent research groups working in housing and urban issues, particularly
those providing advice to local governments and community groups; many are doing so
already, especially in Latin America.

Box 9-4
Misunderstanding Women's Needs in Housing Projects
Housing projects often use a gridiron layout that does not allow women to work intheir house and at the same time keep an eye on their own or their neighbours'
children. House designs and plot sizes rarely consider the fact that many women will
want to use their houses as workshops (to make clothes, for instance) or as shops,
which in fact are often forbidden in low-income housing projects. Application
procedure for low-income housing sometimes requires 'husbands' to apply; thisexcludes women-headed households - between 30 and 50 per cent of all households.
Women's special needs in different cultures are ignored - in Islamic societies, forexample, women's need for private open space within the house is rarely consideredin house designs, while their need for relatively sheltered pathways to get to shops
and clinics is not acknowledged in site layouts.
Source: Based on C.O.N. Moser, 'Housing Policy: Towards a Gender AwarenessApproach', Working Paper #71, Development Planning Unit, London, 1985.

67. International cooperation can also contribute to developing low cost technologies for urban
needs and studying ways of meeting the housing needs of women. (See Box 9-4.)
68. Many technical agencies within the UN system have the appropriate knowledge bases toplay a valuable role in advising and supporting governments, notably the UN Centre for
Human Settlements (UNCHS, or Habitat). They should identify the information and guidelinesthat city governments need and the form in which it can be made accessible and usable bythem. This could be patterned, for example, upon the ongoing efforts to prepare guidebooks
for community workers on identifying disease vectors and mobilizing communities to deal withthem, and on interventions to promote child survival and health. More generally. Habitat canstrengthen international cooperation at the global level, as in the UN International Year of
Shelter for the Homeless. The capacity of the UN system to provide leadership on humansettlements issues through Habitat needs to be strengthened.

Footnotes
1/ This chapter draws heavily on four background papers prepared for WCED: I. Burton,'Urbanization and Development', 1985; J.E. Hardoy and D. Satterthwaite, 'Shelter,
Infrastructure and Services in Third World Cities', 1985 (printed in Habitat International,Vol. 10, No. 4, 1986); J.E. Hardoy and D. Satterthwaite, 'Rethinking the Third World City, 1986;
and I. Sachs, 'Human Settlements: Resource and Environmental Management', 1985.
2/ See J. Jacobs, Cities and the Wealth of Nations (New York: Random House, 1984).
3/ UN, The Growth in the World's Urban and Rural Population 1920-1980,
Population Studies No. 44 (New York: 1969); UN, Urban, Rural and City Populations
1950-2000 (as assessed in 1978), Population Studies No. 68 (New York: 1980).
4/ The expansion of 'city' or 'metropolitan area' boundaries accounts for some of thepopulation growth in Table 9 2. The UN projections are based on extrapolating past trends.
This method often provides a poor guide to future trends, especially long-term ones. But thedata base with which to make better projections ie not available.
5/ UNCHS (Habitat) position paper for October 1986 DAC meeting on Urban Development,
OECD document DAC (86)47, 27 August 1986.
6/ Department of International Economic and Social Affaire, 'Urban and Rural Population
Projections, 1984' (unofficial assessment), UN, New York, 1986.
7/ J.E. Hardoy and D. Satterthwaite, Shelter: Need and Response; Housing, Land andSettlement Policies in Seventeen Third World Nations (Chichester, UK: John Wiley &Sons, 1981). For the situation in Sao Paulo, See Jorge Wilhelm, 'Sao Paulo: Environmental
Problems of the Growing Metropolis', submitted to WCED Public Hearings, Sao Paulo, 1985.
8/ J.E. Hardoy and D. Satterthwaite, 'Third World Cities and the Environment of Poverty',
Geoforum, Vol. 15, No. 3, 1984. See also World Social Prospects Association, The Urban
Tragedy (Geneva: UNITAR, 1986).
9/ See Osvaldo Sunkel, 'Debt, Development and Environment', submitted to WCED Public
Hearings, Sao Paulo, 1985; Ricardo Jordan S., 'Population and the Planning of Large Cities in
Latin America', paper submitted to the International Conference on Population and the Urban
Future, Barcelona, Spain, 19-22 May 1986.
10/ G. Scimemi, 'Cita e Ambiente', DAEST, Instituto Universtario di Architectura, Venezia,
1987. See also, The State of the Environment in OECD Member Countries (Paris:
OECD, 1979 and 1985).
11/ I. Scott, Urban and Spatial Development in Mexico (London: Johns Hopkins
University Press, 1982).
12/ See Chapter 8 in J.E. Hardoy and D. Satterthwaite (eds.), Small and Intermediate Urban
Centres; Their role in Regional and National Development in the Third World(London: Hodder and Stoughton, 1986).
13/ UNCHS, 'Habitat Hyderabad Squatter Settlement Upgrading Project, India', projectmonograph produced for the International Year of Shelter for the Homeless, Nairobi, 1986
14/ J. M. Kalbermatten et al., Appropriate Technology for Water Supply andSanitation; a Summary of Technical and Economic Options (Washington DC: World
Bank, 1980).
15/ D. Silk, 'Urban Agriculture', prepared for WCED, 1986.
16/ N. Khouri-Dagher, 'Waste Recycling: Towards Greater urban Self-Reliance', prepared for
WCED, 1985.
17/ See draft annotated agenda for October 1986, DAC Meeting on Urban Development. OECD
document DAC (86)15. The World Bank definition of urban development assistance was used,which includes fostering urban efficiency and alleviating poverty, shelter, urban transport,
integrated urban development, and regional development on secondary cities.

Our Common Future, Chapter 10: Managing The CommonsI. Oceans: The Balance of Life
1. The Balance Under Threat
2. Oceans Management

II. Space: A Key to Planetary Management
1. Remote Sensing from Space
2. The Geosynchronous Orbit
3. The Pollution of Orbital Space
4. Nuclear Power in Orbit
5. Towards a Space Regime

III. Antarctica: Towards Global Cooperation
1. Guard Present Achievements
2. Anticipate Pressures for Mineral Development
3. Promote Evolution of Antarctic Treaty System
4. Establish a Means for More Effective Communication
1. The traditional forms of national sovereignty are increasingly challenged by the realities of
ecological and economic interdependence. Nowhere is this more true than in sharedecosystems and in 'the global commons' - those parts of the planet that fall outside national
jurisdictions. Here, sustainable development can be secured only through international
cooperation and agreed regimes for surveillance, development, and management in thecommon interest. But at stake is not just the sustainable development of shared ecosystems
and the commons, but of all nations whose development depends to a greater or lesser extent
on their rational management.
2. By the same token, without agreed, equitable, and enforceable rules governing the rights andduties of states in respect of the global commons, the pressure of demands on finite resources
will destroy their ecological integrity over time. Future generations will be impoverished, andthe people who suffer most will be those who live in poor countries that can least assert theirown claims in a free-for-all.

3. Management of the various commons - the oceans, outer space, and Antarctica - is atdifferent stages of evolution, as is the very 'commonality' of these areas. In the Law of the Sea,
the international community has developed one of the most ambitious and advanced ofinternational conventions ever for the seas and the sea-bed. But a few countries have so far
declined to adhere to the multilateral regime that had been the subject of protracted global
negotiations, and this is blocking implementation of certain key aspects. Boundaries have beendrawn on the oceans to separate the common seas from national Exclusive Economic Zones(EEZs), but as the common and claimed waters form interlocked ecological and economic
systems, and as the health of one depends on the health of the other, both are discussed in thischapter. As for outer space, the least tapped global commons, discussion of joint management
has only just begun. Antarctica has been covered for over a quarter of a century by a binding
Treaty. Many states that are not party to it feel they should by right have a stake in the
management of what they see as a part of the global commons.

I. Oceans: The Balance of Life
4. In the Earth's wheel of life, the oceans provide the balance./1 Covering over 70 per cent of theplanet's surface, they play a critical role in maintaining its life-support systems, in moderating
its climate, and in sustaining animals and plants, including minute, oxygen-producing
phytoplankton. They provide protein, transportation, energy, employment, recreation, andother economic, social, and cultural activities.
5. The oceans also provide the ultimate sink for the by-products of human activities. Huge,
closed septic tanks, they receive wastes from cities, farms, and industries via sewage outfalls,
dumping from barges and ships, coastal run-off, river discharge, and even atmospherictransport. In the last few decades, the growth of the world economy, the burgeoning demand
for food and fuel, and accumulating discharges of wastes have begun to press against thebountiful limits of the oceans.
6. The oceans are marked by a fundamental unity from which there is no escape,interconnected cycles of energy, climate, marine living resources, and human activities movethrough coastal waters, regional seas, and the closed oceans. The effects of urban, industrial,
and agricultural growth are contained within no nation's Exclusive Economic Zone; they passthrough currents of water and air from nation to nation, and through complex food chains from
species to species, distributing the burdens of development, if not the benefits, to both rich andpoor.
7. Only the high seas outside of national jurisdiction are truly 'commons'; but fish species,
pollution, and other effects of economic development do not respect these legal boundaries.
Sound management of the ocean commons will require management of land-based activities aswell. Five zones bear on this management: inland areas, which affect the oceans mostly via
rivers; coastal lands - swamps, marshes, and so on - close to the sea, where human activities
can directly affect the adjacent waters; coastal waters - estuaries, lagoons, and shallow waters
generally - where the effects of land-based activities are dominant; offshore waters, out roughly
to the edge of the continental shelf; and the high seas, largely beyond the 200-mile EEZs ofcoastal states' control.
8. Major fisheries are found mostly in offshore waters, while pollution affecting them comes
mostly from inland sources and is concentrated in coastal waters. Formal international
management is essential in the areas beyond the EEZs, although greater international
cooperation, including improved frameworks to coordinate national action, is needed for all
areas.

1. The Balance Under Threat
9. Today, the living resources of the sea are under threat from overexploitation, pollution, andland-based development. Most major familiar fish stocks throughout the waters over thecontinental shelves, which provide 95 per cent of the world's fish catch, are now threatened by
overfishing.
10. Other threats are more concentrated. The effects of pollution and land development are
most severe in coastal waters and semi-enclosed seas along the world's shore-lines. The use ofcoastal areas for settlement, industry, energy facilities, and recreation will accelerate, as will
the upstream manipulation of estuarine river systems through dams or diversion for
agriculture and municipal water supplies. These pressures have destroyed estuarine habitats
as irrevocably as direct dredging, filling, or paving. Shore-lines and their resources will suffer
ever increasing damage if current, business-as-usual approaches to policy, management, andinstitutions continue.

The world's environmental problems are greater than the sum of those in eachcountry. Certainly, they can no longer be dealt with purely on a nation-state basis.
The World Commission on Environment and Development must strike at thisfundamental problem by recommending specific ways for countries to cooperate
to surmount sovereignty, to embrace international instruments in order to deal with
global threats. The growing trend towards isolationism demonstrates that thecurrent rhythm of history is out of harmony with human aspirations, even with its
chances for survival.
The challenge ahead is for us to transcend the self-interests of our respective
nation-states so as to embrace a broader self-interest -- the survival of the humanspecies in a threatened world.
Hon. Tom McMillan
Minister of Environment, Government of Canada
WCED Public Hearing
Ottawa, 26-27 May 1986

11. Certain coastal and offshore waters are especially vulnerable to ecologically insensitive
onshore development, to competitive overfishing, and to pollution. The trends are of special
concern in coastal areas where pollution by domestic sewage, industrial wastes, and pesticideand fertilizer run-off may threaten not only human health but also the development offisheries.
12. Even the high seas are beginning to show some signs of stress from the billions of tons ofcontaminants added each year. Sediments brought to the oceans by great rivers such as the
Amazon can be traced for as much as 2,000 kilometres out to sea./2 Heavy metals fromcoal-burning plants and some industrial processes also reach the oceans via the atmosphere.
The amount of oil spilled annually from tankers now approaches 1.5 million tons./3 The marine
environment, exposed to nuclear radiation from past nuclear weapons tests, is receiving more
exposure from the continuing disposal of low-level radioactive wastes.
13. New evidence of a possible rapid depletion of the ozone layer and a consequent increase inultraviolet radiation poses a threat not only to human health but to ocean life. Some scientists

believe that this radiation could kill sensitive phytoplankton and fish larvae floating near theocean's surface, damaging ocean food chains and possibly disrupting planetary support
systems./4
14. High concentrations of substances such as heavy metals, organochlorines, and petroleum
have been found on the oceans' surface. With continued accumulation, these could havecomplex and long lasting effects./5 The sea-floor is a region of complex physical, chemical, andbiological activity where microbial processes play a major role, but as yet serious damage isknown to have occurred only in very localized regions. Although these findings areencouraging, given accelerating pressures and the inadequacy of present data, they provide no
grounds for complacency.

2. Oceans Management
15. Looking to the next century, the Commission is convinced that sustainable development, if
not survival itself, depends on significant advances in the management of the oceans.
Considerable changes will be required in our institutions and policies and more resources will
have to be committed to oceans management.
16. Three imperatives lie at the heart of the oceans management question:
The underlying unity of the oceans requires effective global management regimes.
The shared resource characteristics of many regional seas make forms of regional
management mandatory.
The major land-based threats to the oceans require effective national actions based oninternational cooperation.
17. Mutual dependence has increased in recent years. The Law of the Sea Convention, with theestablishment of the 200-mile EEZs, has put an additional 35 per cent of the oceans surface
under national control with regard to management of natural resources. It has also provided an
institutional setting that could lead to better management of these areas, given that single
governments may be expected to manage more rationally resources over which they have solecontrol. However, this expectation ignores the realities of short sighted political and economic
goals.
18. An international ecosystem approach is required for the management of these resources forsustained use. Significant gains have been made in past decades, nationally and internationally,
and many essential components have been put in place. But they do not add up to a systemthat reflects the imperatives mentioned above. Where the EEZs of several states come together
in semi-enclosed or regional seas, integrated management requires varying degrees ofinternational cooperation, such as joint monitoring and research on migratory species andmeasures to combat pollution and regulate actions whose effects reach across boundaries.
19. When it comes to the high seas beyond national jurisdiction, international action isessential. The sum of the multiple conventions and programmes now in place do not andcannot represent such a regime. Even the separate UN programmes cannot easily becoordinated, given the structure of the United Nations./6
20. The Commission believes that a number of actions are urgently needed to improve regimes
for oceans management. Thus the Commission proposes measures to:strengthen capacity for national action, especially in developing countries;
improve fisheries management;
reinforce cooperation in semi-enclosed and regional seas;
strengthen control of ocean disposal of hazardous and nuclear wastes; andadvance the Law of the Sea.

2.1 National Action
21. Coastal governments should launch an urgent review of the legal and institutional
requirements for integrated management of their EEZs, and of their roles in arrangements forinternational cooperation. This review should be undertaken within the framework of a clear
statement of national goals and priorities. Reducing overexploitation of fisheries in coastal andoffshore waters might be one such goal. The rapid clean-up of municipal and industrial
pollution discharging into critical marine habitats could be another. Others might include
strengthening national research and management capacity, and producing an inventory ofcoastal and marine resources.
22. Given the increased pressures on coastal and marine resources projected through the year
2000, all coastal states should have a complete inventory of these assets. Drawing on senior
experts from national and international agencies, nations could deploy the latest satellite
mapping and other techniques to put together an inventory of these resources and thenmonitor changes in them.
23. Many developing countries will require assistance to strengthen their legal and institutionalframeworks needed for integrated management of coastal resources. Many small island andmaritime developing countries lack the economic or military means to prevent the exploitationof their coastal resources or the pollution of their waters by powerful countries or companies.
This has become a major concern in the Pacific in particular, and threatens the politicalstability of the region. International development banks and development assistance agencies
should establish programmes to support the development of this Institutional capacity.

2.2 Fisheries Management
24. World fisheries have been expanding since the Second World War, with the global catchrising at a steady 6-7 per cent annually from 20 million to 65 million tons between 1950 and
1969. But after 1970, as more and more stocks were depleted, the average annual growth incatches fell to only about 1 per cent. (See Table 10-1.) With conventional management practices,
the growth era in fisheries is over. Even assuming restored productivity in now depleted
stocks, and an increased harvest from underutilized fisheries, FAO sees only a gradual increasein catches, perhaps rising from current levels of over 80 million tons to about 100 million. This
does not augur well for future food security, especially in low-income countries where fish are aprincipal source of animal protein and where millions secure their livelihoods from fisheries
activities./7
25. Overexploitation threatens many stocks as economic resources. Several of the world's
largest fisheries - the Peruvian anchoveta, several North Atlantic herring stocks, and theCalifornian sardine - have collapsed following periods of heavy fishing. In some of the areas
affected by these collapses, and in other rich fisheries such as the Gulf of Thailand and off West
Africa, heavy fishing has been followed by marked changes in species composition./8 The
reasons for these changes are not well understood, and more research is needed into the
responses of marine resources to exploitation so that managers can receive better scientificadvice. Greater support for such work is urgently needed, and this support must include
additional assistance to developing countries in increasing their research capacity and theirknowledge of their own resources.
26. One factor leading to the establishment of extended EEZs was the concern of coastal states,
both industrialized and developing, over the depletion of fisheries off their coasts. A large
number of conventions had been established covering most major fisheries, but they proved
inadequate in most cases. Participating countries were in general unable to overcome thedifficulties of allocating shares to limited common resources. Improved management was seen
as an urgent need, and open access was perceived as the main obstacle to it.
27. The advent of extended EEZs under the Law of the Sea Convention was expected to solve orat least alleviate the problem. Coastal states were required to introduce effective conservationand management of the living resources in their EEZs. They could also control the activities offoreign fishermen and develop their own fisheries.
28. Industrial countries have been much more successful in doing this than developing
countries. In the north-west Atlantic, the annual catch by long-range fleets has declined fromover 2 million tons before 1974 to around a quarter of a million tons in 1983, and the share of
the catch taken by the United States and Canada has risen from under 50 per cent to over 90
per cent.

Table 10-1
World Fish Catch in Major Fisheries, 1979-84
1979

1980

Region

1981

1982

1983

1984

(thousand tons)

North Atlantic

14,667

14,676

14,48913,597

13,891

13,940

North Pacific

20,303

20,733

21,90822,603

23,666

26,416

Central Atlantic

6,064

6,867

6,833

7,239

7,210

1,164

Central Pacific

7,536

7,910

6,478

8,175

7,648

8,531

Indian Ocean

3,541

3,693

3,728

3,852

4,061

4,362

South Atlantic

4,420

3,895

4,037

4,340

4,314

3,957

South Pacific

7,242

6,619

7,240

8,328

6,724

8,684

Inland

7,240

7,603

8,138

8,455

9,131

9,716

Total*

71,014

71,99674,85076,59076,84682,770Developed

37,14338,23438,89039,26537,99142,412Developing

33,87133,75835,961

37,32636,65540,358Developing countries
catch as per cent ofworld total

47.7

46.9

48.0

48.7

48.0

46.6

* Columns do not add to totals due to rounding.
Source: Based on data in FAO, Yearbooks of Fishery Statistics (Rome: 1979-84).
29. Yet long-range industrial fishing fleets still catch about 5 million tons annually indeveloping regions. Off West Africa, for example, over half the total catch is still taken by suchfleets./9 This is due partly to the fact that many of the biggest resources lie off thinly populatedareas - the western edge of the Sahara and off Namibia. But it is also due to the common lack of
locally available capital, and to a shortage of local expertise in many technical aspects offisheries, especially processing and marketing.
30. Coastal developing countries can usually obtain some modest revenue in the form oflicence fees, but this represents only a fraction of what they could earn from a full national useof the resource. Another 10-15 million tons of so far underutilized or unexploited resources
could be added to the existing fisheries off their coasts./10 There is a pressing need for theseresources to be managed sustainably, for the benefit of developing countries and in ways that
help to meet global nutritional needs.

The opinion of the public is what you see here in this room. You see importantleaders from all over Brazil, from all over the country that have come here, fromthe rubberman that was under a palmtree yesterday and was here speaking to the
U.N. Commission and leaders that are independent. The Brazilian population
yearned to have someone to speak to. Someone who will listen, who will not sortof mystify things, and someone who will not trick them. So there is an enormous
expectation with regards to the seriousness of your Commission.
Randau Marques
Journalist
WCED Public Hearing
Sao Paulo, 28-29 Oct 1985

31. Whaling offers another example. Recognizing that the history of whaling up to the 1960s
was that of overexploitation, the International Whaling Commission (IWC), the maininternational body regulating whaling, has taken a series of conservation measures since theearly 1970s and now all stocks that are below a certain level have been classified as protectedfrom commercial whaling.
32. In its early days, the IWC was dominated by whaling nations. After 1979, non-whaling
nations became an increasingly significant majority of the membership. This change wasreflected in the IWC's decisions, which increasingly opted in cases of scientific doubt for a
cautious approach and the reduction of catch levels or the cessation of whaling altogether on
certain stocks.

33. This trend culminated in the moratorium decision of 1982. Members have the right toobject and continue commercial whaling or to catch whales for scientific purposes. There is astrongly held view in conservation circles that whaling for scientific purposes can be used as aloophole by whaling nations. Permissions for such hunting should be stringently applied by
IWC members, or the IWC's credibility will be undermined.
34. An important political factor in recent developments hat been the ability of the U.S.
Government to invoke legislation that enables contracts for fishing in U.S. waters to be
withheld from nations that undermine marine conservation agreements. The value of such
fishery concessions is large and the legislation has significant political and economic leverage.
Another important factor has been the strength of the NGOs in organizing support for
anti-whaling actions, lobbying governments and organizing boycotts of fish and other products
from whaling nations.
35. By early 1987, whaling was restricted to scientific catches by Iceland and the Republic ofKorea and to a small catch by Norway, which continued to object to the moratorium, but whichplanned to halt its commercial whaling following the 1967 season. And there were catches byJapan and the Soviet Union. The Soviet Union had indicated it would observe the moratorium
after the 1987 Antarctic season, and Japan had withdrawn its objection to the moratorium witheffect from 1988. However, Japan may continue whaling for scientific purposes./11 In addition,some whaling was being performed by native peoples in the Soviet Union and Alaska.
36. If the moratorium is observed and whaling for scientific purposes is not abused,commercial whaling will no longer be a major threat to the conservation of whale stocks taken
as a whole. The annual rate of increase of these stocks, however, is unlikely to exceed a few per
cent. Thus substantial whale populations will probably not be observed much before thesecond half of the next century.

2.3 Cooperation on Regional Seas
37. A large number of agreements have been entered into on regional seas. The Commission
has not attempted to evaluate them all, but given the Commission's origin in the UNEP
Governing Council and the General Assembly resolution, it has given special attention to
UNEP's Regional Seas Programme. This programme now brings together over 130 states
bordering 11 different shared seas around the world, states that have an interest in cooperating
for their own and mutual benefit.
38. UNEP provides the initial impetus by bringing governments together to develop a flexible
legal framework within which further agreements can be negotiated as needs require andpolitics allow. UNEP also provides some initial seed money for programme development, but
the governments of the region themselves are meant to take over funding and management,
drawing on the technical advice of UN and other agencies. The result is a gradually evolving
action-oriented programme rooted in the needs of the regions as perceived by the governments
concerned. Fourteen UN agencies and over 40 international and regional organizations
participate in the worldwide programme.
39. The political strategy behind the programme' and the requirement that management andfinancing be undertaken by the participating countries have clearly been crucial to its success.
But it is one thing to contribute a few million dollars for research, and quite another toincorporate the resulting findings into land-based development plans and to enforce strong
pollution control programmes. The massive U.S.-Canadian clean up of the Great Lakes over thepast 15 years cost $8.85 billion for partial treatment of municipal and industrial wastes./12
Huge investments will also be required to roll back land-based pollution along UNEP's regional
seas. Yet nowhere have the sums been committed under agreed schedules to construct thenecessary urban and industrial pollution control systems and to underwrite policies to control
agricultural run-off. The programme now has to confront the regional seas challenge throughthe year 2000 - moving beyond general agreement on goals and research to a solid schedule ofinvestment on a scale that will make a difference.

2.4 Measures to Control Ocean Disposal of Waste
40. The Convention on the Prevention of Marine Pollution by Dumping of Wastes and Other
Matter (London Dumping Convention), which has world-wide application, was concluded in
November 1972 and entered into force on 30 August 1975./13 Its political evolution parallels
that of the International Whaling Commission. Initially, it consisted largely of dumping states,
but non-dumping states are now in the majority. At present it has 61 contracting parties, andsecretariat facilities are provided by the International Maritime Organization. The dumping ofwastes is regulated by the three annexes to the Convention:/14 on extremely dangerous
substances including high-level radioactive wastes, the dumping of which is prohibited, (AnnexI); on somewhat less noxious substances, the dumping or which can be permitted only by 'priorspecial permit' (Annex II); and all other substances, which can be dumped only after a generalpermit has been obtained from national authorities (Annex III). Although the Convention
applies to all wastes dumped deliberately at sea, the ocean disposal of radioactive wastes has
attracted the most attention. It is this question that the Commission considers here.
41. Prior to 1963, the United Kingdom, Switzerland, Belgium, and the Netherlands had been
dumping low-level wastes regularly at the north-east Atlantic dumpsite in international waters
off the coast of Spain. Despite protests from representatives of these nations at the London
Dumping Convention meeting that they would ignore a moratorium resolution on low-level
wastes and carry out dumping during 1983, a de facto moratorium - which all countries honour
but to which some have not formally agreed - went into and remains in effect. Under it, nodisposal should take place until it can be demonstrated that it is environmentally safe.
42. In 1985, the London Dumping Convention voted to extend indefinitely the moratorium on
the ocean dumping of low-level radioactive wastes./15 As a result, the burden of proof that suchactivities are safe was effectively reversed, being put on those nations who want to dump. Thisrevolutionary reversal, though not binding, reflects the changed composition of the London
Dumping Convention.
43. In 1986, the London Dumping Convention established an intergovernmental panel ofexperts to examine the issue of comparative risks of land- and sea-based options for disposal ofradioactive waste. Without prejudging this assessment, the Commission would urge all states
to continue to refrain from disposing of either low or high- level wastes at sea or in the sea-bed.
Moreover, it would seem prudent to anticipate continuing opposition to sea dumping and toactively pursue the siting and development of environmentally safe, land based methods ofdisposal.

Why must we gamble with the lives of innocent children in order to generate
plutonium for bombs? Even to contemplate dumping radioactive waste in watersthat belong to all of us as part of our global heritage is an outrage. For us to makesuch important decisions on behalf of future generations without taking into

account the morality of using international waters as an exclusive rubbish bin is anarrogant act.
Peter Wilkinson
Greenpeace
WCED Public Hearing
Oslo, 24-25 June 1985

44. Several other conventions regulate the dumping of wastes in the north-east Atlantic andNorth Sea, the Mediterranean Sea, and the Baltic Sea. Most of the Regional Seas Conventions
also include a general provision calling on contracting parties to take all appropriate measures
to prevent and reduce pollution caused by dumping.
45. Land-based sources of nuclear waste have become significant in the North Sea, where highlevels of radioactivity have been found in fish, and could threaten other seas./16 The
Convention for the Prevention of Marine Pollution from Land Based Sources (Paris
Convention) was ratified in 1978 by eight states and the European Economic Community.
While it has achieved some international cooperation, its silence on nuclear plants and its
acceptance of the 'best available technology' principle in determining permitted levels ofradioactive discharges clearly needs to be reviewed.
46. The Law of the Sea Convention requires states to establish national laws and regulations to'prevent, reduce and control pollution of the marine environment from dumping'. It also
requires express prior approval by the coastal state for dumping in the territorial sea, in theEEZs, and onto the continental shelf. The legislative history of this Article indicates that coastal
states have not only the right to act but a duty to do so. States also have an obligation under the
Law of the Sea to ensure that their activities do not injure the health and environment ofneighbouring states and the commons.
47. The Commission encourages the London Dumping Convention to reaffirm the rights andresponsibilities of states to control and regulate dumping within the 200-mile EEZ. It is urgent
that they do so, as oceans and food chains respect no boundaries.
48. Moreover, all states should undertake to report releases of toxic and radioactive substancesfrom land-based sources into any body of water to the appropriate Convention Secretariat sothat they may begin to report on the aggregate releases into various seas. Competentauthorities must be designated to keep records of the nature and quantities of wastes dumped.
Beyond that, regional institutions should forward this information to the London Dumping
Convention Secretariat.

2.5 The Law of the Sea
49. The United Nations Conference on the Law of the Sea was the most ambitious attempt everto provide an internationally agreed regime for the management of the oceans. The resulting
Convention represents a major step towards an integrated management regime for the oceans.
It has already encouraged national and international action to manage the oceans./17
50. The Convention reconciled widely divergent interests of states, and established the basis
for a new equity in the use of the oceans and their resources. It confirmed that coastal states
are empowered to exercise sovereignty over their territorial sea, sea- bed and subsoil, and thesuperjacent air space, up to a distance of 12 nautical miles. It redefined the rights of coastal

states concerning the continental shelf. It established Exclusive Economic Zones of up to 200
nautical miles within which the coastal state may exercise sovereign rights with regard to the
management of national resources, living and non-living, in the waters, sea bed, and subsoil.
51. The Convention removed 35 per cent of the oceans as a source of growing conflict between
states. It stipulates that coastal states must ensure that the living resources of the EEZs are notendangered by overexploitation. Thus, governments now have not only the legal power and theself-interest to apply sound principles of resource management within this area, but they havean obligation to do so. The Convention calls for regional cooperation in formulating andimplementing conservation and management strategies for living marine resources, including
cooperation in the exchange of scientific information, the conservation and development ofstocks, and the optimum use of highly migratory species.
52. Similarly, coastal states now have a clear interest in the sound management of thecontinental shelf and in the prevention of pollution from land- and sea-based activities. Under
the Convention, coastal states may adopt laws and regulations for their EEZs compatible withinternational rules and standards to combat pollution from vessels.
53. The Convention also defines the waters, sea bed, and subsoil beyond the limits of national
jurisdiction, and recognizes this as international. Over 45 per cent of the planet's surface, thissea-bed area and its resources are declared to be the 'common heritage of mankind', a conceptthat represents a milestone in the realm of international cooperation. The Convention would
bring all mining activities in the sea-bed under the control of an International Seabed
Authority.
54. By early 1987, the Convention had been signed by 159 nations, and 32 countries had ratified
it. However, a small number of significant states had indicated that they were unlikely to ratify
it./18 The reasons for this rest largely with the regime proposed to manage the common sea
bed.
55. Despite this, many of the Convention's other provisions have been broadly accepted andhave already entered into international law and practice in various ways. This process should
be encouraged, especially as regards those provisions that relate to the environment. This
Commission believes that the Convention should be ratified by the major technological powers
and come into force. Indeed, the most significant initial action that nations can take in theinterests of the oceans' threatened life-support system is to ratify the Law of the Sea
Convention.

II. Space: A Key to Planetary Management
56. Outer space can play a vital role in ensuring the continued habitability of the Earth, largely
through space technology to monitor the vital signs of the planet and aid humans in protecting
its health. According to the 1967 Outer Space Treaty, outer space, including the moon andother celestial bodies, is not subject to national appropriation by claim of sovereignty, bymeans of use of occupation, or by any other means. The UN Committee on the Peaceful Uses ofOuter Space has been labouring to see that these ideals remain on the agenda. This
Commission, in view of these developments, considers space as a global commons and part ofthe common heritage of mankind.
57. The future of the space as a resource will depend not so much on technology as on the slow
and difficult struggle to create sound international institutions to manage this resource. It will
depend most of all upon humanity's ability to prevent an arms race in space.

1. Remote Sensing from Space
58. If humanity is going to respond effectively to the consequences of changes human activity
has induced - the build-up of atmospheric carbon dioxide, depletion of stratospheric ozone,
acid precipitation, and tropical forest destruction - better data on the Earth's natural systems
will be essential.
59. Today several dozen satellites contribute to the accumulation of new knowledge about the
Earth's systems: for example, about the spread of volcanic gases, enabling scientists for the
first time to describe the specific links between a major natural disturbance of the upper
atmosphere and changes in the weather thousands of miles away./19
60. Satellites also played a key scientific role after the 1986 discovery of a 'hole' in the ozone
layer over Antarctica. When ground-based observers noted this phenomenon, archived
satellite data were examined and provided a record of seasonal ozone fluctuation extending
back nearly a decade./20 And scientists have been able to follow closely the unfolding of thedrought in the Sahel region of Africa in the 1980s. Satellite-generated maps correlating rainfall
patterns and biomass have served as a tool in understanding droughts and helped in thetargeting of relief aid.

We need a kind of new earth/space monitoring system. I think that it goes farther
than simply an earth environmental system. It's a combined earth/space monitoring
system, a new agency that would have the resources to be able to monitor, report,
and recommend in a very systematic way on the earth/space interaction that is so
fundamental to a total ecological view of the biosphere.
Maxwell Cohen
University of Ottawa
WCED Public Hearing
Ottawa, 26-27 May 1986

61. Recently, an international and interdisciplinary group of scientists has proposed a major
new initiative - the International Geosphere-Biosphere Programme (IGBP) to be coordinatedthrough ICSU. It would investigate the biosphere using many technologies, including satellites.
This proposal seemed in 1987 to be gaining momentum; it was already influencing the budget
decisions of several nations on allocations for future satellite launches and is increasing
coordination between existing efforts.
62. The primary frustration about this wealth of data is that the information is dispersed
among governments arid institutions, rather than being pooled. UNEP's Global Environment
Monitoring System is a modest effort to pool space data relevant to the Earth's habitability. Itshould be strengthened. But most such efforts are underfunded, undercoordinated, andinadequate to the tasks.
63. The primary responsibility for action rests initially with national governments, cooperating
to pool, store and exchange data. In time, international efforts might be funded through somedirect global revenue source or through contributions from individual nations. (See Chapter
12.)

2. The Geosynchronous Orbit
64. From an economic point of view, the most valuable part of the Earth's orbital space is thegeosynchronous orbit, a band of space 36,000 kilometres, above the equator./21 Most
communication and many weather satellites - as well as many military orbits - are ingeosynchronous orbit. To prevent signals to and from the satellites interfering with one
another, satellites must be placed some distance apart, effectively limiting the number that canuse this valuable band to 180. Thus, the geosynchronous orbit is not only a valuable but also ascarce and limited global resource.
65. The growth in satellite communication traffic during the 1970s led to many predictions thatslots would soon be saturated. Thus conflict emerged over the use and ownership of thegeosynchronous orbit, largely between industrial nations that have the capacity to put
satellites in this orbit and the equatorial developing nations that do not but that lie beneath
this band of space.
66. The first effort to devise a property regime for geosynchronous orbit was the 1976 Bogota
Declaration, signed by seven equatorial countries./22 These countries declared that the orbits
above them were extensions of their territorial airspace. The Bogota Declaration has beenchallenged by some nations that see it as contradicting the 'non-appropriation' principle of theOuter Space Treaty. Another group of developing countries proposed a licensing system forthe use of geosynchronous orbits./23 Countries would be awarded slots that could then be sold,
rented, or reserved for future use.
67. Another way of managing this resource and capturing its rental value for the common
interest would be for an international body to own and license the slots to bidders at an
auction. Such an alternative would be analogous to the Seabed Authority in the Law of the Sea
Convention.
66. Industrial countries have opposed the creation of a property rights regime forgeosynchronous orbit, especially a regime that granted rights to slots to countries that cannot
now use them. They argue that a regime of prior allocation would drive up costs and reduce the
incentive of the private sector to develop and use this orbit. Others, who see a rapidly growingrole for satellite communications, argue that regulatory regimes should be established before
competition makes such a step more difficult.
69. Since satellite communications involve the use of radio waves, a de facto regime for theparcelling out of slots in geosynchronous orbit has emerged through the activities of theInternational Telecommunications Union (ITU) in the past several years. The ITU allocates theuse of the radio waves (those parts of the electromagnetic spectrum used forcommunication)./24 The highly technical character of the task of parcelling out radio waves,combined with the fact that strict compliance is necessary to allow any user to enjoy access tothis resource, has produced a successful international resource regime, based on three regional
conferences, for effective management of the resource./25 Whether this approach will endure
depends in large part upon the perceived justice of the decisions reached by the regional
conferences.

3. The Pollution of Orbital Space
70. Debris in orbit is a growing threat to human activities in space. In 1981, a panel of experts
convened by the American Institute of Aeronautics and Astronautics concluded that thegrowth of space debris could pose 'an unacceptable threat' to life in space within a decade./26
This debris consists of spent fuel tanks, rocket shells, satellites that no longer function, andshrapnel from explosions in space: it is concentrated in the region between 160 and 1,760
kilometres above the Earth.
71. With greater care in the design and disposal of satellites, much of it could be avoided.
However, the creation of debris is an integral and unavoidable consequence of the testing anduse of space weapons. The contribution of military activities to the Earth's 'debris belt' could
grow greatly if plans to place large numbers of satellite based weapons and weapons-related
sensors are realized.
72. The most important measure to minimize space debris, therefore, is to prevent the further
testing and deployment of space based weapons or weapons designed tor use against objects inspace.
73. Clean up would be expensive. It has been proposed that the major powers lead aninternational effort to retrieve the larger pieces of space debris from orbit. Such work would
involve the design, construction, and launch of vehicles that could manoeuvre in space andgrapple with large, jagged, tumbling space objects. The proposal has elicited little enthusiasm.

4. Nuclear Power in Orbit
74. Many spacecraft are nuclear-powered and threaten contamination if they fall to the
Earth./27 There are two basic approaches to the problem: Ban or regulate. The option ofbanning all radioactive materials from space is the simplest to enact. It would eliminate theproblem and would also severely stunt the further development of space-based warfare
systems. A total ban should exempt scientific uses in deep-space, as small amounts offissionable materials have been essential for the powering of deep-space probes. A ban onreactors in space would be easy to monitor, because reactors produce waste heat detectable byinfrared sensors at great distances. Verifying the absence of small nuclear power systems
would be more difficult, but still possible.
75. A wide variety of methods are available for regulating the use of radioactive materials inspace. The most important include limiting the size of reactors permitted in orbit, requiring
shielding around radioactive material sufficient to withstand reentry into the Earth's
atmosphere, and requiring deep space disposal of spacecraft that contain radioactive material.
All are technologically feasible, but would add cost and complexity to missions. Nevertheless,these measures should be implemented, as a minimum step.

5. Towards a Space Regime
76. Soon after the aeroplane was invented, it became obvious that collisions would occur unlessa general air traffic control regime was established. This model offers a useful way to think
about the need for and contents of a space regime. The creation of 'rules of the road' for orbital
space could ensure that the activities of some do not degrade the resource for all.

Utilization of spacecraft for solving the problems of forestry provides a good
example of the peaceful use of space. Taking into account the interests of thepresent and future generations, there is no other more favourable area of spacetechnology application than environmental protection, to study the natural

resources of Earth and control their rational utilization and reproduction. We thinkthat in the forthcoming years international cooperation in this field will be further
expanded.
L. E. Mikhailov
USSR State Committee on Forestry
WCED Public Hearing
Moscow, 11 Dec 1986

77. Orbital space cannot be effectively managed by any one country acting alone. The inherently
international character of orbital space has been recognized by a majority of nations in theOuter Space Treaty. The international community should seek to design and implement a
space regime to ensure that space remains a peaceful environment for the benefit of all.
78. An essential step towards efficient management of the space resource is to abandon thenotion that because outer space in general is unlimited, orbital space can absorb all humanactivity. Because of the speeds involved, orbital space is for practical purposes much 'closer'
than the atmosphere. A system of space traffic control in which some activities were forbidden
and others harmonized cuts a middle path between the extremes of a sole Space Authority andthe present near anarchy.
79. The electromagnetic spectrum has been effectively regulated by international agreement,
and through this regulation has begun to emerge the beginnings of a space regime forgeosynchronous orbital space. An extension of this type of approach to control debris and theuse of nuclear materials in orbit is the next logical step.
80. A fine balance must be struck between regulating activities too late and regulating
non-existent activities too soon. Regulating activities on the Moon, for example, beyond thegeneral principles laid out in the Outer Space Treaty is clearly premature. But regulating spacedebris and nuclear materials in Earth orbit is clearly overdue.

III. Antarctica: Towards Global Cooperation
81. The Antarctic continent - larger than the United states and Mexico combined - for over a
generation has been managed under a regime of multilateral cooperation that has secured
environmental protection. Signed on 1 December 1959, the Antarctic Treaty has been thevehicle for a number of important initiatives in pursuit of its two primary objectives: tomaintain Antarctica for peaceful uses only, prohibiting all military activities, weapons testing,nuclear explosions, and disposal of radioactive wastes; and to promote freedom of scientificinvestigation in Antarctica and international cooperation to that end./28
82. The fact that the 'question of Antarctica' is today on the UN agenda/29 indicates the realitythat there is a debate in the international community over the future management of thecontinent. Under the combined pressures of economic, technological, environmental, andother trends, there are new initiatives to establish a regime for minerals exploitation. New
questions about equitable management are presenting challenges that may reshape thepolitical context of the continent within the next decade./30
83. During the forthcoming period of change, the challenge is to ensure that Antarctica ismanaged in the interests of all humankind, in a manner that conserves its unique environment,
preserves its value for scientific research, and retains its character as a demilitarized,
non-nuclear zone of peace.

84. Responsibility for guiding change at present rests initially with the countries party to the
Antarctic Treaty./31 Eighteen nations now enjoy full decision-making status under the Treaty,
with these consultative parties exercising their rights and carrying out their obligations inpeaceful cooperation despite their divergent views on the territorial claims to parts of thecontinent. An additional 17 nations have observer status at the biennial Antarctic Treaty
System (ATS) meetings.
85. The Antarctic Treaty is open to accession by any state that is a member of the United
Nations, and by others invited to accede. To become a Consultative Party, a state must
demonstrate concrete interest in Antarctica by conducting substantial scientific research there.
The Treaty nations feel that this system is applied flexibly and opens the Treaty to all nations
with a genuine interest in Antarctica. Many developing nations without the resources to
conduct research on the continent feel that this condition effectively excludes most of theworld's nations./32
86. But the question of participation is not polarized between industrial and developing
countries. Not all industrialized countries are members of the Treaty, and Argentina, Brazil,
Chile, China, India, and Uruguay have consultative status under it, while several additional
developing countries have acceded to it. However, the overwhelming majority of developing
countries, including all those of Africa, remain outside the arrangements.
87. There is furthermore no general agreement as to whether Antarctica is part of theinternational commons. For example, seven states maintain territorial claims. Moreover, many
developing countries reject the idea that what they regard as the common heritage of mankind
should be managed by some countries to the exclusion of others. Many of them see theAntarctic Treaty System as the exclusive preserve of the rich and technologically advanced
countries. Some object to what they consider the exclusivity of the Treaty system, withcountries self-appointed to determine the future of the continent. Although the Consultative
Parties assert that they have managed Antarctica in the interests of all peoples, several nations
maintain that these interests should not be defined by the Consultative Parties alone; this viewhas gained many new sources of expression since 1959. Despite the present debate over thecontinent's future, many nations outside the Treaty have recognized the trusteeship role
played by the Treaty nations in protecting the environment of Antarctica./33
88. The Commission does not propose to adjudicate the status of Antarctica. But it sees it as
essential that the continent be managed and protected in a responsible manner that takes into
account the common interests at stake, it notes also that the legal and management regimes
are in the midst of a process of change leading to wider participation.
89. The Antarctic Treaty Consultative Parties have endeavoured to demonstrate a strong
concern for the protection of the continent's environment and the conservation of its natural
resources. (See Box 10-1.) In 1964, they adopted the 'Agreed Measures for the Conservation of
Antarctic Fauna and Flora',/34 which amount to a conservation protocol to the Treaty. At
subsequent biennial meetings, they have continued to develop environmental principles andmeasures to guide the planning and execution of their activities. Additional measures would
improve the scope and effectiveness of environmental protection, and it would be useful toconsider means to ensure that the record of compliance with these measures is widely known.
90. The Consultative Parties have also played a leading role in the promulgation of two
important international conventions relating to conservation of living resources: the 1972
Convention on the Conservation of Antarctic Seals and the 1980 Convention on theConservation of Antarctic Marine Living Resources./35 The second arose out of concern thatthe depletion of Antarctic fish stocks, particularly shrimp like krill, could have severe andunpredictable effects on related and dependent species. It adopts an 'ecosystem approach' toresource management./36
91. Taken together, these legal instruments and accompanying protocols andrecommendations, along with the non governmental body the Scientific Committee on
Antarctic Research (SCAR), constitute what is referred to as the Antarctic Treaty System. Thissystem demonstrates the evolution that has taken place under the Antarctic Treaty since itentered into force.
92. Several international NGOs have begun to monitor the adequacy of and compliance withenvironmental protection and conservation measures in Antarctica and have frequently been
critical of these measures. They have also sought observer status at ATS meetings and greater
involvement in the formulation and review of Antarctic policies. Some UK agencies areconcerned with southern hemisphere meteorology, oceanography, or fishing and have become
involved in Antarctic science and politics. A concrete result of this interest has been invitations
extended to WMO, FAO, IOC, IUCN, IWC, SCAR, and the Scientific Committee on Oceanic
Research to attend as observers meetings of the Commission for the Conservation of Antarctic
Marine Living Resources (CCAMLR). The European Economic Community is also a CCAMLR
member as a result of its member states ceding competence to it with respect to fisheries
management policies.

Box 10-1
Antarctica's Unique Treaty Arrangements
Under the Antarctic Treaty, the seven states claiming territory there have agreed
with non-claimant parties to the Treaty to Bet aside the disputed territorial status of
Antarctica in order to carry out agreed-upon activities in the area.
While the Treaty is in force, no acts or activities taking place will 'constitute a basis for
asserting, supporting or denying a claim to territorial sovereignty in Antarctica', nor
may any new claim, or enlargement of an existing claim, be asserted.
Decisions are taken by consensus, which guarantees to both claimant andnon-claimant states that no activity or management practice prejudicial to theirposition on the territorial status of Antarctica will be approved. The Treaty provides
for on-site inspection at any time in any or all areas of Antarctica by designatednationals of the consultative parties.
Source: Based on Lee Kimball, 'Testing the Great Experiment' Environment,
September 1985.

93. For the ATS to remain viable into the next century, it will need to continue to evolve andadapt itself to deal with new issues and new circumstances. Although the Treaty could run
indefinitely, in 1991 any of the Consultative Parties may call for a general conference of thesignatory nations, to review its operation.

1. Guard Present Achievements

94. Although further change in the management status of Antarctica is inevitable, it is essentialthat such change not jeopardize the achievements of the Treaty System in the areas of peace,science, conservation, and environment. Antarctica has been an agreed zone of peace for nearly
30 years, free of all military activities, nuclear tests, and radioactive wastes. This is afoundation on which humanity must build.
95. Cooperation in scientific investigation has steadily expanded; it must be further
strengthened, especially concerning Antarctica's role in global atmospheric and oceanic
circulation and world climate. At the same time, more efforts should be made to secure fullparticipation in such research. Means must be found to expand consultation and participationand to extend the benefits of international cooperation in Antarctic science and technology tothe international community as a whole.

The most cruel environmental threat comes from the environmental movement
itself as we see the animal rights laws systematically destroy our way of life andviolate our right as aboriginal peoples to our traditions and values. Yet our people,
including the Arctic people, need development. The challenge is to find strategies
for development that meet the needs of the people and the environment.
Rhoda Inuksu
Inuit Indian
WCED Public Hearing
Ottawa, 26-27 May 1986

96. Several suggestions along these lines have been made. They include establishing a fund to
facilitate the participation of interested developing countries in Antarctic science, and inviting
more scientists from developing nations to join projects and visit scientific stations. Given the
costly technologies involved in Antarctic science, possibilities should be explored for sharing
Antarctic base and logistics capabilities with interested non-consultative states. The right toconsultative status could be extended to states participating in scientific activities on a joint
basis.
97. As Antarctic activities multiply, sound conservation will also require increased datacollection, monitoring, and environmental assessment. The interactive and cumulative effectsof these projects must be carefully reviewed and areas of unique scientific and environmental
value protected.

2. Anticipate Pressures for Mineral Development
98. Minerals of various kinds are known to exist in Antarctica, but the minerals talks havetriggered false assumptions about the imminence of their development. Even given the most
optimistic growth trends, it seems clear that more accessible sources will be developed
elsewhere long before Antarctica attracts major investment. Only two minerals have beenfound that might exist in concentrations suitable for exploitation - coal in the Transantarctic
Mountains and iron in the Prince Charles Mountains. Mining them would be a fool's venture./37
The costs would be prohibitive, and sufficient coal and iron can be found closer to the mainmarkets.
99. Circumstantial evidence suggests the existence of offshore oil and gas, but no deposits have
yet been discovered. The USSR, Japan, France, the United Kingdom, and the Federal Republic

of Germany have surveyed Antarctica's continental shelves. The surveys were of a scientificnature, but, coinciding as they did with the first serious discussions of a minerals regime, wereviewed by some observers as signalling commercial interests.
100. The 18 Consultative Parties are conducting negotiations among themselves to complete anagreed legal framework for determining the environmental acceptability of possible minerals
exploration and development in Antarctica and to govern any such activities./38 Treaty
members felt that it would be more difficult to agree on such a regime after actual finds havebeen made. The negotiations in many ways are an expression of the idea that prevention isbetter than cure, forethought preferable to afterthought.
101. Antarctica is an enormous continent where claims to sovereignty are in dispute and where
there are no agreed legal bases for issuing licences, leasing or selling mineral rights, orreceiving royalty payments. These delicate questions have now been raised and will not lie
silent until they have been answered within an internationally agreed framework. Until thesematters are resolved, and protection of the Antarctic environment is assured, it seems unlikelythat any nation or group of nations will be able to invest securely in developing the continent's
mineral resources./39
102. Given the absence of technologies tested in the ultimate extremities of Antarctic
conditions, the lack of agreement on procedures to assess and take account of the impacts ofany development, and the sparse data base, it could take a generation or more of dedicatedresearch and technological development to ensure that minerals exploitation would not
destroy the Antarctic's fragile ecosystem and its place in global environmental processes. Thus
it is important that no minerals activity takes place until these conditions have changed, andthen only in consonance with a regime that guarantees implementation of the most stringent
standards needed to protect the continent's environment and share the proceeds equitably.

3. Promote Evolution of Antarctic Treaty System
103. In the years ahead, activities in Antarctica will expand in kind and scale, as will thenumbers of participants in such activities. Further efforts must be made to ensure effective
management of those activities and an orderly expansion of participation in such management.
A variety of options are being discussed by the international community. More effective
management, including expanded participation, could evolve gradually through the existing
Treaty System. But given the extent of probable change and the lure of mineral wealth,however remote, such an approach could be too slow to retain political support. Another is thatthe above goals might be reached through the negotiation of an entirely new system. However,neither of these approaches would be free of difficulty. Yet another alternative would be tointensify efforts to make the Treaty System more universal, more open, and responsive toexpressions of concrete and legitimate concern and interest in Antarctica.

4. Establish a Means for More Effective Communication
104. As activities under the different treaties increase, so does the importance of coordination
among the advisory and decision making authorities responsible for various areas. Antarctica
may require the establishment of somewhat more formal institutions than have governed thefirst generation of activities, in order to foster better communication and coordination bothwithin and outside the Treaty System.

Some unique objects like Lake Baikal and Siberia, the Great Lakes in Africa andNorth America, are part of our global patrimony. They are some of the absolutevalues our planet possesses and their significance transcends any nationalboundaries. We should learn how to foresee their future and how to anticipate theafter-effects of large-scale engineering projects.
Since people's interests vary, it cannot be taken for granted that people will accept
scholars' recommendations and come to agreement on that score. And theiragreement is of special importance in situations where global problems are
involved and where the human race as a whole may be threatened with perils
generated by the absence of such agreement.
What is needed today is the moulding of a new ethos and new arrangements forbuilding an understanding among people, countries, and regions. And as a firststep we should produce new knowledge, concentrate our research efforts on
maintaining life on earth, and develop a system distributing and disseminatingknowledge and new moral criteria in a way that makes it available to billions ofpeople who inhabit our planet.
Academician N.N. Moiseev
USSR Academy of Sciences
WCED Public Hearing
Moscow, 8 Dec 1986

105. Antarctica is on the agenda of the UN General Assembly and will probably remain so.
Nothing will happen, however, unless the participants in the debate find terms of reference
that can command broad-based support and an agreed upon means to explore and give effectto improved management.
106. To focus on longer-term strategies to preserve and build on the achievements of theexisting Treaty System, nations must create the means to foster dialogue among politicians,
scientists, environmentalists, and industries from countries within and outside it. A good place
to start would be the development of closer working relationships between the parties to
Antarctic regimes and the international organizations within and outside the UN system thathave responsibilities for science and technology, conservation, and environmental
management.
107. National policy processes could also be structured to provide for dialogue with concerned
industries, public interest organizations, and expert advisors, perhaps through an Antarctic
advisory committee. The U.S. Government has been in the forefront of those countries
appointing industry and public interest advisors to its delegations to Consultative Parties
meetings. Australia, New Zealand, and Denmark have more recently followed suit.
108. Hammering out an internationally supported consensus on Antarctica is a huge task
requiting time and patience. And the lure of minerals increases with every new rumour of afind. Yet such a consensus is the only way to prevent a tragic plundering of the silent continent,
and to maintain Antarctica as a symbol of peaceful international cooperation andenvironmental protection.

Footnotes

1/ This section draws on F. Szekely, 'The Marine and Coastal Environment', prepared for
WCED, 1986; J. Beddington, 'Whaling', prepared for WCED, 1986; V. Sebek, 'Policy Paper on
Dumping', prepared for WCED, 1986.
2/ M.W. Holdgate et al., 'The Marine Environment', in The World Environment 1972-1982(Dublin: Tycooly International Publishing Ltd., 1982).
3/ See National Academy of Sciences, Oil in the Sea (Washington, DC: National Academy
Press, 1985); and OECD, Maritime Transport, 1984 (Paris: 1986).
4/ 'Scientists Closer to Identifying Cause of Antarctic Ozone Depletion', National Science
Foundation News, 20 October 1986; Ad Hoc Working Group of Legal and Technical Experts
for the Elaboration of a Protocol on the Control of Chlorofluorocarbons to the Vienna
Convention for the Protection of the Ozone Layer (Vienna Group), 'Report of the Second Partof the Workshop on the Control of Chlorofluorocarbons, Leesburg, USA, UNEP/WG.151/Background 2, Na.86-2184, UNEP, Nairobi, 15 October 1986; A.S. Miller and I.M. Mintzer,
The Sky Is the Limit: Strategies for Protecting the Ozone Layer, WRI Research
Report No. 3 (Washington, DC: World Resources Institute, 1986).
5/ GESAMP in a recent evaluation of the present state of the health of the oceans, 'The Healthof the Oceans', Regional Seas Reports and Studies No. 16, UNEP, Nairobi, 1982.
6/ M. Bertrand, 'Some Reflections on Reform of the United Nations', Joint Inspection Unit,
United Nations, Geneva, 1985.
7/ E.P. Eckholm, Down to Earth (London: Pluto Press, Ltd., 1982).
8/ J.A. Gulland and S. Garcia, 'Observed! Patterns in Multispecies Fisheries.' in R.M. May (ed.),
Exploitation of Marine Communities (Berlin: Springer-Verlag, 1984); FAO, 'Review of theState of World Fishery Resources', Fisheries Circular 710 (rev. 4), Rome, 1985.
9/ Dr J. Gulland, Marine Resources Assessment Group, Imperial College of Science andTechnology, London, personal communication, 20 January 1987.
10/ FAO, op. cit.
11/ IWC, Report of the IWC 36th Session, 1986 (Cambridge: forthcoming).
12/ 1965 Report on Great Lakes Water Quality: Great Lakes Water quality Board
Report to the International Joint Commission (Windsor, Ont.: IJC, 1985).
13/ IMO, 'The Provisions of the London Dumping Convention, 1972', and Decisions made by
the Consultative Meetings of Contracting Parties, 1975-1984.
14/ Dumping in the Convention means any deliberate disposal at sea of material andsubstances of any kind, form, or description from vessels, aircraft, platform, or other artificial
structures, as well as the disposal of vessels, aircraft, platforms, or other artificial structures
themselves.
15/ Twenty-five nations, led by Spain, Australia, and New Zealand, supported the resolution,
while Canada, France, South Africa, Switzerland, the United Kingdom, and the United States
voted against.
16/ U. Grimas and A. Svansson, Swedish Report on the Skagerak (Stockholm: National
Environmental Protection Board, 1985).

17/ United Nations, Final Act of the Third Conference on the Law of the Sea, Montego Bay,Jamaica, December 1982. In its final form, the Convention is composed of 17 main parts (320articles), dealing with the territorial sea and contiguous zone; straits used for internationalnavigation; archipelagic states; exclusive economic zone; continental shelf; high seas; regime ofislands; enclosed or semi-enclosed seas; right of access of land-locked states to and from thesea and freedom of transit; the area, protection, and preservation of the marine environment;
marine scientific research; development and transfer of marine technology; settlement ofdisputes; general provisions; and final provisions. There are nine annexes to the Convention:highly migratory species; Commission on the Limits of the Continental Shelf; basic conditionsof prospecting; exploration and exploitation; statute of the International Tribunal for the Lawof the Sea; Statute of the Enterprise; conciliations; arbitration and special arbitration andparticipation by international organizations. Under the Convention, coastal states may adopt
laws and regulations in the EEZ compatible with international rules and standards to combat
pollution from vessels.
18/ Among other things, declaration by the President of the United States, on 9 July 1982, and
L.O.S. Bulletin, July 1985, issued by the Office of the Special Representative of the Secretary
General for the Law of the Sea Convention.
19/ W. Sullivan, 'Eruption in Mexico Tied to Climate Shift Off Peru.' New York Times, 12
December 1982.
20/ R. Kerr, 'Taking Shots at Ozone Hole Theories,' Science, 14 November 1986.
21/ When the speed of a satellite matches the speed of the planet's rotation, the satellite is
stationary relative to particular places on the Earth. There is only one band or arc, directly
above the equator, where it is possible to achieve geosynchronous orbit.
22/ The general case for a regulatory regime and several alternative regimes are spelled out in
K.G. Gibbons, 'Orbital Saturation: The Necessity for International Regulation of
Geosynchronous Orbits', California Western International Law Journal, Winter 1979
23/ A summary of Third World views is found in H.J. Levin, 'Orbit and Spectrum Resource
Strategies: Third World Demands', Telecommunications Policy, June 1981.
24/ The allocation is done every 10 years at World Administrative Radio Conferences (WARCs),
the last of which was held in 1979. U.S. Congress, Office oœ Technology Assessment,
Radiofrequency Use and Management: Impacts from the World Administrative
Radio Conference of 1979 (Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1980).
25/ These conferences are described in G. Coding, Jr., 'The USA and the 1985 Space WARC',
and A.M. Rutkowski, 'Space WARC: The Stake of the Developing Countries, the GEO and the
WARC-ORB 85 Conference', Space Policy, August 1985.
26/ AIAA Technical Committee on Space Systems, Space Debris, July 1981.
27/ The United States has launched 23 spacecraft that relied at least in part upon nuclear
power sources: one source was a reactor; the rest were radioactive materials the decay heat ofwhich is converted into electricity (thermoelectric generators). By the end of 1986 the Soviet
Union had launched 31 nuclear-powered spacecraft, almost all of which contained fission
reactors, and it currently operates all of the reactor-powered satellites.
28/ 'Antarctic: A Continent in Transition', Fact Sheet Folio, International Institute forEnvironment and Development, London, 1986.

29/ In 1983, the Seventh Summit Conference of the Non-Aligned Countries included aparagraph on Antarctica in its communique. That same year, the question of Antarctica wasput on the agenda of the UN General Assembly. The debate resulted in a consensus resolution
asking for the elaboration of a special report by the Secretary General, which was debated by
the UN General Assembly at its 39th Session in November 1984. The consensus has not been
maintained. At subsequent General Assembly sessions, resolutions on Antarctica have been
passed over the objections of the parties to the Treaty, moat of whom chose not to participate
in the vote.
30/ L. Kimball, 'Testing the Great Experiment', Environment, September 1985.
31/ 'Antarctic Treaty', concluded 1 December 1959 and entered into force 23 June 1961,
summarized in M.J. Bowman and D.J. Harris (eds.), Multilateral Treaties: Index andCurrent Status (London: Butterworths, 1964).
32/ They include the original seven claimants: Argentina, Australia, Chile, France, New
Zealand, Norway, and the United Kingdom; an additional five who were original signatories:
Belgium, Japan, South Africa, USSR and the United States; plus six who have since acceded to
the Treaty and become full Consultative Parties: Poland (1977), the Federal Republic of
Germany (1981), Brazil and India (1983), and China and Uruguay (1985). Any country canaccede to the Treaty, becoming a full 'Consultative Party' providing, and during such time as, it
demonstrates an interest in the continent through the presence of a substantial scientificactivity. Seventeen other countries have acceded to the Treaty, but do not hold consultative
status. Since 1983, they have been invited to attend Antarctic Treaty meetings as observers.
33/ Both in their declaration of principles concerning the environment and in the text of theConvention on the Conservation of Antarctic Marine Living Resources, the Consultative
Parties insist that the primary responsibility for these matters lies with them by virtue of theirstatus as Consultative Parties, a proposition that Parties to the Convention who are not also
Parties to the Treaty are obliged to affirm.
34/ 'Agreed Measures for the Conservation of Antarctic Fauna and Flora', agreed 2-13 June
1984, reprinted in W.M. Bush (ed.), Antarctica and International Law (London: Oceana
Publications, 1982).
35/ 'Convention for the Conservation of Antarctic Seals', concluded 11 February 1972 andentered into force 11 March 1978, summarized in Bowman and Harris, op. cit.; 'Convention on
the Conservation of Antarctic Marine Living Resources', concluded 20 May 1980 and enteredinto force 7 April 1981, summarized in ibid. See also J.N. Barnes, 'The Emerging Convention on
the Conservation of Antarctic Marine Living Resources: An Attempt to Meet the New Realities
of Resource Exploitation in the Southern Ocean', in J.I. Charney (ed.), New Nationalism
and the Use of Common Spaces (Totowa, NJ: Allenheld Publishers, 1982).
36/ J.A. Beddington and R.M. May, 'The Harvesting oœ Interacting Species in a Natural
Ecosystem', Scientific American, November 1982.
37/ J.H. Zumborge, 'Mineral Resources and Geopolitics in Antarctica', American Scientist,
January-February 1979: G. Pontecorvo, 'The Economics of the Resources of Antarctica', inCharney, op. cit.
38/ L. Kimball, 'Unfreezing International Cooperation in Antarctica', Christian Science
Monitor, 1 August 1982.
39/ D. Shapley, 'Antarctic Up for Grabs', Science 82, November 1982.

Our Common Future, Chapter 11: Peace, Security, Development, andthe Environment

I. Environmental Stress as a Source of Conflict
II. Conflict as a Cause of Unsustainable Development
1. Nuclear War - Threat to Civilization
2. Other Weapons of Mass Destruction
3. The Costs of the 'Arms Culture'
4. World Armaments and the Growth of the 'Arms Culture'

III. Towards Security and Sustainable Development
1. Principles
2. Cooperative Management
3. The Importance of Early Warning
4. Disarmament and Security
1. Among the dangers facing the environment, the possibility of nuclear war, or military conflictof a lesser scale involving weapons of mass destruction, is undoubtedly the gravest. Certain
aspects of the issues of peace and security bear directly upon the concept of sustainable
development. Indeed, they are central to it.
2. Environmental stress is both a cause and an effect of political tension and military conflict./1
Nations have often fought to assert or resist control over raw materials, energy supplies, land,
river basins, sea passages, and other key environmental resources. Such conflicts are likely toincrease as these resources become scarcer and competition for them increases.
3. The environmental consequences of armed conflict would be most devastating in the case ofthermo-nuclear war. But there are damaging effects too from conventional, biological, andchemical weapons, as well as from the disruption of economic production and socialorganization in the wake of warfare and mass migration of refugees. But even where war isprevented, and where conflict is contained, a state of 'peace' might well entail the diversion into
armament production of vast resources that could, at least in part, be used to promotesustainable forms of development.
4. A number of factors affect the connection between environmental stress, poverty, andsecurity, such as inadequate development policies, adverse trends in the international
economy, inequities in multi-racial and multi-ethnic societies, and pressures of population

growth. These linkages among environment, development, and conflict are complex and, inmany cases, poorly understood. But a comprehensive approach to international and national
security must transcend the traditional emphasis on military power and armed competition
The real sources of insecurity also encompass unsustainable development, and its effects canbecome intertwined with traditional forms of conflict in a manner that can extend and deepen
the latter.

I. Environmental Stress as a Source of Conflict
5. Environmental stress is seldom the only cause of major conflicts within or among nations.
Nevertheless, they can arise from the marginalization of sectors of the population and fromensuing violence. This occurs when political processes are unable to handle the effects ofenvironmental stress resulting, for example, from erosion and desertification. Environmental
stress can thus be an important part of the web of causality associated with any conflict and canin some cases be catalytic.
6. Poverty, injustice, environmental degradation, and conflict interact in complex and potent
ways. One manifestation of growing concern to the international community is thephenomenon of 'environmental refugees'/2 The immediate cause of any mass movement ofrefugees may appear to be political upheaval and military violence. But the underlying causes
often include the deterioration of the natural resource base and its capacity to support the
population.
7. Events in the Horn of Africa are a case in point. In the early 1970s, drought and famine
struck the nation of Ethiopia. Yet it has been found that the hunger and human misery werecaused more by years of overuse of soils in the Ethiopian highlands and the resulting severe
erosion than by drought. A report commissioned by the Ethiopian Relief and Rehabilitation
Commission found: 'The primary cause of the famine was not drought of unprecedented
severity, but a combination of long-continued bad land use and steadily increased human andstock populations over decades'./3
8. Wars have always compelled people to leave their homes and their lands, to become
refugees. Also, the wars in our time have forced large numbers of people to leave their
homelands. In addition, we now have the phenomenon of environmental refugees. In 1984-85,
some 10 million Africans fled their homes, accounting for two-thirds of all refugees worldwide.
Their flight was not surprising in a region where 35 million suffered from famine. Many of themswarmed into cities. But many others moved across national boundaries, heightening
interstate tensions. Cote d'Ivoire, Ghana, and Nigeria have been generous in welcoming
refugees from the desertified Sahel. Tanzania, Zambia, and Zimbabwe have also been receiving
large numbers of refugees. Yet, the Cote d'Ivoire, for instance, which depends for much of its
export revenues on timber, is suffering rapid deforestation caused in part by land hunger, andone-third of landless people are immigrants. Agriculture destroys 4.5 times as much forestland
in the Cote d'Ivoire as logging does./4
9. Almost 1 million Haitian 'boat people', one-sixth of the entire populace, have fled that island
nation, an exodus fuelled in large part by environmental degradation. Haiti suffers some of theworld's most severe erosion, down to bedrock over large parts of some regions, so that evenfarmers with reasonable amounts of land cannot make a living. According to a US Agency forInternational Development (USAID) report, 'The social and economic effects of environmental
degradation are great, and contribute to the growing outflow from rural areas. Thousands ofrural Haitians leave their homes each year for Port au Prince, other Caribbean islands and theUnited States in search of employment and better living conditions./5 El Salvador, one of themost troubled nations of Central America, is also one of the most environmentally
impoverished, with some of the worst erosion rates in the region. The fundamental causes ofthe present conflict are as much environmental as political, stemming from problems ofresource distribution in an overcrowded land, according to a draft USAID environmental
profile of El Salvador./6

Today we cannot secure security for one state at the expense of the other.
Security can only be universal, but security cannot only be political or military, it
must be as well ecological, economical, and social. It must ensure the fulfilment of
the aspirations of humanity as a whole.
A. S. Timoshenko
Institute of State and Law, USSR Academy of Sciences
WCED Public Hearing
Moscow, 11 Dec 1986

10. South Africa reveals similar problems. The inhuman policy of apartheid is at the core of thestate of political conflict in Southern Africa. One of the many ways by which apartheid
institutionalizes both conflict and environmental degradation is by allocating, through the'homelands' system, 14 per cent of the nation's land to 72 per cent of the population./7 Youngworking-age blacks flee the overcultivated and overgrazed 'homelands' to seek work in thecities, where, on top of the squalor of overcrowded townships, they encounter extreme socioeconomic inequality and racial segregation. They fight back. Repression intensifies, and thevictims seek refuge over the border - whereupon the South African regime widens the conflict
into neighbouring states. The entire region is becoming caught up in the ensuing violence,
which could well ignite wider conflict drawing in major powers.
11. In addition to the interrelated problems of poverty, injustice, and environmental stress,
competition for non-renewable raw materials, land, or energy can create tension. It was thequest for raw materials that underlay much of the competition between colonial powers andthe subjugation of their holdings. Conflicts in the Middle East inevitably contain the seeds ofgreat power intervention and global conflagration, in part because of the international interestin oil.
12. As unsustainable forms of development push individual countries up against environmental
limits, major differences in environmental endowment among countries, or variations in stocks
of usable land and raw materials, could precipitate and exacerbate international tension andconflict. And competition for use of the global commons, such as ocean fisheries andAntarctica, or for use of more localized common resources in fixed supply, such as rivers andcoastal waters, could escalate to the level of international conflict and to threaten international
peace and security.
13. Global water use doubled between 1940 and 1980, and it is expected to double again by
2000, with two thirds of the projected water use going to agriculture. Yet 80 countries, with 40
per cent of the world's population, already suffer serious water shortages./8 There will be
growing competition for water for irrigation, industry, and domestic use. River water disputes
have already occurred in North America (the Rio Grande), South America (the Rio de la Plataand Parana), South and Southeast Asia (the Mekong and the Ganges), Africa (the Nile), and the
Middle East (the Jordan, Litani, and Orontes, as well as the Euphrates).

How can the world of nature and the community of peoples with their national
economies be harmonized? Posing the question this way suggests that the two areseparate. But not so. Humanity, the human species, exists and it supported within
the world of nature. And I mean that not figuratively but literally.
We are deep-air animals living inside an ecological system. We draw boundaries,
of course, on the ecosphere for national and regional purposes. But it is all of one
piece.
When, therefore, we optimistically declare that economic development andenvironmental maintenance can go along hand in hand, this qualifier must
immediately be added: only if the maintenance of the ecosphere is made the firstpriority. Economic development must be secondary, guided by strict ecologicalstandards. These fundamental ideas are far from being universally accepted.
Stanley Rowe
Saskatchewan Environmental Society
WCED Public Hearing
Ottawa, 26-27 May 1986

14. Fisheries, whether coastal or oceanic, are fundamental to the diets of many countries. For
some countries, fishing is a key economic sector, and overfishing poses immediate dangers toseveral national economies. In 1974 Iceland, largely dependent on its fishing industry, founditself embroiled with the United Kingdom in a 'cod war'. Similar tensions exist in the Japaneseand Korean seas and on both sides of the South Atlantic. The 1986 declaration of an exclusive
fishery zone around the Falkland/Malvinas Islands has further unsettled relations between
Britain and Argentina. Disputes over fishing rights in the South Pacific and the search for tunaby distant-water fleets led to increased competition for diplomatic and fisheries advantages by
the major powers in that region in 1986. Fisheries-related disputes may well become more
frequent as nations harvest fish stocks beyond the level of sustainable yields.
15. Environmental threats to security are now beginning to emerge on a global scale. The mostworrisome of these stem from the possible consequences of global warming caused by theatmospheric build-up of carbon dioxide and other gases./9 (See Chapter 7.) Any such climaticchange would quite probably be unequal in its effects, disrupting agricultural systems in areasthat provide a large proportion of the world's cereal harvests and perhaps triggering mass
population movements in areas where hunger is already endemic. Sea levels may rise during
the first half of the next century enough to radically change the boundaries between coastal
nations and to change the shapes and strategic importance of international waterways - effects
both likely to increase international tensions. The climatic and sea-level changes are also likely
to disrupt the breeding grounds of economically important fish species. Slowing, or adapting
to, global warming is becoming an essential task to reduce the risks of conflict.

II. Conflict as a Cause of Unsustainable Development
16. Arms competition and armed conflict create major obstacles to sustainable development.
They make huge claims on scarce material resources. They pre-empt human resources andwealth that could be used to combat the collapse of environmental support systems, thepoverty, and the underdevelopment that in combination contribute so much to contemporary
political insecurity. They may stimulate an ethos that is antagonistic towards cooperation
among nations whose ecological and economic interdependence requires them to overcome

national or ideological antipathies.
17. The existence of nuclear weapons and the destructive potential inherent in the velocity andintensity of modern conventional warfare have given rise to a new understanding of therequirements for security among nations. In the nuclear age nations can no longer obtainsecurity at each other's expense. They must seek security through cooperation, agreements,and mutual restraint; they must seek common security./10 Hence interdependence, which is so
fundamental in the realm of environment and economics, is a fact also in the sphere of arms
competition and military security. Interdependence has become a compelling fact, forcing
nations to reconcile their approach to 'security'.

1. Nuclear War - Threat to Civilization
18. The likely consequences of nuclear war make other threats, to the environment pale into
insignificance. Nuclear weapons represent a qualitatively new step in the development of
warfare. One thermo-nuclear bomb can have an explosive power greater than that of all the
explosives Used in wars since the invention of gunpowder. In addition to the destructive
effects of blast and heat, immensely magnified by these weapons, they introduce a new lethal
agent - ionizing radiation - that extends lethal effects over both space and tine.
19. In recent years, scientists have in addition called our attention to the prospect of 'nuclear
winter'. It has been most authoritatively explored by some 300 scientists from the UnitedStates, the USSR, and more than 30 other countries - working on a collaborative basis in somecases across ideological divides./11

All youth organizations believe that environmental issues stand high on the priority
list of global problems. However, their solution depends on the preservation ofpeace on our planet. The quest of solutions to ecological problems is impossible
without the curbing of the arms race, for the arms race absorbs tremendous
intellectual and material resources of mankind. The solution of ecological problems
also depends on the way of life of young people and their value orientation.
Dr. I.I. Russin
Moscow State University
WCED Public Hearing
Moscow, 8 Dec 1986

20. The theory contends that the smoke and dust ejected into the atmosphere by a nuclear war
could absorb enough solar radiation to remain aloft for some time, preventing sunlight fromreaching the surface of the earth, causing a widespread and prolonged cooling of land areas.
There would be severe repercussions for plant life generally and for agriculture in particular,
disrupting the production of food to sustain survivors of the war. Great uncertainties remain
about the scale and linkages determining environmental effects, but large-scale environmental
perturbations are considered probable. A nuclear war cannot be won, and must never befought. In the aftermath, there would be no difference between so called victor andvanquished. The nuclear-weapon states must spare no effort to conclude a verifiableagreement on banning all nuclear weapon tests.
21. The findings on nuclear winter are vitally important too for non-aligned nations,predominantly in the South, which are not parties to the East West conflict. They cannot

expect to avoid the potentially disastrous environmental consequences of nuclear war in thenorthern hemisphere. The aftermath of such a war would envelop the world. There is a danger
that nuclear weapons will spread to more and more countries and be used in what begins as alimited regional conflict. Beyond the five recognized nuclear-weapon states, at least six others
have a widely acknowledged potential nuclear weapons capability; a dozen others are not far
behind. The nuclear-weapon states cannot expect the non-nuclear-weapon states to abstain
from exercising the nuclear option in the absence of real progress on the road to nuclear
disarmament. It is imperative, therefore, that the probable consequences of nuclear war berecognized universally and that all states become involved in efforts to prevent the
proliferation - and above all the use of nuclear weapons.

2. Other Weapons of Mass Destruction
22. Other forms of war and other weapons of mass destruction have large scale effects or bothhuman societies and the human environment. Biological warfare could release new agents of
disease that would prove difficult to control. Recent advances in biotechnology multiply thepotentially lethal applications of such weapons. Likewise, the deliberate manipulation of theenvironment (for example, through artificial earthquakes and floods) would haveconsequences far beyond the borders of those involved in a conflict, were they ever used.
Chemical agents can seriously damage the environment, as demonstrated by the defoliants
used in South-east Asia. The dangerous and environmentally unpredictable consequences of
biological and chemical weapons have led to international agreements banning their use./12 But
there is need for further efforts to strengthen the regimes to which these agreements
contribute. In particular, the Geneva protocol prohibiting the use of chemical weapons should
be supplemented by agreements prohibiting the production and stockpiling of such weapons.
23. Military applications of new technologies now threaten lo make outer space a focus ofinternational competition and conflict. (See Chapter 10.) Most countries in the international
community see space as a global commons that should benefit humanity as a whole and bepreserved from military competition - a feeling reflected in the 1967 Outer Space Treaty, underwhich nations agreed not to deploy weapons of mass destruction there. Governments should
now agree on measures to prevent an arms race in space and stop it on Earth. Failing suchagreement, the arms race could expand, with dire consequences for humanity.

3. The Costs of the 'Arms Culture'
24. The absence of war is not peace; nor does it necessarily provide the conditions forsustainable development. Competitive arms races breed insecurity among nations throughspirals of reciprocal fears. Nations need to muster resources to combat environmental
degradation and mass poverty. By misdirecting scarce resources, arms races contribute further
to insecurity.
25. The coexistence of substantial military spending with unmet human needs has long evoked
concern. President Eisenhower, for example, observed at the end his term in office that 'every
gun that is made, every warship launched, every rocket fired represents, in the final analysis, atheft from those who hunger and are not fed, who are cold and are not clothed'./13
26. Global military spending in 1985 was well in excess of $900 billion./14 This was more than
the total income of the poorest half of humanity. It represented the equivalent of almost$1,000 for every one of the world's 1 billion poorest. Put another way, military spending
surpassed the combined gross national products of China, India, and the African countries

south of the Sahara. Moreover, global military spending has risen not only absolutely but
proportionately - from an estimated 4.7 per cent of world output in 1960 to over 6 per cent representing an increase of about 150 per cent in real (constant price) terms. Three-quarters ofcurrent expenditure is in the industrial world./15
27. The true cost of the arms race is the loss of what could have been produced instead withscarce capital, labour skills, and raw materials. The plants that manufacture weapons, thetransport of those weapons, and the mining of minerals for their production all place enormous
demands on energy and mineral resources and are a major contributor to pollution andenvironmental deterioration.
28. The distorting effects of the 'arms culture' are most striking in the deployment of scientificpersonnel. Half a million scientists are employed on weapons research world-wide, and theyaccount to: around half of all research and development expenditure./16 This exceeds the total
combined spending on developing technologies for new energy sources, improving humanhealth, raising agricultural productivity, and controlling pollution. Military research anddevelopment - $70-80 billion world-wide in 1984 - is growing at twice the rate of militaryspending as a whole./17 At the same time, there is a paucity of resources available formonitoring global climatic change, for surveying the ecosystems of disappearing rain forestsand spreading deserts, and for developing agricultural technologies appropriate to rainfed,
tropical agriculture.
29. Nations are seeking a new era of economic growth. The level of spending on arms
diminishes the prospects for such an era - especially one that emphasizes the more efficientuse of raw materials, energy, and skilled human resources. It also has a bearing, albeit indirect,
on the willingness of rich countries to provide development assistance to developing countries.
Clearly, there is no simple correspondence between reduced defence spending and increased
aid. There are other reasons aside from domestic resource constraints for a reluctance toexpand aid, and nations cannot wait for disarmament before devoting more resources toensuring sustainable development. Nonetheless, increased defence spending puts pressure onother budgetary items, and aid is an easy target, despite being a relatively small outlay for mostdonor countries./18
30. Although redeployment is clearly possible, resources currently employed in military
applications cannot be redeployed quickly or easily elsewhere in other sectors or othercountries. There are technical problems in achieving such a transformation, not least thecontribution made by military spending to jobs in economies with high unemployment. And
beyond the technical problems are questions of political will. Nonetheless, some countries China, Argentina, and Peru, for example - have recently shown that it is both technically andpolitically possible to make substantial shifts from military to civilian spending within a shorttime./19

4. World Armaments and the Growth of the 'Arms Culture'
31. Traditionally, nations have adhered to an 'arms culture'. They find themselves locked into
arms competitions fuelled among other things by powerful vested interests in the 'militaryindustrial complex' as well as in the armed forces themselves. Industrial nations account formost of the military expenditures and the production and transfer of arms in internationalsociety. However, the influence of this 'arms culture' is not confined to these nations. It ispresent also in the developing world, fostered both by the desire of many governments to seek
security through acquisition of arms and by a burgeoning world arms trade.

I have here listened to people speaking about financial crises, famine, pollution,and social injustice at various levels. As an ecologist, I cannot see any of thesequestions without linking them to the armaments question and to the nuclear issue.
Poverty generates tensions and conflicts, urban and rural violence. The indigenous
people are still awaiting solutions for their problems. All this depends on moneyand nevertheless we are spending money on our nuclear programmes. They saythat this has peaceful objectives. This is not true because precious money is being
spent on this.
The greatest crime: the death of hope, the death of all of the rights we all have,especially that of the young of believing in a future, the hope for a normal life, adifficult life but something that appears as a challenge to live it the best we can. We
have a right to this chance.
Cacilda Lanuza
Brazilian Ecological Movement
WCED Public Hearing
Sao Paulo, 28- 29 Oct 1985

32. Since the early 1960s, military spending in developing countries as a whole has increased
fivefold. Their share of total spending increased from under one-tenth to almost a quarter of afar larger total./20 Some developing countries, such as the Republic of Korea, have achieved ahigh level of development in spite of military spending. But systematic analysis suggests that
increases in military spending have had negative effects on economic performance./21
33. Moreover, defence expenditure is one of the most import-intensive of activities, usuallycreating a large secondary demand for imported spares, ammunition, servicing, training, andfuel. It has been estimated that 20 per cent of the external debt acquired by non-oil developing
countries in the decade to 1982 could be attributed to arms imports./22 And high levels of arms
spending motivated by a variety of reasons have undoubtedly contributed to the severity of thecrises of development in Africa, where military spending rose, in real terms, by 7.8 per cent per
annum between 1971 and 1982, and arms imports rose by 18.5 per cent./23 it should be noted inthis connection that in the case of the Frontline States they have been compelled to expand
their armed forces because of the threat from South Africa.
34. The development of an 'arms culture' in many developing countries presents particulardangers in the context of environmental and poverty-induced stresses. There are alreadynumerous simmering disputes in the Third World - over 40 unresolved - many arising fromboundaries defined in colonial times.
35. Sophisticated weapons can help convert the potential into actual conflict. According to the
UN Group of Governmental Experts on the Relationship Between Disarmament andDevelopment:
There can no longer be the slightest doubt that resource scarcities and ecologicalstresses constitute real and imminent threats to the future well-being of all people andnations. These challenges are fundamentally non-military and it is imperative that they
be addressed accordingly. If this is not recognized, ... there is a grave risk that thesituation will deteriorate to the point of crisis where, even with low probability ofsuccess, the use of force could be seen as a way to produce results quickly enough. Thisis far from being a remote possibility. In recent years, there has been a marked tendency

in international relations to use or to threaten to use military force in response to
non-military challenges to security./24
36. The situation in many developing countries presents particular dangers in the context ofenvironmental and poverty-induced stresses. Large-scale movements of refugees, competition
for scarce water and fertile lands, deposits of oil and raw materials, ill-defined boundaries, andso on all add to tensions and increase possibilities for conflict. The importation of armaments
by developing countries has increased also because of these real or potential conflicts. It issometimes encouraged by the arms manufacturers because of the important profits that canthemselves sustain the manufacture of arms in the exporting countries. The export of arms
have been evaluated at more than $35 billion annually. The arms trade is estimated to haveabsorbed over $300 billion over the last two decades, three-quarters in the form of sales todeveloping countries./25

III. Towards Security and Sustainable Development
1. Principles
37. The first step in creating a more satisfactory basis for managing the interrelationships
between security and sustainable development is to broaden our vision. Conflicts may arise not
only because of political and military threats to national sovereignty; they may derive also fromenvironmental degradation and the pre-emption of development options.
38. There are, of course, no military solutions to 'environmental insecurity'. And modern
warfare can itself create major internationally shared environmental hazards. Furthermore, theidea of national sovereignty, has been fundamentally modified by the fact of interdependence
in the realm of economics, environment, and security. The global commons cannot be managed
from any national centre: The nation state is insufficient to deal with threats to sharedecosystems. Threats to environmental security can only be dealt with by joint management andmultilateral procedures and mechanisms.

Environment must also be an approach to development. Environment is a social
justice issue and environment even is a peace and security issue. The barriers toachieving sustainable development are great, as might be expected in a major
historical transformation, but they are far from insurmountable.
We approach the millennium in a world in which global interdependence is thecentral reality, but where absolute poverty and environmental degradation cloud our
vision of a common future, and where a geopolitical climate dominated by nuclear
terrorism and increasing militarization saps the idealism of the young and the will to
dream in us all.
Ralph Torrie
On Behalf of Canadian Environment, Development and Peace Organizations
WCED Public Hearing
Ottawa, 26-27 May 1986

2. Cooperative Management
39. Already, environmental stresses are encouraging cooperation among nations, giving someindication of ways to proceed. Antarctica is subject to a far-reaching agreement that provides acollective approach to management. (See Chapter 10.) There are now various institutional
systems, often of complex and advanced form, to foster bilateral and regional cooperation formarine fisheries in order to regulate maximum sustainable yields and the distribution ofcatches. One of the main threats to the oceans the dumping of highly toxic wastes has so far
been managed by the London Dumping Convention. As for international water bodies,
impressive progress has been made by the bilateral U.S.-Canadian Commission for the Great
Lakes. The Mediterranean Convention, only one of the many such treaties concluded within
the context of the UNEP Regional Seas Programme, brings together coastal nations in an
arrangement to monitor and combat pollution at sea.
40. Some of the most challenging problems require cooperation among nations enjoying
different systems of government, or even subject to antagonistic relations. The 1986 Chernobyl
reactor accident in the Soviet Union has resulted in two agreements covering international
cooperation in cases of such accidents. In the future, the nation concerned will immediately
alert neighbouring states; they, in turn, will offer assistance at cost and free of liability./26 The
1979 Convention on Transboundary Pollution has provided a framework for monitoring andassessing damage from pollutants causing acid rain in Europe./27
41. Cooperation on environmental issues among developing countries has often been madedifficult by poor communications. Nonetheless, many now participate in UNEP's Regional Seas
Programme. The nations of the Sahel have formed a regional organization to deal withdesertification, and there ie emerging a body of successful case histories with respect to river
basin development: Witness the joint management programmes in Africa for the Senegal River
Basin.

Box 11-1
Spending on Military Versus Environmental Security
The world spent well over $900 billion on military purposes in 1985, more than $2.5
billion a day. The real cost is what the same resources might otherwise be used for:An Action Plan for Tropical Forests would cost $1.3 billion a year over thecourse of five years. This annual sum is the equivalent of half a day of military
expenditure worldwide.
Implementing the UN Action Plan for Desertification would cost $4.5 billion ayear during the last two decades of this century - the equivalent of less than twodays of military spending.
One of the greatest environmental hazards in the Third World is lack of cleanwater for household use, contributing to 80 per cent of disease. The UN Waterand Sanitation Decade, although given only a small fraction of support needed,would have cost $30 billion a year during the 1980s. This is the approximate
equivalent of 10 days of military spending.
To supply contraceptive materials to all women already motivated to use familyplanning would cost an additional $1 billion per year on top of the $2 billion
spent today. This additional $1 billion is the equivalent of 10 hours of militaryspending.
Sources: International Task Force, Tropical Forests: A Call for Action(Washington, DC: World Resources Institute, 1965); Dr M.K. Tolba, 'Desertificationand the Economics of Survival', UNEP Information 86/2. 25 March 1986; A.
Agarwal et al., Water, Sanitation and Health for All? (London: IIED/Earthscan,
1981); World Bank, World Development Report, 1984 (New York: Oxford
University Press, 1984).

3. The Importance of Early Warning
42. Since it is often uncertainty and insecurity that prompts international conflict, it is of theutmost importance that governments become aware of imminent environmental stress before
the damage actually threatens core national interests. Governments are usually not wellequipped with this kind of foresight.
43. It would be highly desirable if the appropriate international organizations, including
appropriate UN bodies and regional organizations, were to pool their resources and draw on
the most sophisticated surveillance technology available - to establish a reliable early wanting
system for environmental risks and conflict. (See Chapter 12.) such a system would monitor
indicators of risks and potential disputes, such as soil erosion, growth in regional migration,and uses of commons that are approaching the thresholds of sustainability. The organizations
would also offer their services for helping the respective countries to establish principles andinstitutions for joint management.

4. Disarmament and Security
44. Action to reduce environmental threats to security requires a redefinition of priorities,
nationally and globally. Such a redefinition could evolve through the widespread acceptance ofbroader forms of security assessment and embrace military, political, environmental, and othersources of conflict.
45. A broader approach to security assessment would no doubt find many cases in which
national, regional, and global security could be enhanced through expenditures quite small in
relation to the levels of military spending. Four of the most urgent global environmental
requirements - relating to tropical forests, water, desertification, and population - could be
funded with the equivalent of less than one month's global military spending. (See Box 11-1.) It
is difficult to shift budgetary resources, but individual governments have already shown thattransformation is possible, given political will. In some of the countries most seriously affectedby environmental stress and poverty, the sums required to alleviate these conditions are small
in relation to what is now spent on disaster relief, let alone military activities./28 However,these sums must be spent quickly, before deteriorating conditions require much larger
expenditures.
46. But in terms of the aggregate resources involved in arms spending and the potential throat
to the environment from war, the greatest need is to improve relations among those major
powers capable of deploying weapons of mass destruction. This is needed to achieve
agreement on tighter control over the proliferation and testing of various types of weapons ofmass destruction nuclear and non-nuclear including those that have environmental
implications./29
47. A substantial number of agreements already show the potential for negotiated, multilateralsolutions. President Reagan and General Secretary Gorbachev made substantial progress
towards strategic arms agreement, which must be carried forward to reverse the alarming
trends of several decades. Apparently, the two major powers came close to agreeing on
intermediate range systems in Europe, to be followed by agreements banning forward
deployment of shorter range systems. It would alleviate significantly the pressures exercisedby nuclear weapons on the security order in Europe. In addition, they are moving towards, a 50
per cent reduction agreement on strategic systems, followed by total elimination agreements.
They also need to agree on effective measures to prevent an arms race in space. Successful
negotiations would contribute significantly to stemming the spread of nuclear weapons as the
major nuclear-weapon states would deliver on their promise to build down their nuclear
arsenals. Such progress is consistent with the basic needs of our times and the right of
humanity to have the spectre of nuclear destruction removed from the face of the Earth.
48. Nations must turn away from the destructive logic of an 'arms culture' and focus instead or
their common future. The level of armaments and the destruction they could bring about bearno relation to the political conflict that triggered the arms competition in the first place.
Nations must not become prisoners of their own arms race. They must face the common
danger inherent in the weapon of the nuclear age. They must face the common challenge ofproviding for sustainable development and act in concert to remove the growing environmental
sources of conflict.

Footnotes

1/ For some preliminary analyses along these lines, see L. Timberlake and J. Tinker,'Environment and Conflict: Links Between Ecological Decay, Environmental Bankruptcy and
Political and Military Instability, Earthscan Briefing Document. Earthscan, London, 1964; N.
Myers, 'The Environmental Dimension to Security Issues', The Environmentalist, Winter1986; R.H. Ullman, 'Redefining Security', International Security, Summer 1983; and A.H,
Westing (ed.), Global Resources and International Conflict (Oxford: Oxford University
Press, 1986).
2/ E. El-Hinnawi, Environmental Refugees (Nairobi: UNEP, 1985).
3/ Relief and Rehabilitation Commission, 'Drought and Rehabilitation in Wollo and Tigrai',
Addis Ababa, 1975.
4/ L. Timberlake, Africa in Crisis (London: International Institute for Environment andDevelopment/Earthscan, 1985).
5/ Project Paper for Haiti Agroforestry Outreach Project (Project 521-0122), U.S. Agency forInternational Development, Washington, DC, 1981.
6/ National Park Service/U.S. Man and the Biosphere Secretariat, 'Draft Environmental Profile
of El Salvador', Bureau of Science and Technology, U.S. Agency for International Development,
Washington, DC, April 1982. See also T.P. Anderson, The War of the Dispossessed:
Honduras and El Salvador 1969 (Lincoln, Neb.: University of Nebraska Press, 1981); W.H.
Durham, Scarcity and Survival in Central America: Ecological Origins of the
Soccer War (Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1979).
7/ D. Smith, 'Update: Apartheid in South Africa', Queen Mary College, London, 1984.
8/ M. Falkenmark, 'New Ecological Approach to the Water Cycle: Ticket to the Future',
Ambio, Vol. 13, No. 3, 1964; S. Postel, Water: Rethinking Management in an Age of
Scarcity, Worldwatch Paper 62 (Washington, DC: WorldWatch Institute, 1984).
9/ B. Bolin et al., The Greenhouse Effect: Climatic Change and Ecosystems(Chichester, UK: John Wiley & Sons, 1986); National Research Council, Changing Climate(Washington, DC: National Academy Press, 1983); S. Seidel and D. Keyes, Can We Delay a
Greenhouse Warming? (Washington, DC: U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1983).
10/ Independent Commission on Disarmament and Security Issues under the Chairmanship of
Olof Palme, Common Security (London: Pan Books, 1982).
11/ SCOPE, Environmental Consequences of Nuclear War (Chichester, UK: John Wiley& Sons, 1985). Some of the other major studies on the nuclear winter scenario are R. Turco etal., 'Nuclear Winter: Global Consequences of Multiple Nuclear Explosions', Science, 23
December 1983; P. Ehrlich et al., The Cold and the Dark: The World After Nuclear War(New York: W.W. Norton, 1984); M.A. Hartwell and T.C. Hutchinson, Environmental
Consequences of Nuclear War, Volume II: Ecological and Agricultural Effects(Chichester, UK: John Wiley & Sons, 1985); National Research Council, The Effects on the
Atmosphere of a Major Nuclear Exchange (Washington, DC: National Academy Press,
1985); A. Ginsberg et al., 'Global Consequences of a Nuclear War: A Review of Recent Soviet
Studies', World Armaments and Disarmament, SIPRI Yearbook 1985 (London:
Taylor & Francis, 1985); A.B. Pittock et al., Environmental Consequences of Nuclear
War, Volume I: Physical and Atmospheric Effects (Chichester, UK: John Wiley & Sons,
1986); S.L. Thompson and S.H. Schneider, 'Nuclear Winter Reappraised', Foreign Affairs,
Summer 1986. The effects of nuclear war are explored in Y.I. Chazor et al., The Danger ofNuclear War: Soviet Physicians' Viewpoint (Moscow: Novosti Press, 1982); S. Glasstone
and P.J. Dolan (eds.), The Effects of Nuclear Weapons, 3rd ed. (Washington, DC: U.S.
Government Printing office, 1977); National Academy of Sciences, Long-term Worldwide
Effects of Multiple Nuclear Weapon Detonations (Washington, DC: National Academy
Press, 1975); Office of Technology Assessment, U.S. Congress, The Effects of Nuclear War(Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1980); UN, Comprehensive Study of
Nuclear Weapons (A/35/392) (New York: 1980); World Health Organization, Effects of
Nuclear War on Health and Health Services (Geneva: 1984).
12/ Outright banning of particularly lethal weapons has its origin in the St. Petersburg
Declaration banning the use of 'dum-dum bullets' and the Hague war rules outlining the use of
shaped charges (1899). Also relevant are the Geneva Protocol banning the military use ofchemical and bacteriological weapons (1925); the Convention on the Prohibition of theDevelopment, Production, and Stockpiling of Bacteriological and Toxin Weapons (1975); andthe Convention on the Prohibition of Military or Any Other Hostile Use of Environmental
Modification Techniques (1978).
13/ The Eisenhower quote is taken from his final, valedictory address (Speech to the American
Society of Newspaper Editors Washington, DC, April, 1953) which also includes the morefamous reference to the 'military-industrial complex'.
14/ Estimates from R.L. Sivard, World Military and Social Expenditures (Washington,
DC: World Priorities, Inc., 1986). More details in M. Brzoska et al., 'World Military Expenditure
and Arms Production', SIPRI Yearbook, op. cit. The figure of total military spending isnecessarily approximate because of the enormous problems of aggregating spending indifferent - and often non-convertible - currencies and from countries with different statisticalconventions. According to Sivard, total military spending in 1983 was $728 billion. On the basisof trends and preliminary data, a figure of at least $900 billion and possibly $1,000 billion incurrent prices and exchange rates seems appropriate for 1986.
15/ Sivard, 1986 edition, op. cit., SIPRI Yearbook, op. cit.
16/ Sivard, 1986 edition, op. cit., SIPRI Yearbook, op. cit.
17/ M. Ackland-Hood, 'Military Research and Development Expenditure', SIPRI Yearbook,
op. cit.
18/ According to calculations based on OECD Development Assistance Committee data, which
are not universally accepted, together with Sivard, total non-military development aid
measured in net concessional flows from industrial to developing countries represents roughly
5 per cent of the amount spent by all industrial countries on armaments. For the United States,
foreign aid accounts for 4 per cent of armaments spending, and for the USSR, 1.5 per cent. In
Austria, Denmark, the Netherlands, Norway, and Sweden, by contrast, the proportion is close
to 30 per cent, and it is over 10 per cent for Australia, Belgium, Canada, France, FRG, andSwitzerland,
19/ According to L.H. Brown et al., in State of the World 1986 (London: W.W. Norton, 1986),
China in 1972 spent 14 per cent of its gross national product (GNP) on military purposes, one of
the highest levels in the world. Since 1970 (except for 1979), the government has systematicallyreduced this until by 1985 it amounted to only 7.5 per cent In mid 1985 the government
announced it would cut the armed forces to 3.2 million, a drop of 24 per cent. In Argentina, by
1984 new President Raul Alfonsin had cut arms outlays to half their peak level of 1980 (nearly 4
per cent of GNP) by reordering priorities and shifting resources to social programmes.

Peruvian President Alan Garcia Perez, on taking office in mid-1985, announced he would
reduce military outlays, which then totalled 5 per cent of GNP, or one-quarter of the federal
budget. First he cancelled half the order for 26 French Mirage fighter planes.
20/ Over 1960-81, Third World military expenditures grew by some 7 per cent per year, as
compared with 3.7 per cent in the industrial world. In 1960, Third World military expenditures
accounted for less than one-tenth of the global total 1981 for more than one fifth of a far larger
total. R.L. Sivard, World Military and Social Expenditures (Washington, DC: World
Priorities, Inc., 198b).
21/ L. Taylor, 'Military Economics in the Third World', prepared for The Independent
Commission on Disarmament and Security Issues, 1981.
22/ R. Tullberg, 'Military Related Debt in Non-Oil Developing Countries', SIPRI Yearbook,
op. cit.
23/ R. Luckham, 'Militarization in Africa', SIPRI Yearbook, op. cit.
24/ I. Thorsson et al., Relationship Between Disarmament and Development,
Disarmament Study Review No. 5 (A/36/536) (New York: UN Department of Political andSecurity Council Affairs, 1982).
25/ Arms Export from L.R. Brown et al., op. cit, based on U.S. Arms Control and Disarmament
Agency; estimate of cumulative spending on the arine trade in Sivard, 1985 edition, op. cit.
26/ 'Negotiations on Agreement Concerning Nuclear Safety Reach Consensus', press release(PR8-86/17), IAEA, 15 August 1986.
27/ 'Convention on Long-Range Transboundary Air Pollution' concluded 13 November 1979and entered into force 16 March 1983, summarized in M.J. Bowman and D.J. Harris (eds.),
Multilateral Treaties: Index and Current Status (London: Butterworths, 1984).
28/ The amount that the United Nations has recently budgeted for Ethiopia to cater foranti-erosion, reforestation, and related measures under its Anti-Desertification Plan suggeststhat no more than $50 million a year would have been required to counter much of thehighlands' problem if the investment had been undertaken in due time. By contrast, theamount required to counter Ethiopia's famine during 1985 amounted to $500 million for relief
measures alone. Between 1976 and 1980 Ethiopia spent an average of $225 million a year on
military activities.
29/ Among international treaties specifically designed to protect the global commons frommilitarization are the Antarctic Treaty (1959); the Moscow Treaty Banning Nuclear Weapons
Tests in the Atmosphere, in Outer Space and Under Water (1963); the Outer Space Treaty(1967); the Treaty of Tlatelolco (1967); the Treaty on the Non Proliferation of Nuclear
Weapons (1968); and the Sea Bed Treaty (1971).

Our Common Future, Chapter 12: Towards Common Action:
Proposals For institutional and Legal Change

I. The Challenge for Institutional and Legal Change
1. Shifting the Focus to the Policy Sources
2. New Imperatives for International Cooperation

II. Proposals for Institutional and Legal Change
1. Getting at the Sources
1.1 National Policies and Institutions
1.2 Regional and Interregional Action
1.3 Global Institutions and Programmes

2. Dealing With the Effects
2.1 National Environmental Protection and Natural
Resources Management Agencies
2.2 Strengthen the United Nations Environment Programme
2.2.1 Focus on Environmental Protection Issues
2.2.2 Priority to Global Environmental Assessment and Reporting
2.2.3 Strengthen International Environmental Cooperation
2.2.4. Increase the Revenue and Focus of the Environment Fund

3. Assessing Global Risks
4. Making Informed Choices
4.1 Increase the Role of the Scientific Community and
Non-Governmental Organizations
4.2 Increase Cooperation with Industry

5. Providing the Legal Means
5.1 Recognizing Rights and Responsibilities
5.2 A Universal Declaration and a Convention on
Environmental Protection and Sustainable Development
5.3 Strengthen and Extend Existing International
Conventions and Agreements
5.4 Avoiding and Settling Environmental Disputes

6. Investing in Our Future
6.1 National Action
6.2 International Action
6.2.1 Reorienting Multilateral Financial Institutions
6.2.2 Reorienting Bilateral Aid Agencies
6.2.3 New Sources of Revenue and Automatic Financing

III. A Call for Action
1. In the middle or the 20th century, we saw our planet from space for the first time.
Historians may eventually find that this vision had a greater impact on thought than did theCopernican revolution of the 16th century, which upset humans' self-image by revealing that
the Earth is not the centre of the universe. From space, we see a small and fragile balldominated not by human activity and edifice but by a pattern of clouds, oceans, greenery, andsoils. Humanity's inability to fit its activities into that pattern is changing planetary systems
fundamentally. Many such changes are accompanied by life-threatening hazards, fromenvironmental degradation to nuclear destruction. These new realities, from which there is no
escape, must be recognized - and managed.
2. The issues we have raised in this report are inevitably of far reaching importance to thequality of life on earth - indeed to life itself. We have tried to show how human survival andwell-being could depend on success in elevating sustainable development to a global ethic. In
doing so, we have called for such major efforts as greater willingness and cooperation tocombat international poverty, to maintain peace and enhance security world-wide, and to
manage the global commons. We have called for national and international action in respect of
population, food, plant and animal species, energy, industry, and urban settlements. The
previous chapters have described the policy directions required.
3. The onus for action lies with no one group of nations. Developing countries face thechallenges of desertification, deforestation, and pollution, and endure most of the poverty
associated with environmental degradation. The entire human family of nations would sufferfrom the disappearance of rain forests in the tropics, the loss of plant and animal species, andchanges in rainfall patterns. Industrial nations face the challenges of toxic chemicals, toxic
wastes, and acidification. All nations may suffer from the releases by industrialized countriesof carbon dioxide and of gases that react with the ozone layer, and from any future war foughtwith the nuclear arsenals controlled by those nations. All nations will also have a role to play insecuring peace, in changing trends, and in righting an international economic system that
increases rather than decreases inequality, that increases rather than decreases numbers ofpoor and hungry.

In the case of environmental problems, it is obvious that the problems cannot be
solved by one group, one group working in separation. You cannot say because
people are dying of poisoning, it is the Ministry of Health that will solve it. Or tosay because it comes from factories, it is the Ministry of Industry. That is
impossible.
I think the problems need a more holistic approach. The United Nations
Organization, as a professional organization, has developed this fragmentation. It
started automatically with no bad intention at all. But at the same time, the member
countries requested and national bodies also requested entry points in recipient
countries. So WHO corresponds with the Ministry of Health, UNESCO
corresponds with the Ministry of Education, FAO corresponds with the Ministry ofAgriculture the fragmentation is getting worse.
Speaker from the floor
Government Agency
WCED Public Hearing
Jakarta, 26 March 1985

4. The time has come to break out of past patterns. Attempts to maintain social and ecologicalstability through old approaches to development and environmental protection will increase
instability. Security must be sought through change. The Commission has noted a number ofactions that must be taken to reduce risks to survival and to put future development on paths
that are sustainable.
5. Without such reorientation of attitudes and emphasis, little can be achieved. We have noillusions about 'quick-fix' solutions. We have tried to point out some pathways to the future.
But there is no substitute for the journey itself, and there is no alternative to the process bywhich we retain a capacity to respond to the experience it provides. We believe this to holdtrue in all the areas covered in this report. But the policy changes we have suggested haveinstitutional implications, and it is to these we now turn emphasizing that they are acomplement to, not a substitute for, the wider policy changes for which we call. Nor do they
represent definitive solutions, but rather first steps in what will be a continuing process.
6. In what follows we put forward, in the first place, what are essentially conceptual guidelines
for institutions at the national level. We recognize that there are large differences among
countries in respect of population size, resources, income level, management capacity, andinstitutional traditions, only governments themselves can formulate the changes they should
make. Moreover, the tools for monitoring and evaluating sustainable development are
rudimentary and require further refinement.
7. We also address, in more specific terms, the question of international institutions. The
preceding chapters have major implications for international cooperation and reforms, both

economic and legal. The international agencies clearly have an important role in making thesechanges effective, and we endeavour to set out the institutional implications, especially as
regards the United Nations system.

I. The Challenge for Institutional and Legal Change
1. Shifting the Focus to the Policy Sources
8. The next few decades are crucial for the future of humanity. Pressures on the planet are now
unprecedented and are accelerating at rates and scales new to human experience: a doublingof global population in a few decades, with most of the growth in cities; a five- to tenfold
increase in economic activity in less than half a century; and the resulting pressures for growthand changes in agricultural, energy, and industrial systems. Opportunities for moresustainable forms of growth and development are also growing. New technologies andpotentially unlimited access to information offer great promise.
9. Each area of change represents a formidable challenge in its own right, but the fundamental
challenge stems from their systemic character. They lock together environment anddevelopment, once thought separate; they lock together 'sectors' such as industry andagriculture; and they lock countries together as the effects of national policies and actions spillover national borders. Separate policies and institutions can no longer cope effectively withthese interlocked issues. Nor can nations, acting unilaterally.
10. The integrated and interdependent nature of the new challenges and issues contrasts
sharply with the nature of the institutions that exist today. These institutions tend to be
independent, fragmented, and working to relatively narrow mandates with closed decision
processes. Those responsible for managing natural resources and protecting the environment
are institutionally separated from those responsible for managing the economy. The real worldof interlocked economic and ecological systems will not change; the policies and institutions
concerned must.
11. This new awareness requires major shifts in the way governments and individuals approachissues of environment, development, and international cooperation. Approaches toenvironment policy can be broadly characterized in two ways. One, characterized as the'standard agenda', reflects an approach to environmental policy, laws, and institutions that
focuses on environmental effects. The second reflects an approach concentrating on thepolicies that are the sources of those effects./1 These two approaches represent distinctively
different ways of looking both at the issues and at the institutions to manage them.
12. The effects-oriented 'standard agenda' has tended to predominate as a result of growing
concerns about the dramatic decline in environmental quality that the industrialized world
suffered during the 1950s and 1960s. New environmental protection and resource
management agencies were added on to the existing institutional structures, and given mainly
scientific staffs./2
13. These environment agencies have registered some notable successes in improving
environmental quality during the past two decades./3 They have secured significant gains inmonitoring and research and in defining and understanding the issues in scientific andtechnical terms. They have raised public awareness, nationally and internationally.
Environmental laws have induced innovation and the development of new control
technologies, processes, and products in most industries, reducing the resource content ofgrowth./4

14. However, most of these agencies have been confined by their own mandates to focusing
almost exclusively on the effects. Today, the sources of these effects must be tackled. Whilethese existing environmental protection policies and agencies must be maintained and evenstrengthened, governments now need to take a much broader view of environmental problems
and policies.
15. Central agencies and major sectoral ministries play key roles in national decision making.
These agencies have the greatest influence on the form, character, and distribution of the
impacts of economic activity on the environmental resource base. It is these agencies, throughtheir policies and budgets, that determine whether the environmental resource base isenhanced or degraded and whether the planet will be able to support human and economic
growth and change into the next century.
16. The mandated goals of these agencies include increasing investment, employment, food,energy, and other economic and social goods. Most have no mandate to concern themselveswith sustaining the environmental resource capital on which these goals depend. Those withsuch mandates are usually grouped in separate environment agencies or, sometimes, in minor
units within sectoral agencies. In either case, they usually learn of new initiatives in economic
and trade policy, or in energy and agricultural policy, or of new tax measures that will have asevere impact on resources, long after the effective decisions have been taken. Even if they
were to learn earlier, most lack the authority to ensure that a given policy is implemented.
17. Environmental protection and sustainable development must be an integral part of themandates of all agencies of governments, of international organizations, and of major privatesector institutions. These must be made responsible and accountable for ensuring that theirpolicies, programmes, and budgets encourage and support activities that are economically andecologically sustainable both in the short and longer terms.They must be given a mandate topursue their traditional goals in such a way that those goals are reinforced by a steadyenhancement of the environmental resource base of their own national community and of thesmall planet we all share.

2. New Imperatives for International Cooperation
18. National boundaries have become so porous that traditional distinctions between local,
national, and international issues have become blurred. Policies formerly considered to be
exclusively matters of 'national concern' now have an impact on the ecological bases of othernations' development and survival. Conversely, the growing reach of some nations' policies economic, trade, monetary, and most sectoral policies - into the 'sovereign' territory of othernations limits the affected nations' options in devising national solutions to their 'own'
problems. This fast-changing context for national action has introduced new imperatives andnew opportunities for international cooperation.
19. The international legal framework must also be significantly strengthened in support ofsustainable development. Although international law related to environment has evolved
rapidly since the 1972 Stockholm Conference, major gaps and deficiencies must still beovercome as part of the transition to sustainable development. Much of the evidence andconclusions presented in earlier chapters of this report calls into question not just thedesirability but even the feasibility of maintaining an international system that cannot prevent
one or several states from damaging the ecological basis for development and even theprospects for survival of any other or even all other states.

20. However, just at the time when nations need increased international cooperation, the will
to cooperate has sharply declined. By the mid-1980s, multilateral institutions were undersiege for many, and often contradictory, reasons. The UN system has come under increasing
attack for either proposing to do too much or, more frequently, for apparently doing too little.
Conflicting national interests have blocked significant institutional reforms and have increased
the need for fundamental change./5 By the mid-1980s, funds for many internationalorganizations had levelled off or declined in both relative and absolute terms.
21. Bilateral development assistance has declined as a percentage of GNP in many industrial
countries, falling even further below the targets proposed in the early 1970s./6 The benefits
and effectiveness of aid have come under serious question, in part because of criticism basedon environmental considerations./7 Yet, sustainable development creates the need for evengreater international aid and cooperation.
22. Nations must now confront a growing number, frequency, and scale of crises. A major
reorientation is needed in many policies and institutional arrangements at the international aswell as national level. The time has come to break away. Dismal scenarios of mounting
destruction of national and global potential for development - indeed, of the Earth's capacity
to support life - are not inescapable destiny. One of the most hopeful characteristics of thechanges the world is racing through is that invariably they reflect great opportunities forsustainable development, providing that institutional arrangements permit sustainable policy
options to be elaborated, considered, and implemented.

II. Proposals for Institutional and Legal Change
23. The ability to choose policy paths that are sustainable requires that the ecologicaldimensions of policy be considered at the same time as the economic, trade, energy,
agricultural, industrial, and other dimensions - on the same agendas and in the same national
and international institutions. That is the chief institutional challenge of the 1990s.
24. There are significant proposals for institutional and legal change in previous chapters of
our report. The Commission's proposals for institutional and legal change at the national,
regional, and international levels are embodied in six priority areas:
getting at the sources,
dealing with the effects,
assessing global risks,
making informed choices,
providing the legal means, andinvesting in our future.
Together, these priorities represent the main directions for institutional and legal change
needed to make the transition to sustainable development. Concerted action is needed under
all six.

1. Getting at the Sources

1.1 National Policies and Institutions
25. The way countries achieve sustainable development will vary among the many different
political and economic systems around the world. Governments differ greatly in their capacity
to monitor and evaluate sustainable development, and many will need assistance. Several
features should be common to most countries.
26. Sustainable development objectives should be incorporated in the terms of reference of
those cabinet and legislative committees dealing with national economic policy and planning
as well as those dealing with key sectoral and international policies. As an extension of this,the major central economic and sectoral agencies of governments should now be made directly
responsible and fully accountable for ensuring that their policies, programmes, and budgets
support development that is ecologically as well as economically sustainable.
27. Where resources and data permit, an annual report and an audit on changes inenvironmental quality and in the stock of the nation's environmental resource assets areneeded to complement the traditional annual fiscal budget and economic development
plans./8 These are essential to obtain an accurate picture of the true health and wealth of thenational economy, and to assess progress towards sustainable development./9

All governments should develop a 'foreign policy for the environment' as one
major way of improving the international coordination of national environmental
policies.
But in the long-term perspective, and here I think the World Commission could
have an important message, I think that it will be politically sound and wise to get
support from the NGOs to prepare for changes that have to take place anyway
sooner or later. So I think it would be politically wise to look into that in a muchbroader way than what has been done so far.
Mats Segnestam
Swedish Society for the Conservation of Nature
WCED Public Hearing
Oslo, 24-25 June 1985

28. Governments who have not done so should consider developing a 'foreign policy for theenvironment'./10 A nation's foreign policy needs to reflect the fact that its policies have a
growing impact on the environmental resource base of other nations and the commons, just as
the policies of other nations have an impact on its own. This is true of certain energy,
agricultural, and other sectoral policies discussed in this report, as well as certain foreign
investment, trade, and development assistance policies and those concerning the import orexport of hazardous chemicals, wastes, and technology.

1.2 Regional and Interregional Action
29. The existing regional and subregional organisations within and outside the UN systemneed to be strengthened and made responsible and accountable for ensuring that theirprogrammes and budgets encourage and support sustainable development policies andpractices. In some areas, however, especially among developing countries, new regional andsubregional arrangements will be needed to deal with transboundary environmental resource
issues.
30. Some countries already enjoy comparatively well developed bilateral and regional
structures, although many of them lack the mandate and support required to carry out thegreatly expanded role they must assume in the future. These include many specialized
bilateral organizations such as the Canada/USA International Joint Commission; subregional
agencies in Europe such as the different Commissions for the Rhine River, the Danube River,and the Baltic Sea; and organizations such as the CMEA, OECD, and EEC. These bodies
provide member countries with a strong foundation on which to build. Although most of them
have effective programmes for international cooperation on environmental protection andnatural resources management, these programmes will need to be strengthened and adapted
to new priorities. The regional organizations in particular need to do more to integrate
environment fully in their macroeconomic, trade, energy, and other sectoral programmes.
31. Similar organizations among developing countries should be strengthened, particularly atbilateral and subregional levels. Organizations such as the Organization of African Unity, theSouthern Africa Development Coordination Conference, the Gulf Cooperation Council, theArab League, the Organisation of American States, the Association of South East Asian
Nations, and the South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation could work together todevelop contingency plans and the capacity to respond quickly to critical situations and issues.
They need in such bodies to develop comparable economic and environmental statistics,
base-line quantity and quality surveys of shared resources, and early-warning capabilities toreduce environment and development hazards. They could develop and apply in concert basic
common principles and guidelines concerning environmental protection and resource use,
particularly with respect to foreign trade and investment. In this respect, developing countries
have much to gain through sharing their common experiences and taking common action.
32. A new focus on the sustainable use and management of transboundary ecological zones,
systems, and resources is also needed. There are, for example, over 200 distinct biogeographic
zones in the world. Moreover, most non-island countries in the world share at least one
international river basin. The entire national territories of nearly one-quarter of thosecountries is part of an international river, basin. Yet over one-third of the 200 majorinternational river basins in the world are not covered by any international agreement, andfewer than 30 have any cooperative institutional arrangements. These gaps are particularly
acute in Africa, Asia, and Latin America, which together have 144 international river basins./11
33. Governments, directly and through UNEP and IUCN, should support the development ofregional and subregional cooperative arrangements for the protection and sustained use oftransboundary ecological systems with joint action programmes to combat common problems
such as desertification and acidification.

1.3 Global Institutions and Programmes
34. At the global level, an extensive institutional capacity exists that could be redirected
towards sustainable development. The United Nations, as the only intergovernmentalorganization with universal membership, should clearly be the locus for new institutional
initiatives of a global character.
35. Although the funds flowing to developing countries through UN programmes represents arelatively small portion of total ODA flows, the UN can and should be a source of significant
leadership in the transition to sustainable development and in support of developing countries
in effecting this transition. Under existing conditions the UN system's influence is often
fragmented and less effective than it might be because of the independent character of thespecialized agencies and endemic weaknesses of coordination. However, recent moves
towards organizational reform and greater economy and efficiency could improve the capacityof the UN to provide this leadership, and should include sustainable development as animportant criterion.

In retrospect, even if the institutional and policy goals of the decade had beenachieved, one is left with the feeling that most developing countries would be only
marginally better off than they are today. The reason for this is a striking andhumbling one. Although governments, environmentalists, and the aid agencies kept
their eye on the environmental ball during the 1970s and the early 1980s, recent
events have starkly demonstrated that they were watching the wrong ball. While
the world was worrying about the environmental impacts of investments,
controlling pollution, and conserving resources, we collectively failed to notice thedramatic decline in what had complacently been called 'renewable resources'.
David Runnals
International Institute for Environment and Development
WCED Public Hearing
Ottawa, 26-27 May 1986

36. All major international bodies and agencies of the UN system should be made responsible
and accountable for ensuring that their programmes and budgets encourage and support
development policies and practices that are sustainable. Governments, through parallel
resolutions in the respective governing bodies, should now begin to reorient and refocus the
mandates, programmes, and budgets of key agencies to support sustainable development.
They should also insist on much greater coordination and cooperation among them.
37. Each agency will need to redeploy some staff and financial resources to establish a small
but high-level centre of leadership and expertise. That centre should be linked to theprogramme planning and budget processes.
38. Each agency should be directly responsible (or ensuring that the environmental andresource aspects of programmes and projects are properly taken into account when they arebeing planned, and that the financial resources needed are provided directly from its own
budget. In line with these new responsibilities, the following bodies should also assume full
financial responsibility within their own budgets for certain programmes presently supportedby the Environment Fund of UNEP: WHO on 'Environmental Health', FAO on 'Agricultural
Chemicals and Residues', UNDRO on 'Natural Disasters', UNIDO on 'Industry and Transport',
ILO on 'Working Environment', UNDA on 'Arms Race and the Environment', DIESA on'Environmental Aspects of Development Planning and Cooperation', UNESCO on 'Education',and UNDP on 'Technical Cooperation'. UNEP (discussed extensively in the next section)
should continue to cooperate closely with these agencies and help identify new programmeneeds and monitor performance.
39. As in each agency, there is also a need for a high-level centre of leadership for the UN
system as a whole with the capacity to assess, advise, assist, and report on progress made andneeded for sustainable development. That leadership should be provided by the Secretary-

General of the United Nations Organization.
40. Governments at the UN General Assembly should therefore take the necessary measures
to reinforce the system-wide responsibility and authority of the UN Secretary-General
concerning interagency coordination and cooperation generally, and for achieving sustainable
development specifically. This will require that the representatives of those same governmentsin the governing bodies of all major UN organizations and specialized agencies takecomplementary measures. This could be done as an integral part of the parallel resolutions
just proposed on building sustainable development objectives and criteria into the mandates,
programmes, and budget of each agency
41. To help launch and guide the interagency coordination and cooperation that will beneeded, the UN Secretary-General should constitute under his chairmanship a special UN
Board for Sustainable Development. The principal function of the Board would be to agree on
combined tasks to be undertaken by the agencies to deal effectively with the many criticalissues of sustainable development that cut across agency and national boundaries.

2. Dealing With the Effects
42. Governments should also strengthen the role and capacity of existing environmental
protection and resource management agencies./12

2.1 National Environmental Protection and Natural Resources Management
Agencies
43. Strengthening of environmental agencies is needed most urgently in developing countries.
Those that have not established such agencies should do so as a matter of priority. In bothcases, bilateral and multilateral organizations must be prepared to provide increased
assistance for institutional development. Some of this increased financial support should go tocommunity groups and NGOs, which are rapidly emerging as important and cost-effective
partners in work to protect and improve the environment locally and nationally, and indeveloping and implementing national conservation strategies.
44. Industrialized countries also need greatly strengthened environmental protection andresource management agencies. Most face a continuing backlog of pollution problems and a
growing range of environment and resource management problems too. In addition, theseagencies will be called upon to advise and assist central economic and sectoral agencies hethey take up their new responsibilities for sustainable development. Many now provide
institutional support, technical advice, and assistance to their counterpart agencies indeveloping countries, and this need will grow. And, almost inevitably, they will play a larger
and more direct role in international cooperation, working with other countries andinternational agencies trying to cope with regional and global environmental problems.

2.2 Strengthen the United Nations Environment Programme
45. When UNEP was established in 1972, the UN General Assembly gave it a broad andchallenging mandate to stimulate, coordinate, and provide policy guidance for environmental
action throughout the UN system./13 That mandate was to be carried out by a Governing
Council of 58 member states, a high-level UN interagency Environment Coordination Board(ECB),/14 a relatively small secretariat located in Nairobi, and a voluntary fund set initially at alevel of $100 million for the first five years. UNEP's principal task was to exercise leadershipand a catalytic influence on the programmes and projects of other international organizations,primarily in but also outside the UN system. Over the past 10 years, the Environment Fundhas levelled off at around $30 million annually, while its range of tasks and activities haveincreased substantially.
46. This Commission has recommended a major reorientation and refocusing of programmes
and budgets on sustainable development in and among all UN organizations. Within such a
new system-wide commitment to and priority effort on sustainable development, UNEP
should be the principal source on environmental data, assessment, reporting, and related
support for environmental management as well as be the principal advocate and agent forchange and cooperation on critical environment and natural resource protection issues. The
major priorities and functions of UNEP should be:
to provide leadership, advice, and guidance in the UN system on restoring, protecting,and improving the ecological basis for sustainable development;
to monitor, assess, and report regularly on changes in the state of the environment andnatural resources (through its EarthWatch programme);
to support priority scientific and technological research on critical environmental andnatural resource protection issues;
to develop criteria and indicators for environmental quality standards and guidelines forthe sustainable use and management of natural resources;
to support and facilitate the development of action plans for key ecosystems and issues
to be implemented and financed by the governments directly concerned;
to encourage and promote international agreements on critical issues identified by
Earthwatch and to support and facilitate the development of international law,
conventions, and cooperative arrangements for environmental and natural resource
conservation and protection;
to support the development of the institutional and professional capacity of developing
countries in all of these areas and help them develop specific programmes to deal with
their problems and advise and assist development assistance agencies in this respect;andto provide advice and assistance to the United Nations Development Programme, theWorld Bank, and other UN organizations and agencies regarding the environmental
dimensions of their programmes and technical assistance projects, including training
activities.

The environment has quickly deteriorated in certain areas and we don't know
where to put the thresholds for nature's tolerance. We must move very fast
towards a consensus on the necessity for taking urgent action. There is a strong
popular support for this in our country. The findings of several opinion polls tell usthat ecological issues have heightened priority. People feel anxious about thelegacy our generation will be passing on to the next one. A new environmental
awareness has germinated among large sections of the community and mainly
among young people.

Dr. Litre V. Nagy
Environment Protection Committee of the Patriotic People's Front, Hungary
WCED Public Hearing
Moscow, 6 Dec 1986

2.2.1 Focus on Environmental Protection Issues
47. UNEP has been a key agent in focusing the attention of governments on criticalenvironmental problems (such as deforestation and marine pollution), in helping develop
many global and regional action plans and strategies (as on desertification), in contributing to
the negotiation and implementation of international conventions (on Protection of the Ozone
Layer, for example), and in preparing global guidelines and principles for action by
governments (such as on marine pollution from land-based sources). UNEP's Regional Seas
Programme has been particularly successful, and could serve as a model for some other areasof special concern, especially international river basins.
48. UNEP's catalytic and coordinating role in the UN system can and should be reinforced andextended. In its future work in critical environmental protection issues, UNEP should focus
particularly on:
developing, testing, and helping to apply practical and simple methodologies forenvironmental assessment at project and national levels;
extending international agreements (such as on chemicals and hazardous wastes) more
widely;extending the Regional Seas Programme;developing a similar programme for international river basins; andidentifying the need for and advising other UN organizations and agencies inestablishing and carrying out technical assistance and training courses forenvironmental protection and management.
2.2.2 Priority to Global Environmental Assessment and Reporting
49. Although more is known about the state of the global environment now than a decade ago,
there are still major gaps and a limited international capability for monitoring, collecting, andcombining basic and comparable data needed for authoritative overviews of key environmental
issues and trends. Without such, the information needed to help set priorities and develop
effective policies will remain limited.
50. UNEP, as the main UN source for environmental data, assessment, and reporting, should
guide the global agenda for scientific research and technological development "orenvironmental protection. To this end, the data collection, assessment, and state of theenvironment reporting sections (Earthwatch) of UNEP need to be significantly strengthened
as a major priority. The Global Environment Monitoring System should be expanded as rapidly
as possible, and the development of the Global Resource Information Database should beaccelerated to bridge the gap between environmental assessment and management. Special
priority should be accorded to providing support to developing countries to enable them toparticipate fully in and derive maximum benefits from these programmes.

2.2.3 Strengthen International Environmental Cooperation
51. The UNEP Governing Council cannot fulfil its primary role of providing leadership andpolicy guidance in the UN system nor have a significant influence on national policies unlessgovernments increase their participation and the level of representation. National delegations
to future meetings should preferably be led by Ministers, with their senior policy and scientificadvisers. Special provisions should be made for expanded and more meaningful participation
by major non governmental organizations at future sessions.
2.2.4. Increase the Revenue and Focus of the Environment Fund
52. The UNEP voluntary funding base of $30 million annually is too limited and vulnerable for
an international fund dedicated to serving and protecting the common interests, security, andfuture of humanity. Six countries alone provided over 75 per cent of the 1985 contributions to
the Environment Fund (the United States, Japan, USSR, Sweden, FRG, and UK)./15
Considering the critical importance of renewed efforts on environmental protection andimprovement, the Commission appeals to all governments to substantially enlarge theEnvironment Fund both through direct contributions by all members of the UN and throughsome of the sources cited later in this chapter in the section 'Investing in Our Future'.
53. A substantial enlargement of the Environment Fund seems unlikely in the current climateof financial austerity. Any additional funds made available by states for UN development
programmes and activities will likely be channelled largely through UNDP and thedevelopment programmes of other UN agencies. Moreover, as recommended earlier, thebudgets of all of those agencies should be deployed so that environmental considerations arebuilt into the planning and implementation of all programmes and projects.
54. The Environment Fund can be made more effective by refocusing the programme on fewer
activities. As other UN agencies assume full responsibility for certain activities now provided
through the Environment Fund and finance them entirely from their own budgets, someresources will be released for other purposes. These should be concentrated on the principal
functions and priority areas identified earlier.
55. Expanding support and cooperation with NGOs capable of carrying out elements of
UNEP's programme will also increase the effectiveness of the Environment Fund. Over the last
decade, non-governmental organizations and networks have become increasingly important inwork to improve environmental protection locally, nationally, and internationally. However,financial support from the Environment Fund for cooperative projects with NGOs declined inboth absolute and relative terms in the last 10 years, from $4.5 million (23 per cent of theFund) in 1976 to $3.6 million (13 per cent) in 1985./16 The amount and proportion ofEnvironment Fund resources for cooperation and projects with NGOs should be significantly
increased by using the capacities of those NGOs that can contribute to UNEP's programmes ona cost-effective basis.

3. Assessing Global Risks
56. The future - even a sustainable future - will be marked by increasing risk./17 The risks
associated with new technologies are growing./18 The numbers, scale, frequency, and impact ofnatural and human-caused disasters are mounting.19/ The risks of irreversible damage tonatural systems regionally (for example through acidification, desertification, or deforestation)and globally (through ozone layer depletion or climate change) are becoming significant./20

57. Fortunately, the capacity to monitor and map Earth change and to assess risk is also
growing rapidly. Data from remote sensing platforms in space can now be merged with datafrom conventional land-based sources. Augmented by digital communications and advanced
information analysis, photos, mapping, and other techniques, these data can provide
up-to-date information on a wide variety of resource, climatic, pollution, and othervariables./21 High-speed data communications technologies, including the personal computer,enable this information to be shared by individuals as well as corporate and governmental
users at costs that are steadily falling. Concerted efforts should be made to ensure that all
nations gain access to them and the information they provide either directly or through the
UNEP Earthwatch and other special programmes.
58. Governments, individually and collectively, have the principal responsibility to collect theirinformation systematically and use it to assess risks, but to date only a few have developed acapacity to do so. Some intergovernmental agencies have a capacity to collect and assess
information required for risk assessment, such as FAO on soil and forest cover and on
fisheries; WMO on climate; UNEP on deserts, pollutants, and regional seas; quasigovernmental organizations like IUCN have a similar capacity. These are only a few examples
from a long list. But no intergovernmental agency has been recognized as the centre ofleadership to stimulate work on risk assessment and to provide an authoritative source ofreports and advice on evolving risks. This gap needs to be filled both within and among
governments. Beyond our proposal that the global environment assessment and reporting
functions of UNEP should be significantly strengthened, the Commission would now proposethat UNEP's Earthwatch be recognized as the centre of leadership on risk assessment in theUN system.
59. But neither UNEP nor other intergovernmental organizations can be expected to carry out
these important functions alone. To be effective, given the politically sensitive nature of manyof the most critical risks, intergovernmental risk assessment needs to be supported byindependent capacities outside of government. Several national science academies andinternational scientific groups such as ICSU and its Scientific Committee on Problems of theEnvironment, with special programmes such as the newly inaugurated International
Geosphere-Biosphere Programme (see Chapter 10); the Man and the Biosphere Programme of
UNESCO; quasi-governmental bodies such as IUCN; and certain industry groups and NGOs
are active in this field. But, again, there is no recognized international non-governmental
centre of leadership through which the efforts of these groups can be focused and coordinated.
60. During the 1970s, the growing capacity of computers led various governments, institutes,
and international bodies to develop models for integrated policy analysis. They have provided
significant insights and offer great promise as a means of anticipating the consequences ofinterdependent trends and of establishing the policy options to address them./22 Without
suggesting any relationship between them, early attempts were all limited by serious
inconsistencies in the methods and assumptions employed by the various sources on which
they depended for data and information./23 Although significant improvements have been
made in the capability of models and other techniques, the data base remains weak./24
61. There is an urgent need to strengthen and focus the capacities of these and other bodies tocomplement and support UNEP's monitoring and assessment functions by providing timely,
objective, and authoritative assessments and public reports on critical threats and risks to theworld community. To meet this need, we recommend the establishment of a Global Risks
Assessment Programme:
to identify critical threats to the survival, security, or well-being of all or a majority ofpeople, globally or regionally;
to assess the causes and likely human, economic, and ecological consequences of thosethreats, and to report regularly and publicly on their findings;
to provide authoritative advice and proposals on what should or must be done to avoid,
reduce, or, if possible, adapt to those threats; andto provide an additional source of advice and support to governments andintergovernmental organizations for the implementation of programmes and policies
designed to address such threats.
62. The Global Risk Assessment Programme would not requite the creation of a newinternational institution as such, as it should function primarily as a mechanism forcooperation among largely non-governmental national and international organizations,scientific bodies, and industry groups. To provide intellectual leadership and guide theprogramme, there should be a steering group composed of eminent individuals who together
would reflect a broad cross-section of the major areas of knowledge, vocations, and regions of
the world, as well as the major bodies active in the field.
63. The steering group would serve as the focal point for identifying the risks to be addressedby the programme, agreeing on the research needed to assess those risks, and coordinating
the work among the various participating bodies. It could form special consortia and task
forces made up of experts from these bodies and it would also establish special expert andadvisory groups consisting of world-known authorities in specialized areas of science,
economics, and law. The steering group would be responsible for the overall evaluation of
results, for their wide dissemination, and for follow-up activities.
64. The steering group would also be charged with helping mobilize funds for implementing
the programme through contributions by the Environment Fund of UNEP, states,
foundations, and other private sources. Funding would principally be for the purpose offinancing the various activities that would be carried out by other organizations as part of the
programme, with only a small portion required to meet the costs of the steering group.

4. Making Informed Choices
65. As is evident from this report, the transition to sustainable development will require a
range of public policy choices that are inherently complex and politically difficult. Reversing
unsustainable development policies at the national and international level will require
immense efforts to inform the public and secure its support. The scientific community, private
and community groups, and NGOs can play a central role in this.

If the NGO community is to translate its commitment to sustainable development
into effective action, we will need to see a matching level of commitment from thegovernmental and intergovernmental communities, in genuine partnership with
NGOs. The success and cost-effectiveness of NGO action is to an importantdegree a function of their spontaneity and freedom of action.
Both among NGOs and amongst governments, we must find ways to engender a
new period of international cooperation. The urgency of our tasks no longer
permits us to spill our energies in fruitless and destructive conflict. Whilst we fightour wars of ideology on the face of this planet, we are losing our productive

relationship with the planet itself.
David Bull
Environmental Liaison Centre
WCED Public Hearing
Nairobi, 23 Sept 1986

4.1 Increase the Role of the Scientific Community and Non-Governmental
Organizations
66. Scientific groups and NGOs have played - with the help of young people/25 - a major part in
the environmental movement from its earliest beginnings. Scientists were the first to point out
evidence of significant environmental risks and changes resulting from the growing intensity ofhuman activities. Other non-governmental organizations and citizens' groups pioneered in thecreation of public awareness and political pressures that stimulated governments to act.
Scientific and non-governmental communities played a vital role in the United Nations
Conference on the Human Environment in Stockholm./26
67. These groups have also played an indispensable role since the Stockholm Conference in
identifying risks, in assessing environmental impacts and designing and implementing
measures to deal with them, and in maintaining the high degree of public and political interest
required as a basis for action. Today, major national 'State of the Environment' reports arebeing published by some NGOs (in Malaysia, India, and the United States, for instance)./27
Several international NGOs have produced significant reports on the status of and prospects
for the global environment and natural resources./28
68. The vast majority of these bodies are national or local in nature, and a successful transition
to sustainable development will require substantial strengthening of their capacities. To an
increasing extent, national NGOs draw strength from association with their counterparts inother countries and from participation in international programmes and consultations. NGOsin developing countries are particularly in need of international support - professional andmoral as well as financial - to carry out their roles effectively.
69. Many international bodies and coalitions of NGOs are now in place and active. They play animportant part in ensuring that national NGOs and scientific bodies have access to the support
they require. These include regional groups providing networks linking together environmentand development NGOs in Asia, Africa, Eastern and Western Europe, and North and SouthAmerica. They also include a number of regional and global coalitions on critical issues such as
pesticides, chemicals, rain, seeds, genetic resources, and development assistance. A global
network for information exchange and joint action is provided through the Environment
Liaison Centre (ELC) in Nairobi. ELC has over 230 NGO member groups, with the majority
from developing countries, and is in contact with 7,000 others.
70. Only a few international NGOs deal on a broad basis with both environment anddevelopment issues, but this is changing rapidly. One of them, the International Institute forEnvironment and Development, has long specialized in these issues and pioneered theconceptual basis for the environment/development relationship. Most of them work with andsupport related organizations in the developing world. They facilitate their participation ininternational activities and their links with counterparts in the international community. They
provide instruments for leadership and cooperation among a wide variety of organizations intheir respective constituencies. These capabilities will be ever more important in the future.

An increasing number of environment and development issues could not be tackled withoutthem.
71. NGOs should give a high priority to the continuation of their present networking on
development cooperation projects and programmes, directed at the improvement of theperformance of NGO bilateral and multilateral development programmes. They could increase
their efforts to share resources, exchange skills, and strengthen each other's capacities
through greater international cooperation in this area. In setting their own house in order,'environment' NGOs should assist 'development' NGOs in reorienting projects that degrade
the environment and in formulating projects that contribute to sustainable development. The
experience gained would provide a useful basis for continuing discussions with bilateral andmultilateral agencies as to steps that these agencies might take to improve their performance.
72. In many countries, governments need to recognize and extend NGOs' right to know andhave access to information on the environment and natural resources; their right to be
consulted and to participate in decision making on activities likely to have a significant effecton their environment; and their right to legal remedies and redress when their health orenvironment has been or may be seriously affected.
73. NGOs and private and community groups can often provide an efficient and effective
alternative to public agencies in the delivery of programmes and projects. Moreover, they cansometimes reach target groups that public agencies cannot. Bilateral and multilateraldevelopment assistance agencies, especially UNDP and the World Bank, should draw upon
NGOs in executing programmes and projects. At the national level, governments, foundations,and industry should also greatly extend their cooperation with NGOs in planning, monitoring,and evaluating as well as in carrying out projects when they can provide the necessary
capabilities on a cost-effective basis. To this end, governments should establish or strengthen
procedures for official consultation and more meaningful participation by NGOs in all relevantintergovernmental organizations.
74. International NGOs need substantially increased financial support to expand their special
roles and functions on behalf of the world community and in support of national NGOs. In theCommission's view, the increased support that will allow these organizations to expand theirservices represents an indispensable and cost-effective investment. The Commission
recommends that these organizations be accorded high priority by governments, foundations,and other private and public sources of funding.

4.2 Increase Cooperation with Industry
75. Industry is on the leading edge of the interface between people and the environment. It isperhaps the main instrument of change that affects the environmental resource bases ofdevelopment, both positively and negatively. (See Chapter 8.) Both industry and government,
therefore, stand to benefit from working together more closely.
76. World industry has taken some significant steps through voluntary guidelines concerningindustry practices on environment, natural resources, science, and technology. Although few
of these guidelines have been extended to or applied regionally in Africa, Asia, or Latin
America, industry continues to address these issues through various international
associations.
77. These efforts were advanced significantly by the 1984 World Industry Conference on
Environmental Management (WICEM)./29 Recently, as a follow-up to WICEM, several majorcorporations from a number of developed countries formed the International Environment
Bureau to assist developing countries with their environment/development needs. Suchinitiatives are promising and should be encouraged. Cooperation between governments andindustry would be further facilitated if they established joint advisory councils for sustainable
development - for mutual advice, assistance, and cooperation in helping to shape andimplement policy, laws, and regulations for more sustainable forms of development.
Internationally, governments in cooperation with industry, and NGOs should work throughappropriate regional organizations to develop basic codes of conduct for sustainable
development, drawing on and extending relevant existing voluntary codes, especially in Africa,
Asia, and Latin America.
78. The private sector also has a major impact on development through commercial bank loans
from within and outside countries. In 1983, for example, the proportion of the total net
receipts of developing countries from private sources, mostly in the form of commercial bankloans, was greater than all ODA that year. Since 1963, as indebtedness worsened, commercialbank lending to developing countries has declined./30
79. Efforts are being made to stimulate private investment. These efforts should be geared tosupporting sustainable development. The industrial and financial corporations making suchinvestments, and the export credit, investment insurance, and other programmes thatfacilitate them, should incorporate sustainable development criteria into their policies.

5. Providing the Legal Means
80. National and international law has traditionally lagged behind events. Today, legal regimes
are being rapidly outdistanced by the accelerating pace and expanding scale of impacts on theenvironmental base of development. Human laws must be reformulated to keep humanactivities in harmony with the unchanging and universal laws of nature. There is an urgent
need;
to recognize and respect the reciprocal rights and responsibilities of individuals andstates regarding sustainable development,
to establish and apply new norms for state and interstate behaviour to achievesustainable development,
to strengthen and extend the application of existing laws and international agreements
in support of sustainable development, andto reinforce existing methods and develop new procedures for avoiding and resolving
environmental disputes.

5.1 Recognizing Rights and Responsibilities
81. Principle 1 of the 1972 Stockholm Declaration said that 'Man has the fundamental right tofreedom, equality and adequate conditions of life, in an environment of a quality that permits alife of dignity and well-being'./31 It further proclaimed the solemn responsibility of
governments to protect and improve the environment for both present and future
generations. After the Stockholm Conference, several states recognized in their Constitutions
or laws the right to an adequate environment and the obligation of the state to protect thatenvironment.

82. Recognition by states of their responsibility to ensure an adequate environment for
present as well as future generations is an important step towards sustainable development.
However, progress will also be facilitated by recognition of, for example, the right ofindividuals to know and have access to current information on the state of the environment
and natural resources, the right to be consulted and to participate in decision making on
activities likely to have a significant effect on the environment, and the right to legal remedies
and redress for those whose health or environment has been or may be seriously affected.

What are we to do? It is axiomatic that we as individuals or groups of individuals
share territory in resources. We need to define common norms of behaviour. Thisis true whether we are speaking of a family, small town, a province or country, or
the world community. However, the definition of common norms of behaviour is
not in itself sufficient for the creation of a body of rules and regulation.
To operate effectively, certain basic conditions must be fulfilled: the existence of ageneral will among members of the community to accept and adhere to
regulations; the existence of a political framework not only for defining andquantifying common behaviour or norms, but also for adopting existing rules tochange within the community; a means of determining compliance withinternational rules and regulations; and, finally, the means for enforcement.
Fergus Watt
World Association of World Federalists
WCED Public Hearing
Ottawa, 26-27 May 1986

83. The enjoyment of any right requires respect for the similar rights of others, andrecognition of reciprocal and even joint responsibilities. States have a responsibility towards
their own citizens and other states:
to maintain ecosystems and related ecological processes essential for the functioning of
the biosphere;
to maintain biological diversity by ensuring the survival and promoting the conservationin their natural habitats of all species of flora and fauna;
to observe the principle of optimum sustainable yield in the exploitation of living natural
resources and ecosystems;
to prevent or abate significant environmental pollution or harm;to establish adequate environmental protection standards;
to undertake or require prior assessments to ensure that major new policies, projects,
and technologies contribute to sustainable development; andto make all relevant information public without delay in all cases of harmful or
potentially harmful releases of pollutants, especially radioactive releases.
84. It is recommended that governments take appropriate steps to recognize these reciprocal
rights and responsibilities./32 However, the wide variation in national legal systems andpractices makes it impossible to propose an approach that would be valid everywhere. Somecountries have amended their basic laws or constitution; others are considering the a 'optionof a special national law or charter setting out the rights and responsibilities of citizens and thestate regarding environmental protection and sustainable development Others may wish toconsider the designation of a national council or public representative or 'ombudsman' torepresent the interests and rights of present and future generations and act as anenvironmental watchdog, alerting governments and citizens to any emerging threats.

5.2 A Universal Declaration and a Convention on Environmental Protectionand Sustainable Development
85. Building on the 1972 Stockholm Declaration, the 1982 Nairobi Declaration, and many
existing international conventions and General Assembly resolutions, there is now a need toconsolidate and extend relevant legal principles in a new charter to guide state behaviour inthe transition to sustainable development. It would provide the basis for, and be subsequently
expanded into, a Convention, setting out the sovereign rights and reciprocal responsibilities ofall states on environmental protection and sustainable development. The charter shouldprescribe new norms for state and interstate behaviour needed to maintain livelihoods and lifeon our shared planet, including basic norms for prior notification, consultation, andassessment of activities likely to have an impact on neighbouring states or global commons.
These could include the obligation to alert and inform neighbouring states in the event of an
accident likely to have a harmful impact on their environment. Although a few such norms
have evolved in some bilateral and regional arrangements, the lack of wider agreement on suchbasic rules for interstate behaviour undermines both the sovereignty and economic
development potential of each and all states.
86. We recommend that the General Assembly commit itself to preparing a universal
Declaration and later a Convention on environmental protection and sustainable development.
A special negotiating group could be established to draft a Declaration text for adoption in1986. Once it is approved, that group could then proceed to prepare a Convention, based onand extending the principles in the Declaration, with the aim of having an agreed Convention
text ready for signature by states within three to five years. To facilitate the early launching ofthat process the Commission has submitted for consideration by the General Assembly, and asa starting point for the deliberations of the special negotiating group, a number of proposed
legal principles embodied in 22 Articles which were prepared by its group of international legal
experts. These proposed principles are submitted to assist the General Assembly in its
deliberations and have not been approved or considered in detail by the Commission. A
summary of the principles and Articles appears as Annexe 1 of this report.

5.3 Strengthen and Extend Existing International Conventions andAgreements
87. In parallel, governments should accelerate their efforts to strengthen and extend existing
and more specific international conventions and cooperative arrangements by:acceding to or ratifying existing global and regional conventions dealing withenvironment and development, and applying them with more vigour and rigour;reviewing and revising those relevant conventions that need to be brought in line withthe latest available technical and scientific information; andnegotiating new global and regional conventions or arrangements aimed at promoting
cooperation and coordination in the field of environment and development (including,for example, new conventions and agreements on climate change, on hazardous
chemicals and wastes, and on preserving biological diversity).

Law does not stand alone. It depends on the functioning of many things.
Experience from the past 15 years of development has taught us that there is adanger that bureaucracy with all its strength coming from the West, in Indonesia'scase because of the oil and gas revenues, will strangle the community with somany laws. They have, for instance, laws that ask every gathering of five or more
people to have permission from the police. Sometimes I feel that maybe the best
government is the one who governs the least. In this case, I feel that sometimes
the Asian countries learn from each other.
Adi Sasono
Institute for Development Studies
WCED Public Hearing
Jakarta, 26 March 1985

88. It is recommended that the UNEP secretariat, in close cooperation with the IUCN
Environmental Law Centre, should help in these efforts.

5.4 Avoiding and Settling Environmental Disputes
89. Many disputes can be avoided or more readily resolved if the principles, rights, andresponsibilities cited earlier are built into national and international legal frameworks and are
fully respected and implemented by many states. Individuals and states are more reluctant to
act in a way that might lead to a dispute when, as in many national legal systems, there is anestablished and effective capacity as well as ultimately binding procedures for settling
disputes. Such a capacity and procedures are largely lacking at the international level,
particularly environmental and natural resource management issues./33
90. it is recommended that public and private organizations and NGOs help in this area by
establishing special panels or rosters of experts with experience in various forms of disputesettlement and special competence on the legal and substantive aspects of environmental
protection, natural resources management, and sustainable development. In addition, a
consolidated inventory and referral system or network for responding to requests for advice
and assistance should be established in avoiding or receiving such disputes.
91. To promote the peaceful and early settlement of international disputes on environmental
and resource management problems, it is recommended that the following procedure be
adopted. States should be given up to 18 months to reach mutual agreement on a solution or
on a common dispute settlement arrangement. If agreement is not reached, then the disputecan be submitted to conciliation at the request of any one of the concerned states and, if stillunresolved, thereafter to arbitration or judicial settlement.
92. This proposed new procedure raises the possibility of invoking a binding process ofdispute settlement at the request of any state. Binding settlement is not the preferred method
for settling international disputes. But such a provision is now needed not only as a last resort
to avoid prolonged disputes and possible serious environmental damage, but also toencourage and provide an incentive for all parties to reach agreement within a reasonable timeon either a solution or a mutually agreed means, such as mediation.
93. The capabilities of the Permanent Court of Arbitration and the International Court ofJustice to deal with environmental and resource management problems also should be
strengthened. States should make greater use of the World Court's capacity under Article 26
of its Statute to form special chambers for dealing with particular cases or categories of cases,
including environmental protection or resource management cases. The Court has declared its
willingness and readiness to deal with such cases fully and promptly.

6. Investing in Our Future
94. We have endeavoured to show that: it makes long-term economic sense to pursue
environmentally sound policies. But potentially very large financial outlays will be needed in
the short term in such fields as renewable energy development, pollution control equipment,
and integrated rural development. Developing countries will need massive assistance for thispurpose, and more generally to reduce poverty. Responding to this financial need will be acollective investment in the future

6.1 National Action
95. Past experience teaches us that these outlays would be good investments. By the late1960s, when some industrial countries began to mount significant environmental protection
programmes, they had already incurred heavy economic costs in the form of damage to humanhealth, property, natural resources, and the environment. After 1970, in order to roll backsome of this damage, they saw expenditures on environmental pollution measurer, alone risefrom about 0.3 per cent of GNP in 1970 to somewhere between 1.5 per cent and, in somecountries, 2.0 per cent around the end of the decade. Assuming low levels of economic growthin the future, these same countries will probably have to increase expenditures onenvironmental protection somewhere between 20 to 100 per cent just to maintain current
levels of environmental quality./34

First, if the problems of environmental degradation and of poverty, particularly in
the Third World, are to be solved, a continued economic development is essential.
Second, we must reconcile environmental protection with economic growth. Thereis a growing consensus that this is perfectly possible and desirable. Third, there isalso a great consensus that the application of strict environmental standards isgood for economic growth, as well as for the environment, and that theyencourage innovation, promote inventiveness and efficiency, and generate
employment. Fourth, to achieve the goals of sustainable development, goodenvironment, and decent standards of life for all involves very large changes in
attitude.
Stanley Clinton-Davis
Commissioner for Environment European Economic Community
WCED Public Hearing
Oslo, 24-25 June 1985

96. These figures relate only to expenditures to control environmental pollution.

Unfortunately, similar figures are not available on the level of expenditures made to
rehabilitate lands and natural habitats, re-establish soil fertility, reforest areas, and undertake
other measures to restore the resource base. But they would be substantial.
97. Nations, industrial and developing, that did not make these investments have paid much
more in terms of damage costs to human health, property, natural resources, and theenvironment. And these costs continue to rise at an accelerating pace. Indeed, countries thathave not yet instituted strong programmes now face the need for very large investments. Not
only do they need to roll back the first generation of environmental damage, they also need to
begin to catch up with the rising incidence of future damage. If they do not, their fundamental
capital assets, their environmental resources, will continue to decline.
98. In strictly economic terms, the benefits of these expenditures have been generally greaterthan the costs in those countries that have made them./35 Beyond that, however, many ofthese countries found that economic, regulatory, and other environmental measures could beapplied in ways that would result in innovation by industry. And those companies that did
respond innovatively are today often in the forefront of their industry. They have developed
new products, new processes, and entire plants that use less water, energy, and otherresources per unit of output and are hence more economic and competitive.
99. Nations that begin to reorient major economic and sectoral policies along the lines
proposed in this report can avoid much higher future levels of spending on environmental
restoration and curative measures and also enhance their future economic prospects. By
making central and sectoral agencies directly responsible for maintaining and enhancing
environmental and resource stocks, expenditures for environmental protection and resource
management would gradually be built into the budgets of those agencies for measures toprevent damage. The unavoidable costs of environmental and resource management would
thus be paid only once.

We must have a true participation of all of the society in the decision-making andMore particularly in the allocation of resources. And why so? because all of us are
perfectly aware that there will never be sufficient resources for everything that wewish, but if the population participates in the decision making it will benefit those
who need the most and it will express their thought about the allocation of
resources and it will give us the certainty that that which is bring done is thelegitimate aspiration of the people.
Aristides Marquee
National Council for Urban Development
WCED Public Hearing
Brasilia, 30 Oct 1985

6.2 International Action
100. Developing countries, as noted earlier, need a significant increase in financial support
from international sources for environmental restoration, protection, and improvement and tohelp them through the necessary transition to sustainable development.
101. At the global level, there is an extensive institutional capacity to channel this support.
This consists of the United Nations and its specialized agencies: the multilateral development

banks, notably the World Bank; other multilateral development cooperation organizations,such as those of the European Economic Community; national development assistanceagencies, most of whom cooperate within the framework of the Development AssistanceCommittee of OECD or of OPEC; and other international groups, such as the Consultative
Group on International Agricultural Research, that play an important role and influence on
the quality and nature of development assistance. Together, the development organizations
and agencies are responsible for the transfer of about $35 billion of ODA annually todeveloping countries. In addition, they are the source of most technical assistance and policy
advice and support to developing countries.
102. These organizations and agencies are the principal instruments through which thedevelopment partnership between industrial and developing countries operates and,collectively, their influence is substantial and pervasive. It is imperative that they play aleading role in helping developing countries make the transition to sustainable development.
Indeed, it is difficult to envisage developing countries making this transition in an effective
and timely manner without their full commitment and support.
6.2.1 Reorienting Multilateral Financial Institutions
103. The World Bank, IMF, and Regional Development Banks warrant special attention
because of their major influence on economic development throughout the world. As indicatedin Chapter 3, there is an urgent need for much larger flows of concessional andnon-concessional finance through the multilateral agencies. The role of the World Bank isespecially important in this respect, both as the largest single source of development lending
and for its policy leadership, which exerts a significant influence on both developing countries
and donors. The World Bank has taken a significant lead in reorienting its lending
programmes to a much higher sensitivity to environmental concerns and to support forsustainable development. This is a promising beginning. But it will not be enough unless anduntil it is accompanied by a fundamental commitment to sustainable development by theWorld Bank and the transformation of its internal structure and processes so as to ensure its
capacity to carry this out. The same is true of other multilateral development banks andagencies.
104. The IMF also exerts a major influence on the development policies of developing
countries and, as described in Chapter 3, there is deep concern in many countries that theconditions that accompany its lending are undermining sustainable development. It istherefore essential that the IMF, too, incorporate sustainable development objectives andcriteria into its policies and programmes.
105. Several countries have already formally instructed their representatives on the Board of
the World Bank to ensure that the environmental impacts of projects proposed for approval
have been assessed and adequately taken into account. We recommend that othergovernments take similar action, not only with regard to the World Bank but also in the
Regional Banks and the other institutions. In this way they can support the ongoing efforts
within the Banks and other institutions to reorient and refocus their mandates, programmes,and budgets to support sustainable development. The transition to sustainable developmentby the development assistance agencies and the IMF would be facilitated by the establishmentof a high-level office in each agency with the authority and resources to ensure that all policies,
projects, and loan conditions support sustainable development, and to prepare and publish
annual assessments and reports on progress made and needed. A first step is to develop
simple methodologies for such assessments, recognizing that they are at present experimental
and need further work.

106. In making these changes, the multilateral financial institutions fortunately have somebase on which to build. In 1980, they endorsed a Declaration of Environmental Policies andProcedures Relating to Economic Development. Since then they have been meeting andconsulting through the Committee of International Development Institutions on theEnvironment (CIDIE)./36 Some have articulated clear policies and project guidelines forincorporating environmental concerns and assessments into their planning and decision
making, but only a few have assigned staff and resources to implementing them, notably theWorld Bank, which is now considering even further institutional changes to strengthen thiswork. Overall, as pointed out by the UNEP Executive Director in his statement reviewing thefirst five years of work. CIDIE has not yet truly succeeded in getting environmental
considerations firmly ingrained in development policies. "There has been a distinct lack ofaction by several multilaterals." CIDIE members have "gone along with the Declaration inprinciple more than in major shifts in action."/37
107. In order to marshal and support investing its in conservation projects and national
conservation strategies that enhance the resource base for development, serious consideration
should be given to the development of a special international banking programme or facility/38
linked to the World Bank. Such a special conservation banking programme or facility could
provide leans and facilitate joint financing arrangements for the development and protectionof critical habitats and ecosystems, including those of international significance,
supplementing efforts by bilateral aid agencies, multilateral financial institutions, andcommercial banks.
106. In the framework of the Council of Mutual Economic Assistance (CMEA), there has been
since the early 1970s a Committee for Environmental Protection with the participation of theheads of appropriate organizations in the member states. This Committee coordinates therelevant research and development programmes and, in some cases, organizes technicalassistance for the interested member states, involving the Investment Bank of CMEA.
6.2.2 Reorienting Bilateral Aid Agencies
109. Bilateral aid agencies presently provide nearly four times as much total ODA as isprovided by international organizations. As indicated in Chapter 3, a new priority and focus inbilateral aid agencies is needed in three main areas:
new measures to ensure that all projects support sustainable development;
special programmes to help restore, protect, and improve the ecological basis fordevelopment in many developing countries; andspecial programmes for strengthening the institutional and professional capacities
needed for sustainable development.
110. Proposals for special bilateral aid programmes in the areas of agriculture, forestry, energy,
industry, human settlements, and genetic resources are made in earlier chapters of thisreport. The first two priority areas in this chapter also contain proposals for strengthening theinstitutional and professional capacities in developing countries. The focus here is therefore
on the first area: new measures to ensure that all bilateral aid projects support sustainable
development.

The problems of today do not come with a tag marked energy or economy orCO2 or demography, nor with a label indicating a country or a region. The
problems are multi-disciplinary and transnational or global.
The problems are not primarily scientific and technological. In science we have theknowledge and in technology the tools. The problems are basically political,
economic, and cultural.
Per Lindblom
International Federation of Institutes of Advanced Studies
WCED Public Hearing
Oslo, 24-25 June 1985

111. Over the past decade, bilateral aid agencies have gradually given more attention to theenvironmental dimensions of their programmes and projects. A 1980 survey of theenvironmental and practices of six major bilateral aid agencies indicated that only one, USAID,
had systematic and enforceable procedures backed by the staff resources necessary to carrythem out./39 Since then, others have made some progress on the policy level, increased funds
for environmental projects, and produced guidelines or checklists to guide their programmes.
However, a 1983 study of those guidelines concluded that there was little evidence of theirsystematic application./40
112. An important step towards concerted action was taken in 1986 with the adoption by OECDof a recommendation to member governments to include an environmental assessment policy
and effective procedures for applying it in their bilateral aid programmes./41 It is based on adetailed analysis and studies carried out by a joint group of governmental experts from boththe Development Assistance Committee and the Environmental Committee./42 The
recommendation includes proposals for adequate staff and financial resources to undertake
environmental assessments and a central office in each agency to supervise implementationand to assist developing countries wishing to improve their capacities for conducting
environmental assessments. We urge all bilateral aid agencies to implement thisrecommendation as quickly as possible, it is essential, of course, that this should not reduce
aid flows in the aggregate or slow disbursements or represent a new form of aid conditionality.
6.2.3 New Sources of Revenue and Automatic Financing
113. We have made a series of proposals for institutional change within and among theorganizations and specialized agencies of the UN system in the sections on 'Getting at the
Sources' and 'Dealing with the Effects'. Most of those changes will not require additional
financial resources but can be achieved through a reorientation of existing mandates,
programmes, and budgets and a redeployment of present staff. Once implemented, thosemeasures will make a major difference in the effective use of existing resources in making thetransition to sustainable development.
114. Nevertheless, there is also a need to increase the financial resources for new multilateralefforts and programmes of action for environmental protection and sustainable development.
These new funds will not be easy to come by if the international organizations through which
they flow have to continue to rely solely on traditional sources of financing: assessed
contributions from governments, voluntary contributions by governments, and funds
borrowed in capital markets by the World Bank and other international financial institutions.
115. Assessed contributions from governments have traditionally been used largely for theadministrative and operating costs of international organizations; they are not intended formultilateral assistance. The total assessed contributions from governments are much smaller
than the amount provided through voluntary contributions and the prospects of raising
significant, additional funds through assessed contributions are limited.
116. Voluntary contributions by governments give the overall revenue system some flexibility,
but they cannot be adjusted readily to meet new or increased requirements. Being voluntary,
the flow of these funds is entirely discretionary and unpredictable. The commitments are also
extremely short-term, as pledges are normally made only one or two years in advance.
Consequently, they provide little security or basis for effective planning and management ofinternational actions requiring sustained, longer-term efforts. Most of the limited funds
provided so far for international environmental action have come through voluntary
contributions, channelled principally through UNEP and NGOs.
117. Given the current constraints on major sources and modes of funding, it is necessary toconsider new approaches as well as new sources of revenue for financing international action
in support of sustainable development. The Commission recognizes that such proposals may
not appear politically realistic at this point in time. It believes, however, that - given the trends
discussed in this report - the need to support sustainable development will become so
imperative that political realism will come to require it.
118. The search for other, and especially more automatic, sources and means for financing
international action goes almost as far back as the UN itself. It was not until 1977, however,when the Plan of Action to Combat Desertification was approved by the UN General Assemblythat governments officially accepted, but never implemented, the principle of automatictransfers. That Plan called for the establishment of a special account that could draw resources
not only from traditional sources but also from additional measures of financing, 'including
fiscal measures entailing automaticity'./43
119. Since then, a series of studies and reports/44 have identified and examined a growing listof new sources of potential revenue, including:revenue from the use of international commons (from ocean fishing and transportation,from sea-bed mining, from Antarctic resources, or from parking charges forgeostationary communications satellites, for example;
taxes on international trade (such as a general trade tax; taxes on specific tradedcommodities, on invisible exports, or on surpluses in balance of trade; or a consumption
tax on luxury goods); andinternational financial measures (a link between special drawing rights and development
finance, for example, or IMF gold reserves and sales).
120. In its 1980 report, the Brandt Commission called for raising additional funds from more
automatic sources such as those cited above. In its follow-up report in 1983, the Brandt
Commission strongly urged that these most 'futuristic' of all the Report's proposals not be lostcompletely from view./45 Nevertheless, they again rank below the short term horizon of theinternational agenda.
121. The World Commission on Environment and Development was specifically given the
mandate by the UN General Assembly to look once again beyond that limited horizon. We havedone so and, given the compelling nature, pace, and scope of the different transitions affecting
our economic and ecological systems as described in this report, we consider that at least someof those proposals for additional and more automatic sources of revenue are fast becomingless futuristic and more necessary. This Commission particularly considers that the proposals
regarding revenue from the use of international commons and natural resources now warrantand should receive serious consideration by governments and the General Assembly.

III. A Call for Action
122. Over the course of this century, the relationship between the human world and the planetthat sustains it has undergone a profound change. When the century began, neither humannumbers nor technology had the power to radically alter planetary systems. As the century
closes, not only do vastly increased human numbers and their activities have that power, but
major, unintended changes are occurring in the atmosphere, in soils, in waters, among plants
and animals, and in the relationships among all of these. The rate of change is outstripping theability of scientific disciplines and our current capabilities to assess and advise. It is frustrating
the attempts of political and economic institutions, which evolved in a different, more
fragmented world, to adapt and cope. It deeply worries many people who are seeking ways toplace those concerns on the political agendas.
123. We have been careful to base our recommendations on the realities of present
institutions, on what can and must be accomplished today. But to keep options open for future
generations, the present generation must begin now, and begin together, nationally andinternationally.
124. To achieve the needed change in attitudes and reorientation of policies and institutions,the Commission believes that an active follow-up of this report is imperative. It is with this inmind that we call for the UN General Assembly, upon due consideration, to transform thisreport into a UN Programme of Action on Sustainable Development. Special follow-up
conferences could be initiated at the regional level. Within an appropriate period after thepresentation of the report to the General Assembly, an international Conference could be
convened to review progress made and promote follow-up arrangements that will be neededover time to set benchmarks and to maintain human progress within the guidelines of humanneeds and natural laws.
125. The Commissioners came from 21 very different nations. In our discussions, we disagreed
often on details and priorities. But despite our widely differing backgrounds and varying
national and international responsibilities, we were able to agree to the lines along which
institutional change must be drawn.
126. We are unanimous in our conviction that the security, well-being, and very survival of theplanet depend on such changes, now.

Footnotes
1/ The characteristics and differences of the two approaches are described in our inaugural
report, 'Mandate for Change: Key Issues, Strategy and Workplan', Geneva, 1985.
2/ L.G. Uy, 'Combating the Notion of Environment as Additionality: A study of the Integrationof Environment and Development and a Case for Environmental Development as Investment',
Centre for Environmental Studies, University of Tasmania, Hobart, Tasmania, 1985 (to be
published).
3/ OECD, Environment and Economics, Vols. I and II. Background Papers for theInternational Conference on Environment and Economics (Paris: 1984).
4/ OECD, 'The Impact of Environmental Policies on Industrial Innovation', in Environment
and Economics, Vol. III. op. cit.
5/ R. Bertrand, 'Some Reflections on Reform of the United Nations'. Joint Inspection Unit,
UN, Geneva, 1985.
6/ V. Fernando, 'Development Assistance, Environment and Development', paper prepared
for WCED, Geneva, 1985.
7/ 'List of Projects with Possible Environmental Issues' transmitted to Congress by U.S.
Agency for International Development, 1967, as included in Public Law 9? -591.
8/ L. Gagnon, Union Québecoise pour la Conservation de la Nature, Québec, 'Pour Une
Révision des Sciences Economiques', submitted to WCED Public Hearings, Ottawa, 1986. See
also the review of the state-of-the art concerning natural resource accounts, including detailed
case studies from Norway and France, in OECD, Information and Natural Resources(Paris: 1986).
9/ T. Friend, 'Natural Resource Accounting ant? its Relationship with Economic andEnvironmental Accounting', Statistics Canada, Ottawa, September 1966.
10/ The need for an explicit 'foreign policy for environment' was raised in different ways in thediscussion at many WCED public hearings, but originally in a joint submission by Nordic NGOs
to the Public Hearings in Oslo, 1985.
11/ See 'Report of the Secretary-General: Technical and Economic Aspects of International
River Basin Development', UN E/C.7/35, New York, 1972. An updated list of relevantinternational agreements was provided by the IUCN Environmental Law Centre. See also
Department of Technical Cooperation for Development, Experiences in the Development
and Management of International River and Lake Basins, Proceedings of the UN
Interregional Meeting of International River Organizations held at Dakar, Senegal, in May 1981
(New York: UN, 1983).
12/ In 1982, there were environment and natural resource management agencies operating in
144 countries. At the time of the 1972 Stockholm Conference, only 15 industrial countries and
11 developing countries had such agencies. World Environment Centre, World
Environment Handbook (New York: 1985).
13/ See General Assembly resolution 2997 (XXVII) of 16 December 1972 on 'Institutional andfinancial arrangements for international environmental cooperation'.
14/ The Environment Coordination Board was abolished in 1977 and its functions assumed by
the Administrative Committee on Coordination (ACC). See General Assembly Resolution
32/197, Annex, para 54. The ACC subsequently established a Committee of DesignatedOfficials for Environmental Matters (DOEM).
15/ In addition to the Environment Fund there were 1.8 special Trust Funds with
contributions totalling $5-6 million in 1985. See UNEP, 1985 Annual Report (Nairobi:1986).
16/ Ibid., Annex V, Table B.

17/ J. Urquhart and K. Heilmann, Risk Watch: The Odds of Life (Bicester, UK: Facts on
File, 1984).
18/ 'Risk Assessment and Risk Control', Issue Report, Conservation Foundation,
Washington, DC, 1985: C. Schweigman et al., '"Agrisk", Appraisal of Risks in Agriculture in
Developing Countries', University of Groningen, The Netherlands, 1981.
19/ A. Wijkman and L. Timberlake, Natural Disasters: Acts of God and Acts of Men?
(London: Earthscan for the International Institute for Environment and Development and theSwedish Red Cross, 1984).
20/ WMO, A Report of the International Conference on the Assessment of theRole of Carbon Dioxide and of Other Greenhouse Gases in Climate Variations
and Associated impacts. Villach, Austria, 9-15 October 1985, WMO No. 661 (Geneva:
WMO/ICSU/UNEP, 1986).
21/ For an overview of the current technological capabilities and possibilities, see A. Khosla,
Development Alternatives, New Delhi, 'Decision Support Systems for Sustainable
Development', prepared for WCED, 1986.
22/ See M.C. McHale et al., Ominous Trends and Valid Hopes: A Comparison of Five
World Reports (Minneapolis, Minn.: Hubert Humphrey Institute of Public Affairs, (year?)for a comparison of North-South: A Programme for Survival (Cambridge, Mass.: MIT
Press, 1980); World Bank, World Development Report 1980 (Washington, DC: 1980);
U.S. Department of State and Council on Environmental quality, Global 2000 Report to
the President: Entering the Twenty First Century (Washington, DC: U.S. Government
Printing Office, 1980); IUCN/WWF/UNEP, World Conservation Strategy (Gland, Switzerland:1980); and OECD, Interfutures: Facing the Future, Mastering the Probable andManaging the Unpredictable (Paris: 1979). See also D. Meadows et al. Groping In the
Dark - The First Decade of Global Modelling (Chichester, UK: John Wiley & Sons, 1982)
for an analysis of various models.
23/ See C.O. Barney, Study Director, Global 2000 Report, op. cit.
24/ See OECD, Economic and Ecological Interdependence. (Paris: 1982).
25/ The importance of involving youth in nature conservation and environmental protection
and improvement activities were emphasized in many presentations at WCED Public
Hearings. See, for example the report 'Youth Nature Conservation Movement in the Socialist
Countries' to the Public Hearing at Moscow, December 1986.
26/ For an overview of the role and contribution of NGOs to environment and development
action at the national and international levels, see 'NGOs and Environment-Development
Issues', report to WCED by the Environment Liaison Centre, Nairobi, 1986. It includes a
selection of 20 case studies of successful NGO environmental action around the world.
27/ NGOs in Chile, Colombia, the Federal Republic of Germany, and Turkey have also
published 'State of the Environment' reports. Official reports have appeared in Australia,
Austria, Canada, Denmark, Finland, France, Ireland, Israel, Japan, the Netherlands, thePhilippines, Poland, Spain, Sweden, the United States, and Yugoslavia.
28/ See, for example, the annual State of the World report by WorldWatch Institute, theWorld Resources Report by World Resources Institute and the International Institute forEnvironment and Development, and the World Conservation Strategy by IUCN.

29/ Report of the World Industry Conference on Environmental Management
sponsored by the International Chamber of Commerce and UNEP, 1984; see particularly theprinciples adopted by OECD in 1985 as a clarification of the OECD Guiding Principles forMultinational Enterprises in International Legal Materials, vol 25, No. 1 (1986); see also
the presentation to WCED Public Hearings, Oslo, June 1985, on 'World Industry Conference
Follow-Up' by the Chairman of the Environment Committee of the International Chamber ofCommerce.
30/ See P.S. Thacher 'International Institutional Support: The International System, Funding
and Technical Assistance', paper presented to the World Conservation Strategy Conference,
Ottawa, Canada, June 1986.
31/ United Nations, Report of the United Nations Conference on the Human
Environment, document A/CONF.48/14/Rev.1, Chapter 1 (New York: 1972).
32/ These and other principles have been developed as proposed Articles for a Convention in
the report to WCED by its Experts Group on Environmental Law. Their report also contains acommentary on the legal precedents and references for each Article. See Legal Principles
for Environmental Protection and Sustainable Development (Dordrecht, The
Netherlands: Martinus Nijhoff, in press).
33/ For an overview of dispute settlement procedures, mechanisms, and needs, see R.E. Steinand G. Grenville Wood, 'The Settlement of Environmental Disputes: A Forward Look',
prepared for WCED, 1985.
34/ OECD, Environment and Economics, Vol. I, op. cit.
35/ OECD, Environment and Economics, Results of the International Conference on
Environment and Economics (Paris: 1985.
36/ For a summary report on the work of the Committee of International Development
Institutions on the Environment, see UNEP, 1985 Annual Report, op. cit.
37/ Statement by Dr M.K. Tolba, UNEP Executive Director, at the opening of the sixth sessionof CIDIE, hosted by the Organization of American States, Washington, DC, June 1985.
38/ A proposal for a World Conservation Bank was made by M. Sweatman of the International
Wilderness Leadership Foundation at the WCED Public Hearings, Ottawa, 1986.
39/ R.D.G. Johnson and R.O. Blake, Environmental and Bilateral Aid (London:
International Institute for Environment and Development, 1960).
40/ J. Horberry, Environmental Guidelines Survey: An Analysis of Environmental
Procedures and Guidelines Governing Development Aid (London and Gland: IIEDand IUCN, 1963).
41/ 'Environmental Assessment oœ Development Assistance Projects and Programmes', OECD
Council Recommendation C(85)104 (Paris: OECD, 20.6.85); 'Measures Required to Facilitate
the Environmental Assessment of Development Assistance Projects and Programmes' OECD
Council Recommendation C(86)26 (final) OECD, Paris, 20 November 1986.
42/ 'Final Report on Environmental Assessment and Development Assistance' OECD
Environment Monograph No 4 (Paris: OECD, 1986).

43/ Report of the United Nations Conference on Desertification, document
A/CONF.74/36 (New York: UN, 1977).
44/ See for example, E.B. Steinberg and J.A. Yager, 'New Means of Financing International
Needs', The Brookings Institution, Washington, DC, 1978; 'Additional Measures andMeans of Financing for the Implementation of the Plan of Action to Combat Desertification',
document UNEP/GC.6/9/Add.1, 1978; UN, 'Study on Financing the United Nations Plan of
Action to Combat Desertification: report of the Secretary-General', General Assembly
document A/35/396, 1980; Dag Hammarskjold Foundation 'The Automatic Mobilization of
Resources for Development', Development Dialogue, No. 1, 1981; UN, 'Study on Financing
the Plan of Action to Combat Desertification: Report of the Secretary-General', General
Assembly document A/36/141, 1981.
45/ Independent Commission on International Development Issues, North-South: A
Programme for Survival (London: Pan Books, 1980); Common Crisis, North-South:
Cooperation for World Recovery (London: Pan Books, 1983).

Our Common Future, Annexe 1: Summary of Proposed Legal
Principles for Environmental Protection and Sustainable
Development Adopted by the WCED Experts Group on
Environmental Law
I. General Principles, Rights, and Responsibilities
Fundamental Human Right
1. All human beings have the fundamental right to an environment adequate for their healthand well being.

Inter-Generational Equity
2. States shall conserve and use the environment and natural resources for the benefit ofpresent and future generations.

Conservation and Sustainable Use
3. States shall maintain ecosystems and ecological processes essential for the functioning of
the biosphere, shall preserve biological diversity, and shall observe the principle of optimum
sustainable yield in the use of living natural resources and ecosystems.

Environmental Standards and Monitoring
4. States shall establish adequate environmental protection standards and monitor changes inand publish relevant data on environmental quality and resource use.

Prior Environmental Assessments
5. States shall make or require prior environmental assessments of proposed activities which
may significantly affect the environment or use of a natural resource.

Prior Notification, Access, and Due Process
6. States shall inform in a timely manner all persons likely to be significantly affected by aplanned activity and to grant them equal access and due process in administrative and judicial
proceedings.

Sustainable Development and Assistance
7. States shall ensure that conservation is treated as an integral part of the planning andimplementation of development activities and provide assistance to other States, especially todeveloping countries, in support of environmental protection and sustainable development.

General Obligation to Cooperate
8. States shall cooperate in good faith with other States in implementing the preceding rights
and obligations.

II. Principles, Rights and Obligations Concerning Transboundary
Natural Resources and Environmental Interferences
Reasonable and Equitable Use
9. States shell use transboundary natural resources in a reasonable and equitable manner.

Prevention and Abatement
10. States shall prevent or abate any transboundary environmental interference which could
cause or causes significant harm (but subject to certain exceptions provided for in #11 and #12
below).

Strict Liability
11. States shall take all reasonable precautionary measures to limit the risk when carrying out
or permitting certain dangerous but beneficial activities and shall ensure that compensation isprovided should substantial transboundary harm occur even when the activities were notknown to be harmful at the time they were undertaken.

Prior Agreements When Prevention Costs Greatly Exceed Harm
12. States shall enter into negotiations with the affected State on the equitable conditions
under which the activity could be carried out when planning to carry out or permit activities
causing transboundary harm which is substantial but far less than the cost of prevention. (Ifno agreement can be reached, see Art. 22).

Non-Discrimination
13. States shall apply as a minimum at least the same standards for environmental conduct
and impacts regarding transboundary natural resources and environmental interferences as
are applied domestically (i.e., do not do to others what you would not do to your own citizens).

General Obligation to Cooperate on Transboundary Environmental
Problems
14. States shall cooperate in good faith with other States to achieve optimal use oftransboundary natural resources and effective prevention or abatement of transboundary
environmental interferences.

Exchange of Information

15. States of origin shall provide timely and relevant information to the other concerned States
regarding transboundary natural resources or environmental interferences.

Prior Assessment and Notification
16. States shall provide prior and timely notification and relevant information to the otherconcerned States and shall make or require an environmental assessment of planned activities
which may have significant transboundary effects.

Prior Consultations
17. States of origin shall consult at an early stage and in good faith with other concerned States
regarding existing or potential transboundary interferences with their use of a natural
resource or the environment.

Cooperative Arrangements for Environmental Assessment and Protection
18. States shall cooperate with the concerned States in monitoring, scientific research andstandard setting regarding transboundary natural resources and environmental interferences.

Emergency Situations
19. States shall develop contingency plans regarding emergency situations likely to cause
transboundary environmental interferences and shall promptly warn, provide relevant
information to and co-operate with concerned States when emergencies occur.

Equal Access and Treatment
20. States shall grant equal access, due process and equal treatment in administrative andjudicial proceedings to all persons who are or may be affected by transboundary interferenceswith their use of a natural resource or the environment.

III. State Responsibility
21. States shall cease activities which breach an international obligation regarding theenvironment and provide compensation for the harm caused.

IV. Peaceful Settlement of Disputes
22. States shall settle environmental disputes by peaceful means. If mutual agreement on asolution or on other dispute settlement arrangements is not reached within 18 months, thedispute shall be submitted to conciliation and, if unresolved thereafter, to arbitration or
judicial settlement at the request of any of the concerned States.

Footnote* This summary is based on the more detailed legal formulations in the report to theCommission by the international legal experts group. (See Annexe 2 for a list of groupmembers.) This summary highlights only the main thrusts of the principles and Articles and is
not a substitute for the full text is published in Legal Principles for Environmental Protectionand Sustainable Development (Dordrecht, The Netherlands: Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, inpress).

Our Common Future, Annexe 2: The Commission and its Work
The Commissioners
ChairmanVice-Chairman
Members

The Commission's Mandate
The Commission's Work
Members of the Secretariat
Senior Professional Staff:
General Services and Support Staff:

Inaugural Meeting & Workplan
Public Hearings
Expert Special Advisors
Advisory Panel on Energy
Advisory Panel on Industry
Advisory Panel of Food Security
Advisory Panel Reports

Financia1 Contributions
Other Contributions
Further Activities
Acknowledgements
The World Commission on Environment and Development was created as a consequence ofGeneral Assembly resolution 38/161 adopted at the 38th Session of the United Nations in thefall of 1983. That resolution called upon the Secretary General to appoint the Chairman andVice Chairman of the Commission rind in turn directed them to jointly appoint the remaining
members, at least half of whom were to be selected from the developing world. The Secretary
General appointed Mrs. Gro Harlem Brundtland of Norway, then leader of the NorwegianLabour Party, as Chairman and Dr. Mansour Khalid, the former Minister of Foreign Affairs
from Sudan, as Vice-Chairman. They together appointed the remaining members of theCommission.
The Commission has functioned as an independent body. All its members have served theCommission in their individual capacities, not as representatives of their governments. The
Commission has thus been able to address any issues, to solicit any advice, and to formulate
and present any proposals and recommendations that it considered pertinent and relevant.
In pursuing its mandate, the commission has paid careful attention to the Terms of Reference
suggested by the General Assembly in Resolution 38/161 and has operated in close
collaboration with the Intergovernmental Inter-sessional Preparatory Committee of theGoverning Council of the UN Environment Programme, which has itself been preparing anintergovernmental report on environmental perspectives to the year 2000 and beyond.
After the Commission's report has been discussed by UNEP's Governing Council, it is to besubmitted to the General Assembly of the United Nations for its consideration during its 42nd
Session in the fall of 1987.

The Commissioners
ChairmanGro Harlem Brundtland, Norway. Prime Minister, Parliamentary Leader of the Labour Party
1981 86, Member of Parliament from 1977, Minister of Environment 1974-79. Associate
Director Oslo school Health Services 1968-74.

Vice-Chairman
Mansour Khalid, Sudan. Deputy Prime Minister 1976, Minister of Education 1975-76,
President, UN Security Council 1972, Minister of Foreign Affairs 1971 75, Minister of Youth andSocial Affairs 1969-71.

Members
Susanna Agnelli, Italy. Italian Senator, writer, Undersecretary of State for Foreign Affairs.
Member of the Independent Commission on International Humanitarian Issues. Member ofthe European Parliament 1979-81, Mayor of Monte Argentario 1974-84, Member of Chamber of
Deputies 1976-83.
Saleh Abdulrahman Al-Athel, Saudi Arabia. President of King Abdulaziz City for Science andTechnology; Vice-President for Graduate Studies and Research, King Saud University 1976-64;
Dean, College of Engineering, King Saud University 1975-76.
Pablo Gonzalez Casanova, Mexico. Professor of Political and social Sciences, National
Autonomous University of Mexico, President of the Latin American Association of Sociology.
[In August 1986, for personal reasons, Pablo Gonzalez Casanova ceased to participate in thework of the Commission.]

Bernard T. G. Chidzero, Zimbabwe. Minister of Finance, Economic Planning and Development;
Chairman, Development Committee of the World Bank and the International Monetary Fund;
Member, UN Committee for Development Planning; Member, Board of the World Institute forDevelopment Economics and Research; Director, Commodities Division, United Nations
Conference on Trade and Development (UNCTAD) 1968-1977; Deputy Secretary General,
UNCTAD 1977-80.
Lamine Mohamed Padika, Cote d'Ivoire. Minister of Marine Affairs, Chairman of the National
Council for Environment, Secretary of State for Marine Affairs 1974-76.
Volker Hauff, Federal Republic of Germany. Member of Parliament; Vice Chairman, Social
Democratic Party Parliamentary Group, Responsible for Environment; Minister forTransportation 1980-82; Minister for Research and Technology 1979-80; Parliamentary
Secretary of State for Science Research and Technology 1972-78.
Istvan Lang, Hungary. Secretary General of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences; Deputy
Secretary General 1970-85, and Executive secretary 1963-70, Section of Biology, Hungarian
Academy of Sciences; Research Institute of Soil Science and Agricultural Chemistry,
Hungarian Academy of Sciences 1955-63.
Ma Shijun, Peoples Republic of China. Director of the Research Center of Ecology, Academia
Sinica, Chairman of the Commission of Environmental Sciences, President of the EcologicalSociety of China.
Margarita Marino do Botero, Colombia. Chairman, Fundacion El Colegio de Villa de Leyva (TheGreen College); Director General, National Institute of Renewable Natural Resources and theEnvironment (INDERENA) 1983-86; Director, Office of International Affairs, INDERENA
1978-83; Regional Consultant, United Nations Environment Programme 1973-77.
Nagendra Singh, India. President of the International Court of Justice, President of IMO
Assembly 1969, President of ILO Maritime Session 1971, President of the Indian Academy ofEnvironmental Law and Research, President of the National Labour Law Association of India,
Life Member of the Board of Governors of the International Council for Environmental Law,
Member of the Permanent Court of Arbitration; Deputy Chairman of CEPLA (IUCN);
Chancellor of the University of Goa; Fellow of the British Academy.
Paulo Nogueira-Neto, Brazil. Federal District Secretary of Environment, Science andTechnology, National Council of Environment; Federal Secretary of the Environment 1974-86;
Associate Professor, Department of Ecology, University of Sao Paulo; President, Association
for the Defence of the Environment 1954-83; President, Sao Paulo State Forest Council
1967-74.
Saburo Okita, Japan. President, International University; Advisor to the Ministry of Foreign
Affairs; Advisor to the Environment Agency; Executive Committee Member of the Club ofRome; Chairman, World Wildlife Fund Japan; Chairman, Advisory Committee for External
Economic Issues 1984-85; Government Representative for External Economic Relations
1980-81; Foreign Minister 1979-80; Member of the Pearson Commission 1968-69.
Shridath S. Ramphal, Guyana. Secretary General of the Commonwealth of Nations, Ministerfor Foreign Affairs 1972-75, Minister of Justice 1973-75, Minister of State for Foreign Affairs
1967-72, Attorney General 1966-72.
William Doyle Ruckelshaus, United States. Attorney, Perkins, Coie; Administrator, U.S.

Environmental Protection Agency 1970-73, 1983-84; Senior Vice President for Law andCorporate Affairs, Weyerhaeuser company 1976-83; Acting Director of the Federal Bureau of
Investigation 1973; Deputy Attorney General, US Department of Justice 1973.
Mohamed Sahnoun, Algeria. Algerian Ambassador to the United States; Chief of Algerian
Permanent Mission to the United Nations 1982-84; Algerian Ambassador, Paris 1979-82;
Algerian Ambassador, Bonn 1975-79; Deputy Secretary General, Arab League 1973-74; Deputy
Secretary General, Organization of African Unity 1964-73.
Emil Salim, Indonesia. Minister of State for Population and the Environment; Minister of State
for Development Supervision and the Environment 1978-83; Member People's Consultative
Assembly 1977-32; Minister of Communications 1973-78; Minister of State for Administrative
Reform; Deputy Chairman, National Planning Board 1971-81.
Bukar Shaib, Nigeria. Minister of Agriculture, Water Resources and Rural Development
1983-86, Special Advisor to the President of Nigeria 1980-83, Nigerian Ambassador to Rome
1979, Permanent Secretary, Federal Ministry of Agriculture and Water Resources 1968-78.
Vladimir Sokolov, USSR. Director, Institute of Evolutionary Animal Morphology and Ecology,
USSR Academy of Sciences; Professor and Head of Department oh Vertebrate Zoology, Facultyof biology, Moscow State University; Deputy Chairman, Section of Chemical and Technologicaland Biological Sciences, Presidium, USSR Academy of Sciences.
Janez Stanovnik, Yugoslavia. Member, Presidium of the Socialist Republic of Slovenia;
Professor, University of Ljubljana; Executive Secretary, UN Economic Commission for Europe
1967-83: Member of the Federal Cabinet and Federal Executive Council 1966-67.
Maurice Strong, Canada. President, American Water Development, Inc.: former UnderSecretary General and Special Advisor to the Secretary-General of the United Nations;Executive Director of the United Nations Office for Emergency Operations in Africa 1985-86;
Chairman of the Board, Petro-Canada 1976-78; Executive Director, United Nations
Environment Programme 1973-75; Secretary-General, United Nations Conference on the
Human Environment 1970-72.
Jim MacNeill, Canada. Secretary-General of the Commission and ex officio member; Directorof Environment, OECD 1978-84; Secretary (Deputy Minister), Canadian Ministry of State for
Urban Affaire 1974-76; Canadian Commissioner General, UN Conference on Human
Settlements 1975-76; Assistant Secretary, Canadian Ministry of State for Urban Affairs
1972-74.

The Commission's Mandate
The Commission's Mandate, officially adopted at its Inaugural Meeting in Geneva on 1-3
October 1984, states:
The World Commission on Environment and Development has been established at atime of unprecedented growth in pressures on the global environment, with grave
predictions about the human future becoming commonplace.
The Commission is confident that it is possible to build a future that is more
prosperous, more just, and more secure because it rests on policies and practices
that serve to expand and sustain the ecological basis of development.

The Commission is convinced, however, that this will no happen without significant
changes in current approaches: changes in perspectives, attitudes and life styles;
changes in certain critical policies and the ways in which they are formulated andapplied; changes in the nature of cooperation between governments, business,science, and people; changes in certain forms of international cooperation whichhave proved incapable of tackling many environment and development issues;changes, above all, in the level of understanding and commitment by people,
organizations and governments.
The World Commission on Environment and Development therefore invites
suggestions, participation, and support in order to assist it urgently:
1. to re-examine the critical issues of environment and development and toformulate innovative, concrete, and realistic action proposals to deal withthem;
2. to strengthen international cooperation on environment and development andto assess and propose new forms of cooperation that can break out of existing
patterns and influence policies and events in the direction of needed change;
and3. to raise the level of understanding and commitment to action on the part ofindividuals, voluntary organizations, businesses, institutes, and governments.
The Commission solicits the views of those individuals, scientific institutes,
non-governmental organizations, specialized agencies, and other bodies of theUnited Nations, and national governments concerned with environment anddevelopment issues. It requests their support and it will facilitate their participationin the work of the Commission. It wishes especially to hear the views of youth.
In fulfilling its tasks, the Commission will pay careful attention to the Terms ofReference suggested by the General Assembly of the United Nations in resolution
38/161, in which the General Assembly welcomed the establishment of theCommission.

The Commission's WorkIn May of 1984, an Organizational Meeting of the Commission was held in Geneva to adopt its
rules of procedure and operation and to appoint a Secretary General to guide its work. In Julyof 1964, a Secretariat was established in Geneva, temporarily at the Centre de Morillon andlater at the Palais Wilson.

Members of the Secretariat
Members of the Secretariat have included:
Secretary General: Jim MacNeill

Senior Professional Staff:

Nitin Desai, Senior Economic Advisor
Vitus Fernando, Senior Programme Officer
Branislav Gosovic, Senior Programme Officer
Marie-Madeleine Jacquemier, Finance and Administrative Officer
Kazu Kato, Director of Programmes
Warren H. Lindner, Secretary of the Commission and Director of Administration
Elisabeth Monosovski, Senior Programme Officer
Gustavo Montero, Programme Planning Officer
Shimwaa'i Muntemba, Senior Programme Officer
Janos Pasztor, Senior Programme Officer
Peter Robbs, Senior Public Information Advisor
Vicente Sanchez, Director of Programmes
Linda Starke, EditorPeter Stone, Director of Information
Edith Surber, Finance and Administrative Officer

General Services and Support Staff:
Brita Baker
Elisabeth Bohler-GoodshipMarie-Pierre Destouet
Marian Doku
Tamara Dunn
Teresa Harmand
Aud Loen
Jelka de Marsano
Chedra Mayhew
Christel Ollesch
Ellen Permato
Guadalupe Quesado

Mildred Raphoz
Evelyn Salvador
Iona D'Souza
Kay Streit
Vicky Underhill
Shane Vanderwert

Inaugural Meeting & Workplan
The Commission held its first official meeting in Geneva on 1-3 October 1984. During thatmeeting, the Commission agreed upon its Mandate, the key issues it would address in thecourse of its deliberations, the strategy it would employ to achieve its objectives, and theworkplan and timetable that would be used to guide its work. Immediately following thatmeeting, the Commission publicly released its principal working document, 'Mandate for
Change'.
At its Inaugural Meeting, the Commission selected eight key issues for analysis during thecourse of its work:
Perspectives on Population, Environment, and Sustainable Development;
Energy: Environment and Development;
Industry: Environment and Development;
Food Security, Agriculture, Forestry, Environment, and Development;
Human Settlements: Environment and Development;International Economic Relations, Environment, and Development;
Decision Support Systems for Environmental Management; andInternational Cooperation.
It agreed that it would examine these issues from the perspective of the year 2000 and beyond
and from the perspective of their common sources in economic, social, and sectoral policies.
At its Inaugural Meeting, the Commission also decided that its processes would be open,
visible, and participatory and that in conducting its work, strategies would be employed toensure it of receiving the broadest range of views and advice on the key issues it wasaddressing.

Public Hearings
The Commission therefore decided that it would hold deliberative meetings in all regions of
the world and that it would take the occasion of those meetings to get a first hand view ofenvironment and development issues in those regions. It also decided to use these visits tohold open Public Hearings where senior government representatives, scientists and experts,
research institutes, industrialists, representatives of non-governmental organizations, and thegeneral public could openly express their concerns to the Commission and submit their views
and advice on issues of common concern.
These Public Hearings, which are a unique feature of the Commission, have become its'trademark', demonstrating both to the Commissioners and the participants that the issues
addressed by the Commission are indeed of global concern and do transcend nationalboundaries and disparate cultures. Hundreds of organizations and individuals gave testimony
during the Public Hearings and over 800 written submissions constituting more than 10,000
pages of material were received by the Commission in connection with them. The Public
Hearings have been of immeasurable benefit to the Commissioners and the Secretariat, andthe gratitude of the Commission is extended to all who contributed to their success.
Deliberative meetings, site visits, and/or Public Hearings of the Commission were held inJakarta, Indonesia, 27-31 March 1985: Oslo, Norway, 21-28 June 1985; Sao Paulo and Brasilia,
Brazil, 25 October-4 November 1985; Vancouver, Edmonton, Toronto, Ottawa, Halifax, andquebec City, Canada, 21-31 May 1986; Harare, Zimbabwe, 15-19 September, Nairobi, Kenya,
20-23 September 1986; Moscow, USSR, 6-12 December 1986; and Tokyo, Japan, 23-28
February 1987. Special working group meetings of the Commission were also held in Geneva,
Moscow, and Berlin (West).

Expert Special Advisors
To further widen its base of information and advice, the Commission appointed a group of
expert Special Advisors to assist it and the Secretariat in the analysis of the key issues. These
included Edward S. Ayensu on Food Security and Forestry, Gamani Corea on International
Economic Relations, Gordon T. Goodman on Energy. Ashok Khosla on Decision Support
Systems for Environmental Management, Robert D. Munro on International Cooperation and
Legal Regimes, Michael Royston on Industry, Johan Jorgen Hoist on Environment andSecurity, and Guy-Olivier Segond on Youth. The Chairman was also advised by Hans Christian
Bugge and Morten Wetland. Later in its work, the Commission appointed Lloyd Timberlake as
Special Editorial Advisor.
To assist it in its work in three of the key issue areas - Energy, Industry, and Food Security the Commission constituted Advisory Panels of leading experts to advise it on therecommendations and conclusions it should consider making. The chairmen and members of
the Commission's Advisory Panels were:

Advisory Panel on Energy
Chairman:
Enrique Iglesias, Foreign Minister of Uruguay
Members:
Abdlatif Y. Al-Hamad (Kuwait)
Toyoaki Ikuta (Japan)
Gu Jian (China)
Al Noor Kassum (Tanzania)

Ulf Lantzke (deceased) (Federal Republic of Germany)
Wangari Maathai (Kenya)
David J. Rose (deceased) (United States)
Prero Shankar Jha (India)
Carl Tham (Sweden)
Gyorgy Vajda (Hungary)

Advisory Panel on Industry
Chairman: Umberto Colombo (Italy), President of ENfcA
Members:
Betsy Ancker-Johnson (United States)
M.J. Flux (United Kingdom)
Arnoldo Jose Gabaldon (Venezuela)
Alexander C. Helfrich (Netherlands)
Charles Levinson (Canada)
Finn Lied (Norway)
George P. Livanos (Greece)
Mohamed Mazouni (Algeria)
Thomas McCarthy (United States)
Jose E. Mind]in (Brazil)
Keichi Oshima (Japan)
Roger Strelow (United States)
Naval Tata (India)
Erna Witoelar (Indonesia)

Advisory Panel of Food Security
Chairman:
M.S. Swarainathan (India), Director General of the International Rice Research InstituteMembers:
Nyle Brady (United States)Robert Chambers (United Kingdom)
K. Chowdhry (India)
Gilberto Gallopin (Argentina)
Joe Hulse (Canada)
Kenneth King (Guyana)
V. Malima (Tanzania)
Samir Radwan (Egypt)
Lu Liang Shu (China)

Advisory Panel Reports
The reports of the three Advisory Panels were submitted to the Commission for its
consideration during its meeting in Canada in May of 1986 and have since been publishedunder the titled Energy 2000, Industry 2000, and Food 2000.
The Commission was also assisted in its review of legal rights and principles by a group ofinternational legal experts chaired by Robert Munro (Canada) with Johan G. Lammers(Netherlands) as Rapporteur. The members of the group included Andronico Adede (Kenya),Francoise Burhenne (Federal Republic of Germany), Alexandre-Charles Kiss (France), Stephen
McCaffrey (United States), Akio Morishima (Japan), Zaki Mustafa (Sudan), Henri Smets(Belgium), Robert Stein (United States), Alberto Szekely (Mexico), Alexandre Timoehenko(USSR), and Amado Tolentino (Philippines) Their report was submitted to and considered by
the Commission during its meeting in Harare in September 1986. It will be published under
the title Legal Principles for Environmental Protection and Sustainable Development.
During the course of its work, the Commission also engaged experts, research institutes, andacademic centres of excellence from around the globe to prepare more than 75 studies andreports relating to the eight key issues for the Commission's review and consideration. Thesestudies and reports provided an invaluable resource base for the final reports of theCommission's Advisory Panels and for the final chapters of this report.

Financial Contributions
Initial funding to permit the Commission to commence its work came from the governments ofCanada, Denmark, Finland, Japan, the Netherlands, Norway, Sweden, and Switzerland. Eachof these 'sponsoring' governments had been instrumental in the creation of the Commission
and during the course of the Commibeion'r work, each of them increased their contribution
beyond their original pledge.
In addition to the 'sponsoring' group of countries, the Commission has also received untied
financial contributions from the governments of Cameroon, Chile, the Federal Republir of
Germany, Hungary, Oman, Portugal, and Saudi Arabia. Significant contributions have also
been received from the Kord Foundation and the John D. and Catherine T. MacArthur
Foundation, as well as from NOPAD and SIDA.

Other Contributions

The City and Canton of Geneva restored and furnished one wing of the Palais Wilson andprovided that to the Commission's Secretariat free of rent and utilities. The local costs of theCommission's meetings in Indonesia, Brazil, Zimbabwe, and the USSR were covered by thehost governments. The costs of the Commission's working group meeting in Moscow were also
covered by the Soviet Government. The costs of the working group meeting in Berlin (West)
were covered by the Federal Republic of Germany. The Arab Fund for Economic and Social
Development hosted and covered all of the costs of a meeting in Kuwait of the Advisory Panelon Energy. The accounts of the Commission have been audited by Hunzikei and Associates ofGeneva.
The Commission's sincere appreciation is extended to all the governments, foundations, andinstitutes that provided the financial and other support necessary for it to complete its work,
including those that contributed funds too late to be acknowledged here.

Further Activities
Between the issuance of this report and its consideration by the UN General Assembly during
its 42nd Session in the fall of 1987, the Commission will be meeting during a series of regionalpresentational meetings with senior governmental representatives, the business and scientificcommunities, non-governmental organizations, and the press to discuss this report and, it ishoped, to build a body of public and governmental support for the recommendations andconclusions.
There are no plans for the Commission to continue after its report has been considered by theGeneral Assembly, and it will officially cease its operations on 31 December 1987.

Acknowledgements
Since its creation in late 1963, the Commission has received advice and support fromthousands of individuals, institutes, and organizations the world over, many of whom arelisted here. Many laboured long hours in preparing submissions for the Public Hearings,
reports for the Advisory Panels, and studies for submission to the Commission. Without their
dedication, cooperation, and advice as well as that of the Special Advisors and the chairmen
and members of the Advisory Panels and Legal Experts Group, this report would not havebeen possible. The Commission's sincerest appreciation is extended to them all. (Affiliations
and titles are as of the date of communication with the Commission. Verification of all thefollowing names and titles was not possible, and the Commission apologizes for any
inaccuracies.)